Patent Publication Number: US-RE46108-E

Title: Communication device

Description:
This application is a reissue of U.S. Pat. No. 8,560,012, which issued on Oct. 15, 2013.  
     TECHNICAL FIELD 
     The present invention relates to communication devices, and more particularly to a communication device that uses proximity wireless communication to serve as an extended user interface for a home appliance. 
     BACKGROUND ART 
     There has been disclosed a communication device which reads apparatus information out from an Integrated Circuit (IC) tag on an apparatus by using proximity wireless communication, then registers operation information corresponding to the readout apparatus information, so that the communication device can serves as a remote controller of the apparatus (for example, Patent Reference 1). This communication device has operation units each of which enables the communication device to serve as a remote controller that remotely controls a predetermined target apparatus to be controlled. The communication device includes an IC tag reader unit and a Central Processing Unit (CPU). The IC tag reader unit reads, from an IC tag on the target apparatus, apparatus information corresponding to the target apparatus. The CPU executes a registration program for registering a control information data file and the apparatus information read by the IC tag reader unit. In the control information data file, the apparatus information is stored in association with control information. The CPU also executes the registration program for obtaining the control information associated with the apparatus information from the control information data file, and for registering various control instructions of the obtained control information to the respective operation units. Then, when one of the operation units is pressed, the communication device transmits, to the target apparatus, a specific control instruction corresponding to the pressed operation unit from among the registered control instructions of the control information. 
     There also has been disclosed a remote control user interface using proximity wireless communication which has been conceived in consideration of operation simplicity and usability (for example, Patent Reference 2). This remote control user interface includes an operation sheet and a remote controller. The operation sheet holds wireless tags in respective regions segmented for respective different operation items. In each of the tags, information necessary to operate an external electronic device is stored. By using the operation sheet, the remote controller transmits a command signal to the electronic device. Then, the remote controller side reads the information from the wireless tag on the operation sheet not without being in contact with the operation sheet, and transmits a command signal based on the readout information to the electronic device. 
     There still has been disclosed a control device that allows a user to select necessary information by a simple operation, for example, by pointing by a remote controller to a button (selected button) on a display of a display unit (for example, Patent Reference 3). This control device includes a remote controller unit, a display coordinate unit, a selected-button recognition unit, and a screen display control unit. By using an angular sensor included in the remote controller, the remote controller unit detects and measures an angle change amount between two directions which is caused when the user (operator) holding the remote controller moves the remote controller. The display coordinate unit calculates, from initial coordinates and the angle change amount, two-dimensional (2D) coordinates of the button selected on the display of the display unit by the remote controller. The selected-button recognition unit determines the selected button based on the calculated 2D coordinates and button position information stored in a button information storage unit. The screen display control unit displays buttons on respective positions on the display of the display unit and displays the selected button by hot spot. When the operator intends to decide the button selected by the screen display control unit, the operator presses a decision button on the remote controller to transmit a decision signal. This control device can select necessary information by such a simple operation. 
     PRIOR ART 
     Patent Reference 
     
         
         Patent Reference 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-134962 
         Patent Reference 2: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2004-145720 
         Patent Reference 3: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2000-270237 
       
    
     DISCLOSURE OF INVENTION 
     Problems that Invention is to Solve 
     However, the above-described conventional technologies have the following problems. 
     In Patent Reference 1, when a user intends to operate the target apparatus by the communication device, the user needs to select the target apparatus to be controlled (operated) by the communication device, via a display unit, buttons, and keys of the communication device. More specifically, there is a problem that complicated operations such as plural various operations are necessary for the communication device in order to cause the communication device to serve as a remote controller for the target apparatus when the target apparatus is selected. 
     In Patent Reference 2, different operation sheets are necessary for different electronic devices to be operated. In other words, with the increase of electronic devices which a user wishes to control, the number of operation sheets for the electronic devices is also increased. 
     In Patent Reference 3, the remote controller transmits an angle change amount regarding a move of the operator to the control device, and the control device determines a location pointed by the operator based on the angle change amount. Therefore, the control of the target apparatus requires the remote controller, the control device, and the display device. In short, Patent Reference 3 has a problem that a plurality of devices are required to control the apparatus. Moreover, Patent Reference 3 does not consider the situation where a plurality of target apparatuses are to be operated, and neither discloses nor suggests a method of registering a target apparatus selected by the operator and instructions corresponding to the target apparatus. 
     In order to solve the above-described problems of the conventional technologies, an object of the present invention is to provide a communication device that can easily serve as an extended user interface, such as a remote controller, of a target apparatus, without causing any complicated operations to a user. 
     Means to Solve the Problems 
     In accordance with an aspect of the present invention for achieving the object, there is provided a communication device including: an apparatus information obtainment unit configured to obtain, from an apparatus, apparatus information for uniquely identifying the apparatus; a position information obtainment unit configured to obtain position information indicating a position of the communication device; an external communication unit configured to perform external communication; an operation information obtainment unit configured to obtain, via the external communication unit, operation information for allowing the communication device to operate the apparatus, based on the apparatus information; a storage unit configured to store the position information and the operation information in association with each other, the operation information being obtained by the operation information obtainment unit, and the position information being obtained when the apparatus information obtainment unit obtains the apparatus information and being considered as apparatus position information indicating a position of the apparatus; a direction sensor unit configured to generate direction information indicating a direction to which the communication device faces; a directional space calculation unit configured to calculate a directional space based on the position information obtained by the position information obtainment unit and the direction information generated by the direction sensor unit, the directional space being a space pointed by the communication device facing the space; a selection unit configured to (i) specify the apparatus existing in the directional space based on the apparatus position information stored in the storage unit, and (ii) select, from the storage unit, the operation information associated with the apparatus position information of the specified apparatus; and an operation information transmission unit configured to transmit, based on the operation information selected by the selection unit, a control signal to the apparatus specified by the selection unit so as to allow the communication device to operate the apparatus. 
     With the above structure, the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention can store the position information of the communication device and the operation information of the apparatus in association with each other. In addition, the use of the position information of the apparatus to be operated by the communication device enables the user to operate the apparatus merely by pointing the communication device such as a mobile device to the apparatus. As a result, the aspect of the present invention can provide a communication device that can easily serve as an extended user interface, such as a remote controller, of the apparatus, without causing any complicated operations to the user. 
     Furthermore, the communication device may further include a proximity wireless communication unit configured to perform proximity wireless communication, wherein the apparatus information obtainment unit is configured to obtain the apparatus information regarding the apparatus via the proximity wireless communication unit. 
     With the above structure, the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention can easily obtain the operation information of the apparatus such as a home appliance by single pressing of a button, by using via proximity wireless communication without causing any complicated operations to the user. 
     Still further, the selection unit may include: an apparatus direction calculation unit configured, when there are a plurality of apparatuses including the apparatus in the directional space, to calculate plural pieces of apparatus direction information based on the position information of the communication device and plural pieces of apparatus position information including the apparatus position information, the plural pieces of apparatus direction information each indicating a direction from the communication device to a corresponding one of the apparatuses, and the plural pieces of apparatus position information being stored in the storage unit and each indicating a position of the corresponding one of the apparatuses; a difference calculation unit configured to calculate a difference between the direction information of the communication device and each of the plural pieces of apparatus direction information; and an apparatus decision unit configured to decide, as the specified apparatus existing in the directional space, an apparatus having the difference that is smaller than a predetermined value from among the apparatuses, the difference being calculated by the difference calculation unit. 
     With the above structure, even if there are a plurality of apparatuses in an oriented direction of the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention, the communication device can appropriately select, as a target apparatus to be operated by the communication device, an apparatus closer to the oriented direction pointed by the communication device from among the plurality of apparatuses. 
     Still further, the selection unit may include: a space information storage unit configured to store space information indicating (a) a space and (b) an arrangement of the apparatus in the space; and an apparatus decision unit configured, when there are a plurality of apparatuses including the apparatus in the directional space, to (i) obtain the space information including information of a space in which the communication device exists from the space information storage unit based on the position information of the communication device, and (ii) decide, as the specified apparatus existing in the directional space, an apparatus existing in the space in which the communication device exists based on the obtained space information. 
     With the above structure, the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention can use the space information such as room arrangement information of a building. As a result, it is possible to decrease a possibility that the user selects a wrong apparatus to which the user does not intend to point. 
     Still further, the communication device may further include a display unit, wherein the selection unit includes: a pitch angle detection unit configured to generate pitch angle information indicating an angle of a pitch direction of the communication device; a pitch angle information storage unit configured to store the pitch angle information in association with the apparatus information; and an apparatus decision unit configured to decide, as the specified apparatus existing in the directional space, an apparatus selected by a user from an apparatus candidate list displayed on the display unit, wherein the display unit is configured to display, as the apparatus candidate list, apparatuses existing in the directional space, based on plural pieces of apparatus position information including the apparatus position information stored in the storage unit and plural pieces of pitch angle information including the pitch angle information stored in the pitch angle information storage unit, and the pitch angle detection unit is configured to store the generated pitch angle information into the pitch angle information storage unit in association with the apparatus decided by the apparatus decision unit. 
     With the above structure, the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention can consider habits of the user in consideration of an angle change in a pitch direction of the communication device. As a result, it is possible to increase an accuracy of selecting the target apparatus to be operated by the communication device. 
     Still further, the communication device may further include an apparatus state obtainment unit configured to obtain an operation state of the apparatus, wherein the display unit is further configured to display, based on the operation state obtained by the apparatus state obtainment unit, (a) the apparatus candidate list and (b) plural pieces of operation information including the operation information associated with respective apparatuses in the apparatus candidate list. 
     With the above structure, if a plurality of apparatuses are specified as candidates to be operated by the communication device, the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention can change the operation information depending on the operation state of each of the apparatuses. As a result, pieces of information to be displayed on the communication device can be simplified. 
     Still further, the apparatus information obtainment unit may further include: an absolute position generation unit configured to generate absolute position information of the communication device; and a relative position generation unit configured to generate relative position information of the communication device, the relative position information indicating a position moved from a position indicated by the absolute position information, wherein the position information is generated from the absolute position information and the relative position information. Still further, the communication device may further include a still determination unit configured to obtain move information of the communication device from the relative position information and the direction information, and determine, based on the move information, whether or not the communication device is still, wherein the direction sensor unit is configured to generate the direction information indicating a direction to which the communication device faces, when the still determination unit determines that the communication device is still. 
     With the above structure, the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention can operate the apparatus, at the timing where the user points the communication device to the apparatus and stops a move of the communication device to be still. 
     Still further, when it is determined based on the apparatus information that it is possible to obtain the apparatus position information from the storage unit, the position information obtainment unit may (i) store, into the storage unit, the absolute position information generated by the absolute position obtainment unit as the apparatus position information, and (ii) initialize the relative position information generated by the relative position generation unit. 
     With the above structure, the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention can decrease accumulated errors of the relative position information generated by the relative position generated unit such as an acceleration sensor. 
     Still further, the communication device may further include a display unit, wherein, when it is determined, based on the direction information and the position information, that the communication device is outside a communicable range where the operation information transmission unit is capable of transmitting the control signal to the apparatus, the display unit is configured to display a fact that the communication device is outside the communicable range, when the operation information transmission unit is to transmit the control signal to the apparatus. 
     With the above structure, if the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention is outside the communicable range of the operation information transmission unit, the communication device can warn the user to persuade the user to be back to the communicable range. For example, since a communicable range of infrared communication is limited due to narrow directionality, the above structure can improve usability. 
     Still further, the communication device may further include a sound sensor unit configured to detect sound information produced by the apparatus, wherein the communication device determines, based on the sound information detected by the sound sensor unit, whether or not the transmission of the control signal to the apparatus is successful. 
     With the above structure, the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention can allow the operation information transmission unit to perform reliable one-way communication without requesting a feedback response. 
     Still further, the communication device may further include an operation history obtainment unit configured to obtain an operation history including a history of the transmission of the control signal to the apparatus, wherein the communication device transmits the operation history to a server by performing the external communication, when it is determined that the transmission of the control signal to the apparatus is successful. 
     With the above structure, even if the apparatus does not have a means for communicating via a general-purpose network such as the Internet, the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention can transmit the reliable operation history of the apparatus to a server. 
     Still further, the apparatus information may further include individual identification information for identifying a user of the communication device, and the communication device may control the display on the display unit, based on the individual identification information. 
     With the above structure, the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention can serve as a remote control interface suitable for each user. For example, if the user does not require detailed operations, the communication device displays a simple interface. 
     Still further, the operation information obtainment unit may obtain external communication operation information of the apparatus for allowing the communication device to operate the apparatus via the external communication unit, when it is determined, based on the position information obtained by the position information obtainment unit, that the apparatus does not exist in a range where the operation information transmitting unit is capable of transmitting the control signal to the apparatus, and the communication device may operate the apparatus via the external communication unit based on the external communication operation information. 
     With the above structure, the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention can easily serve as a remote control interface of the apparatus connected to a general-purpose network such as the Internet, even if the communication device is outside a building. For example, when the communication device is pointed to a direction of user&#39;s home, the communication device can serve as a remote controller of an operable apparatus in the user&#39;s home. 
     Still further, the apparatus information obtainment unit may include a reading unit configured to read the apparatus information from an image regarding the apparatus information, the image being provided on the apparatus. 
     With the above structure, the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention can obtain the apparatus information, when a simple information image such as a two-dimensional (2D) bar-code is provided on the apparatus. 
     Effects of the Invention 
     The present invention can realize a communication device that can easily serve as an extended user interface, such as a remote controller, of a target apparatus, without causing any complicated operations to a user. For example, use of position information of the target apparatus enables the user to operate the target apparatus merely by pointing the communication device to the target apparatus. In addition, if the communication device has a proximity wireless communication function, use of the proximity wireless communication enables the user to easily obtain operation information of the target apparatus such as a home appliance by single pressing of a button. 
    
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS 
         FIG. 1  illustrates an entire system of an image capturing device according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 2  illustrates external views of the image capturing device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 3  is a block diagram of the image capturing device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 4  is a block diagram of a second memory in the image capturing device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 5  is a block diagram of the second memory in the image capturing device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 6  is a block diagram of image display method instruction information of the image capturing device according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 7  is a flowchart of processing performed by the image capturing device and a TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 8  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 9  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 10  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 11  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 12  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 13  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 14  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 15  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 16  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 17  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 18  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 19  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 20A  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 20B  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 21A  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 21B  is a flowchart of the processing performed by the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 22A  is a diagram presenting a display method of the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 22B  is a diagram presenting a display method of the image capturing device and the TV, according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 23  is a block diagram of a RF-ID unit in the image capturing device for storing an operation program, a remote controller of the TV, and the TV. 
         FIG. 24  is a flowchart of processing for transferring and executing the operation program stored in the RF-ID unit. 
         FIG. 25  presents an example of description of the operation program for downloading image and executing slide show. 
         FIG. 26  is a block diagram of (a) the TV changing processing of the operation program according to a language code, and (b) a server storing the program. 
         FIG. 27  is a flowchart of processing for changing processing of the operation program according to a language code. 
         FIG. 28  is a block diagram of a home network  6500  connecting the image capturing device  1  to the TV  45  by a wireless LAN. 
         FIG. 29  presents an example of an authentication method without using RF-ID unit. 
         FIG. 30  presents an example of an authentication method using RF-ID unit. 
         FIG. 31  presents an example of an authentication method used when it is difficult to move a terminal into proximity of another terminal. 
         FIG. 32  is a flowchart of an example of processing performed by a camera. 
         FIG. 33  is a flowchart of an example of processing performed by the TV. 
         FIG. 34  is a block diagram of (a) a first processing unit generating the operation program in the image capturing device  1  to be executed by the TV, and (b) a second memory unit. 
         FIG. 35  is a flowchart of processing performed by a program generation unit  7005  in the first processing unit. 
         FIG. 36  is a flowchart of an example of a program generated by the program generation unit  7005 . 
         FIG. 37  is a block diagram of (a) the first processing unit generating the operation program in the image capturing device  1  to display a use status of the image capturing device  1 , and (b) the second memory unit. 
         FIG. 38  illustrates a use example where the program generated by the image capturing device  1  is executed by an external device (apparatus). 
         FIG. 39  is a sequence where the program generated by the image capturing device  1  is executed by a remote controller with display function. 
         FIG. 40A  shows a flowchart of uploading steps in a camera according to a second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 40B  shows flowcharts of uploading steps in the camera according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 40C  shows flowcharts of uploading steps in the camera according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 41  is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 42A  is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 42B  is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 42C  is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 42D  is a flowchart of uploading steps in the camera according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 43  is a flowchart of operation steps of a RF-ID unit in the camera according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 44  is a block diagram of a TV according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 45  is a flowchart of RF-ID communication between the camera and the TV, according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 46A  shows flowcharts of details of  FIG. 45 . 
         FIG. 46B  shows flowcharts of details of  FIG. 45 . 
         FIG. 47A  presents a data format of the RF-ID communication between the camera and the TV. 
         FIG. 47B  presents a data format of the RF-ID communication between the camera and the TV. 
         FIG. 48  is a schematic diagram of an electronic catalog display system. 
         FIG. 49  is a block diagram of an electronic catalog server information input device. 
         FIG. 50  is a flowchart of steps of processing performed by the electronic catalog server information input device. 
         FIG. 51  is a block diagram of a RF-ID unit of an electronic catalog notification card. 
         FIG. 52  is a block diagram of a TV displaying an electronic catalog. 
         FIG. 53  is a block diagram of an electronic catalog server. 
         FIG. 54  is a flowchart of steps of processing performed by the electronic catalog server. 
         FIG. 55  is a flowchart of steps of processing performed by a TV displaying the electronic catalog. 
         FIG. 56  is a diagram illustrating screen display of the electronic catalog. 
         FIG. 57  is a table of a data structure of a customer attribute database. 
         FIG. 58  is a table of a data structure of an electronic catalog database. 
         FIG. 59  is a schematic diagram of a RF-ID-attached post card mailing system. 
         FIG. 60  is a block diagram of a TV in the RF-ID-attached post card mailing system. 
         FIG. 61  is a diagram illustrating screen display in image selection operation by the RF-ID-attached post card mailing system. 
         FIG. 62  is a flowchart of steps of processing performed by an image server in the RF-ID-attached post card mailing system. 
         FIG. 63  is a block diagram of a system according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 64  is a diagram illustrating examples of fixed information of a mailing object according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 65  is a flowchart of processing for associating an image capturing device with an image server, according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 66  is a flowchart of processing for registering the image capturing device with a relay server, according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 67  is a diagram illustrating an example of a mailing object attached with a 2-dimensional code. 
         FIG. 68  is a flowchart of processing using a 2-dimensional bar-code of the image capturing device according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 69  is a flowchart of processing performed by a TV according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 70  is a flowchart of processing performed by the relay server according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 71  is a schematic diagram of an image transmitting side according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 72  is a schematic diagram of an image receiving side according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 73  is a flowchart of processing performed by a TV transmitting image according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 74  is a flowchart of processing performed by a TV receiving image according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 75A  is a flowchart of another example of processing performed by the TV transmitting image according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 75B  is a flowchart of another example of processing performed by the TV transmitting image according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 76  is a table of an example of information recorded in a mailing object memory unit according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 77  is a block diagram of a recorder according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 78  is a block diagram of a RF-ID card according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 79  is a flowchart of steps of registering setting information to a server. 
         FIG. 80  is a table of pieces of setting information registered in the server. 
         FIG. 81  is a table of pieces of apparatus operation information registered in the RF-ID card. 
         FIG. 82  is a flowchart of steps of updating setting information of a recorder by the RF-ID card. 
         FIG. 83  is a flowchart of steps of obtaining the setting information from the server. 
         FIG. 84  is a table of apparatus operation information registered in the RF-ID card used in the recorder. 
         FIG. 85  is a table of apparatus operation information registered in the RF-ID card used in a vehicle navigation device. 
         FIG. 86  is a block diagram of a configuration where a remote controller of a TV or the like has a RF-ID reader, according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 87  is a flowchart of processing performed by the above configuration according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 88  is a diagram of a network environment. 
         FIG. 89  is a functional block diagram of a mobile AV terminal. 
         FIG. 90  is a functional block diagram of a TV. 
         FIG. 91  is a sequence diagram in the case where the mobile AV terminal gets video (first half, control performed by get side). 
         FIG. 92  is a sequence diagram in the case where the mobile AV terminal gives video (second half, control performed by get side). 
         FIG. 93  is a basic flowchart of the mobile AV terminal. 
         FIG. 94  is a flowchart of a give mode of the mobile AV terminal. 
         FIG. 95  is a flowchart of a get mode of the mobile AV terminal. 
         FIG. 96  is a flowchart of a wireless get mode of the mobile AV terminal. 
         FIG. 97  is a flowchart of a URL get mode of the mobile AV terminal. 
         FIG. 98  is a flowchart of server position search by the mobile AV terminal. 
         FIG. 99  is a flowchart of a mode in which the mobile AV terminal gets video from an external server. 
         FIG. 100  is a basic flowchart of the TV. 
         FIG. 101  is a flowchart of a give mode of the TV. 
         FIG. 102  is a flowchart of a get mode of the TV. 
         FIG. 103  is a sequence diagram in the case where the mobile AV terminal gets video. 
         FIG. 104  is a sequence diagram in the case where the mobile AV terminal gives video. 
         FIG. 105  is a sequence diagram in the case where passing is performed by a remote controller. 
         FIG. 106  is a sequence diagram in the case where a video server performs synchronous transmission. 
         FIG. 107  is a schematic diagram illustrating processing of HF-RFID and UHF-RFID upon apparatus factory shipment. 
         FIG. 108  is a schematic diagram illustrating a recording format of a memory accessible from a UHF-RFID tag M 005 . 
         FIG. 109  is a flowchart of a flow of processing of copying a product serial number and the like from HF-RFID to UHF-RFID upon factory shipment of an apparatus M 003 . 
         FIG. 110  is a flowchart of a flow of processing in a distribution process of the apparatus M 003 . 
         FIG. 111  is a block diagram according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 112  is a flowchart according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 113  is a flowchart according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 114  is a diagram of a network environment in home ID registration. 
         FIG. 115  is a hardware diagram of the communication device in the home ID registration. 
         FIG. 116  is a functional block diagram of the communication device in the home ID registration. 
         FIG. 117  is a flowchart of the home ID registration. 
         FIG. 118  is a flowchart of home ID obtainment. 
         FIG. 119  is a sequence diagram of the home ID registration. 
         FIG. 120  is a functional block diagram of communication devices in home ID sharing. 
         FIG. 121  is a flowchart of processing performed by a receiving communication device in the home ID sharing (using proximity wireless communication). 
         FIG. 122  is a flowchart of processing performed by a transmitting communication device in the home ID sharing (using proximity wireless communication). 
         FIG. 123  is a sequence diagram of the home ID sharing (using proximity wireless communication). 
         FIG. 124  is a flowchart of processing performed by the receiving communication device in the home ID sharing (using a home network device). 
         FIG. 125  is a flowchart of processing performed by the transmitting communication device in the home ID sharing (using the home network device). 
         FIG. 126  is a sequence diagram of the home ID sharing (using the home network device). 
         FIG. 127  is a block diagram of a device management system according to a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 128  is a sequence diagram of the device management system according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 129  is a schematic diagram of a structure of a device management database according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 130  is a schematic diagram of display of the device management system according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 131  is a functional block diagram of a RF-ID unit N 10  according to a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 132  is a functional block diagram of a mobile device N 20  according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 133  is a functional block diagram of a registration server N 40  according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 134  is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement of networked products according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 135  is a diagram illustrating an example of a system according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 136  is a sequence diagram for registering information of a TV N 10 A into a registration server N 40 , according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 137A  is a table illustrating an example of a structure of product information according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 137B  is a table illustrating an example of a structure of server registration information according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 138A  is a table illustrating an example of a structure of product information stored in a product information management unit N 45  according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 138B  is a table illustrating an example of product information managed in the product information management unit N 45  according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 139  is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performed by a RF-ID unit N 10  to perform product registration according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 140  is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performed by a mobile device N 20  to perform product registration according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 141  is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing performed by a registration server N 40  to perform product registration according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 142  is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of controlling power for an air conditioner N 10 J and a TV N 10 A according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 143A  is a table illustrating an example of a structure of positional information according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 143B  is a table illustrating an example of a structure of first product control information according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 143C  is a table illustrating an example of a structure of second product control information according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 144  is a diagram illustrating a product map generated by a position information generation unit N 48  according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 145  is a table illustrating an example of a structure of product information stored in the product information management unit N 45  according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 146  is a diagram illustrating a product map generated by the position information generation unit N 48  according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 147  is a table illustrating examples of an accuracy identifier according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 148  is a diagram illustrating an example of a system according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 149  is a schematic diagram showing a communication system according to an eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 150  is a block diagram showing a structure of a communication device according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 151  is a block diagram showing a minimum structure of the communication device according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 152A  is a block diagram showing an example of a detailed structure of an apparatus specification unit according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 152B  is a block diagram showing another example of a detailed structure of the apparatus specification unit according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 152C  is a block diagram showing still another example of a detailed structure of the apparatus specification unit according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 153  is a table showing an example of a data structure stored in a storage unit according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 154  is a graph showing an example of a method of calculating a directional space by a directional space calculating unit according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 155  is a flowchart of a summary of processing performed by the communication device according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 156  is a flowchart of registering operation information onto a storage unit of the communication device according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 157  is a flowchart of setting remote control information into the communication device to serve as a remote controller, according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 158  is a flowchart of setting remote control information into the communication device to serve as a remote controller, according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 159  is a flowchart of an example of processing of specifying a terminal apparatus existing in a direction pointed by the communication device according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 160  is a flowchart of an example of processing of operating a target terminal apparatus by using, as a remote controller, the communication device according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 161  is a sequence of data flow in registration of operation information performed by the communication device according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 162  is a sequence of data flow where the communication device serves as a remote controller to operate a terminal apparatus, according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 163A  is a diagram showing the case where a two-dimensional (2D) bar-code is provided as apparatus information of the terminal apparatus  101 , according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 163B  is a diagram showing an example of the case where the apparatus information of the terminal apparatus  101  is read from the 2D bar-code, according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 164A  is a diagram showing a display example of a display unit in the case where a plurality of illumination apparatuses are operated. 
         FIG. 164B  is a diagram showing a display example of a display unit in the case where a plurality of illumination apparatuses are operated. 
         FIG. 165A  is a diagram showing a display example in the case where a user is persuaded to select which apparatus among a plurality of apparatuses should be operated by a communication device  102  as a remote controller. 
         FIG. 165B  is a diagram showing an example in the case where the communication device  102  sets operation information according to a current operating status of the terminal apparatus  101 . 
         FIG. 166  is a schematic diagram of remote control operation for the second floor, according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 167  is a diagram illustrating an example of an entire system according to a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 168  is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement of products embedded with RF-ID units O 50  according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 169  is a diagram illustrating an example of a three-dimensional (3D) map of a building, which is building coordinate information extracted from a building coordinate database O 104  according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 170  is a diagram illustrating an example of image data of a 3D map of products which is generated by a program execution unit O 65  according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 171  is a diagram illustrating an example of a 3D product map in which image data of  FIG. 128  is combined with the already-displayed image data of  FIG. 129  by a display unit O 68 d according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 172  is a table illustrating examples of an accuracy identifier according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 173  is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing for the 3D map according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 174  is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing for the 3D map according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 175  is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific small power wireless communication system using the 3D map according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 176  is a configuration of network environment for apparatus connection setting according to a twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 177  is a diagram showing a structure of a network module of an apparatus according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 178  is a functional block diagram of a structure of a home appliance control device according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 179  is a diagram for explaining a user action for setting a solar panel according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 180  is a diagram of switching of a mobile terminal screen in setting the solar panel according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 181  is a diagram of switching of a mobile terminal screen in subsequent authentication of the solar panel according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 182  is a diagram of a mobile terminal screen in checking energy production of a target solar panel according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 183  is a diagram of a mobile terminal screen in checking a trouble of a solar panel according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 184  is a part of a flowchart of processing performed by the mobile terminal in setting the solar panel according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 185  is a part of the flowchart of the processing performed by the mobile terminal in setting the solar panel according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 186  is a part of the flowchart of the processing performed by the mobile terminal in setting the solar panel according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 187  is a part of the flowchart of the processing performed by the mobile terminal in setting the solar panel according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 188  is a part of the flowchart of the processing of the setting the solar panel according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 189  is a flowchart of processing of equipping the solar panel according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 190  is a flowchart of processing of connecting an apparatus to a home appliance control device (SEG), according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 191  is a flowchart of processing of connecting the apparatus to the home appliance control device (SEG), according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 192  is a flowchart of processing of installing new-version software onto the home appliance control device (SEG) according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 193  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) and a target apparatus, according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 194  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus, according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 195  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus, according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 196  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus, according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 197  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus, according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 198  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus, according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 199  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus, according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 200  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus via a relay device, according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 201  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus via the relay device, according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 202  is a diagram of an example of image data on a three-dimensional (3D) map generated by a program execution unit O 65  according to a twenty-first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 203  is a diagram of an example of a product 3D map generated by a display unit O 68 d by combining the image data of  FIG. 169  and the displayed image data of  FIG. 202 , according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 204  is a flowchart of remote control operation according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 205  is a flowchart of remote control operation according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 206  is a flowchart for explaining of significance of detailed processing shown in  FIG. 205 . 
         FIG. 207  is a flowchart for explaining processing of determining a correct reference point of a mobile terminal when a current reference point of the mobile terminal is not correct, according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 208  is a flowchart for explaining processing of connecting an apparatus to a parent device when the apparatus does not have NFC function, according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 209  is a flowchart for explaining processing of connecting the apparatus to the parent device when the apparatus does not have NFC function, according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 210  is a flowchart of a position information registration method according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 211  is a flowchart of the position information registration method according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 212  is a flowchart of the position information registration method according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 213  is a diagram for explaining the situation of a mobile device and cooperation apparatuses according to a twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 214  is a diagram showing display screens of a mobile device and display screens of a cooperation apparatus, according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 215  is a flowchart of processing according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 216  is a flowchart of the processing according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 217  is a flowchart of the processing according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 218  is a flowchart of the processing according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 219  is a flowchart of the processing according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 220  is a schematic diagram of the mobile device according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 221  is a flowchart of an example of displays of the mobile device and a cooperation apparatus, according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 222  is a flowchart of processing in the case where the cooperation apparatus is a microwave, according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 223  is a flowchart of processing in the case where the cooperation apparatus is a microwave, according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 224  is a diagram for explaining a communication method for establishing a plurality of transmission paths by using a plurality of antennas and performing transmission via the transmission paths. 
         FIG. 225  is a flowchart for explaining a method for obtaining position information in the communication method using the transmission paths. 
         FIG. 226  is a diagram showing an example of apparatuses related to moves of a mobile device near and inside a building (user&#39;s home), according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 227  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of a mobile device in the building, according to a twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 228  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 229  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 230  is a diagram showing an example of information indicating an area of a room on a 3D map according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 231  is a diagram showing a move of the mobile device near a reference point according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 232  is a diagram showing a location to be detected with a high accuracy in a direction of moving the mobile device, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 233  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 234  is a table of moves of the mobile device near reference points and an attention point, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 235  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 236  is a list indicating priorities of sensors for detecting each of reference points, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 237  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 238  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 239  shows graphs each indicating detection data in a Z-axis (vertical) direction of an acceleration sensor, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 240  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 241  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 242  shows graphs and a diagram for showing a relationship between detection data and walking sound in the acceleration Z-axis (vertical) direction, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 243  shows a diagram showing an example of moves in the building, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 244  is a table indicating a path from a reference point to a next reference point, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 245  shows a table and a diagram for explaining original reference point accuracy information, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 246  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 247  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 248  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 249  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 250  is a diagram showing the principal of position determination, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 251  is a diagram showing the principal of position determination, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 252  is a diagram showing the principal of position determination, according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 253  is a circuit diagram of a solar cell according to the twenty-third embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 254  is a flowchart according to a twenty-fourth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 255  is a flowchart according to the twenty-fourth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 256  is a flowchart according to the twenty-fourth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 257  is a flowchart according to the twenty-fourth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 258  is a flowchart according to the twenty-fourth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 259  is a flowchart according to the twenty-fourth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 260  is a table indicating information recorded on a tag, according to the twenty-fourth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 261  is a diagram of a mobile terminal according to a twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 262  is a diagram of a home appliance according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 263  is a diagram of display states of a module position of the mobile terminal according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 264  is a diagram of display states of a module position of the mobile terminal according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 265  is a diagram showing proximity wireless communication states of the mobile terminal and the home appliance, according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 266  is a diagram showing the situation where proximity wireless communication mark is cooperated with an acceleration meter and a gyro, according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 267  is a diagram showing the situation where proximity wireless communication mark is cooperated with a camera, according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 268  is a diagram showing the situation where an application program is downloaded from a server, according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 269  is a functional block diagram according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 270  is a diagram of state changes in the case where a trouble occurs in a home appliance, according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 271  is a diagram of state changes in the case where the home appliance performs communication for a long time, according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 272  is a diagram of a home appliance having a display screen according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 273  is flowchart  1  according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 274  is flowchart  2  according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 275  is flowchart  3  according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 276  is a flowchart according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 277  is flowchart  5  according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
         FIG. 278  is a diagram showing a display method of a standby screen of a terminal according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention. 
     
    
    
     BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION 
     The following describes embodiments according to the present invention with reference to the drawings. In the following embodiments, various aspects of the communication device according to the present invention are described. Among them, the eighteenth embodiment is directly related to the claims appended in this application. 
     First Embodiment 
     The first embodiment according to the present invention is described below.  FIG. 1  is a schematic diagram of the first embodiment of the present invention. Here, a communication system including an image capturing device (camera)  1 , a TV  45 , and a server  42  is illustrated. In  FIG. 1 , the image capturing device  1  capturing images is illustrated on a left-hand side, while the image capturing device  1  reproducing the captured images is illustrated on a right-hand side. 
     The image capturing device  1  is an example of the communication device according to the aspect of the present invention. Here, the image capturing device  1  is implemented as a digital camera. For units used in capturing images, the image capturing device  1  includes a first power supply unit  101 , a video processing unit  31 , a first antenna  20 , a first processing unit  35 , a second memory  52 , and a RF-ID antenna (second antenna)  21 . The second memory  52  holds medium identification information  111 , captured image state information  60 , and server specific information  48 . The RF-ID antenna  21  is used for a RF-ID unit. For units used in reproducing images, the image capturing device  1  includes the first power supply unit  101 , a first memory  174 , a power detection unit  172 , an activation unit  170 , the second memory  52 , a second processing unit  95 , a modulation unit switch  179 , a communication unit  171 , a second power supply unit  91 , and the RF-ID antenna  21 . The second memory  52  holds medium identification information  111 , captured image state information  60 , and the server specific information  48 . 
     The TV  45  is an example of an apparatus (device) connected to a reader via a communication path. In more detail, the TV  45  is a television receiving apparatus used to display image data captured by the image capturing device  1 . The TV  45  includes a display unit  110  and a RF-ID reader/writer  46 . 
     The server  42  is a computer that holds image data uploaded from the image capturing device  1  and that downloads the image data to the TV  45 . The server  42  has a storage device in which data  50  is stored. 
     When images of objects such as scenery are captured, the images are converted to captured data (image data) by the video processing unit  31  data. Then, in communicable conditions, the image data is transmitted to an access point using the first antenna  20  for a wireless Local Area Network (LAN) or Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access (WiMAX), and eventually recorded as the data  50  via the Internet to the predetermined server  42 . 
     Here, the first processing unit  35  records the captured image state information  60  regarding the captured image data onto the second memory  52  in a RF-ID unit  47 . The captured image state information  60  indicates at least one of (a) date of time of capturing each of the images, (b) the number of the captured images, (c) date and time of finally transmitting (uploading) an image, (d) the number of transmitted (uploaded) images, and (e) date and time of finally capturing an image. In addition, the captured image state information  60  includes (f) serial numbers of images that have already been uploaded or images that have not yet been uploaded; (g) a serial number of a finally captured image; and the like. 
     In addition, the first processing unit  35  generates a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) of the data  50  that is uploaded to the server  42 . The first processing unit  35  records the server specific information  48  onto the second memory  52 . The server specific information  48  is used to access the image data. The medium identification information  111  is also recorded on the second memory  52 . The medium identification information  111  is used to determine whether the device embedded with the RF-ID (RF-ID unit) is a camera, a card, or a post card. 
     When a main power of the camera (the first power supply unit  101  such as a battery) is ON, the second memory  52  receives power from the main power. Even if the main power of the camera is OFF, the external RF-ID reader/writer is located outside supplies power to the RF-ID antenna  21 . This enables the passive second power supply unit  91  without any power like a battery to adjust a voltage to provide power to respective units in a RF-ID circuit unit including the second memory. Thereby, it is possible to supply power to the second memory  52  so that the data is exchanged between the second memory  52  and the external device to be recorded and reproduced. Here, the second power supply unit  91  is a circuit generating power from radio waves received by the second antenna (RF-ID antenna)  21 . The second power supply unit  91  includes a rectifier circuit and the like. Whenever the main power is ON or OFF, the data in the second memory  52  is read and written by the second processing unit  95 . When the main power is ON, the data in the second memory  52  can be read and written also by the first processing unit  35 . In other words, the second memory  52  is implemented as a nonvolatile memory, and both the first processing unit  35  and the second processing unit  95  can read and write data from and to the second memory  52 . 
     When the image capturing device  1  completes capturing images of a trip or the like and then the captured images are to be reproduced, the image capturing device  1  is moved into proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45 , as illustrated on the right side of  FIG. 1  as being the situation of reproducing images. Then, the RF-ID reader/writer  46  supplies power to the RF-ID unit  47  via the second antenna  21 , and thereby the second power supply unit  91  provides power to the units in the RF-ID unit  47 , even if the main power (the first power supply unit  101 ) of the image capturing device  1  is OFF. The captured image state information  60  and the server specific information  48  are read by the second processing unit  95  from the second memory  52 , and transmitted to the TV  45  via the second antenna  21 . The TV  45  generates a URL based on the server specific information  48 , then downloads the image data of the data  50  from the server  42 , and eventually displays, on the display unit  110 , thumbnails or the like of images in the image data. If it is determined based on the captured image state information  60  that there is any captured image not yet been uploaded to the server  42 , the determination result is displayed on the display unit  110 . If necessary, the image capturing device  1  is activated to upload, to the server  42 , image data of the captured image not yet been uploaded. 
     (a), (b), and (c) in  FIG. 2  are an external front view, an external back view, and an external right side view, respectively, of the image capturing device  1  according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
     As illustrated in (c) in  FIG. 2 , the first antenna  20  used for a wireless LAN and the second antenna  21  used for the RF-ID unit are embedded in a right side of the image capturing device  1 . The antennas are covered with an antenna cover  22  made of a material not shielding radio waves. The RF-ID unit operates at a frequency of 13.5 MHz, while the wireless LAN operates at a frequency of 2.5 GHz. The significant difference in frequency prevents interference between them. Therefore, the two antennas  20  and  21  are seen overlapping with each other from the outside, as illustrated in (c) in  FIG. 2 . The structure decreases an installation area of the antennas, eventually reducing a size of the image capturing device  1 . The structure also enables the single antenna cover  22  to cover both of the two antennas as illustrated in (c) in  FIG. 2 , so that the part made of the material not shielding radio waves is minimized. The material not shielding radio waves, such as plastic, has a strength lower than that of a metal. Therefore, the minimization of the material can reduce a decrease in a strength of a body of the image capturing device  1 . The image capturing device  1  further includes a lens  6  and a power switch  3 . The units assigned with numeral references  2  to  16  will be described later. 
       FIG. 3  is a detailed block diagram of the image capturing device  1 . 
     Image data captured by an image capturing unit  30  is provided to a recording/reproducing unit  32  via the video processing unit  31  and then recorded onto a third memory  33 . The image data is eventually recorded onto an Integrated Circuit (IC) card  34  that is removable from the image capturing device  1 . 
     The above processing is instructed by the first processing unit  35  that is, for example, a Central Processing Unit (CPU). The image data, such as captured photographs or video, is provided to an encryption unit  36 , a transmission unit  38  in a communication unit  37 , and then the first antenna  20 , in order to be transmitted to an access point or the like by radio via a wireless LAN, WiMAX, or the like. From the access point or the like, the image data is transmitted to the server  42  via the Internet  40 . In the above manner, the image data such as photographs is uploaded. 
     There is a situation where a part of the image data fails to be uploaded because, for example, the communication state is not good or there is no nearby access point or base station. In the situation, some images have already been uploaded to the server  42 , and the other images have not yet been uploaded. Therefore, the image data in the server  42  is different from the image data captured by the image capturing device  1 . In the first embodiment of the present invention, the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  or the like reads the server specific information  48  and the like from the second memory  52  in the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1 . Then, based on the readout information, a URL or the like of the server  42  is generated. According to the URL, the TV  45  accesses the server  42  to access the data  50  such as a file, folder, or the like uploaded by the image capturing device  1 . Then, the TV  45  downloads the uploaded images from among the images captured by the image capturing device  1 , and displays the downloaded images. The above method will be described in more detail later. 
     If a part or all of the captured images is not uploaded as image data of the data  50  in the server  42 , a problem would occur that a user downloading the images to the TV  45  cannot watch a part of the images on the TV  45 . 
     In order to solve the problem, in the first embodiment of the present invention, the first processing unit  35  causes a recording/reproducing unit  51  to indicate information regarding a state of captured images, such as information of uploading state, to the captured image state information  55  in the second memory  52 . 
     The above is described in more detail with reference to  FIG. 4 . In the second memory  52 , synchronization information  56  is recorded. The synchronization information  56  indicates whether or not image data in the server  42  matches image data captured by the camera, in other words, whether or not the image data in the server  42  is in synchronization with the image data captured by the camera. In the first embodiment of the present invention, the TV  45  reads the captured image state information  55  from the second memory  52  via the second antenna  21 . The captured image state information  55  makes it possible to instantly determine whether or not the data  50  in the server lacks any image. If the determination is made that there is any image that has not yet been uploaded, then the determination result is displayed on the display unit of the TV  45 . Here, the TV  45  also displays a message of “Please upload images” to a viewer. Or, the TV  45  issues an instruction to the camera via the RF-ID antenna  21  to transmit an activation signal to the activation unit  170 , thereby supplying power to the first power supply unit  101  of the image capturing device  1 . Thereby, the TV  45  causes the image capturing device  1  to upload, to the server  42 , the images in the first memory  174  or the like of the image capturing device  1 , which have not yet been uploaded, via a wireless LAN, a wired LAN, the second antenna (RF-ID antenna)  21 , or the like. 
     Since transmission via the RF-ID antenna  21  has a small transfer amount, transmission of the image data as originally captured takes a considerable time to upload and display the image data. This causes a user to feel unpleasant. In order to avoid this, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, when the image data is transmitted via the RF-ID antenna  21 , thumbnails of the images not yet been uploaded are transmitted instead. The thumbnails can shorten apparent upload time and display time, suppressing unpleasant feeling of the user. Most of current RF-ID having a high communication ability has a transfer amount of several hundreds kbps. However, development of RF-ID having a quad-speed has been examined. The quad-speed RF-ID has a possibility of achieving a transfer amount of several Mbps. If thumbnails of images not yet been uploaded are transmitted, it is possible to transmit several dozens of thumbnails in one second. If thumbnails are displayed in a list, thumbnails of all images including images not yet been uploaded can be displayed on the TV within a time period a general user can tolerate. The above is one of practical solutions. 
     If the image capturing device is forced to be activated to upload images not yet been uploaded as described above, the most speedy and stable path is selected from a wireless LAN, the RF-ID antenna  21 , and a wired LAN, to be used for uploading and displaying on the TV. In the situation where the image capturing device  1  receives power from the outside via the second antenna  21 , the communication unit  171  transmitting signals to the second antenna  21  performs communication with the outside by a low-speed modulation method. On the other hand, in the situation where the image capturing device  1  can receive power from the first power supply unit  101  or the like, the communication unit  171  switches the modulation method to a modulation method having a large signal point, such as Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK), 16-Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM), or 64-QAM, as needed, in order to achieve high-speed transfer to upload the image data not yet been uploaded in a short time. Furthermore, when the power detection unit  172  detects, for example, that the first power supply unit  101  or the like does not have enough power or that the image capturing device  1  is not connected to an external power, the first power supply unit  101  stops supplying power and a modulation switch unit  175  switches the modulation method employed by the communication unit  171  to a modulation method having a smaller signal point or less transfer rate. As a result, it is possible to prevent that the capacity of the first power supply unit  101  is reduced to be equal to or less than a set value. 
     There is another solution for power. When power is not enough, the second processing unit  95 , the communication unit  171 , or the like sends a power increase request signal to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  via the second antenna  21 , to request for power support. In response to the request, the RF-ID reader/writer  46  increases providing power to have a value greater than the set value for the power used in reading data from the RF-ID unit. Since the RF-ID unit receives more power via the second antenna  21 , the RF-ID unit can provide power to the communication unit  171  or the first processing unit  35 . Thereby, a power amount of a battery  100  for the first power supply unit  101  is not reduced. Or, without the battery  100 , the image capturing device  1  can practically and unlimitedly continue transmission. 
     As still another method, uploaded-image-data information  60  in  FIG. 3  can be used. In uploaded-image-data information  60 , uploaded-image information  61  such as serial numbers of photographs, is recorded. It is also possible to use hashed information  62  generated by hashing the information  61 . As a result, a data amount is reduced. 
     The TV  45  can read the above information to be compared to information of images captured by the camera, thereby obtaining information of images not yet been uploaded. 
     As still another method, not-yet-uploaded image data existence identification information  63  can be used. The not-yet-uploaded image data existence identification information  63  includes an existence identifier  64  indicating whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded. Since existence of images has not yet been uploaded is notified, data in the second memory  52  can be significantly reduced. 
     It is also possible to use not-yet-uploaded-image number  65  indicating the number of images not yet been uploaded. Since the image capturing device  1  allows the TV  45  to read the information, a viewer can be informed of the number of images to be uploaded. In this case, a data capacity in addition to the number is recorded as the captured image state information  55 . Thereby, the image capturing device  1  enables the TV  45  to display a more exact prediction time required to upload images not yet been uploaded. 
     It is also possible to use not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  that is generated by hashing information regarding images not yet been uploaded. 
     In addition, it is also possible to record a final capturing time (final capturing date/time)  68  in the second memory  52 . Later, the TV  45  reads the final capturing time  68 . The TV  45  is connected to the server  42  to compare the final capturing time  68  to a capturing date of an image that has been finally uploaded to the server  42 . Thereby, it is possible to easily determine whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded. If images are captured and assigned with serial numbers sequentially from an older image, it is possible to record only a final image serial number  69 . The final image serial number  69  is compared to a serial number of an image that has been finally uploaded to the server  42 . Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded. It is also possible to record, onto the second memory  52 , captured image information  70  that is, for example, serial numbers of all captured images. Thereby, the TV  45  later accesses the server  42  to match the serial numbers to images uploaded to the server  42 . As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not there is any image not yet uploaded. When the captured image information  70  is used, use of hashed information  71  generated by hashing the captured image information  70  can compress the captured image information  70 . 
     The second memory  52  further stores Unique IDentification (UID)  75  of the RF-ID unit, camera ID  76 , and the medium identification information  111 . Even if the main power of the camera (except a sub-power for backup etc. of a clock) is OFF, these pieces of information can be read by the TV  45  via the second antenna  21  to be used for identifying the camera or the user or authenticating a device (apparatus). When the user comes back from an overseas trip or the like, the camera is likely to have a small charge amount of the battery. However, according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the camera can be operated to transmit information without battery, which is highly convenient for the user. The medium identification information  111  includes an identifier or the like indicating whether the medium or device embedded with the RF-ID unit is a camera, a camcorder, a post card, a card, or a mobile phone. The identifier enables the TV  45  to identify the medium or device. Thereby, the TV  45  can display a mark or icon of the camera or postcard on a screen as illustrated in  FIGS. 22A and 22B , as will be described. The TV  45  can also change processing depending on the identifier. 
     The second memory  52  also stores image display method instruction information  77 . For example, in the situation where a list display  78  in  FIG. 5  is selected, when the second antenna  21  is moved into proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45 , the image capturing device  1  (camera) causes the TV  45  to display a list of thumbnails of images, such as photographs. 
     In the situation where slide show  79  is selected, the image capturing device  1  causes the TV  45  to sequentially display images from a newer one or an older one. 
     In a lower part of the second memory  52  in  FIG. 4 , there is a region for recording the server specific information  48 . 
     The server specific information  48  allows a camera operator to display images on the TV screen by a preferred method. 
     The server specific information  48  includes server URL generation information  80  that is source information from which a server URL is generated. An example of the server URL generation information  80  is login ID  83 . The server specific information  48  has a region in which server address information  81  and user identification information  82  are recorded. In practical, login ID  83  and the like are recorded. In addition, there is a region for storing a password  84 . An encrypted password  85  may be stored in the region. The above pieces of information are used to generate an URL by a URL generation unit  90  that is provided in the image capturing device  1 , the RF-ID unit  47 , the camera function used for capturing images in the image capturing device  1 , or the TV  45 . The URL is used for accessing a group of images corresponding to the image capturing device  1  or the user in the server  42 . If the URL generation unit  90  is provided in the RF-ID unit  47 , the URL generation unit  90  receives power from the second power supply unit  91 . 
     It is also possible to generate URL  92  without using the above pieces of information and store the generated URL  92  directly to the second memory  52 . 
     It is characterized in that the above-described pieces of information stored in the second memory  52  can be read by both the second processing unit  95  in the RF-ID unit and the first processing unit  35  in the camera function. 
     The above structure allows the TV  45  reading the RF-ID unit  47  in the camera to instantly obtain the pieces of information regarding uploading state, the sever address information, the login ID, the password, and the like. Thereby, the TV  45  can download image data corresponding to the camera from the server  42 , and display the image data at a high speed. 
     In the above situation, even if the main power of the image capturing device  1  is OFF, the RF-ID reader/writer supplies power to the second power supply unit  91  to activate (operate) the image capturing device  1 . Therefore, power of the battery  100  in the image capturing device  1  is not reduced. 
     Referring back to  FIG. 3 , the first power supply unit  101  receives power from the battery  100  to provide power to the units in the camera. In a quiescent state, however, a third power supply unit  102  provides weak power to the clock  103  and the like. In some cases, the third power supply unit  102  supplies backup power to a part of the second memory  52 . 
     The RF-ID unit  47  receives power from the second antenna to provide power to the second power supply unit  91 , thereby operating the second processing unit  95 , or operating a data receiving unit  105 , a recording unit  106 , a reproducing unit  107 , a data transfer unit  108  (the communication unit  171 ), and the second memory  52 . 
     Therefore, in a quiescent state of the camera, no power is consumed. As a result, it is possible to keep the battery  100  of the camera longer. 
     The processing performed by the image capturing device  1  (referred to also as a “medium” such as a camera or card) and the processing performed by the TV and the RF-ID reader/writer are explained with reference to a flowchart of  FIG. 7 . 
     If the main power is OFF at Step  150 a in  FIG. 7 , it is determined at Step  150 b whether or not activation setting of the RF-ID reader/writer for the main power OFF is made. If the activation setting is made, then the RF-ID reader/writer  46  is turned ON at Step  150 c and changed to be in a power saving mode at Step  150 e. 
     At Step  150 f, impedance or the like of an antenna unit is measured, or a nearby sensor is measured. When the RF-ID unit is moved into proximity of an antenna of the RF-ID reader/writer  46  at Step  150 j, it is detected at Step  150 g whether or not the RF-ID unit is in proximity of or contacts the antenna. If it is detected that the RF-ID unit is in proximity of or contacts the antenna, then the RF-ID reader/writer  46  starts supplying power to the antenna of the medium at Step  150 h. At Step  150 k, in the medium, the second power supply unit is turned ON and thereby the second processing unit starts operating. As Step  150 m, communication between the medium (camera or card) and the RF-ID reader/writer  46  starts. 
     When at Step  150 i, the TV determines whether or not the RF-ID reader/writer  46  receives communication from the medium. If the RF-ID reader/writer  46  receives communication, then mutual authentication starts at Steps  151 a and  151 f in  FIG. 8 . If it is determined at Steps  151 b and  151 g that the mutual authentication is successful, information is read out from the second memory at Step  151 d. At Step  151 e, the readout information is transmitted to the RF-ID reader/writer  46 . At Step  151 i, the RF-ID reader/writer  46  receives the information. At Step  151 j, the TV  45  side makes a determination as to whether or not the identification information or the like of the second memory is correct. If the identification information or the like is correct, then it is determined at Step  151 p whether or not the TV  45  has identification information indicating automatic power ON. If the TV  45  has identification information, then it is determined at Step  151 r whether or not a main power of the TV is OFF. If the main power of the TV is OFF, the main power of the TV is turned ON at Step  152 a of  FIG. 9 . At Step  152 b, the TV  45  side makes a determination as to whether or not the second memory  52  has forced display instruction. If the second memory  52  has the forced display instruction, then the TV  45  side changes an input signal of the TV to a screen display signal for displaying the RF-ID at Step  152 d. At Step  152 e, the RF-ID reader/writer  46  reads format identification information. At Step  152 f, the RF-ID reader/writer  46  reads information from the second memory by changing a format of the information to a format according to the format identification information. At Step  152 g, the TV  45  side makes a determination as to whether or the second memory has a “password request flag”. If the second memory has the “password request flag”, then the RF-ID reader/writer  46  reads an “ID of TV not requesting password entry” from the second memory at Step  152 h. At Step  152 i, the TV  45  side makes a determination as to whether or not ID of the TV  45  matches the “ID of TV not requesting password entry”. If the ID of the TV  45  does not match the “ID of TV not requesting password entry”, then the medium reads out a password from the second memory at Step  152 q. At Step  152 v, the medium decrypts the password that has been encrypted. At Step  152 s, the medium transmits the decrypted password to the TV  45  side. Here, at Steps  152 q,  152 r, and  152 s, it is also possible to store the password in a storage device in the server  42  as the data  50  in the server  42 . 
     At Step  152 j, the RF-ID reader/writer  46  receives the password. At Step  152 k, the TV  45  displays a password entry screen. At Step  152 m, the TV  45  determines whether or not the input password is correct. The determination may be made by the server  42 . If the determination is made that the input password is correct, then the TV  45  performs display based on the information and program read from the second memory in the RF-ID unit at Step  152 p. 
     At Step  153 a of  FIG. 10 , the TV  45  side determines whether or not the medium identification information  111  in the RF-ID unit in the second memory indicates that the medium is a camera. If the medium identification information  111  indicates a camera, then the TV  45  displays an icon (characters) of a camera (camera icon) on the display unit at Step  153 b. On the other hand, if the medium identification information  111  does not indicate a camera, then it is determined at Step  153 c whether or not the medium identification information  111  indicates a post card. If the medium identification information  111  indicates a post card, then the TV  45  displays an icon of a post card (post-card icon) at Step  153 d. On the other hand, if the medium identification information  111  does not indicate a post card, the TV  45  further determines at Step  153 e whether or not the medium identification information  111  indicates an IC card. If the medium identification information  111  indicates an IC card, then the TV  45  displays an icon of an IC card at Step  153 f. On the other hand, if the medium identification information  111  does not indicate an IC card, the TV  45  still further determines at Step  153 g whether or not the medium identification information  111  indicates a mobile phone. If the medium identification information  111  indicates a mobile phone, then the TV  45  displays an icon of a mobile phone on a corner of the TV screen. 
     At Steps  154 a and  154 i of  FIG. 11 , the RF-ID reader/writer  46  reads service detail identification information from the server or the second memory. At Step  154 c, the TV  45  side determines whether or not the service detail identification information indicates image display service. At Step  154 b, the TV  45  side determines whether or not the service detail identification information indicates a post card service such as direct mail. At Step  154 d, the TV  45  side determines whether or not the service detail identification information indicates advertising service. At Steps  154 f and  154 j, the RF-ID reader/writer  46  obtains the server specific information  48  from the second memory of the medium. At Step  154 g, the TV  45  side determines whether or not the second memory stores the URL  92 . If the second memory does not store the URL  92 , then the processing proceeds to Steps  154 h and  154 k at which the TV  45  obtains the server address information  81  and the user identification information  82  from the second memory. At Steps  155 a and  155 p, the TV obtains an encrypted password from the second memory. At Steps  155 b, the TV decrypts the encrypted password. At Step  155 c, the TV generates URL from the above pieces of information. At Step  155 d, even if the second memory stores the URL  92 , the TV accesses the server having the URL via the communication unit and the Internet. At Step  155 k, the TV starts being connected to the server  42 . At Step  155 q, the medium reads out operation program existence identifier  119  from the second memory. At Step  155 e, the TV determines whether or not the TV has any operation program existence identifier. If the TV has any operation program existence identifier, it is further determined at Step  155 f whether or not there are plurality of operation programs. If there are a plurality of operation programs, then the TV reads operation program selection information  118  from the second memory at Step  155 r. At Step  155 g, the TV determines whether or not the operation program selection information  118  is set. If the operation program selection information  118  is set, the TV selects directory information of a specific operation program at Step  155 h. At Step  155 s, the medium reads out directory information  117  of the specific operation program from the server and provides the directory information  117  to the TV. At Step  155 i, the TV accesses the specific operation program in the directory on the server. At Step  155 m, the server provides the specific operation program to the TV or executes the specific operation program on the server at Step  155 n. At Step  155 j, the TV (or the server) starts execution of the specific operation program. At Step  156 a of  FIG. 13 , the TV determines whether or not the specific operation program is service using images. If the specific operation program is service using images, then the TV starts checking images not yet been uploaded at Step  156 b. 
     At Step  156 i, the TV reads the not-yet-uploaded image data existence identification information  64  from the medium. At Step  156 c, the TV determines whether or not the not-yet-uploaded image data existence identification information  64  indicates that there is any image not yet been uploaded. If there is any image not yet been uploaded, the TV reads the not-yet-uploaded-image number  66  and the data capacity  65  from the medium at Step  156 d. At Step  156 e, the TV displays (a) the not-yet-uploaded-image number  66  and (b) a prediction time required to upload images which is calculated from the data capacity  65  regarding image not yet been uploaded. At Step  156 f, the TV determines whether or not the medium (camera) is in a state where the medium can automatically upload images. If the medium can automatically upload images, then at Step  156 g, the TV activates the medium (camera) to upload images not yet been uploaded to the server via the first antenna  20  or the second antenna  21  by wireless communication or wired communication having contacts. When Step  156 g is completed, the processing proceeds to Step  157 a of  FIG. 14 . At Step  157 a, the TV determines whether or not there is a billing program. If there is no billing program, then at Step  157 n, the TV reads identifier  121  regarding the image display method instruction information which is shown in  FIG. 6 . At Step  157 b, the TV determines whether or not the server has the image display method instruction information. If the server has image display method instruction information, then at Step  157 p, the TV reads, from the medium, directory information  120  regarding a directory in which image display method instruction information is stored on the server. At Step  157 c, the TV reads, from the medium, the directory information  120  in which the image display method instruction information corresponding to UID or the like is stored. At step  157 d, the TV obtains the image display method instruction information from the server. Then, the processing proceeds to Step  157 f. 
     On the other hand, if the determination is made at Step  157 b that the server does not have the image display method instruction information, then the processing proceeds to Step  157 e. At Step  157 e, the TV obtains the image display method instruction information from the medium (such as a camera). Then, the processing proceeds to Step  157 f. 
     At Step  157 f, the TV starts display of images based on the image display method instruction information. At Step  157 g, the TV reads an all-image display identifier  123  from the medium. At Step  157 g, the TV determines whether or not the all-image display identifier  123  indicates that all images are to be displayed. If all images are to be displayed, the TV displays all images at Step  157 r. On the other hand, if all images are not to be displayed, then at Step  157 h, the TV displays a part of images in a specific directory identified by the directory information  124  that is read at Step  157 s from the medium. At Step  157 i, the TV determines whether or not a list display identifier  125  indicates that images to be displayed in a list. If the images are to be displayed in a list, then the TV reads a display order identifier  122  at Step  157 t. At Step  157 j, the TV displays the images in a list in a date order or an upload order based on the display order identifier. At Step  157 v, the TV reads a slide show identifier  126  from the medium. At Step  157 k, the TV determines whether or not the slide show identifier  126  indicates that images are to be displayed as slide show. If the images are to be displayed as a slide show, then at Step  157 m, the TV displays the images as slide show based on the display order identifier  122 . Then, the TV reads image quality prioritization  127  from the second memory of the medium. At Step  158 a of  FIG. 15 , the TV determines whether or not the image quality prioritization  127  indicates that the images are to be displayed by prioritizing image quality. If the images are not to be displayed by prioritizing image quality, the TV reads speed prioritization  128  from the medium at Step  158 q and further determines at Step  158 b whether or not the speed prioritization  128  indicates that the images are to be displayed by prioritizing a speed. If a speed is to be prioritized, then the TV determines at Step  158 c whether or not the server stores display audio. At Step  158 s, the TV reads and checks display audio server directory  130  from the medium. At Step  158 d, the TV accesses the directory in the server to obtain the display audio and outputs the audio. 
     At Step  158 e, the TV determines whether or not all images are to be displayed as priorities. If all images are not to be displayed as priorities, then at Step  158 f, the TV selects a part of the images. At Steps  158 g, the TV reads specific directory information  124  from the medium at Step  158 v, and receives images in the specific directory from the server at Step  158 w. At Step  158 h, the TV displays the images in the specific directory. On the other hand, if it is determined at Step  158 e that all images are to be displayed as priorities, then the TV may display all images at Step  158 i. At Step  158 j, the TV determines whether or not the image display is completed. If the image display is completed, then the TV displays a message “view other image(s)?” at Step  158 k. If the user agrees, then the TV displays a menu of images in different directories at Step  158 m. 
     At Step  159 a of  FIG. 16 , the TV determines whether or not images captured by a specific user are requested. If images captured by a specific user are requested, then at Step  159 b, the TV requests the medium to provide (a) specific user all image information  132  at Step  159 m and (b) a specific user password  133  that is a password of the specific user. At Step  159 c, the TV determines whether or not the password is correct. If the password is correct, then at Step  159 p, the TV reads directory information  134  of a directory of a file storing an image list from the medium. At Step  159 d, the TV accesses the server to access a directory having an image list of the specific user. At Step  159 r, the TV downloads image data in the directory from the server. At Step  159 e, the TV displays the images captured by the specific user. 
     At Step  159 f, the TV starts color correction routine. At Step  159 g, the TV reads camera model information from the camera ID  76 . At Steps  159 h and  159 t, the TV downloads characteristic information of the camera model from the server. Then, at Steps  159 i and  159 u, the TV downloads characteristic information of the TV from the server. At Step  159 w, the server calculates the characteristic information to generate modified information. At Step  159 j, the TV modifies color and brightness of the display unit based on the pieces of characteristic information of the medium (camera) and the TV. At Step  159 k, the TV displays the images with the modified color and brightness. 
     At Step  160 a of  FIG. 17 , the TV determines whether or not forced print instruction is selected. Here, if forced print instruction is selected, it is determined at Step  160 b whether or not the terminal (the TV in the above example) to which the medium (camera) is moved closer is a printer or a terminal connected to the printer. If the terminal is a printer or a terminal connected to the printer, then the terminal obtains, at Step  160 c, camera model information of the medium (camera) and a model name of the printer for each image data. At Step  160 d, the terminal modifies each piece of information of the server to generate modified information. At Step  160 p, the terminal receives directory information  137  of a directory in which the image data to be printed is stored. At  160 e, the terminal accesses the server by using an address of the directory having the image data to be printed (or file name). At Step  160 m, the server sends the image data stored in the directory to the terminal. At Step  160 f, the TV receives the image data to be printed. At Step  160 g, the terminal prints the image data. At Step  160 h, the printing is completed. At Step  160 i, for each image data, the terminal records, onto the server, an identifier indicating that one printing process is completed. At Step  160 n, the server assigns a print completion identifier to the image data that is stored in the server and has been printed. 
     Next, the following describes the situation where the medium such as a camera or a post card does not have a memory for storing data. 
     Steps of  FIG. 18  follow the numbers  3 ,  4 , and  5  in circles in  FIG. 8 . At Step  161 a of  FIG. 18 , a main power of the TV is turned ON. At Step  161 k, the TV reads UID of the RF-ID unit from the second memory. At Step  161 b, the TV obtains the UID. At Step  161 m, the TV reads the server specific information  48  from the second memory. At Step  161 c, the TV accesses a server directory. At Step  161 d, the TV searches the server directories for a final server providing service corresponding to the UID. At Step  161 e, the TV determines whether or not such a final server exists. If there is such a final server, then at Step  161 g, the TV accesses the final server and reads a user ID, a password, and a service name from a UID list. At Step  161 h, the TV determines whether or not a password is requested. If the password is requested, then the TV determines at Step  161 i whether or not the readout password is correct. At Step  162 a of  FIG. 19 , the TV determines whether or not the service is regarding photographs or video. If the service is regarding photographs or video, then at Step  162 b, the TV reads (i) reads, from a specific directory in the server associated with the UID, (a) a corresponding program such as a billing program, (b) a list including an address or a file name of image data to be displayed, (c) image display instruction information, (d) forced display instruction, (e) forced print instruction, and (f) camera ID, and (ii) automatically displays the image data or causes the image data to be printed, based on the above pieces of information and procedure. 
     If needed, password entry is requested at Step  162 b. At Step  162 c, the TV determines whether or not the user desires to print a specific image. If the user desires to print a specific image, then at Step  162 d, the TV adds data of the specific image to the server associated with the UID or to a print directory of the TV. At Step  162 e, the TV determines whether or not the TV is connected to a printer and there is an independent printer. If so, then, at Step  162 f, the RF-ID unit of the medium such as a post card is moved into proximity of a RF-ID reader/writer of the printer. At Step  163 a of  FIG. 20A , the printer (i) reads UID of the RF-ID from the medium, (ii) thereby reads image data to be printed or a location of the image data from the print directory on the server having the modified information, and (iii) prints the image data. At Step  163 b, the printing is completed. Thereby, the above processing is completed. 
     Step  163 i of  FIG. 20B  is the number  23  in  FIG. 19 . At Step  163 d, the TV determines whether or not the service is for shopping. If the service is for shopping, then the TV determines at Step  163 e whether or not authentication is successful. If the authentication is successful, then at Step  163 f, the TV reads, from the server, a shopping/billing program associated with the UID, and executes the program. At Step  163 g, the execution of the program is completed. Thereby, the above processing is completed. 
     Next, the following describes a method of reading information from a RF-ID unit embedded in a postcard without a RF-ID reader. 
     At Step  164 a in  FIG. 21A , a second RF-ID unit, on which URLs of relay servers are recorded, is attached to or embedded in the medium such as a post card. On the outer surface of the second RF-ID unit, (a) UID of the second RF-ID unit and (b) information for identifying a first URL of a certain relay server are printed to be displayed by a two-dimensional barcode. 
     At Step  164 b, there is a camera capable of being connected to a main server. The camera has a first RF-ID unit on which a first URL of the main server is recorded. An image capturing unit in the camera optically reads the two-dimensional barcode, and converts the readout information to information for identifying (a) the UID of a second RF-ID unit in the post card and (b) a second URL of a relay server. 
     At Step  164 c, the converted information is recorded onto a memory in the camera. 
     At Step  164 d, the camera selects a specific set of images from images captured by the camera, and stores the set of images into a specific first directory in the main server. At the same time, the camera uploads information of first directory (first directory information) as well as the first URL of the main server, a specific second directory in the relay server having the second URL. The camera uploads information for associating the UID of the second RF-ID unit with the second directory, to the relay server having the second URL. At Step  164 e, the medium such as a post card is mailed to a specific person. 
     At Step  164 f, the person receiving the post card moves the RF-ID unit of the post card into proximity of a RF-ID reader of a TV or the like. Thereby, the TV reads, from the RF-ID unit, the second URL of the relay server and the UID of the post card. 
     At Step  164 g, the TV accesses the relay server having the second URL. Then, the TV reads, from the relay server, (a) a program in the second directory associated with the UID and/or (b) the first URL and the first directory information of the main server on which specific image data is recorded. The TV downloads the image data from the main server. The TV displays the image data on a screen. In the above case, the image capturing unit in the image capturing device according to the first embodiment of the present invention reads information from the two-dimensional bar-code that is generally printed in a product or post card to record server information. Then, the image capturing device records the information read from the two-dimensional bar-code, as digital information, onto the second memory of the RF-ID unit. Thereby, the image capturing device allows a RF-ID reader of a TV to read the information. As a result, even a TV without an optical sensor for two-dimensional bar-codes can indirectly read information of two-dimensional bar-codes and automatically access a server or the like. 
       FIG. 22A  illustrates the situation where display is presented when the image capturing device  1  is moved into proximity of a RF-ID antenna  138  of the TV  45 . 
     When the image capturing device  1  is moved into proximity of the antenna  138 , the TV  45  displays a camera icon  140  for notifying of that the medium is a camera in the manner described previously. 
     Next, since the number (for example, five) of images not yet been uploaded is detected, the TV  45  displays five blank images  142 a,  142 b,  142 c,  142 d, and  142 e as if these images were taken out from the camera icon  140 . 
     Thereby, the TV  45  displays “tangible” information of images by changing “materials to information”. As a result, the user can perceive the information of images by more natural sense. 
     Regarding images that have been already uploaded to the server, actual images  143 a,  143 b, and  143 c are displayed as tangible data in the same manner as described above. 
       FIG. 22B  illustrates the situation where RF-ID is embedded in a post card  139 . Since the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  reads attribute information of the post card from the RF-ID. Thereby, the TV  45  displays a post-card icon  141  at a bottom left corner of the display unit of the TV  45  as illustrated in  FIG. 22B . The TV  45  also displays images stored in the server or a menu screen as tangible data in the same manner as described with reference to  FIG. 22A . 
     Next, the following processing is described in detail. By the processing, an operation program  116  illustrated in  FIG. 4  is transmitted to the TV  45  illustrated in  FIG. 3  that is an apparatus (device) communicating with the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1 . The communicating device (TV  45 ) executes the transmitted program. 
       FIG. 23  is a block diagram of a configuration in which the apparatus communicating with the RF-ID unit  47  in the image capturing device  1  executes the transmitted program.  FIG. 23  illustrates a communication system including a part of the image capturing device  1  (the RF-ID  47  and the second antenna  21 ), the TV  45 , and a remote controller  827  of the TV  45 . Here, the image capturing device  1  is implemented as a camera which has the RF-ID unit  47  to perform proximity wireless communication with the RF-ID reader/writer  46 . The RF-ID reader/writer  46  is connected to the TV  45  by an infrared communication path. The camera includes the second antenna  21 , the data receiving unit  105 , the second memory  52 , and the data transfer unit  108 . The second antenna  21  is used for the proximity wireless communication. The data receiving unit  105  receives, via the second antenna  21 , an input signal provided from the RF-ID reader/writer  46 . The second memory  52  is a nonvolatile memory holding at least (a) the UID unit  75  that is identification information for identifying the image capturing device  1 , and (b) the operation program  116  that is to be executed by the TV  45  with reference to the UID unit  75 . The data transfer unit  108  transmits the UID unit  75  and the operation program  116  stored in the second memory  52  to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  via the second antenna  21 , according to the input signal received by the data receiving unit  105 . The UID unit  75  and the operation program  116  transmitted from the data transfer unit  108  are transmitted to the TV  45  via the data transfer unit  108 , the second antenna  21 , the RF-ID reader/writer  46 , and then the infrared communication path. The following explains the above units in more detail. 
     The RF-ID unit  47  in the image capturing device  1  has the second memory  52 . The second memory  52  holds the operation program  116 . The operation program  116  can be executed by the TV  45  communicating with the RF-ID unit. In more detail, the operation program  116  is an example of the program executed by the TV  45  with reference to the identification information of the image capturing device  1 . The operation program  116  is, for example, an execution program such as Java™ program, a virtual-machine script program such as Javascript™ program, or the like. 
     The reproducing unit in the RF-ID unit  47  reads necessary information and the operation program  116  from the second memory  52 . The necessary information is required to execute the operation program  116 . The necessary information includes the UID unique to the image capturing device  1 , the server specific information including the URL of the server, and the like. The necessary information and the operation program  116  are transmitted to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  in the remote controller  827  via the data transfer unit  108  and the second antenna  21 . The remote controller  827  remotely controls the TV  45 . 
     The RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the remote controller  827  receives the necessary information and the operation program from the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1  and stores them into a RF-ID storage unit  6001 . 
     A remote-controller signal generation unit  6002  in the remote controller  827  converts the necessary information and the operation program, which are transmitted from the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1  and stored in the RF-ID storage unit  6001 , to remote-controller signals. The remote-controller signals, such as infrared signals, are widely used in communication for present remote controllers. 
     To the TV  45 , a remote-controller signal transmission unit  6003  transmits the remote-controller signals including the operation program which are generated by the remote-controller signal generation unit  6002 . 
     A remote-controller signal receiving unit  6004  in the TV  45  receives the remote-controller signals from the remote controller  827 . A program execution unit  6005 , such as a Java™ virtual machine, retrieves the necessary information and the operation program in the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1 , from the remote-controller signals by using a decryption unit  5504 . Thereby, the program execution unit  6005  executes the operation program. 
       FIG. 24  is a flowchart of execution of the operation program for “downloading data of images from an image server with reference to identification information (UID in this example) of the image capturing device  1 , and displaying the images as a slide show”. 
     When the remote controller is moved into proximity of the image capturing device  1 , the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the remote controller provides power to the RF-ID unit  47  in the image capturing device  1  via RF-ID communication. Thereby, the UID  75  unique to the image capturing device  1 , the URL  48  of the image server (image server URL), and the operation program  116  are read from the second memory  52  (S 6001 ). The readout UID, image server URL, and operation program are transmitted to the remote controller  827  via the data transfer unit  108  and the second antenna  21  (S 6002 ). Here, as presented in  FIG. 25 , the operation program includes server connection instruction  6006 , download instruction  6008 , slide show display instruction  6010 , download-completion-time processing set instruction  6007 , and download-completion-time instruction  6009 . The remote controller  827  receives the UID, the image server URL, and the operation program from the image capturing device  1  via the RF-ID reader/writer  46  (S 6003 ). A determination is made as to whether or not receiving is completed (S 6004 ). If receiving is completed, then the UID, the image server URL, and the operation program are stored in the RF-ID storage unit  6001  (S 6005 ). Then, the UID, the image server URL, and the operation program are converted to remote-controller signals transmittable by infrared ray (S 6006 ). A determination is made as to whether or not the user performs a predetermined input operation by the remote controller  827  to instruct to transmit the remote-controller signals to the TV  45  (S 6007 ). If the instruction is received by from user, then the remote-controller signal transmission unit  6003  transmits the remote-controller signals including the image server URL and the operation program to the TV  45  (S 6008 ). In other words, serving as a common remote controller, the remote controller  827  serves also as a relay device that transfers the UID, the image server URL, and the operation program from the image capturing device  1  to the TV  45  by using the embedded RF-ID reader/writer  46 . 
     Next, the TV  45  receives the remote-controller signals from the remote controller  827  (S 6009 ). The decryption unit  5504  in the TV  45  retrieves (decrypts) the UID, the image server URL, and the operation program from the remote-controller signals (S 6010 ). Then, the program execution unit  6005  executes the operation program with reference to the image server URL (S 6011  to S 6015 ). More specifically, by the operation program, connection between the TV  45  and the image server  42  on a communication network is established with reference to the image server URL (S 6012 , and  6006  in  FIG. 25 ). Then, with reference to the UID unique to a corresponding image capturing unit, image data captured by a specific image capturing unit is selected from the image data  50  stored in the storage device of the image server  42 , and the selected image data is downloaded to the TV  45  (S 6013 , and  6008  in  FIG. 25 ). In other words, the UID is used to select image data associated with the image capturing device  1  indicated by the UID, from among pieces of image data stored in the image server  42 . A determination is made as to whether or not the image download is completed (S 6014 ). If the image download is completed, the downloaded images are sequentially displayed as a slide show (S 6015 , and  6007 ,  6009 , and  6010  in  FIG. 25 ). The download-completion-time processing set instruction  6007  in  FIG. 25  is instruction for setting processing to be performed when image downloading is completed. In the example of  FIG. 25 , the download-completion-time processing set instruction  6007  instructs the download-completion-time instruction  6009  as the processing to be performed when image downloading is completed. Moreover, the download-completion-time instruction  6009  calls the slide show display instruction  6010  for performing a slide show of the images. 
     It should be noted that, referring to  FIGS. 23 and 24 , it has been described that the operation program and the necessary information for the operation program are transferred from the image capturing device  1  to the TV  45  via the remote controller  827 . However, the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the remote controller  827  may be provided to the TV  45 . In other words, the RF-ID reader/writer  46  may be embedded in the TV  45 . Furthermore, the communication path connecting the reader (RF-ID reader/writer  46 ) to the apparatus may be a wireless communication path such as infrared communication path, or a wired signal cable. 
     It should also be noted that, in the above-described execution example, the UID is used to select image data associated with the image capturing device  1  from among pieces of image data stored in the image server  42 . However, it is also possible to use the UID to identify the image server storing the image data. Here, it is assumed that, in a communication system including a plurality of image servers, UID is associated with an image server storing image data captured by an image capturing device identified by the UID. Under the assumption, if the operation program is created so that a URL of the image server can be identified with reference to the UID, the TV  45  executing the operation program can identify, by using the UID, the image server associated with the UID from the plurality of image servers and thereby download the image data from the identified image server. 
     It should also be noted that the identification information for identifying the image capturing device  1  is not limited to UID. The identification information maybe any other information regarding the image capturing device  1 , such as a serial number, a product serial number, a Media Access Control (MAC) address, or information equivalent to the MAC address, for example, an Internet Protocol (IP) address. Moreover, if the image capturing device  1  serves as an access point on a wireless LAN, the identification information maybe a Service Set Identifier (SSID) or any information equivalent to SSID. It should also be noted that, in the above-described second memory  52 , the identification information (UID unit  75 ) for identifying the image capturing device  1  has been described to be stored separately from the operation program  116 . However, the identification information may be stored (described) in the operation program  116 . 
     It should also be noted that the remote-controller signals (in other words, the communication path connecting the reader to the apparatus) are described to employ infrared ray. However, the remote-controller signals are limited to the above, but may employ a wireless communication method such as Bluetooth. The use of wireless communication that is generally speedier than infrared communication can shorten a time required to transfer an operation program and/or the like. 
     It should be noted that the operation program is not limited to the program in the format presented in  FIG. 25 . The operation program may be described in any other programming language. For example, the operation program described in Java™ can be easily executed by various apparatuses (devices), because the program execution circumstances called JavaVM™ have broad versatility. The operation program may be described in a compact programming language in a script format represented by Javascript™ so as to be stored in a small storage capacity. The operation program in such a compact programming language can be stored in the RF-ID unit  47  in the second memory  52  even if the RF-ID unit  47  has a small storage capacity. Moreover, the operation program may be in an executable format applied with processing such as compiling, rather than a source code presented in  FIG. 25 . The program can reduce a processing load on apparatuses having program execution environments. 
     The following describes, in detail, the processing of changing execution of a program depending on information unique to a display device (such as the TV  45 ) having a RF-ID reader, with reference to  FIGS. 26 and 27 . 
     The TV  45  illustrated in  FIG. 26  further includes a language code holding unit  6013 . When the operation program received as remote-controller signals is executed to connect the TV  45  to the server  42 , the program execution unit  6005  reads a language code from the language code holding unit  6013  to connect the TV  45  to the server  42  compliant to the language code. Then, the operation program is executed to download a server program from the server  42 , and executes the downloaded server program. For example, if the language code indicates Japanese language, the TV  45  is connected to the server  42  having a program storage unit  6011  in which a server program compliant to Japanese language is stored, and then the server program is obtained from the program storage unit  6011  to be executed in the TV  45 . More specifically, the operation program stored in the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1  as illustrated in  FIG. 23  executes only connection to the server  42 , while other processing such as image display is executed by the server program downloaded from the server  42 . 
     The steps in the above processing are described with reference to  FIG. 27 . The processing by which the TV  45  receives the operation program and the necessary information for the operation program from the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1  is the same as the processing described previously with reference to  FIG. 24 . In  FIG. 27 , it is assumed that the server specific information which the TV  45  receives as remote-controller signals includes two different server addresses which are (a) a sever address of a server  42  compliant to English and (a) a server address of a different server  42  compliant to Japanese. It is also assumed that the operation program which the TV  45  receives as remote-controller signals includes instruction for connecting the TV  45  to a server indicated by the server connection instruction  6006  in  FIG. 25 . 
     In the execution environments, the TV  45  obtains a language code of the TV  45  (S 6016 ). The TV  45  determines whether or not the language code indicates Japanese language (S 6017 ). If the language code indicates Japanese language, then the TV  45  selects, from the server specific information, a sever address of a server having a program storage unit  6011  storing an operation program for processing compliant to Japanese (S 6018 ). On the other hand, if the language code does not indicate Japanese language, then the TV  45  selects, from the server specific information, a server address of a server having a program storage unit  6011  storing an operation program for processing compliant to English (S 6019 ). Next, the TV  45  is connected to the server  42  with reference to the selected server address (S 6021 ). The TV  45  downloads a server program from the server  42  (S 6022 , S 6023 ). The TV  45  executes the downloaded server program in the program execution environments (for example, a virtual machine) of the TV  45  (S 6024 ). 
     It should be noted that the use of the language code has been described in  FIGS. 26 and 27 , but the language code may be replaced by other information. Examples are a product serial number, a serial number of the display device (TV  45 ), and the like each of which indicates a country where the display device is on the market or equipped. 
       FIG. 28  illustrates a configuration of a home network  6500  in which the image capturing device  1  and the TV  45  are connected to each other via a wireless LAN or Power Line Communication (PLC). When the image capturing device  1  has a direct communication unit  6501  and the TV  45  has a direct communication unit  6502  so that the image capturing device  1  and the TV  45  can communicate directly with each other via the wireless LAN, the image capturing device  1  can transmit images to the TV  45  without using the server on the Internet. In other words, the image capturing device  1  serves also as a server. In this case, however, some communication mediums such as the wireless LAN used in the home network  6500  is easily intercepted by others. Therefore, safe data communication requires mutual authentication and exchange of encrypted data. For example, for existing wireless-LAN terminals (devices), access points serve as authentication terminals. If such an existing terminal is to authenticate its communication party, the terminal displays all connectable access points on its screen. The user selects one of the displayed access points from the screen. Then, the user presses a Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) key to perform encrypted communication. However, the above processing bothers general users. In addition, if a wireless LAN is embedded in home appliances such as a TV, there are so many terminals with which the existing terminal can communicate with authentication. If the user lives in an apartment house, the user can communicate even with terminals in neighbors. As a result, it is difficult for the user to select a terminal to be authenticated. For instance, if a neighbor has a TV  6503  that is the same model of the user&#39;s TV  45 , the user has difficulty in distinguishing the TV  45  in the user&#39;s house from the TV  6503  based on the information displayed on the screen of the existing device. 
     The first embodiment of the present invention can solve the above problem. In the first embodiment of the present invention, RF-ID is used to perform authentication. In more detail, an authentication program including a MAC address  58  is recorded, as an operation program, in the second memory  52  in the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1 . When the image capturing device  1  is moved into proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45 , the image capturing device  1  provides the authentication program to the TV  45 . The authentication program includes not only the MAC address but also a cryptography key for authentication (hereinafter, “authentication cryptography key”) and an authentication command When the TV  45  recognizes that the information provided from the RF-ID unit  47  includes the authentication command, the TV  45  performs authentication processing. The communication unit  171  in the RF-ID unit  47  cannot communicate with the TV  45 , until the image capturing device  1  is physically located in proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer  46 . Therefore, it is extremely difficult to intercept the communication between the image capturing device  1  and the TV  45  which is performed in a house. In addition, since the image capturing device  1  is moved into proximity of the TV  45  to exchange data, it is possible to prevent that the image capturing device  1  authenticates a wrong device (apparatus), such as the TV  6503  in a neighbor or a DVD recorder  6504  in the user&#39;s house. 
     The following is an example of an authentication method without using RF-ID with reference to  FIG. 29 . A user inputs, to the TV  45 , (a) MAC addresses of terminals to be authenticated, such as the camera (the image capturing device  1 ) and the DVD recorder  6504 , which the user intends to authenticate for communication, and (b) authentication cryptography keys  6511  for the terminals. The TV  45  receiving the inputs transmits an appropriate message called a challenge  6513 , to a target terminal having the MAC address. When the image capturing device  1  receives the challenge  6513 , the image capturing device  1  encrypts the challenge  6513  using the authentication cryptography key  6511 , and returns the encrypted challenge  6513  to the TV  45  that is a terminal from which the challenge  6513  has been provided. In receiving the encrypted challenge  6513 , the TV  45  decrypts the encrypted challenge  6513  using the authentication cryptography key  6511 . Thereby, the TV  45  can authenticate the authentication cryptography key  6511  to prevent user&#39;s error and intervention of other malicious users. Next, the TV  45  encrypts a cryptography key  6512 a for data (hereinafter, a “data cryptography key  6512 a”) using the authentication cryptography key  6511 . Then, the TV  45  transmits the encrypted data cryptography key  6512 a to the image capturing device  1 . Thereby, it is possible to perform the encrypted data communication between the TV  45  and the image capturing device  1 . The TV  45  performs the above-described processing also with the DVD recorder  6504  and other apparatuses (terminals)  6505  and  6506  in order to share the data cryptography key  6512 a among them. Thereby, the TV  45  can perform encrypted communication with all terminals (devices, apparatuses, or the like) connected in the home network. 
     On the other hand,  FIG. 30  illustrates an authentication method using RF-ID. In the authentication method using RF-ID, the image capturing device  1  (camera) generates an authentication program  6521 a. The camera provides the generated authentication program  6521 a from the RF-ID unit  47  in the camera to a RF-ID unit  46  in the TV  45 . The authentication program  6521 a includes an authentication command, a MAC address of the camera, and an authentication cryptography key  6511  for the camera. When the TV  45  receives the authentication program  6521 a with the authentication command, the TV  45  retrieves the MAC address and the authentication cryptography key  6511  from the RF-ID unit  46 . The TV  45  encrypts a data cryptography key  6512 a using the retrieved authentication cryptography key  6511  and transmits the encrypted data cryptography key  6512 a to the retrieved MAC address. The transmission is performed by a wireless-LAN device (terminal). In the authentication method using RF-ID, the authentication is performed automatically without any user&#39;s input. Therefore, there is no problem caused by user&#39;s input errors. In addition, since the image capturing device  1  (camera) needs to moved into proximity of the TV  45 , it is possible to prevent intervention of other malicious users. This authentication method using RF-ID can eliminate pre-processing such as the above-described challenge. Moreover, the action of physically moving the image capturing device  1  (camera) into proximity of the TV  45  enables the user to easily recognize which terminals the camera has authenticated. Furthermore, if the authentication cryptography key  6511  is not included in the authentication program, the authentication may be performed by a technique of general public key authentication. In addition, the communication device (medium) is not limited to a wireless LAN, but may be any medium, such as PLC or Ethernet™ included in the home network. Moreover, the MAC address may be any identification information for uniquely identifying a communication terminal in the home network. 
       FIG. 31  illustrates an authentication method using RF-ID when it is difficult to move a terminal into proximity of another terminal. For example, when the terminals are a refrigerator and a TV which are difficult to move, it is almost impossible to directly exchange an authentication program between the terminals using RF-ID. In such a situation, the first embodiment of the present invention can be implemented by relaying the authentication program between the terminals using a device (such as a remote controller  6531 ) that is an accessory of the terminal. In more detail, a RF-ID reader/writer embedded in the remote controller  6531  reads the authentication program from a RF-ID unit in the refrigerator. Thereby, the authentication program is stored in a memory in the remote controller  6531 . A user moves the remote controller  6531  that is mobile. When the remote controller  6531  is moved into proximity of the TV  45 , the remote controller  6531  transfers the authentication program from the memory of the remote controller  6531 , to the RF-ID unit of the TV  45 . It should be noted that the transfer from the remote controller  6531  to the TV  45  is not limited to use RF-ID technology. Other communication means, such as infrared ray or ZigBee, that is previously set in the remote controller  6531  can be used. Any medium for which security in communication has already been established may be used. 
       FIG. 32  is a flowchart of authentication performed by the camera (image capturing device  1 ) side. In an authentication mode, the camera generates an authentication cryptography key and sets a timer (S 6541 ). The camera writes a MAC address of the camera, the generated authentication cryptography key, and an authentication command, into a memory in the RF-ID unit (S 6542 ). When the user moves the camera to bring the RF-ID unit of the camera into proximity of the RF-ID unit of the TV, the camera transfers the information stored in the memory of the RF-ID unit of the camera to the RF-ID unit of the TV (S 6543 ). The camera determines whether or not a response of the transfer is received from the TV within a predetermined time period counted by the timer (S 6544 ). If the response is received within the predetermined time period, then the camera decrypts, by using the authentication cryptography key, encrypted data cryptography key included in the response (S 6545 ). The camera starts communicating with the other device (apparatus) using the data cryptography key (S 6546 ). The camera determines whether or not data communication with the TV is successful (S 6547 ). If the data communication is successful, then the authentication is completed. On the other hand, if data cannot be correctly decrypted (in other words, data communication is not successful), then a notification of authentication error is displayed and the authentication is terminated (S 6548 ). Referring back to Step S 6544 , if there is no response within the predetermined time period, then the camera cancels the authentication mode (S 6549 ) and then displays a notification of time out error (S 6550 ). 
       FIG. 33  is a flowchart of authentication performed by the TV  45  side. The TV  45  determines whether or not received information, which is provided from the RF-ID unit of the camera to the RF-ID unit of the TV  45 , includes an authentication command (S 6560 ). If the received information does not include the authentication command, then the TV  45  performs other processing according to the received information (S 6561 ). On the other hand, if the received information includes the authentication command, the TV  45  determines that the information received from the RF-ID unit of the camera is an authentication program, and therefore encrypts a data cryptography key in the TV  45  using an authentication cryptography key in the authentication program (S 6562 ). Then, the TV  45  transmits the encrypted data cryptography key to the terminal (the camera) having the MAC address designated in the authentication program (S 6563 ). 
     Next, the following situation is described in detail with reference to figures. Here, the image capturing device  1  described with reference to  FIG. 3  generates or updates a program executable by the TV  45 . Then, the image capturing device  1  transmits the program to the TV  45  via the data transmission unit  173 . Thereby, the TV  45  executes the program. 
       FIG. 34  is a block diagram of the first processing unit  35  and the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1  according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The first processing unit  35  includes a second memory reading unit  7003 , a URL generation unit  7004 , a program generation unit  7005 , a program part storage unit  7006 , and a program writing unit  7007 . 
     The second memory reading unit  7003  reads information from the second memory  52  via the recording/reproducing unit  51 . The URL generation unit  7004  reads the UID  75 , the server specific information  48 , the captured image state information  55 , and the image display method instruction information  77  from the second memory  52  via the second memory reading unit  7003 . From the above pieces of information, the URL generation unit  7004  generates a URL that is an address of the server  42  to which images have been uploaded from the image capturing device  1 . 
     The UID  75  is identification information for identifying the image capturing device  1 . The UID  75  is unique to each image capturing device  1 . The URL generated by the URL generation unit  7004  includes UID. For instance, the image server  42 , to which images are uploaded, has an image file in a directory unique to each UID. Thereby, a URL address can be generated for each image capturing device  1 . 
     The server specific information  48  is a server name for identifying the server to which the images are uploaded. Via a Domain Name Server (DNS), an IP address of the server  42  is determined to connect the image capturing device  1  to the server  42 . Therefore, the server specific information  48  is included in the generated URL. 
     The image display method instruction information  77  is information for enabling the user to optionally select the list display  78 , the slide show display  79 , or the like. The URL generation unit  7004  generates the URL based on the image display method instruction information  77 . In other words, since the generated URL includes information indicating the list display  78  or the slide show display  79 , the image server (the server  42 ) can determine based on the URL whether the images are to be displayed as the list display or the slide show display. 
     As described above, based on the UID  75 , the server specific information  48 , the captured image state information  55 , the image display method instruction information  77 , and the like which are stored in the second memory  52 , the URL generation unit  7004  generates a URL of the image server in which images to be watched are stored. Then, the URL generation unit  7004  provides the generated URL to the program generation unit  7005 . 
     The program generation unit  7005  generates a program executable by the TV  45 , based on (a) the URI generated by the URL generation unit  7004 , and (b) forced display instruction  7000 , forced print instruction  136 , and format identification information  7001  stored in the second memory  52 . It should be noted that the program generation unit  7005  can generate a new operation program based on the above-described information, which is a method of generating a new operation program. The program generation unit  7005  can also generate such a new operation program by updating an operation program that has been already generated. 
     The program generated by the program generation unit  7005  is executable by the TV  45 . The program should be compiled into a machine language used in a system controller (not shown) of the TV  45 , so that the system controller can execute the program. In this case, the program generation unit  7005  has a compiler to convert the generated program to a program in an executable format. 
     However, the above-described compiler is not necessary if the program in a text format (script) (for example, a general Java™ script) is executed by a browser in the TV  45 . 
     The URL provided to the program generation unit  7005  is used to connect the TV  45  to the image server (server  42 ) in which images are stored. By using the URL, the program generation unit  7005  generates or updates a connection program (hereinafter, referred to also as a “server connection program” or “connection program”) for connecting the TV  45  to the image server. 
     The forced display instruction  7000  is optional and used in the following situation. For example, there is the situation where, while the user watches on the TV  45  a TV program provided by general broadcast waves, the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  becomes communicable with the image capturing device  1  via the second antenna  21 . In the situation, the forced display instruction  7000  is used to automatically set the TV  45  into a browser watching mode so that image data provided from the image server is displayed on the TV  45 . If this option is selected, the program generation unit  7005  generates a program for forcing the TV  45  to display image data. 
     The forced print instruction  136  is optional and used in the following situation. For example, there is the situation where, while the user watches on the TV  45  a TV program provided by general broadcast waves, the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  becomes communicable with the image capturing device  1  via the second antenna  21 . In the situation, the forced print instruction  136  is used to automatically print image data stored in the image server by a printer (not shown) connected to the TV  45 . If this option is selected, the program generation unit  7005  generates a program for forcing the TV  45  to print image data by the printer. 
     The format identification information  7001  is information of a format by which image data is to be displayed. When an option of language code optimization selection in the format identification information  7001  is selected, the program generation unit  7005  generates a program for selecting a URL to be connected, based on the language code set in the TV  45 . The following is an example in the situation where the option of language code optimization selection in the format identification information  7001  is selected. If the language code of the TV  45  indicates Japanese language, the program generation unit  7005  selects a Japanese site as the URL to be connected. On the other hand, if the language code of the TV  45  does not indicate Japanese language, the program generation unit  7005  selects an English site as the URL to be connected. Or, the URL generation unit  7004  may generate two URLs for the Japanese site and the English site, and provide the two URLs to the program generation unit  7005 . 
     The program part storage unit  7006  holds program command information used by the program generation unit  7005  to generate a program. A program part stored in the program part storage unit  7006  may be a general library or an Application Programming Interface (API). In order to generate a connection command for connecting the TV  45  to the server, the program generation unit  7005  combines a server connection command “Connect” in the program part storage unit  7006  with the URL generated by the URL generation unit  7004 . Thereby, the program generation unit  7005  generates or updates a connection program for connecting the TV  45  to the server indicated by the URL. 
     The program writing unit  7007  is an interface used to write the program generated by the program generation unit  7005  to the second memory  52 . 
     The program provided from the program writing unit  7007  is stored into a program storage unit  7002  in the second memory  52  via the recording/reproducing unit  51 . 
     When the image capturing device  1  is moved to bring the RF-ID unit of the image capturing device  1  into proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer  46  connected to the TV  45 , the reproducing unit reads out the program from the program storage unit  7002  in the second memory  52 . Then, transmission signals indicating the program are transmitted to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  via the data transfer unit  108  and the second antenna  21 . The TV  45  receives the transmission signals via the RF-ID reader/writer  46 . The TV  45  executes the receives program. 
     The TV  45  has the product serial number  7008 , the language code  7009 , and a program execution virtual machine  7010 . 
     The product serial number  7008  is a product serial number of the TV  45 . From the product serial number  7008 , it is possible to learn a manufacture date/time, a manufacture location, a manufacturing line, and a manufacturer of the TV  45 . 
     The language code  7009  is predetermined in the TV  45  to be used in displaying a menu, for example. The language code  7009  is not limited to be predetermined, but can be switched to another by the user. 
     The program execution virtual machine  7010  is a virtual machine that executes a received program. The program execution virtual machine  7010  may be implemented as hardware or software. For example, the program execution virtual machine  7010  may be a Java™ virtual machine. The Java™ virtual machine is a stack or interpreter virtual machine that executes defined instruction sets. If the image capturing device  1  has the virtual machine, the program generated by the program generation unit  7005  in the image capturing device  1  is compliant to any execution platforms. As a result, the program generation unit  7005  can generate a program executable in any platforms. 
       FIG. 35  is a flowchart of processing performed by the program generation unit  7005  of the image capturing device  1 . 
     First, the program generation unit  7005  initializes information used to generate a program (S 7000 ). 
     Next, based on the server specific information  48  stored in the second memory  52 , the program generation unit  7005  generates a connection command for connecting the TV  45  to the server  42 , by using the URL generated by the URL generation unit  7004 . In order to generate the connection command, the program generation unit  7005  selects an instruction set (for example, “Connect” in  FIG. 25 ) for a server connection command from the program part storage unit  7006 , and combines the selected instruction set with the URL. Thereby, a server connection program (for example, “Connect (URL)”) is generated. 
     Then, the program generation unit  7005  examines the forced display instruction  7000  in the second memory  52  so as to determine whether or not the forced display instruction  7000  is selected (S 7002 ). If the forced display instruction  7000  is selected, then the program generation unit  7005  calls an instruction set for a forced display program from the program part storage unit  7006 , and thereby generates a forced display command (S 7003 ). The generated forced display command is added to the program (S 7004 ). 
     On the other hand, if the forced display instruction  7000  is not selected, then the program generation unit  7005  does not generate the forced display command, but proceeds to S 7005 . 
     Next, the program generation unit  7005  makes a determination as to whether the forced print instruction in the second memory  52  is selected (S 7005 ). If the forced print instruction is selected, then the program generation unit  7005  generates a forced print command for forcing the TV  45  to print, by a printer, an image file stored in the server  42  (S 7006 ). The generated print command is added to the program (S 7007 ). 
     Then, the program generation unit  7005  examines the image display method instruction information  77  in the second memory  52  so as to determine whether or not the list display  78  is selected (S 7008 ). If the list display  78  is selected, then the program generation unit  7005  generates a list display command for causing the TV  45  to display a list of the image file stored in the server  42  (S 7009 ). The generated list display command is added to the program (S 7010 ). 
     After that, the program generation unit  7005  examines the image display method instruction information  77  in the second memory  52  so as to determine whether or not the slide show  79  is selected (S 7011 ). If the slide show  79  is selected, then the program generation unit  7005  generates a slide show command for causing the TV  45  to display a slide show of the image file stored in the server  42  (S 7012 ). The generated slide show command is added to the program (S 7013 ). 
     As described above, based on the information set in the second memory  52 , the program generation unit  7005  in the image capturing device  1  generates a program used to display images on the TV  45 , by using an instruction command set that is stored in the program part storage unit  7006  to generate the program. 
     It should be noted that, in the first embodiment, there are commands for the forced display instruction, the forced print instruction, the list display, and the slide show display. However, the commands (programs) are not limited to the above. For example, if a command for the forced display instruction is to be generated as a program, the program generation unit  7005  can also generate a determination command for determining whether or not the apparatus (device) executing the program has a display device or display function, and adds the generated determination command to the program. Thereby, the command for the forced display instruction is executed only if the apparatus executing the program has a display device or display function. As a result, the determination command can prevent confusion in the apparatus executing the program. The same goes for a command for the forced print instruction. It is preferable that the program generation unit  7005  also generates a determination command for determining whether or not the apparatus executing the program has or is connected to a printing function, and adds the generated determination command to the program. Thereby, the command for the forced print instruction is executed only if the apparatus executing the program has or is connected to a printing function. 
     The following describes execution of the program generated or updated by the program generation unit  7005  in the image capturing device  1 . 
       FIG. 36  is a flowchart of execution of the program generated or updated by the program generation unit  7005 . The program is transmitted from the image capturing device  1  to a device (apparatus) different from the image capturing device  1  via the second antenna  21  of the image capturing device  1 . Then, the program is executed by the different device. In the first embodiment, the different device is the TV  45 . The TV  45  receives the program via the RF-ID reader/writer  46  and executes the received program by a controller or virtual machine (not shown) in the TV  45 . 
     First, the program is executed to read the language code set in the TV  45 , as unique information of the TV  45  (S 7020 ). The language code is predetermined by the user to be used in displaying a menu and the like on the TV  45 . 
     Next, the program is executed to determine a language indicated in the language code. First, a determination is made as to whether or not the language code indicates Japanese language (S 7021 ). If the determination is made that the language code indicates Japanese language, then a connection command for a Japanese site is selected from the connection commands in the program (S 7022 ). On the other hand, if the determination is made that the language code does not indicate Japanese language, then a connection command for an English site is selected from the connection commands in the program (S 7023 ). It should be noted that it has been described in the first embodiment that a determination is made as to whether or not the language code indicates Japanese language, and thereby a connection command is selected from the connection command for connecting to a Japanese site and the connection command for connecting to an English command. However, it is also possible that the program includes a plurality of connection programs compliant to various language codes. Thereby, the program can be compliant to two or more language codes. As a result, usability is improved. Next, according to the selected connection command, the program is executed to connect the TV  45  to the URL indicted in the connection command (S 7024 ). 
     Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the connection to the URL indicted in the connection command is successful (S 7025 ). If the connection is failed, then the display unit of the TV  45  displays warning indicating the connection failure (S 7027 ). On the other hand, if the connection is successful, then a command for displaying a slide show of an image file stored in the server is executed to display the slide show (S 7026 ). 
     It should be noted that the above is the situation where the operation program is for displaying images as a slide show. However, the operation program is not limited to the above. The program may be used for performing list display, forced display, or forced printing. If the operation program is for forced display, a step (command) of automatically changing setting of the TV  45  to setting of displaying an image file stored in the server is added to the program. Thereby, the user does not need to change the setting of the TV  45  by manual in order to display images provided from the image server. In the case of the forced printing, a command for automatically changing setting of the TV  45  to a printable mode is added to the program. Moreover, in the case of each of the forced printing and forced display, a determination command for determining whether or not the TV  45  has a printing function or a displaying function is added to the program. Thereby, the forced print command is not executed in an apparatus (device) without a printing function. Furthermore, the operation program in the first embodiment of the present invention may be a connection program for leading other programs. For example, the operation program may be a loader program, such as a boot-loader for loading other programs to be executed. 
     As described above, the first embodiment of the present invention is characterized in that the program generation unit  7005  is included in the first processing unit  35  of the image capturing device  1  that is a device having RF-ID communication means (such as the data transfer unit  108  and the second antenna  21 ). It is also characterized in that the program generated or updated by the program generation unit  7005  is executed by a different device (apparatus) except the image capturing device  1  according to the first embodiment of the present invention that is a communication device having RF-ID. 
     Conventionally, a device having RF-ID needs to transfer ID information (tag information), which the device has, from a RF-ID communication unit to another device (for example, the TV  45  according to the first embodiment of the present invention). The device (apparatus) receiving the ID information should previously hold operation programs each unique to a corresponding device having RF-ID. Therefore, if new products having RF-ID technology appear, the receiving device needs to install an operation program corresponding to the new products and execute the program. Otherwise, the receiving device is excluded as not being compliant to the new products. The installation of operation programs requires technical knowledge. Not everyone can perform the installation. Therefore, if various new devices having RF-ID are produced, other devices such as the TV  45  of the first embodiment of the present invention become obsolete. As a result, property values of user&#39;s devices are damaged. 
     According to the disclosure of the first embodiment of the present invention, the device having RF-ID technology has the program generation unit  7005  and sends not ID information (tag information) but a program to another device (apparatus) such as the TV  45 . The apparatus such as the TV  45  receives and executes the program. Therefore, the receiving apparatus does not need to previously have operation programs for various devices having RF-ID. Even if a new device having RF-ID technology appears, the receiving apparatus does not need to install a new program for the device. Therefore, usability is significantly improved. 
     Therefore, the terminal such as a TV does not need to previously have application programs for respective items, kinds, or application systems of various objects having RF-ID. Thereby, the terminal such as a TV does not need to previously have a storage device, either, for holding various application programs. In addition, maintenance such as version-up of the programs in the terminal is not necessary. 
     The program generated by the program generation unit  7005  is useful if it is executable in any execution platforms such as a Java™ language. Therefore, if the device (apparatus) such as the TV  45  executing programs has a Java™ virtual machine, programs generated by any devices (apparatuses) can be executed. 
     It should be noted that the program generation unit  7005  according to the first embodiment of the present invention may has a function of updating the program previously stored in the program storage unit  7003  of the second memory  52 . The situation of updating a program produces the same advantages as that in the situation of generating a program. The generating or updating performed by the program generation unit  7005  may be generating or updating data used in executing a program by the TV  45 . In general, the program includes additional initialization setting data. The additional data is used to switch an execution mode or to set a flag. Therefore, generating or updating of the additional data is equivalent to generating or updating of the program, without deviating from the inventive concepts of the present invention. This is because, for execution of a program, it depends on design whether a parameter for mode switching or the like is to be hold and read as data, or is to be included in the program to be executed. Therefore, when the program generation unit  7005  according to the first embodiment of the present invention generates or updates a program, the program generation unit  7005  can also generate data such a parameter sequence used by the program. The parameter is generated based on the forced display instruction  7000 , the forced print instruction  136 , the image display method instruction information  77 , the format identification information  7001 , or the like stored in the second memory  52 . 
     The following describes characteristic structures and processing of the second memory  52  and the first processing unit  35  in the image capturing device  1  that is a communication device having RF-ID according to the first embodiment of the present invention. In the first embodiment of the present invention, the image capturing device  1  that is a communication device having RF-ID has a use status detection unit in the first processing unit  35 . The use status detection unit detects a trouble related to operation, a power consumption status, or the like. The image capturing device  1  generates a program for displaying the result of the detection (use status) on the TV  45  that is a device (apparatus) different from the image capturing device  1 . 
       FIG. 37  is a block diagram of characteristic structures of the second memory  52  and the first processing unit  35  in the image capturing device  1  according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 
     The second memory  52  includes the UID  75 , the server specific information  48 , the camera ID  135 , and the program storage unit  7002 . 
     The UID  75  is a serial number unique to the image capturing device  1 , and used to identify the single image capturing device  1 . 
     The server specific information  48  is information for identifying the server  42  to which image data captured by the image capturing device  1  is transmitted by the communication unit  37 . The server specific information  48  includes a sever address, a storing directory, a login account, a login passwords, and the like. 
     The camera ID  135  includes a product serial number, a manufacturing year/month/date, a manufacturer, a manufacturing line, a manufactured location, and the like of the image capturing device  1 . The camera ID  135  also includes camera model information for identifying a model of the image capturing device  1 . 
     The first processing unit  35  includes the second memory reading unit  7003 , a use status detection unit  7020 , the program generation unit  7005 , the program part storage unit  7006 , and the program writing unit  7007 . 
     The second memory reading unit  7003  reads information from the second memory  52  via the recording/reproducing unit  51 . In the first embodiment of the present invention, the second memory reading unit  7002  reads the UID  75 , the server specific information  48 , and the camera ID  135  from the second memory  52 , and provides the pieces of information to the program generation unit  7005 . Reading of the pieces of information from the second memory  52  is performed when a readout signal is provided from a use status detection unit  7020  that is described later. 
     The use status detection unit  7020  detects a use status of each unit included in the image capturing device  1 . The use status detection unit  7020  includes sensors each detecting a trouble in operation of a corresponding unit included in the image capturing device  1 . Results of the detection of the sensors in respective units are provided to the use status detection unit  7020 . The sensors for the respective units provide the use status detection unit  7020  with trouble information, battery duration, a power consumption amount, and the like. For example, the image capturing unit  30  provides the use status detection unit  7020  with information indicating whether or not an image capturing operation of the image capturing unit  30  has any trouble (whether or not the image capturing unit  30  functions correctly, and whether or not the image capturing unit  30  responds to a call from the use status detection unit  7020 ). The video processing unit  31  provides the use status detection unit  7020  with information indicating whether or not data processing for image data captured by the image capturing unit  30  has any trouble (whether or not the video processing unit  31  functions correctly, and whether or not the video processing unit  31  responds to a call from the use status detection unit  7020 ). The first power supply unit  101  provides the use status detection unit  7020  with a voltage level of the battery and a total power consumption amount. The communication unit  37  provides the use status detection unit  7020  with information indicating whether or not the communication unit  37  is successfully connected to the server or the Internet (whether or not the communication unit  37  functions correctly, and whether or not the communication unit  37  responds to a call from the use status detection unit  7020 ). The display unit  6 a provides the use status detection unit  7020  with information indicating whether or not display processing has any trouble, whether or not the display unit  6 a correctly responds to a call from the use status detection unit  7020 , and the display unit  6 a functions correctly. Based on the above pieces of status information provided regarding the respective units, the internal trouble detection unit  7021  in the use status detection unit  7020  determines whether or not each of the units has any trouble in its functional operation. If there is a trouble, then the use status detection unit  7020  provides the program generation unit  7005  with information for specifying the trouble. The use status detection unit  7020  has a power consumption detection unit  7022 . The power consumption detection unit  7022  generates power consumption information based on the total power consumption information provided form the power supply unit, and then provides the power consumption information to the program generation unit  7005 . 
     The program generation unit  7005  generates a program for displaying, on the TV  45 , the information for specifying a trouble or the power consumption information which is provided from the use state detection unit  7020 . For generation of a program, instruction sets to be included in the program are previously stored in the program part storage unit  7006 . Therefore, the program generation unit  7005  generates (a) a display command (“display” in  FIG. 37 ) for displaying a trouble or a power consumption amount, and (b) a program for displaying information for specifying a location of the trouble and information for specifying the trouble in detail. It should be noted that the power consumption amount may be converted to a carbon dioxide emission amount, and therefore a program may be generated to display the carbon dioxide emission amount. 
     The program generated by the program generation unit  7005  is stored in the program storage unit  7002  in the second memory  52  via the program writing unit  7007 . 
     The program stored in the program storage unit  7002  in the second memory  52  is transmitted to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  via the data transfer unit  108  and then the second antenna  21 . 
     The TV  45  executes the received program by the program execution virtual machine  7010 . 
     With the above-described structure, the program generation unit  7005  in the first processing unit  35  generates a program for displaying, on the TV  45 , trouble information or use status information detected by the use status detection unit  7020  regarding use of the image capturing device  1 . The program is transmitted to the TV  45  that displays the trouble information or the use status information of the image capturing device  1 . Thereby, the TV  45  can present the trouble information or the use status information to the user, without installing a plurality of programs compliant to various devices including the image capturing device  1 . 
     In conventional systems, each of devices such as an image capturing device, a camcorder, an electric toothbrush, and a weight scale is provided with a simple display function such as a liquid crystal device, so as to display the trouble information or the use status information on the corresponding display function. Therefore, the display function has a low display capability for merely displaying the trouble information as a symbol sequence or an error code. When the trouble information is presented, the user needs to read instruction manual to check what kind of trouble it is. Some users have lost instruction manual and therefore obtain more information from a website on the Internet. 
     In the system according to the first embodiment of the present invention, however, a program for displaying trouble information can be executed by the TV  45  not by the image capturing device  1 . The TV  45 , which displays the trouble information detected by each device such as the image capturing device  1 , has a display capability higher than that of the conventional systems. Therefore, the system according to the first embodiment of the present invention can solve the above conventional problem. 
     The following describes, in detail with reference to figures, the situation where a program generated by the image capturing device  1  described with reference to  FIG. 3  is executed by a plurality of apparatuses (devices) including the TV  45 . 
       FIG. 38  illustrates a system in which a program generated by the image capturing device  1  is executed by a plurality of apparatuses. The system includes the image capturing device  1 , the TV  45 , a remote controller (with display function)  6520 , and a remote controller (without display function)  6530 . 
     The TV  45  includes the RF-ID reader/writer  46  and a wireless communication device  6512 . The wireless communication device  6512  is, for example, a general infrared communication device currently used as many remote controllers of home appliances, or a short-range wireless communication device used for home appliances using radio waves, such as Bluetooth and ZigBee. 
     The remote controller (with display function)  6520  includes a transmission unit  6521 , a display unit  6523 , an input unit  6524 , a RF-ID reader  6522 , a memory  6526 , and a program execution virtual machine  6525 . The transmission unit  6521  transmits signals to the wireless communication device  6512  of the TV  45 . The display unit  6523  displays video. The input unit  6524  receives key inputs from a user. The RF-ID reader  6522  communicates with the RF-ID unit  47 . The memory  6526  stores a program received by the RF-ID reader  6522 . The program execution virtual machine  6525  is a virtual machine that executes the program received by the RF-ID reader  6522 . For instance, recent mobile phones are example of the remote controller (with display function)  6520 , having an infrared communication function, Bluetooth, a RF-ID reader, a liquid crystal display, a key input unit, a Java™ virtual machine, and the like. The display unit  6523  and the input unit  6524  may be a liquid crystal display and a plurality of character input buttons, or may be integrated into a liquid-crystal touch panel, for example. 
     The remote controller (without display function)  6530  includes a transmission unit  6531 , an input unit  6533 , a RF-ID reader  6532 , and a memory  6535 . The transmission unit  6531  transmits signals to the wireless communication device  6512  of the TV  45 . The input unit  6533  such as buttons receives key inputs from a user. The RF-ID reader  6532  communicates with the RF-ID unit  47 . The memory  6535  temporarily stores data received by the RF-ID reader  6532 . 
     The remote controller (without display function)  6530  is, for example, a general remote controller having a RF-ID reader. Remote controllers are common accessory devices of TVs. 
     In the first embodiment of the present invention, there are the following four possible situations from which the user selects a preferred one. In the first situation, the program generated by the image capturing device  1  is transmitted directly to the TV  45  via the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45 , and executed by the TV  45 . In the second situation, the program generated by the image capturing device  1  is transmitted indirectly to the TV  45  via the remote controller (without display function)  6530 , and executed by the TV  45 . In the third situation, the program generated by the image capturing device  1  is transmitted indirectly to the TV  45  via the remote controller (with display function)  6520 , and executed by the TV  45 . In the fourth situation, the program generated by the image capturing device  1  is transmitted to the remote controller (with display function)  6520 , and executed by the remote controller (with display function)  6520 . 
     The first situation has been already described above in the first embodiment. Therefore, the first situation is not described again below. 
     The following describes the above second to fourth situations. 
     In the second situation, a program generated by the image capturing device  1  is executed by the TV  45 , via the remote controller (without display function)  6530 , such as general TV remote controllers, that does not have a graphical display device such as a liquid crystal panel. 
     When the user moves the image capturing device  1  to bring the RF-ID unit  47  to the RF-ID reader  6532 , the RF-ID reader  6532  reads the program generated by the image capturing device  1  to store the program in the memory  6535 . 
     Then, when the user presses the input unit  6533 , the program held in the memory  6535  is transmitted from the transmission unit  6531  to the wireless communication device  6512  of the TV  45 . The program execution virtual machine  7010  in the TV  45  executes the program. If the wireless communication device  6512  is a directional infrared communication device, the user presses the input unit  6533 , facing the remote controller (without display function)  6530  to the TV  45 . If the wireless communication device  6512  is a non-directional short-range wireless communication device, such as devices using Bluetooth or ZigBee, the program is transmitted to the TV  45  that is previously paired with the remote controller (without display function)  6530 . In the case of the short-range wireless communication device, it is also possible that the program is automatically transmitted to the paired TV  45  when the RF-ID reader  6532  reads the program from the RF-ID unit  47 , without user&#39;s pressing of the input unit  6533 . 
     The remote controller (without display function)  6530  may have a display unit, such as a LED  6534 , for notifying the user of that data read by the RF-ID reader  6532  is stored in the memory  6535 . The LED  6534  is lit up to encourage the user to press the input unit  6533 , when the program is read by the RF-ID reader  6532  and stored in the memory  6535 . The LED  6534  is lit out when the transmission of the program to the TV  45  is completed. Thereby, it is possible to clearly notify the user of that the remote controller (without display function) holds the program. The LED  6534  may be an independent LED or integrated into the input unit  6533 . 
     In the second situation, even if the user is far from the TV  45 , the program can be executed by the TV  45  by using the remote controller (without display function)  6530  in the user&#39;s hand. 
     In the third and fourth situations, if the remote controller (with display function)  6520  has a program execution virtual machine as high-function mobile phones called smart phones do, the user can select whether the program generated by the image capturing device  1  is executed on the remote controller (with display function)  6520  or the program is transmitted to the TV  45  to be executed on the TV  45 . 
     When the user moves the image capturing device  1  to bring the RF-ID unit  47  to the RF-ID reader  6522 , the RF-ID reader  6522  reads the program generated by the image capturing device  1  to store the program in the memory  6535 . 
     The following describes the processing performed by the remote controller (with display function)  6520  in more detail with reference to a flowchart of  FIG. 39 . 
     First, a program read by the RF-ID reader  6522  is transmitted to the program execution virtual machine  6525  and executed by the program execution virtual machine  6525  (S 6601 ). 
     Next, a determination is made as to whether or not the remote controller  6520  has a display function (S 6602 ). If the remote controller  6520  does not have any display function (N at S 6602 ), then the program is transmitted to the TV  45  via the transmission unit  6521  and then the processing is completed. In this situation, the program is executed by the TV  45 . 
     If the remote controller  6520  has a display function (Y at S 6602 ), then a further determination is made as to whether or not the remote controller  6520  is paired with the TV  45  that is a transmission destination (S 6603 ). If the remote controller  6520  is not paired with the TV  45  (N at S 6603 ), then a rest processing of the program is executed by the display unit  6523  of the remote controller  6520 . On the other hand, if the remote controller  6520  is paired with the TV  45  (Y at S 6603 ), then the display unit  6523  displays a dialog message “Display on TV or on Remote Controller?” to encourage the user to select one of the options (S 6604 ). 
     Then, the remote controller  6520  receives user&#39;s entry by the input unit  6524  (S 6605 ). A determination is made as to whether or the user selects to display data on the TV  45  (S 6606 ). If the user selects the TV  45  to display data (Y at S 6606 ), then the program is transmitted to the TV  45  via the transmission unit  6521  and thereby the processing is completed. In this situation, the program is executed by the TV  45 . On the other hand, if the user selects the remote controller to display data (N at S 6606 ), then a rest processing of the program is executed by the remote controller  6520  using the display unit  6523  (S 6607 ). 
     It should be noted that the “rest processing of the program” refers to displaying of a status of a battery, a trouble status, or an instruction manual regarding the image capturing device  1 , but, of course, not limited to those described in the first embodiment. 
     With the above structure, a program generated by the image capturing device  1  is transmitted to the remote controller with display function, then a capability of the remote controller with display function is examined, and a determination is made by the remote controller as to which apparatus (device) is to execute rest processing of the program. Thereby, the remote controller does not need to previously install various programs compliant to a plurality of apparatuses. The user can execute the program in his/her preferred manner. 
     It should be noted that it has been described in the first embodiment that the determination is made based on whether or not the remote controller has a display function and based on a pairing status of the remote controller. However, it is not limited to the above. A program may execute any determination based on a capability of the apparatus, such as a communication capability, an audio-video reproduction capability, a capability of an input unit, a capability of an output device, and the like. 
     As described above, the storage region of the RF-ID unit holds not only information but also a program describing operations of an apparatus (device). This considerably simplify changing or updating of a program, which has been necessary for conventional techniques to change operations of apparatuses. In addition, it is possible to deal with addition of various new functions and an increase of cooperative apparatuses. Moreover, proximity communication using RF-ID technology is a simple operation achieved by simply bringing a device into proximity of an apparatus, which the user can easily understand. Therefore, conventional bothersome device operations by using buttons and a menu are simplified. As a result, the complicated device operations are changed to be convenient. 
     Second Embodiment 
     The following describes the second embodiment of the present invention. In the second embodiment, actual operations of the communication system are described. In the communication system, images captured by a camera are uploaded to a server, and then downloaded by a simple operation to a TV to be displayed. The whole configuration of the communication system according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the communication system according to the first embodiment. 
       FIGS. 40A to 40C  are flowcharts of processing performed by a camera (the image capturing device  1 ) to upload photographs (images). First, the camera captures images (Step S 5101 ). Then, the captured images are stored into the third memory (Step S 5102 ). Then, the camera updates information stored in the second memory (Step S 5103 ). The second memory updating process will be described later. Next, the camera determines whether or not the communication unit is connectable to the Internet (Step S 5104 ). If connectable, then the camera generates a URL (Step S 5105 ). The URL generation process will be described in more detail later. After generating the URL, the camera uploads the captured images (Step S 5106 ). In completing the uploading process, the camera disconnects the communication unit from the Internet (Step S 5107 ). As a result, the processing is completed. The uploading process will be described in more detail later. 
     The second memory updating process of Step S 5103  enables the server  42  and the camera to share identification information for distinguishing photographs that have already been uploaded to the server  42  from photographs that have not yet been uploaded to the server  42 . Examples of the uploading process at Step S 5106  are given as following cases  1  to  4 . 
     In case  1 , the final capturing time (final capturing date/time)  68  is previously stored in the second memory, and then updated after the captured images are stored into the third memory (Step S 5111 ). 
     Comparison of a time of uploading the captured images to the final capturing time  68  of the camera allows the server  42  and the camera to share identification information of the uploaded photographs. 
     In case  2 , the above advantages can be produced also by generating existence identifiers  64  of images not yet been uploaded to the server  42 , with reference to images uploaded to the server  42  among the captured images, and storing the generated existence identifiers  64  into the second memory (Step S 5121 ). 
     In case  3 , it is also possible that the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  is stored in the second memory (Step S 5131 ). Thereby, an amount of the information stored in the second memory is reduced, thereby saving a capacity of the second memory. 
     In case  4 , it is further possible that image serial numbers are chronologically generated for captured images, and thereby the final image serial number  69  in the second memory is updated (Step S 5141 ). Thereby, even if a time counted by the camera is not correct, it is possible to synchronize information of uploaded photographs between the server  42  and the camera. 
       FIG. 41  depicts details of the URL generation process at Step S 5105 . The camera reads, from the second memory, the server specific information  48  including the server address information  81 , the login ID  83 , and the password  84  (Step S 5201 ). Based on the server specific information  48 , the camera generates a URL (Step S 5202 ). 
       FIGS. 42A to 42D  depict details of the uploading process at Step S 5106 . 
     The cases  1  to  4  in  FIGS. 42A to 42D  correspond to the above-described cases  1  to  4  of the second memory updating process in  FIGS. 40B to 40C , respectively. 
     In case  1 , the camera receives, from the server  42 , a final upload time (final upload date/time) that is a time of finally uploading to the server  42  (Step S 5211 ). Then, the camera compares the final upload time to the final capturing time (Step S 5212 ). If the final capturing time is later than the final upload time (in other words, if there is any image captured after final uploading), then the camera uploads, to the server  42 , any images captured after the final upload time (Step S 5213 ). 
     In case  2 , the camera checks not-yet-uploaded image data existence identifiers  64  in the second memory (Step S 5231 ). Thereby, the camera determines whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded (Step S 5232 ). If there is any image not yet been uploaded, then the camera uploads images not yet been uploaded, to the server  42  (Step S 5233 ). Then, the camera updates the uploaded-image information  61  in the second memory (Step S 5234 ). 
     In case  3 , the camera checks the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  in the second memory (Step S 5301 ). Thereby, the camera determines whether or not the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  in the second memory is the same as hashed information that is generated by hashing NULL (Step S 5302 ). If the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  is not the same as the hashed information regarding NULL, then the camera determines that there is an image not yet been uploaded to the server  42  and therefore uploads, to the server  42 , any images that are stored in the third memory but have not yet been uploaded to the server  42  (Step S 5303 ). 
     In case  4 , the camera receives, from the server  42 , an image serial number of a finally uploaded image (Step S 5311 ). Then, the camera determines whether or not the image serial number matches the final image serial number  69  in the second memory (Step S 5312 ). If the image serial number does not match the final image serial number  69 , then the camera uploads any images having UIDs that are newer than UID of the final image serial number  69  that is received from the server  42  (Step S 5313 ). 
       FIG. 43  is a flowchart of RF-ID proximity communication between the image capturing device  1  and the TV  45 . 
     First, the second antenna  21  embedded in the image capturing device  1  receives weak radio power from polling of the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45 , and thereby activates the RF-ID unit  47  operated under the second power supply unit  91  (S 5401 ). 
     The RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1 , which is activated by receiving weak power at Step S 5401 , responds to the polling of the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  (Step S 5402 ). 
     After responding to the polling at Step S 5402 , mutual authentication is performed to determine whether or not the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1  and the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  are legitimate devices, and also to share a cryptography key used for secure information communication between the image capturing device  1  and the TV  45  (Step S 5403 ). The mutual authentication employs a public key cryptography algorism such as elliptic curve cryptography. In general, the employed method for the mutual authentication is the same as that of mutual authentication used in communication via High Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) or IEEE1394. 
     As described earlier, at Step S 5403 , the mutual authentication is performed between the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1  and the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  to generate a common cryptography key. After that, the server URL generation information  80  is read from the server specific information  48  stored in the second memory  52  readable from the RF-ID unit  47 . The server URL generation information  80  is transmitted to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  via the second antenna  21  (Step S 5404 ). The server URL generation information  80  includes: the server address information  81  indicating address information of the server  42 ; the user identification information  82  that is the login ID  83  to the server  42 ; and the password  84  that is a login password to the server  42 . The password  84  is important information for preventing unauthorized acts of a malicious third person. Therefore, the password  84  is sometimes encrypted beforehand as the encrypted password  85  to be stored, and then transmitted to the TV  45 . 
     After the server URL generation information  80  is transmitted to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  at Step S 5404 , the captured image state information  55  stored in the second memory  52  is also transmitted to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  via the second antenna  21  (Step S 5405 ). The captured image state information  55  is: the final capturing time  68  (case  1 ); the existence identifiers  64  which are existence identification information regarding images not yet been uploaded and each of which is assigned to a corresponding one of the captured images so that it is possible to determine whether the image has not yet been uploaded (case  2 ); the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  (case  3 ); or the final image serial number  69  from among image serial numbers chronologically assigned to captured images (case  4 ). The captured image state information  55  is important for examining synchronization between captured images in the image capturing device  1  and captured images in the server  42 . 
     In case  1 , the final capturing time  68  is used as the captured image state information  55 . Therefore, the TV  45  compares the final capturing time  68  to the final upload time. If the final capturing time  68  is temporally later than the final upload time that is a time of finally uploading to the server  42 , then it is determined that the image data in the image capturing device  1  is not in synchronization with the image data in the server  42 . Therefore, warning information regarding the synchronization failure is displayed on the display unit of the TV  45 . 
     In case  2 , the captured image state information  55  is the existence identifiers  64  each of which is assigned to a corresponding one of the captured images so that it is possible to determine whether the image has not yet been uploaded. Therefore, the TV  45  examines the existence identifiers  64  to determine whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded. If there is any image not yet been uploaded, then it is determined that the image data in the image capturing device  1  is not in synchronization with the image data in the server  42 . Therefore, warning information regarding the synchronization failure is displayed on the display unit of the TV  45 . 
     In case  3 , the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  is employed as the captured image state information  55 . Therefore, the TV  45  examines the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  to determine whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded. If there is any image not yet been uploaded, then it is determined that the image data in the image capturing device  1  is not in synchronization with the image data in the server  42 . Therefore, warning information regarding the synchronization failure is displayed on the display unit of the TV  45 . 
     In case  4 , the captured image state information  55  is the final image serial number  69  from among image serial numbers chronologically assigned to the captured images. Therefore, the TV  45  compares (a) the final image serial number  69  from among image serial numbers chronologically assigned to the captured images to (b) an image serial number of an image finally uploaded to the server  42 . Here, the final image serial number  69  is provided from the image capturing device  1 , while the image serial number is provided from the server  42 . Based on the comparison, the TV  45  can determine whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded. If there is any image not yet been uploaded, then it is determined that the image data in the image capturing device  1  is not in synchronization with the image data in the server  42 . Therefore, warning information regarding the synchronization failure is displayed on the display unit of the TV  45 . 
     After transmitting the captured image state information  55  from the second antenna  21  of the image capturing device  1  to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  at Step S 5405 , the image display method instruction information  77  is also transmitted from the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1  to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  via the second antenna  21  (Step S 5406 ). The image display method instruction information  77  is identification information indicating how the display unit of the TV  45  is to display the images downloaded from the server  42 . The image display method instruction information  77  includes the list display (indicator)  78  indicating that the images are to be displayed in a list, and the slide show (indicator)  79  indicating that the images are to be displayed as a slide show. 
     As described above, at Steps S 5401  to S 5406 , the image capturing device  1  transmits the server URL generation information  80 , the captured image state information  55 , and the image display method instruction information  77 , which are stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 , from the second antenna  21  of the image capturing device  1  to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45 . Here, it is desirable to encrypt all of the above pieces of information to be transmitted, by using the cryptography key information shared between the image capturing device  1  and the TV  45  at the mutual authentication. The encryption achieves secure information communication between the image capturing device  1  and the TV  45 . As a result, intervention of a malicious third person can be prevented. 
     Since the server URL generation information  80  is transmitted to the TV  45 , the server  42  (and directory) to which the first antenna  20  of the image capturing device  1  transmits data is the same as the server (and directory) from which the TV  45  downloads the data. Therefore, the TV  45  can display the images that have been captured by the image capturing device  1  and then uploaded to the server  42 . 
     In addition, the transmission of the captured image state information  55  to the TV  45  makes it possible to examine synchronization between the captured images stored in the third memory  33  of the image capturing device  1  and the images uploaded from the first antenna  20  to the server  42 . Therefore, the TV  45  can detect a failure of the synchronization. The display of the warning information indicating the synchronization failure on the TV  45  can prevent unnecessary confusion of the user. 
     Moreover, the transmission of the image display method instruction information  77  to the TV  45  enables the user to view images by a set image viewing method without designating the image viewing method on the TV  45 . The user merely needs to move the image capturing device  1  into proximity of the TV  45 . The complicated operations using a remote controller or the like of the TV  45  are not necessary. The images can be automatically displayed by the set viewing method. 
       FIG. 44  is a block diagram of characteristic functions of a TV system according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 
     The TV  45  according to the second embodiment includes the RF-ID reader/writer  46 , the decryption unit  5504 , a URL generation unit  5505 , a communication unit  5506 , a transmission unit  5507 , a communication interface  5508 , a receiving unit  5509 , a data processing unit  5510 , a memory unit  5511 , a display unit  5512 , and a CPU  5513 . 
     The RF-ID reader/writer  46  communicates with the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1  via the second antenna  21 . The RF-ID reader/writer  46  includes a wireless antenna  5501 , a receiving unit  5503 , and a communicable device search unit (polling unit)  5502 . 
     The wireless antenna  5501  performs proximity wireless communication with the second antenna  21  of the image capturing device  1 . The wireless antenna  5501  has the same structure as that of wireless antennas of general-purpose RF-ID reader/writers. 
     The communicable device search unit (polling unit)  5502  performs polling to check a RF-ID unit of each of plural cameras in order to examine whether to have any transmission request (or processing request). If the communicable device search unit  5502  receives a response of the polling from the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1  (the corresponding camera), then the mutual authentication is performed to share a common cryptography key between the TV  45  and the image capturing device  1 . 
     When the mutual authentication is completed after receiving the polling response, the receiving unit  5503  receives the server URL generation information  80 , the captured image state information  55 , and the image display method instruction information  77  from the second memory  52  via the second antenna  21  of the image capturing device  1 . 
     The decryption unit  5504  decrypts the server URL generation information  80 , the captured image state information  55 , and the image display method instruction information  77  which are received by the receiving unit  5503 . The decryption of the server URL generation information  80 , the captured image state information  55 , and the image display method instruction information  77  which have been encrypted is performed using the cryptography key shared between the image capturing device  1  and the TV  45  after the mutual authentication by the communicable device search unit (polling unit)  5502 . 
     The URL generation unit  5505  generates, based on the server URL generation information  80 , a URL to access the server  42 , and then transmits the generated URL to the communication unit. The URL includes not only the server specific information, but also the login ID  83  and the password  85  used to login to the server. 
     The communication unit  5506  communicates with the server  42  via a general-purpose network using the communication interface  5508 . 
     The transmission unit  5507  transmits the URL generated by the URL generation unit  5505  via the communication interface  5508  in order to connect the TV  45  to the server  42 . 
     The communication interface  5508  is a communication interface for connecting the TV  45  to the server  42  via a general-purpose network. The communication interface  5508  is, for example, a wired/wireless LAN interface. 
     The receiving unit  5509  receives (downloads) image data and an image display cascading style sheet (CSS) from the server  42  connected by the communication interface  5508 . 
     The data processing unit  5510  performs data processing for the image data downloaded by the receiving unit  5509 . If the image data to be downloaded is compressed data, the data processing unit  5510  de-compresses the image data. If the image data is encrypted, the data processing unit  5510  decrypts the image data. In addition, the data processing unit  5510  can arrange the downloaded image data by an image display style based on the image display CSS. If it is determined, based on the captured image state information  55  obtained, if necessary, by decryption of the decryption unit, that the image data in the image capturing device  1  is not in synchronization with the image data in the server  42 , then the data processing unit  5510  causes the display unit  5512  to display warning information regarding the synchronization failure. Thereby, unnecessary confusion of the user can be prevented. Moreover, the data processing unit  5510  sets a mode of displaying the downloaded image data, according to the image display method instruction information  77  provided from the decryption unit  5504 . For example, if the list display (flag)  78  in the image display method instruction information  77  is ON, then the data processing unit  5510  generates a list of the downloaded images and provides the list to the memory unit  5511 . If the slide show (flag)  79  in the image display method instruction information  77  is ON, then the data processing unit  5510  generates a slide show of the downloaded images and provides the slide show to the memory unit  5511 . 
     The memory unit  5511  is a memory that temporarily holds the image data processed by the data processing unit  5510 . 
     The display unit  5512  displays the image data stored in the memory unit  5511 . The image data has been downloaded from the server  42  and applied with data processing by the data processing unit  5510  as described earlier. 
     As descried above, based on the server URL generation information  80 , the captured image state information  55 , and the image display method instruction information  77  which are received from the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1 , the TV  45  according to the second embodiment of the present invention can be connected to the server  42 , then download the uploaded image data from the server  42 , and display the downloaded image data on the display unit  5512 . Thereby, the user does not need to do complicated processes of removing the third memory  33  such as a Secure Digital (SD) card or a flash memory from the image capturing device  1  and equipping the third memory  33  to a card reader of the TV  45  in order to view captured images. In the second embodiment of the present invention, the user can display and view captured image data, by simple operations of simply presenting the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1  to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  for proximity communication. The second embodiment of the present invention can provide a captured image viewing system by which even users who are not familiar with operations of digital devices can easily view image data. 
       FIG. 45  is a flowchart of RF-ID wireless proximity communication between the image capturing device  1  and the TV  45 . 
     First, the communicable device search unit  5502  in the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  transmits a polling signal to search for the RF-ID unit  47  of the communicable image capturing device  1  (Step S 5601 ). 
     When the image capturing device  1  receives the polling signal from the communicable device search unit  5502  in the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45 , the second power supply unit  91  is supplied with power to activate (operate) the RF-ID unit  47  (Step S 5602 ). Here, at least the RF-ID unit  47 , which can be operated under the second power supply unit  91 , is activated. It is not necessary to activate all functions in the image capturing device  1 . 
     When the activation of the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1  is completed at Step S 5602 , the image capturing device  1  transmits a polling response for the polling to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  via the second antenna  21  (Step S 5603 ). 
     After the image capturing device  1  responds to the polling at Step S 5603 , the TV  45  receives the polling response by the wireless antenna  5501  of the RF-ID reader/writer  46  (Step S 5604 ). 
     After receiving the polling response at Step S 5604 , the TV  45  determines whether or not the image capturing device  1  transmitting the polling response is a device mutually communicable with the TV  45  (Step S 5605 ). If the determination is made that the image capturing device  1  cannot mutually communicate with the TV  45 , then the processing is completed. On the other hand, if the determination is made that the image capturing device  1  is mutually communicable with the TV  45 , then the processing proceeds to Step S 5606 . 
     If the determination is made that the image capturing device  1  is mutually communicable with the TV  45  at Step S 6505 , then the TV  45  performs mutual authentication to determine whether or not the image capturing device  1  and the TV  45  are legitimate devices for communication (Step S 5606 ). The mutual authentication is the same as general mutual authentication using HDMI or IEEE1394. In the mutual authentication, issuing of challenge data and checking of response data are performed plural times between the TV  45  and the image capturing device  1  to eventually generate a common cryptography key. If one of the TV  45  and the image capturing device  1  is not legitimate, the common cryptography key is not generated, thereby disabling future mutual communication. 
     The image capturing device  1  also performs the same mutual authentication in the RF-ID unit  47 . Generation and transmission of challenge data and receiving and checking of response data are performed plural times between the TV  45  and the image capturing device  1  to eventually generate a cryptography key identical to the cryptography key generated by the TV  45  (Step S 5607 ). 
     When the mutual authentication is completed at Step S 5607 , the image capturing device  1  reads the server URL generation information  80  as the server specific information  48  from the second memory  52 , then encrypts the server URL generation information  80  using the common cryptography key generated at the mutual authentication, and transmits the encrypted server URL generation information  80  to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  (Step S 5608 ). 
     The TV  45  receives the encrypted server URL generation information  80  transmitted at Step S 5608 , by the receiving unit  5503  in the RF-ID reader/writer  46 . Then, the decryption unit  5504  decrypts the encrypted server URL generation information  80  using the common cryptography key. Based on the server URL generation information  80 , the URL generation unit  5505  generates a URL to access the server  42 . Then, the TV  45  transmits, to the image capturing device  1 , a notification of completion of receiving the server URL generation information  80  (Step S 5609 ). 
     After the notification of the receiving completion is transmitted at Step S 5609 , the image capturing device  1  receives the notification by the second antenna  21 . Then, the image capturing device  1  reads the captured image state information  55  from the second memory  52  to transmit the captured image state information  55  to the TV  45  (Step S 5610 ). The captured image state information  55  is: the final capturing time  68  (case  1 ); the existence identifiers  64  which are existence identification information regarding images not yet been uploaded and each of which is assigned to a corresponding one of the captured images so that it is possible to determine whether the image has not yet been uploaded (case  2 ); the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  (case  3 ); or the final image serial number  69  from among image serial numbers chronologically assigned to captured images (case  4 ). The captured image state information  55  is important for examining synchronization between captured images in the image capturing device  1  and captured images in the server  42 . 
     After the image capturing device  1  transmits the captured image state information  55  at Step S 5610 , the TV  45  receives the captured image state information  55  by the RF-ID reader/writer  46  and then transmits, to the image capturing device  1 , a notification of completion of receiving the captured image state information  55  (Step S 5611 ). Here, the CPU  5513  in the TV  45  performs the following processing depending on kinds of the received captured image state information  55 . 
     In case  1 , the final capturing time  68  is used as the captured image state information  55 . Therefore, the TV  45  compares the final capturing time  68  to the final upload time that is a time of finally uploading to the server  42 . If the final capturing time  68  is temporally later than the final upload time, then it is determined that the image data in the image capturing device  1  is not in synchronization with the image data in the server  42 . Therefore, warning information regarding the synchronization failure is displayed on the display unit of the TV  45 . 
     In case  2 , the captured image state information  55  is the existence identifiers  64  each of which is assigned to a corresponding one of the captured images so that it is possible to determine whether the image has not yet been uploaded. Therefore, the TV  45  examines the existence identifiers  64  to determine whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded. If there is any image not yet been uploaded, then it is determined that the image data in the image capturing device  1  is not in synchronization with the image data in the server  42 . Therefore, warning information regarding the synchronization failure is displayed on the display unit of the TV  45 . 
     In case  3 , the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  is employed as the captured image state information  55 . Therefore, the TV  45  examines the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  to determine whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded. If there is any image not yet been uploaded, then it is determined that the image data in the image capturing device  1  is not in synchronization with the image data in the server  42 . Therefore, warning information regarding the synchronization failure is displayed on the display unit of the TV  45 . 
     In case  4 , the captured image state information  55  is the final image serial number  69  from among image serial numbers chronologically assigned to the captured images. Therefore, the TV  45  compares (a) the final image serial number  69  from among image serial numbers chronologically assigned to the captured images to (b) an image serial number of an image finally uploaded to the server  42 . Here, the final image serial number  69  is provided from the image capturing device  1 , while the image serial number is provided from the server  42 . Based on the comparison, the TV  45  can determine whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded. If there is any image not yet been uploaded, then it is determined that the image data in the image capturing device  1  is not in synchronization with the image data in the server  42 . Therefore, warning information regarding the synchronization failure is displayed on the display unit of the TV  45 . 
     After the TV  45  completes receiving of the captured image state information  55  and transmits the notification of the receipt to the image capturing device  1  at Step S 5611 , the image capturing device  1  reads the image display method instruction information  77  from the second memory  52  and transmits the image display method instruction information  77  to the TV  45  (Step S 5612 ). The image display method instruction information  77  includes the list display (flag)  78  and the slide show (flag)  79 . 
     After the image display method instruction information  77  is transmitted at Step S 5612 , the TV  45  receives the image display method instruction information  77  by the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  and transmits a notification of completion of receiving the image display method instruction information  77  to the image capturing device  1  (Step S 5613 ). The data processing unit  5510  of the TV  45  generates a mode of displaying images downloaded from the server  42 , based on the received image display method instruction information  77 . For example, if the list display flag in the image display method instruction information  77  is ON, the data processing unit  5510  generates a list of the downloaded images and stores the generated list in the memory unit  5511  and causes the display unit  5512  to display the list. On the other hand, if the slide show flag in the image display method instruction information  77  is ON, the data processing unit  5510  generates a slide show of the downloaded images and stores the generated slide show in the memory unit  5511  and causes the display unit  5512  to display the slide show. 
     After receiving the image display method instruction information  77  at Step S 5613 , the TV  45  disconnects communication from the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1  (Step S 5614 ). 
     Next, the TV  45  activates a TV system (Step S 5615 ). The activation of the TV system refers to turning the main power of the TV  45  ON to display the downloaded image data on the display unit  5512 . Prior to the activation of the TV system at Step S 5615 , at least the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  is activated and the display unit  5512  may be turned OFF. 
     Then, the communication unit  5506  is activated to connect the TV  45  to the server  42  based on the URL generated by the URL generation unit  5505  (Step S 5616 ). 
     After connecting to the server  42  at Step S 5616 , the TV  45  downloads uploaded image data from the server  42  (Step S 5617 ). 
     The data processing unit  5510  generates to-be-displayed image data from the images downloaded at the Step S 5617 , based on the image display method instruction information  77  obtained from the camera (the image capturing device  1 ), then stores the generated image data into the memory unit  5511 , and displays the image data on the display unit  5512  (Step S 5618 ). The data processing unit  5510  of the TV  45  generates a mode of displaying the images (image data) downloaded from the server  42 , based on the received image display method instruction information  77 . For example, if the list display flag  78  in the image display method instruction information  77  is ON, the data processing unit  5510  generates a list of the downloaded images and stores the generated list in the memory unit  5511  and causes the display unit  5512  to display the list. On the other hand, if the slide show flag  79  in the image display method instruction information  77  is ON, the data processing unit  5510  generates a slide show of the downloaded images and stores the generated slide show in the memory unit  5511  and causes the display unit  5512  to display the slide show. 
     After displaying of the images downloaded from the server  42  is completed at Step S 5617 , the TV  45  performs synchronization examination to determine whether or not the captured images recorded in the third memory  33  of the image capturing device  1  are in synchronization with the images downloaded from the server  42  (Step S 5619 ). The synchronization examination is performed based on the captured image state information provided at Step S 5611  from the image capturing device  1 . The captured image state information  55  is: the final capturing time  68  (case  1 ); the existence identifiers  64  which are existence identification information regarding images not yet been uploaded and each of which is assigned to a corresponding one of the captured images so that it is possible to determine whether the image has not yet been uploaded (case  2 ); the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  (case  3 ); or the final image serial number  69  from among image serial numbers chronologically assigned to captured images (case  4 ). The captured image state information  55  is important for examining synchronization between captured images in the image capturing device  1  and captured images in the server  42 . 
       FIGS. 46A and 46B  are flowcharts of details of the server synchronization examination (Step S 5619 ) of  FIG. 45  when the captured image state information  55  are cases  1  to  4 , respectively. 
     (a) in  FIG. 46A  is a flowchart of case  1  where the captured image state information  55  is the final capturing time  68 . 
     First, the communication unit  5506  of the  45  receives, from the server  42 , date/time of finally uploading to the server  42  (hereinafter, referred to also as a “final upload date/time” that may be date/time of capturing a final image among uploaded images to produce the same advantages) (Step S 5701 ). 
     Next, the TV  45  compares the final upload date/time to a final capturing date/time  68  (Step S 5702 ). The final capturing date/time  68 , which is date/time of final capturing of the image capturing device  1 , is indicated in the captured image state information  55  provided from the image capturing device  1  to the RF-ID reader/writer  46 . If the final upload date/time is prior to the final capturing date/time  68 , it is determined that there is an image captured after the final upload and not yet been uploaded to the server  42 . Therefore, a determination is made that the images in the image capturing device  1  are not in synchronization with the images in the server  42 . Then, warning information is displayed at Step S 5703 . On the other hand, if the final upload date/time is equal to the final capturing date/time  68 , it is determined that the images in the image capturing device  1  are in synchronization with the images in the server  42 . Then, the synchronization examination is completed without displaying warning information. 
     If it is determined at Step S 5702  that the images in the image capturing device  1  are not in synchronization with the images in the server  42 , the display unit  5512  displays warning information indicating the synchronization failure. Here, if time information is generated by comparing the final upload date/time to the final capturing date/time  68  in order to indicate from when captured images are not uploaded, and the generated time information is presented as a message together with the warning information, the warning information is convenient for the user. 
     (b) in  FIG. 46A  is a flowchart of case  2  where the captured image state information  55  is the existence identifiers  64  each of which is assigned to a corresponding one of the captured images so that it is possible to determine whether the image has not yet been uploaded. 
     First, it is determined, based on the existence identifiers of the not-yet-uploaded image existence identification information, whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded to the server  42  from among the captured images stored in the third memory  33  of the image capturing device  1  (Step S 5711 ). Here, the existence identifiers are indicated in the captured image state information  55  provided from the image capturing device  1  to the RF-ID reader/writer  46 . If it is determined that there is an image not yet been uploaded to the server  42  at Step S 5711 , then the processing proceed to Step S 5712  to display warning information. On the other hand, if there is not image not yet been uploaded, it is determined that the images in the image capturing device  1  are in synchronization with the images in the server  42 . Then, the synchronization examination is completed without displaying warning information. 
     If it is determined that the images in the image capturing device  1  are not in synchronization with the images in the server  42 , the display unit  5512  displays warning information indicating the synchronization failure at Step S 5712 . 
     (c) in  FIG. 46B  is a flowchart of case  3  where the captured image state information  55  is the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67 . 
     First, it is determined, based on the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67 , whether or not there is any image not yet been uploaded to the server  42  from among the captured images stored in the third memory  33  of the image capturing device  1  (Step S 5721 ). Here, the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  is indicated in the captured image state information  55  provided from the image capturing device  1  to the RF-ID reader/writer  46 . The determination of Step S 5721  is performed by comparing the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  to a hashed value generated by hashing NULL generated in the TV  45 . If it is determined that there is an image not yet been uploaded at Step S 5721 , then the processing proceed to Step S 5722  to display warning information. On the other hand, if there is no image not yet been uploaded, it is determined that the images in the image capturing device  1  are in synchronization with the images in the server  42 . Then, the synchronization examination is completed without displaying warning information. 
     If it is determined that the images in the image capturing device  1  are not in synchronization with the images in the server  42 , the display unit  5512  displays warning information indicating the synchronization failure at Step S 5722 . 
     (d) in  FIG. 46B  is a flowchart of case  4  where the captured image state information  55  is a final image serial number from among image serial numbers assigned to captured images. 
     First, the communication unit  5506  of the TV  45  receives, from the server  42 , an image serial number of an image finally uploaded to the server  42  (Step S 5731 ). 
     Next, the TV  45  compares (a) the image serial number  69  of the image finally uploaded which is provided form the server  42  to (b) a final image serial number  69  of an image finally captured which is indicated in the captured image state information  55  provided from the image capturing device  1  by the RF-ID reader/writer  46  (Step S 5732 ). If the mage serial number  69  of the image finally uploaded is smaller than the mage serial number  69  of the image finally captured, it is determined that there is an image captured after the final upload and not yet been uploaded to the server  42 . Therefore, a determination is made that the images in the image capturing device  1  are not in synchronization with the images in the server  42 . Then, the processing proceeds to Step S 5733  to display warning information. On the other hand, if the mage serial number  69  of the image finally uploaded is identical to the mage serial number  69  of the image finally captured, it is determined that the images in the image capturing device  1  are in synchronization with the images in the server  42 . Then, the synchronization examination is completed without displaying warning information. 
     If it is determined at Step S 5732  that the images in the image capturing device  1  are not in synchronization with the images in the server  42 , the display unit  5512  displays warning information indicating the synchronization failure. 
     When all of images captured by the image capturing device  1  are not uploaded to the serve  42  (in other words, when images captured by the image capturing device  1  are not in synchronization with images uploaded to the server  42 ), any of above cases  1  to  4  makes it possible to detect the synchronization failure. Thereby, although all of the captured images cannot be displayed on the display unit  5512 , a convenient message can be displayed to the user to inform the synchronization failure. As a result, unnecessary confusion of the user can be prevented. 
       FIG. 47A  is (1) a data format used in uploading captured images from the image capturing device  1  to the server  42 .  FIG. 47B  is (2) a data format used in RF-ID communication between the image capturing device  1  and the TV  45 . 
     First, (1) a data format  5940  in uploading captured images from the image capturing device  1  to the server  42  is described. The data format  5940  includes camera ID  5901 , a sever address  5902 , a server login ID  5903 , a server login password  5904 , an image directory  5905 , and an uploading-image number  5906 . 
     The camera ID  5901  is camera UID uniquely assigned to each camera (image capturing device  1 ). The camera ID  5901  is ID information recorded in the camera ID  76  in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . Use of the camera ID  5901  as login ID to the server  42  can provide a server address unique to each image capturing device  1  so that the image capturing device  1  can access the server  42  without user&#39;s entry of login ID. In addition, the camera ID  5901  enables the server  42  to manage captured images for each capturing camera. 
     The sever address  5902  is included in the server address information  81  in the server specific information  48  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . The sever address  5902  enables the TV  45  to identify the server to which target image data is uploaded. 
     The server login ID  5903  is included in the login ID  83  in the user identification information  82  in the server specific information  48  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . The server login ID  5903  allows the TV  45  to login, by using the same account, to the server to which the image capturing device  1  uploads image data. 
     The server login password  5904  is included in the password  84  in the server specific information  48  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . The server login password  5904  allows the TV  45  to login, by using the same account, to the server to which the image capturing device  1  uploads image data. 
     The uploading-image number  5906  is the number of images to be uploaded to the server. The uploading-image number  5906  is equal to the number of images which is stored as the not-yet-uploaded-image number  65  in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . After capturing images, the number of images not yet been uploaded is indicated in the uploading-image number  5906 . 
     After transmitting the data format  5940 , the image capturing device  1  uploads, to the server  42 , the images that are stored in the third memory  33  of the image capturing device  1  but not yet been uploaded to the server  42 . 
     Next, (2) a data format  5950  used in RF-ID communication between the image capturing device  1  and the TV  45  is described. The data format  5950  includes camera ID  5911 , a sever address  5912 , a server login ID  5913 , a server login password  5914 , a final capturing date/time (final capturing time)  5915 , and not-yet-uploaded image data existence identifiers  5916 , not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  5917 , a final image serial number  5918 , and image display method instruction information  5919 . 
     The camera ID  5911  is a camera UID uniquely assigned to each camera (image capturing device  1 ). The camera ID  5911  is ID information recorded in the camera ID  76  in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . Use of the camera ID  5911  as login ID to the server  42  from the TV  45  can provide a server address unique to each image capturing device  1  so that the TV  45  can access the server  42  without user&#39;s entry of login ID. The camera ID  5901  may be used in the mutual authentication between the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1  and the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45 . 
     The sever address  5912  is included in the server address information  81  in the server specific information  48  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . The sever address  5912  enables the TV  45  to identify the server to which target image data is uploaded. 
     The server login ID  5913  is included in the login ID  83  in the user identification information  82  in the server specific information  48  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . The server login ID  5913  allows the TV  45  to login, by using the same account, to the server to which the image capturing device  1  uploads image data. 
     The server login password  5914  is included in the password  84  in the server specific information  48  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . The server login password  5914  allows the TV  45  to login, by using the same account, to the server to which the image capturing device  1  uploads image data. 
     The final capturing date/time  5915  corresponds to the final capturing time  68  in the captured image state information  55  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . The TV  45  uses the final capturing date/time  5915  for the synchronization examination between captured images in the image capturing device  1  and captured images in the server  42 . 
     The not-yet-uploaded image data existence identifiers  5916  correspond to the not-yet-uploaded image data existence identification information in the captured image state information  55  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . TV  45  uses the not-yet-uploaded image data existence identifiers  5916  for the synchronization examination between captured images in the image capturing device  1  and captured images in the server  42 . In order to implement each of the not-yet-uploaded image data existence identifiers  5916 , each image ID  5928  for identifying a corresponding one of captured images is assigned with an upload flag  5926  indicating whether or not the corresponding image has been uploaded to the server  42 . Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not each of the captured images has been uploaded to the server  42 . 
     The not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  5917  corresponds to the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  67  in the captured image state information  55  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . The TV  45  uses the not-yet-uploaded image information hashed information  5917  for the synchronization examination between captured images in the image capturing device  1  and captured images in the server  42 . 
     The final image serial number  5918  corresponds to the final image serial number  69  in the captured image state information  55  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . The TV  45  uses the final image serial number  5918  for the synchronization examination between captured images in the image capturing device  1  and captured images in the server  42 . 
     The image display method instruction information  5919  corresponds to the image display method instruction information  77  in the captured image state information  55  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . The image display method instruction information  5919  includes identification information by which the TV  45  designates a method of viewing images downloaded from the server  42 . 
     For each image ID  5927 , the image display method instruction information  5919  includes a list display flag  5920 , a slide show flag  5921 , a print flag  5922 , a video reproduction flag  5923 , a download flag  5924 , and a security password  5925 . 
     The image ID  5927  is information unique to a captured image. The pieces of image ID  5927  are chronologically assigned to captured images by the image capturing device  1  in capturing the images. 
     The list display flag  5920  corresponds to the list display (flag)  78  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . The TV  45  uses the list display flag  5920  to determine whether or not image data downloaded from the server  42  is to be displayed in a list format. If the list display flag  5920  indicates “yes”, the data processing unit  5510  of the TV  45  generates a list of the downloaded images, stores the list to the memory unit  5511 , and then displays the list on the display unit  5512 . 
     The slide show flag  5921  corresponds to the slide show (flag)  79  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . The TV  45  uses the slide show flag  5921  to determine whether or not image data downloaded from the server  42  is to be displayed as a slide show. If the slide show flag  5921  indicates “automatic”, the data processing unit  5510  of the TV  45  generates a slide show of the downloaded images, stores the slide show to the memory unit  5511 , and then displays the slide show on the display unit  5512 . If the slide show flag  5921  indicates “manual”, the TV  45  permits execution of the slide show according to instructions from the user. If the slide show flag  5921  indicates “disable”, the TV  45  inhibits display of the slide show. 
     The print flag  5922  indicates whether or not images to be downloaded to the TV  45  and then displayed on the display unit  5512  are permitted to be printed by a printer (not shown) connected to the TV  45 . The print flag  5922  is not shown in the image display method instruction information  77  stored in the second memory  52  of the image capturing device  1 . However, if the print flag  5922  is added, it is possible to set whether or not image data is printable. As a result, usability related to use of images can be improved. 
     The video reproduction flag  5923  indicates whether or not video data captured by the image capturing device  1  and then uploaded to the server  42  is permitted to be downloaded by the TV  45  and then viewed. If the image capturing device  1  has a video capturing function, addition of the video reproduction flag  5923  to the image display method instruction information  77  stored in the second memory  52  can add setting of whether or not video reproduction is permitted. As a result, the video reproduction can be managed without complicated operations by the user. 
     The download flag  5924  is an identifier indicating whether or not image or video uploaded to the server  42  is permitted to be downloaded (copied) to a memory in the TV  45 . The download flag  5924  can prevent that the image or video is copied by the third person to which image capturing is not permitted. Thereby, copy-right protection is also achieved. 
     The security password  5925  is password information that permits only the authorized user to perform the above-described image viewing, printing, and downloading processes. In the second embodiment, the same password is set for each of the above-described image viewing, printing, and downloading processes. It is preferable, however, to set a different password to each of image viewing, printing, and downloading processes, so that a level of security can be set independently. 
     As described above, in the system according to the second embodiment of the present invention, the image capturing device  1  uploads captured images to the server connected to the image capturing device  1  via the first antenna. When the image capturing device  1  is prevented to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45 , the image capturing device  1  transmits the server URL generation information  80 , the captured image state information  55 , and the image display method instruction information  77  from the RF-ID unit  47  to the TV  45  by the RF-ID communication. Then, the TV  45  connects to the server to which the image capturing device  1  has uploaded the captured images, then downloads the captured images from the server, and displays the captured images. Here, it is determined whether or not the captured images in the server  42  are in synchronization with the captured images in the image capturing device  1 . If the synchronization is failure, the TV  45  displays notification of the synchronization failure on the display unit  5512 . Thereby, the user can display the captured images only by presenting the image capturing device  1  to the TV  45 , although the user conventionally has to remove a recording memory from the camera (the image capturing device  1 ) to be equipped to the TV  45  in order to view the images. Thereby, even the user who is not familiar with operations of digital devices can easily display the images on the TV  45 . 
     Third Embodiment 
     The third embodiment according to the present invention is described below. 
     First, the third embodiment is explained in summary.  FIG. 48  is a schematic block diagram of an electronic catalog display system according to the third embodiment. The electronic catalog display system according to the third embodiment includes an electronic catalog server information input device  500 , an electronic catalog notification card  502 , the TV  45 , and an electronic catalog server  506 . The electronic catalog server information input device  500  includes a RF-ID writer  501 . The electronic catalog notification card  502  includes a RF-ID unit  47 . The TV  45  includes a RF-ID reader  504  and a network communication unit  509 . The electronic catalog server  506  includes an electronic catalog database  507  and a customer attribute database  508 . 
     The electronic catalog server information input device  500  writes electronic catalog server information from the RF-ID writer  501  to the RF-ID unit  47  attached to the electronic catalog notification card  502 . The electronic catalog server information is provided from a user who provides services of an electronic catalog (hereinafter, referred to as a “provider user”). When a user who receives the services of the electronic catalog (hereinafter, referred to as a “customer user”) brings the electronic catalog notification card  502 , in which the electronic catalog server information is written, into proximity of the TV  45 , the RF-ID reader  504  in the TV  45  reads the electronic catalog server information from the RF-ID unit  47 . In addition, the TV  45  transmits, based on the readout electronic catalog server information, a request for obtaining an electronic catalog to the electronic catalog server  506  set on a network via the network communication unit  509 . Furthermore, when transmitting the request to the electronic catalog server, the TV  45  transmits also user information, which is previously inputted in the TV  45 , to the electronic catalog server  506 . The electronic catalog server  506  receives the request for the electronic catalog and the user information from the TV  45 . First, the electronic catalog server  506  obtains customer attribute data from the customer attribute database  508  based on the user information. Next, from the electronic catalog database  507 , the electronic catalog server  506  obtains electronic catalog data associated with the customer attribute data. Then, the electronic catalog server  506  transmits the obtained electronic catalog data to the TV  45  from which the request for the electronic catalog has been transmitted. The TV  45  displays the electronic catalog data received from the electronic catalog server  506 , and thereby receives purchase operations from the customer user to purchase products in the electronic catalog data. 
     The following describes the electronic catalog display system according to the third embodiment in more detail. 
       FIG. 49  is a functional block diagram illustrating a structure of the electronic catalog server information input device according to the third embodiment. First, a key input receiving unit  520  receives an input by input keys operated by the provider user, in order to obtain the electronic catalog server information. The electronic catalog server information obtained by the key input receiving unit  520  includes: a sever address such as a URL; server login ID; a server login password; an electronic catalog display password; electronic catalog display information; and a medium identification information. The electronic catalog display information indicates whether images of products/services in the electronic catalog are to be displayed in a list (as thumbnails) or sequentially (as a slide show). The medium identification information is used for identifying a medium such as a card or a postcard to which RF-ID is attached. The electronic catalog server information obtained by the key input receiving unit  520  is stored into a storage unit  522 . Next, when a RF-ID transmission key and the like are received after receiving of the electronic catalog server information, a RF-ID transmission input receiving unit  521  notifies a transmission unit  523  of a transmission request. Then, the transmission unit  523  reads the electronic catalog server information from the storage unit  522 . An antenna unit  524  transmits the electronic catalog server information. The processing performed by the electronic catalog server information input device is presented in more detail with reference to a flowchart of  FIG. 50 . 
       FIG. 51  is a block diagram of a structure of the RF-ID unit  47  included in the electronic catalog notification card  502 . A structure and processing of the RF-ID unit  47  are the same as those described in the first and second embodiments. The second power supply unit  91  obtains current from signals received by the second antenna  21 , and provides power to each unit in the electronic catalog notification card  502 . Received information is recorded into the second memory  52  via the data receiving unit  105 , the second processing unit  95 , and the recording unit  106 . 
       FIG. 52  is a functional block diagram of a structure of the TV  45 . The structure of the TV  45  according to the third embodiment differs from the structure of the TV  45  according to the second embodiment in that a user information input unit  588  is added. The user information input unit  588  receives the user information and stores the user information into a memory unit  583  temporarily. The user information is an attribute of the customer user and previously inputted by the customer user himself/herself. The user information is preferably gender or age information of the customer user. The user information may be other information, such as a residence or a family structure, which is private information for selecting product/service data in the electronic catalog. The user information is transmitted to the electronic catalog server via the communication unit  509 , together with the URL of the electronic catalog server generated by the URL generation unit. In the same manner as described in the first embodiment, in the third embodiment, when the customer user moves the electronic catalog notification card  502  into proximity of a RF-ID reader  504  of the TV  45 , the TV  45  receives the electronic catalog server information and thereby generates a URL of the server to connect to the server. The details of this processing are the same as those described in the first embodiment with reference to  FIGS. 7 to 20 . 
       FIG. 53  is a functional block diagram of a structure of the electronic catalog server  506 . The electronic catalog server  506  receives an electronic catalog destination address and the user information from the TV  45  via a communication unit  600 . The electronic catalog destination address is a network address of the TV  45  on a network to which the TV  45  and the electronic catalog server  506  belong. Next, based on the user information received by the customer attribute data obtainment unit, the electronic catalog server  506  obtains customer attribute data from the customer attribute database  508 . For instance, if the user information includes a gender and an age of the customer user using the TV  45 , the electronic catalog server  506  obtains, as the customer attribute data, information of a product/service genre and a product/service price range which are in association with the age and gender of the customer user, based on the customer attribute database  508  having a data structure illustrated in  FIG. 57 . Then, the electronic catalog data obtainment unit  602  obtains the electronic catalog data from the electronic catalog database  507  based on customer attribute data. For example, if the customer attribute data includes product/service genres and product/service price ranges, the electronic catalog server  506  obtains, as the electronic catalog data, all of product/service data corresponding to the product/service genres and the product/service price ranges, from the electronic catalog database  507  having a data structure illustrated in  FIG. 58 . The electronic catalog server  506  transmits the electronic catalog data obtained by the electronic catalog data obtainment unit  602  to the TV  45  having the electronic catalog destination address, via a communication unit  600 . The processing performed by the electronic catalog server  506  is presented in more detail in a flowchart of  FIG. 54 . 
     The following describes processing of the TV  45  after downloading the electronic catalog data, with reference to a flowchart of  FIG. 55 . The processing regarding obtaining of the electronic catalog server information from the RF-ID unit at Steps S 630  to S 632  is the same whichever the electronic catalog data is downloaded or not. At S 633 , it is determined whether or not the electronic catalog data associated with the electronic catalog server information received from the RF-ID unit has already been downloaded and displayed. If the electronic catalog data has not yet been downloaded, then the TV  45  downloads the electronic catalog data from the server at S 634  and displays the electronic catalog data at S 635 . The download processing is the same as the download processing described in the first embodiment. 
     If it is determined at S 633  that the electronic catalog data has already been downloaded, then the TV  45  issues a signal of a predetermined key (for example, a signal of a Decide key) to execute operations for the displayed electronic catalog data (S 636 ). Here, as illustrated in an example of a screen display of the electronic catalog data in  FIG. 56 , a screen presents the customer user with a few of options for a next operation to be executed by the customer user for the displayed electronic catalog data. Then, a focus circulates among the options on the screen (as illustrated as options  652  and  653  in  FIG. 56 ) to indicate one of them as a selection candidate every time a predetermined time period passes. This allows the customer user to execute an operation for selecting or purchasing each product in the electronic catalog data, for example, only by presenting the electronic catalog notification card  502  having the RF-ID unit  47  to the TV  45 , when the focus indicates a desired option of the customer user. 
     The second memory  52  according to the third embodiment, which is embedded in the RF-ID unit  47  on the electronic catalog notification card  502 , may be a Read Only Memory (ROM). In this aspect, the electronic catalog server information input device  500  serves as a RF-ID memory data input unit in manufacturing the RF-ID unit, or a RF-ID memory data input means in a RF-ID manufacturing system. In general, a RF-ID unit having a ROM unit is inexpensive more than a RF-ID unit having a rewritable memory. Therefore, the RF-ID unit having a ROM allows the provider user sending a great number of electronic catalog notification cards to reduce a cost. 
     It should be noted that it has been described in the third embodiment that a focus circulates among the options on the screen of the TV  45  (as illustrated as options  652  and  653  in  FIG. 56 ) to indicate one of them as a selection candidate every time a predetermined time period passes. However, the method of operating the electronic catalog data displayed on the screen by using the electronic catalog notification card  502  having the RF-ID unit  47  is not limited to the above. For example, it is also possible that the receiving unit  571  of the TV  45  sequentially receive pieces of information from the RF-ID unit and counts the sequential receiving processes, then thereby calculates a time period (RF-ID proximity time period) during which the RF-ID unit is in proximity of the TV  45 , and eventually moves a focus indicating a selection candidate displayed on the screen based on the RF-ID proximity time period. With the above structure, the following operation for the electronic catalog is possible. Only when the RF-ID unit is in proximity of the TV, the focus displayed on the screen is circulated to change the selection candidate. If the RF-ID unit is away from the TV, the focus is stopped. After a predetermined time period after stopping of the focus, the selection candidate on which the focus is stopped is decided as selection. In this operation for the electronic catalog, the customer user can actively operate the electronic catalog by using the RF-ID unit, without waiting for the focus, which automatically circulates among options every predetermined time period, to arrive at a user&#39;s desired option. 
     It should also be noted that it has been described in the third embodiment that the electronic catalog server information input device  500  has the key input receiving unit  520  which receives inputs by the input keys operated by the provider user in order to obtain the electronic catalog server information. However, the following configuration is also possible. That is, the electronic catalog server information input device  500  has a communication interface to communicate with the image server. The image server holds the server information to be transmitted to the electronic catalog server information input device  500 . The electronic catalog server information input device  500  receives the server information from the image server, in order to obtain the server information. This configuration in which the server information is stored in the image server allows the electronic catalog server information input device  500  to eliminate inputting to the image server. Especially, when a plurality of the electronic catalog server information input devices  500  are operated for a single image server, this configuration is highly convenient. 
     The conventional techniques have a program that users who are not familiar with operations of digital devices such as personal computers should learn operations of the devices to do online shopping. However, the system according to the third embodiment enables users using electronic catalogs to do online shopping and the like, simply by bringing received cards or post cards into proximity of TVs. Therefore, even users who are not familiar with online terminals such as personal computers and mobile phones can easily enjoy shopping on TV screens. 
     Fourth Embodiment 
     The fourth embodiment according to the present invention is described below. 
       FIG. 59  is a schematic diagram of the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, it is described a method of sending, to a remote location, a post card attached with RF-ID used to access an image server. First, a first user, who is a sender of a post card, brings the image capturing device  1  having the RF-ID unit  47  into proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45 . Thereby, the TV  45  generates a server URL used to connect the TV  45  to the image server  42 , thereby obtains image data from the image server  42 , and eventually displays the image data on a screen. This processing is the same as described in the first embodiment. Next, by using an input means such as a remote controller of the TV  45 , the first user selects an image(s) to be printed on a post card and images to be registered in association with the post card (in other words, images to be shown to a second user living in a remote location), from among the image data displayed by the TV  45 . In addition, the first user inputs address information such as a destination address of the post card by using the remote controller or the like. The TV  45  transmits, to the image server  42 , ID of the image selected by the first user to be printed on the post card (hereinafter, referred to as “print image ID”), ID of the images to be registered for the post card (hereinafter, referred to as “registration image ID”), and the destination information of the post card (hereinafter, referred to as “post card destination information”). The image server  42  retrieves the image data identified by the print image ID and then transmits the image data and the post card destination information to a printer  800 . The printer  800  prints the image data and the post card destination information on the post card. In addition, to the image server information input unit  500 , the image server  42  transmits the registration image ID received from the TV  45 , together with image server information. The image server information includes: a sever address such as a URL; server login ID; a server login password; an image display password, image display information indicating whether the image data (images) is to be displayed in a list (as thumbnails) or sequentially (as a slide show); and medium identification information indicating a medium, such as a card or post card, to which RF-ID is to be attached. The image server information input device  500  writes the image server information and the registration image ID to the RF-ID unit  47  of the post card on which the image and the destination information are printed by the printer  800 . The post card  801  applied with printing and RF-ID writing is mailed to the printed destination. Thereby, the second user, who is designated by the first user as being the destination, receives the post card  801 . When the second user brings the mailed post card  801  into proximity of a RF-ID reader/writer  46  of a TV  45  of the second user, the TV  45  of the second user obtains the image server information and the registration image ID from the RF-ID unit  47 , downloads the images identified by the registration image ID, and displays the downloaded images. 
     The structure and processing of the image capturing device  1  according to the fourth embodiment are the same as described in the first embodiment. 
       FIG. 60  is a block diagram of a structure of the TV  45  according to the fourth embodiment. A receiving unit  811  receives the image server information from the RF-ID unit  47  of the image capturing device  1  or the post card  801  via a wireless antenna  570 . If the RF-ID unit  47  of the post card  801  holds the registration image ID, the receiving unit  811  receives also the registration image ID. An image selection unit  584  receives an image selection operation from the user via a key unit  585  and an infrared ray receiving unit  586 , and thereby obtains ID of an image which the first user has selected to be printed on the post card (namely, the print image ID) and ID of images which the first user has selected to be registered for the post card (namely, the registration image ID). Then, the image selection unit  584  provides the obtained IDs to the communication unit  509  (the network communication unit  509 ).  FIG. 61  illustrates an example of a screen display on the TV  45  in the image selection operation. In  FIG. 61, 821  is a screen display from which the first user selects an image to be printed on the post card.  820  in  FIG. 61  is a screen display from which the first user selects images to be registered for the post card. A post card destination information input unit  810  receives a character input operation of the first user via the key unit  585  and the infrared ray receiving unit  586 . Thereby, the post card destination information input unit  810  obtains the post card destination information including an address and a name of the destination of the post card. Then, the post card destination information input unit  810  provides the post card destination information to the communication unit  509 .  823  in  FIG. 61  is an example of a screen display on which the post card destination information is inputted. The communication unit  509  transmits the post card destination information, the print image ID, and the registration ID to the image server via a transmission unit  575  and a communication interface  576 . 
       FIG. 62  is a flowchart of processing performed prior to mailing of the post card  801 , by the image server  42 , the printer  800 , and the image server information input device  500 . When the post card  801  is applied with printing and RF-ID writing, the post card  801  is mailed to the printed destination. The second user, who is designated by the first user as being the destination, receives the post card  801 . When the second user presents the received post card  801  to the TV  45 , the receiving unit  811  receives the image server information and the registration image ID from the RF-ID unit  47  via the wireless antenna  570 . A decryption unit  572  decrypts encrypted information in the image server information and the registration image ID. Next, the URL generation unit  573  generates a URL from which only images identified by the registration image ID from among images stored in the image server  42  are downloaded to the TV  45 . More specifically, the URL generation unit  573  may designate an internal directory of the server in the generated URL or may use a method of embedding the registration image ID to the URL as a URL option. By using the URL generated by the URL generation unit  573  to designate the server, the TV  45  accesses the image server to obtain the images, which is the same as described in more detail in the first embodiment. 
     It should be noted that it has been described in the fourth embodiment that the user inputs the destination information to the TV  45 , but the user may input not only the destination information such as an address and a name but also a message to be printed with an image on a post card. The TV  45  receives the input message together with the destination information and provides them to the image server  42 . The printer  800  prints them on the post card.  822  in  FIG. 61  illustrates an example of a screen of the TV  45  on which a message to be printed is inputted. If the user can select an image to be printed on the post card and also input an message added to the image, a flexibility in generating a post card with RF-ID is increased. 
     It should also be noted that the TV  45  according to the fourth embodiment may allow the user to perform operations for images displayed on the TV  45  by using the post card with RF-ID, in the same manner as described in the third embodiment for the processing in which the user operates an electronic catalog displayed on a screen by using RF-ID. 
     As described above, the system according to the fourth embodiment enables the user to mail a post card with RF-ID to a person living in a distant location, without creating a post card attached with RF-ID by the user himself/herself. In addition, when the user wishes to print the image(s) stored in the image server onto the post card to be mailed, the system allows the user to perform operation on a TV screen to select an image(s) to be printed. As a result, high usability is achieved. 
     Conventionally, if the user intends to show images, on a large screen display device, to a different user living in a remote location, the user in the remote location needs to learn operations of the device (apparatus), an operation acquirer has to go to the remote location to operate the device, or the display device in the remote location should be remotely controlled. The system according to the fourth embodiment, however, enables such a user in a remote location to easily view images by a simple operation, for example, by bringing a physical medium such as a post card with RF-ID into proximity of a display device. 
     Fifth Embodiment 
     The fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration. A mailing object such as a post card is written with fixed information. The image capturing device associates the fixed information with an image or a group of images (image data) stored in the server. A reproduction side reads the fixed information from the RF-ID attached to the post card or the like in order to display the image data associated with the fixed information. The configuration is illustrated in  FIG. 63 . Referring to  FIG. 63 , first, the image capturing device reads the fixed information from the mailing object, then associates the fixed information with an image(s), and registers information of the association (hereinafter, referred to as “association information) into the server. When the user receives the mailing object for which the registration is completed, the user brings the mailing object into proximity of a RF-ID reader of a TV to read the fixed information from the mailing object. The TV queries the server using the fixed information, and thereby displays the image(s) associated with the mailing object. 
     The fifth embodiment is characterized in that the RF-ID information in the mailing object is not rewritable (ROM) or in non-rewritable environments so that image data in the server is associated with the mailing object without rewriting the fixed information in the mailing object. 
     &lt;Image Uploading and Mailing Object Associating by Image Capturing Device&gt; 
     The images captured by the image capturing device are uploaded to the server using the method described in the prior embodiments. Here, an identifier is assigned to an uploaded image or image group. The identifier makes it possible to identify the image or an group of images stored in the server. 
     The following describes a method of associating (i) an image or image group which is captured and uploaded to the server by the image capturing device with (ii) fixed information recorded in a RF-ID tag of a mailing object.  FIG. 64  illustrates examples of the fixed information recorded in the RF-ID tag of the mailing object. 
     (a) in  FIG. 64  illustrates fixed information including: mailing object UID unique to the mailing object; and information such as an address for accessing the image server. (b) in  FIG. 64  illustrates fixed information including: the mailing object UID; and information such as an address for accessing a relay server. (c) in  FIG. 64  illustrates fixed information including the mailing object UID only. The fixed information may also include a login ID, password information, and the like for accessing the server. It is assumed in the fifth embodiment that such information necessary to access the server is included in a URL including the address information. 
       FIG. 65  is a flowchart of processing performed by the image capturing device to associate the RF-ID with image data stored in the server, when the image capturing device has a RF-ID reader function. 
     First, the image capturing device reads information from the RF-ID of the mailing object by using the RF-ID reader (S 2500 ). In more detail, the second antenna  21  illustrated in  FIG. 3  communicates with the RF-ID of the mailing object, and thereby the data receiving unit  105  receives the fixed information from mailing object. Then, the second processing unit  95  performs processing to provide the fixed information of the mailing object to the first processing unit  35  via the recording unit  106 , the second memory  52 , and the recording/reproducing unit  51 . The first processing unit  35  associates the mailing object UID read from the mailing object with an image or image group, according to designation from the user (S 2501 ). Then, the image capturing device accesses the server  42  via the first antenna  20  (S 2502 ). Thereby, the image capturing device registers, to the server  42 , the association information regarding the association between the mailing object UID and the image data stored in the server  42  (S 2503 ). 
     If the fixed information read from the mailing object includes an address of the image server or a URL including the address, then the processing is completed. On the other hand, if the fixed information read from the mailing object does not include an address of the image server or a URL including the address, the image capturing device sets a relay server ( FIG. 66 ). 
     In order to set a relay server, the image capturing device accesses the relay server (S 2510 ). In more detail, if the fixed information read from the mailing object includes an address of a relay server or a URL including the address, then the image capturing device accesses the relay server. Otherwise, the image capturing device accesses a relay server that is previously set for the image capturing device. 
     After accessing the relay server, the image capturing device sets, in a database of the relay server, association information regarding association between the mailing object UID and the server that is a redirection destination (transfer destination) (S 2511 ). Thereby, association between the mailing object UID and an address of the transfer destination is registered in the database of the relay server. 
     If the image capturing device does not have a RF-ID reader function and the mailing object is printed with a two-dimensional code or the like indicating information of the RF-ID reader, the image capturing device captures an image of the two-dimensional code using an image capturing unit to read information from the code so that the image capturing device can obtain the same information as the fixed information recorded in the RF-ID unit of the mailing object. The two-dimensional code may be a QR Code™, a PDF417, Veri Code, Maxi Code, or the like. Any other code can be used if the image capturing device can read information from the code by capturing an image of the code. In addition, the same advantages as described in the fifth embodiment can be produced by using a bar-code in a one-dimensional direction only, although a printing area is increased. 
       FIG. 67  is an example of the mailing object attached with a RF-ID unit  2520  and printed with a two-dimensional code  2521  indicating the same information as that recorded on the RF-ID unit  2520 . A flow of processing data when the two-dimensional code is read by the image capturing device is described with reference to the block diagram of  FIG. 3 . The two-dimensional code printed on the mailing object is captured by the image capturing unit  30 , then converted into an imaged by the video processing unit  31 , and provided to the first processing unit  35  via the recording/reproducing unit  32 . The first processing unit  35  analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and retrieves the information from the two-dimensional code. The information indicated by the two-dimensional code is basically the same as the information recorded in the RF-ID unit. The information indicated by the two-dimensional code includes at least the mailing object UID. 
     The following describes a flow of the processing from reading the information of the two-dimensional code to associating the information with an image or image group in the server with reference to  FIG. 68 . 
     Firstly, the image capturing unit captures an image of the two-dimensional code (S 2530 ). Then, it is determined whether or not the captured image is a two-dimensional code (S 2531 ). If the captured image is not a two-dimensional code, then error processing is performed (S 2532 ). Or, normal image capturing processing may be performed. On the other hand, if the captured image is a two-dimensional code, then the two-dimensional code is analyzed (S 2533 ). Thereby, information is read from the mailing object based on the result of the analysis (S 2534 ). After reading the fixed information from the mailing object, the image capturing device associates the mailing object UID with image data stored in the server (S 2535 ). Then, the image capturing device accesses the server (S 2536 ). Then, the image capturing device sets the association information to the server (S 2537 ). The Steps S 2535  to S 2537  are the same as the Steps S 2501  to S 2503  in  FIG. 65 . Here, if the readout information does not include an address of the image server or a URL including the address, then the image capturing device performs transfer setting to a relay server. The transfer setting to the relay server has been previously described with reference to  FIG. 66 . 
     As described above, by reading information from the two-dimensional bar-code printed on the mailing object, it is possible to complete to associate the information recorded on the RF-ID unit with image data stored in the server. 
     If the image capturing device does not have a RF-ID reader function and the mailing object is not printed with a code such as a two-dimensional code, the image capturing device can read information from the mailing object if the user manually inputs, to the image capturing device, the mailing object UID and the URL such as a sever address which are printed on the mailing object. The user inputs the information using buttons  7  to  15  illustrated in  FIG. 2 . In this aspect, the URL and the mailing object UID may be printed directly as a plane text or coded to be a code which the user easily inputs. 
     As described above, even if the image capturing device does not have a RF-ID reader function and the mailing object is not printed with a two-dimensional code, it is possible to associate the mailing object with image data stored in the server. 
     &lt;Image Reproducing and Viewing by Using RF-ID on Mailing Object&gt; 
     Next, the steps for viewing images stored in the server on the TV using the mailing object for which association is completed. 
       FIG. 69  is a flowchart of processing performed by the TV to read RF-ID from the mailing object and eventually access the image server. 
     When the user brings the mailing object into proximity of the RF-ID reader of the TV, the TV reads information of the RF-ID on the mailing object (S 2540 ). Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the readout information includes a sever address or a URL including the server address (S 2541 ). If the readout information includes a sever address or a URL including the sever address, then the TV accesses the designated server (S 2542 ). Then, the TV transmits the mailing object UID (S 2543 ). Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the server receiving the transmission is a relay server (S 2544 ). If the server is a relay server, then the relay server redirects to a server (the image sever) designated in the relay server (S 2547 ). Thereby, the TV accesses an image or image group in the image server (S 2548 ). On the other hand, if it is determined at S 2544  that the server receiving the transmission is the image server, then redirecting is not performed and access to the image server is performed (S 2548 ). Moreover, if it is determined at S 2541  that the readout information does not include a sever address, then the TV accesses a server set by a predetermined default (S 2545 ). Then, the TV transmits the mailing object UID to the default server (S 2546 ). The default server redirects to a server (the image server) designated in the default server (S 2547 ) to access the image server. 
     Here, if association between the mailing object UID and the designated server as a destination of the relay is not registered in a database of the relay or default server, the relay or default server redirects to an error page.  FIG. 70  is a flowchart of processing performed by the relay or default server after receiving the mailing object UID. When the relay or default server receives the mailing object UID (S 2550 ), the server searches its database for information regarding the mailing object UID (S 2551 ). Then, the relay or default server determines whether or not the database holds information regarding the mailing object UID (S 2552 ). If the database holds the information, then the relay or default server redirects to a server associated with the mailing object UID in the database (S 2554 ). On the other hand, if the database does not hold the information (in other words, if there is no association), then the relay or default server redirects to an error page (S 2553 ). 
     As described above, the mailing object having fixed information in the RF-ID is previously associated with image data stored in the image server. Thereby, when the mailing object with the association is presented to the TV, the user can view an image or image group in the server which is associated with the mailing object UID, without rewriting of the RF-ID of the mailing object. Therefore, even if the user is away from home and cannot rewrite the RF-ID of the mailing object, or even if the RF-ID of the mailing object is not rewritable, the user can associate images in the server with the mailing object. As a result, the user allows a person receiving the mailing object to view the images associated with the mailing object. 
     It should be noted that it has been described in the fifth embodiment that the mailing object UID is transmitted after accessing the server. However, it is also possible to generate a URL from the mailing object UID and the sever address recorded on the mailing object in order to access the server. In this aspect, it is possible to perform the access to the server and the transmission of the mailing object UID at the same time. 
     According to the fifth embodiment, even in an environment where the RF-ID cannot be rewritten, such as in a sight-seeing location, for example, the user can associate captured images with a post card and send the post card to a friend. Thereby, the friend receiving the post card presents the post card to a TV to view the images the user captured in the sight-seeing location. As explained above, even in an environment where the RF-ID cannot be rewritten, the user can create a mailing object associated with images in the server and then send the mailing object to a person to which the user desires to show the images. 
     If the image capturing device has a RF-ID writer function to rewrite the RF-ID of the mailing object, the processing is the same as processing performed by the TV for associating the mailing object with image data in the server, which will be described below in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, the processing is not described in the fifth embodiment. 
     Sixth Embodiment 
     In the sixth embodiment, the following configuration is described. The image capturing device captures images and uploads the images to the image server. Then, a user transmitting the images (hereinafter, referred to as a “sending user”) selects an image group from the images in the server. Information for accessing the selected image group is recorded in the RF-ID on the mailing object. The mailing object is mailed to a user receiving the images (hereinafter, referred to as a “receiving user”). The receiving user accesses the image group in the image server by using the RF-ID on the mailing object. 
       FIG. 71  is a schematic diagram of a configuration of an image transmission side according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention.  FIG. 72  is a schematic diagram of a configuration of an image receiving side according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. Here, the same reference numerals of  FIGS. 1 and 3  are assigned to the identical elements of  FIGS. 71 and 72 , so that the identical elements are not explained again below. 
     In  FIGS. 71 and 72 , a mailing object  3001  is a post card, envelope, or letter paper which is mailed from the image transmission side to the image receiving side. A RF-ID unit  3002  is a rewritable RF-ID. At least part of the RF-ID unit  302  is a rewritable memory unit  3003 . The RF-ID unit  3002  is attached to or incorporated into the mailing object  3001  in order to be sent to the image receiving side together with the mailing object. 
     As described in the prior embodiments, the memory unit  3003  in the RF-ID unit  3002  holds the medium identification information for identifying that the medium having the RF-ID unit  3002  is a mailing object. 
     Referring to  FIG. 72 , a TV  3045  is a TV display device provided in the image receiving side. The TV  3045  has the same function as that of the TV  45  in  FIG. 71  described in the prior embodiments. Like the TV  45  in  FIG. 71 , the TV  3045  includes a RF-ID reader/writer  3046  (corresponding to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  in  FIG. 71 ) and a display unit  3047  (corresponding to the display unit  110  in  FIG. 71 ). The TV  3045  is connected to the Internet  40  via a network connection means not shown. 
     Next, the processing performed by the above configuration is described. 
     &lt;Image Group Selecting and Mailing Object Writing by Image Transmission Side&gt; 
     In the image transmission side in  FIG. 71 , images captured by the image capturing device  1  are transmitted to a wireless access point via the second antenna  20  in the image capturing device  1  used for wireless communication, such as a wireless LAN or WiMAX. The images are recorded as the image data  50  onto the image server  42  via the internet  40 . Then, the image capturing device  1  is moved into proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  in order to establish connection with the TV  45  by wireless communication via the first antenna  21  of the image capturing device  1  used for RF-ID. The TV  45  obtains, from the image capturing device  1 , information for accessing the image data  50  in the image server  42 . Then, the TV  45  downloads the images of the image data  50  to be displayed on the display unit  110 . The above processing is the same as described in the prior embodiments. The above is just a summary. 
     Next, the sending user checks the images displayed on the display unit  110  of the TV  45  in order to set transmission image selection information indicating whether or not each of the images is to be transmitted to the receiving user (in other words, whether or not each of the images is to be permitted to be viewed by the receiving user). The sending user can set also restriction on display for the receiving user, utility form information such as a slide show and printing, which is described in the prior embodiments. The transmission image selection information and the utility form information are transmitted to and recorded onto the image server. The image server manages, as an image group, a set of images selected as transmission images in the transmission image selection information. 
     The following describes steps performed by the TV  45  for recording, onto the mailing object  3001 , information regarding the image group selected by the sending use, with reference to a flowchart of  FIG. 73 . 
     It is assumed that transmission images have been selected and an image group set with the utility form information has been generated. Under the assumption, the sending user brings the mailing object  3001  having the RF-ID unit  3002  into proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  in order to establish wireless communication between the RF-ID unit  3002  and the RF-ID reader/writer  46 . 
     When the TV  45  becomes able to communicate with the RF-ID unit  3002  on the mailing object  3001  via the RF-ID reader/writer  46 , the TV  45  reads information from the memory unit  3003  (S 3101 ). Then, the TV  45  determines whether or not the medium identification information indicates that the current communication partner is a mailing object (S 3102 ). If the current communication partner is a mailing object, then the TV  45  proceeds to steps for writing to the mailing object. Here, if it is determined at Step S 3102  that the current communication partner is not a mailing object, then the subsequent steps are not described here but the TV  45  proceeds to steps depending on a medium indicated by the medium identification information. 
     In order to write to the mailing object  3001 , first, the TV accesses the image server  42  via the internet  40  (S 3103 ). Thereby, the TV  45  obtains, from the image server  42 , image group designation information, such as a server URL and an image group address, for allowing the image receiving side to access the image group in the image server  42  (S 3104 ). 
     The TV  45  transmits the obtained image group designation information to the RF-ID unit  3002  on the mailing object  3001  via the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV  45  in order to write the image group designation information to the memory unit  3003  in the mailing object  3001 , and the RF-ID unit  3002  on the mailing object  3001  records the image group designation information to a rewritable region of the memory unit  3003  (S 3105 ). 
     As described above, the mailing object  3001  on which the image group designation information is recorded is mailed by the sending user to a user of the image receiving side. 
     &lt;Image Reproducing and Viewing by Image Receiving Side&gt; 
     Next, the image receiving side is described with reference to  FIG. 72  illustrating the schematic block diagram of the image receiving side and  FIG. 74  illustrating a flowchart of processing performed by the TV in the image receiving side. 
     Referring to  FIG. 72 , the receiving user receives the mailing object  3001  from the sending user. Then, the receiving user checks the RF-ID unit  3002  or characters or design indicated on the mailing object  3001  to determine whether the mailing object is incorporated with a means for accessing images. Here, the receiving user needs only to understand that the receiving user can access to the images by using the mailing object  3001 . The receiving user does not need to care about the image group designation information and the like in the RF-ID unit  3002 . 
     In order to reproduce and view the images, the receiving user brings the mailing object  3001  into proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer  3046  of the TV  3045  in the image receiving side so as to start viewing of the images. 
     If the RF-ID unit  3002  on the mailing object  3001  is in enough proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer  3046  of the TV  3045 , the RF-ID reader/writer  3046  supplies power to the RF-ID unit  3002  of the mailing object  3001  via antennas (not shown) of both the RF-ID reader/writer  3046  and the RF-ID unit  3002  in order to activate the RF-ID unit  3002 . Thereby, wireless communication between the TV  3045  and the RF-ID unit  3002  of the mailing object  3001  starts. When the wireless communication starts, the TV  3045  reads information from the memory unit  3003  of the RF-ID unit  3002  (S 3151 ). 
     A determination is made as to whether or not the medium identification information in the readout information indicates that the current communication partner is a mailing object (S 3152 ). If the current communication partner is a mailing object, then the TV  3045  proceeds to processing of reading the image group designated by the sending user from the image server  42 . 
     The access to the image server  42  makes it possible to generate an URL for accessing the image group in the image server  42  by using the image group designation information in the information read by the RF-ID unit  3002  at Step S 3151 , such as an image group address, and thereby to access the image server  42  via the internet  40  (S 3153 ). 
     The TV  3045  connected to the image server  42  at the above step obtains the images (the image group) which are permitted to be displayed, from among the image data  50  in the image server  42 , based on the transmission image selection information indicating the image group managed by the image server  42  (S 3154 ). Then, the TV  3045  displays the images on the display unit  110  (S 3155 ). 
     Furthermore, according to the transmission image selection information indicating the image group managed by the image server  42  and the utility form information, the receiving user can use functions of, for example, reproducing the images as a slide show, printing the images, and downloading the images to a recording medium (not shown) attached to the TV  3045  or connected to the outside. 
     In addition, for image printing, the user can print the images by the printer on a LAN (not shown), and also ask, via the internet  40 , a photograph print service provider to print the images. 
     As described above, with the above configuration according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention, the image group designation information is provided from the RF-ID unit  3002  on the mailing object  3001  to the TV  3045  in the image receiving side. Therefore, the receiving user does not need to input characters of a network access destination to obtain images, for example. In other words, the intuitive and simple operation of simply bringing the mailing object  3001  into proximity of the TV  3045  enables the receiving user to access the image data  50  stored in the image server  42 . As a result, the receiving user can obtain images from the image server, without knowledge of complicated operations such as menu selection and character inputs. 
     It should be noted that it has been described in the sixth embodiment that the mailing object  3001  is previously attached or incorporated with the RF-ID unit  3002 . However, the mailing object may be a general post card or letter paper attached with an independent RF-ID unit  3002  that is provided separately. In this aspect, the above effect can be produced by later attaching the RF-ID unit to the mailing object. This produces further advantages that the sending user can use the sixth embodiment for any desired mailing object. 
     It should also be noted that, if the access to the image server  42  requires a login operation, a server login ID and a server login password may also be written at Step S 3105  into the rewritable region of the memory unit  3003  in the RF-ID unit  3002  on the mailing object  3001 . Here, it is desirable that the login ID and the login password are not plane texts but are written in an encrypted format for security. 
     It should also be noted that it has been described in the sixth embodiment that the TV  45  in the image transmission side performs selection of transmission images, setting of the utility form information, and writing of the image group designation information to the RF-ID unit  3002  on the mailing object  3001 . However, it is also possible that the image capturing device  1  having a RF-ID reader/writer function performs setting of the transmission image selection information and the utility form information and writing of the image group designation information, in order to produce the same effect as described above for obtaining images by the simple operation of the receiving user. 
     Variation of Sixth Embodiment 
       FIGS. 75A and 75B  are flowcharts of processing performed by the TV  45  in the image transmission side according to a variation of the sixth embodiment of the present invention. Here, the same step numerals of  FIG. 73  are assigned to the identical steps of  FIGS. 75A and 75B , so that the identical steps are not explained again below. 
     According to the variation of the sixth embodiment, the mailing object UID is previously recorded on the memory unit  3003  of the RF-ID unit  3002  on the mailing object  3001 . Here, it is desirable to record the mailing object UID on a ROM region of the memory unit  3003  in order to reduce risks of data damages or data manipulation caused by accidental operations.  FIG. 76  illustrates a diagram of an example of a data structure of the memory unit  3003 . 
     The TV  45  in the image transmission side sets the transmission image selection information and the utility form information into the above-described RF-ID unit in order to designate an image group in the image serve  42 . In this situation, the TV  45  performs processing according to the flowchart of  FIG. 75A . 
     The TV  45  reads information from the RF-ID unit  3002  on the mailing object  3001  (S 3101 ) and determines based on the medium identification information that the communication partner is a mailing object (S 3102 ). After that, the TV  45  obtains the mailing object UID (S 3201 ). The mailing object UID may be the information read at Step S 3101  or be newly obtained from the RF-ID unit  3002 . Next, the TV  45  accesses the image server  42  via the Internet  40  (S 3202 ). The TV  45  transmits the mailing object UID to the image server  42 , and thereby the image server  42  associates with the transmitted mailing object UID with an address of the image group and then stores the manages information of the association (association information) (S 3203 ). 
     The TV  45  obtains, from the image server  42 , the server URL enabling the image receiving side to access the image server  42  (S 3204 ). The obtained server URL is written into the rewritable region of the memory unit  3003  in the RF-ID unit  3002  on the mailing object  3001  via the RF-ID reader/writer  46  (S 3205 ). 
     As described above, if the image server associates the image group with the mailing object UID and then stores and manages the association information, the utility form information can be managed separately for each mailing object UID. Therefore, in the situation where there are a plurality of the mailing objects  3001 , it is possible to change an operation for receiving images for each mailing object, namely, for each different receiving user. 
     If, in the configuration described in the sixth embodiment, the image receiving side designates an image group for each mailing object, generates a different image group address for each designated image group, and writes the image group address into a corresponding RF-ID unit, the image transmission side needs complicated operations for designating image groups separately although the same advantages as those of the sixth embodiment can be obtained. 
     Therefore, when the sending user selects the same transmission image group for a plurality of mailing objects, it is preferable that the sending user records and manages different utility form information for each mailing object by using the mailing object UID as described earlier. Thereby, it is possible to reduce operations of the sending user, and to reduce a memory capacity of the image server because it is not necessary to hold pieces of the transmission image selection information separately, thereby producing further advantages. 
     The processing of  FIG. 75B  differs from the processing of  FIG. 75A  in that Steps S 3204  and S 3205  are replaced by Steps S 3214  and  3215 . At Step  3214 , the TV  45  obtains an image group address in addition to the server URL. At Step S 3215 , the TV  45  writes the image group address together with the server URL into the memory unit  3003  of the RF-ID unit  3002 . 
     Thereby, when the image receiving side is to receive images, the image receiving side accesses the designated image group in the image server  42 . Here, the access is permitted only when the mailing object UID of the image group stored and managed in the image server matches the mailing object UID used by the receiving server requesting the access. Thereby, security is increased. 
     Conventionally, if the user intends to show images, on a large screen display device (apparatus), to a different user living in a remote location, the user in the remote location needs to learn operations of the device, an operation acquirer has to go to the remote location to operate the device, or the display device in the remote location should be remotely controlled. However, like the fourth embodiment, the system according to the sixth embodiment enables such a user in a remote location to easily view images by a simple operation, for example, by bringing a physical medium such as a post card with RF-ID into proximity of a display device. In the fourth embodiment, generation of the post card with RF-ID and writing of data into the RF-ID is not performed by the user (who captures and sends images or who views the images), but by a service provider. In the sixth embodiment, however, the sending user in the image transmission side performs generation of the post card with RF-ID and writing of data into the RF-ID. 
     Seventh Embodiment 
     In the seventh embodiment of the present invention, a method of changing setting for a device (apparatus) by using a RF-ID card according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention is described. 
     The following describes a method of changing setting for a recorder by using a RF-ID card with reference to  FIGS. 77 and 78 . 
       FIG. 77  is a block diagram of a structure of a recorder according to the seventh embodiment. 
     A recorder  2000  records broadcast contents obtained by a tuner  2001 , onto a Hard Disk Drive (HDD)  2008  or an optical disk drive  2009 . In addition, the recorder  200  reproduces, on the TV  45 , the recorded contents or video/audio contents ready by the optical disk drive  2009 . 
     An input signal processing unit  2002  includes an Analog/Digital (A/D) converter, a decoder, and an encoder, in order to convert input video/audio signals into data in a predetermined video/audio format. The A/D converter converts analog signals obtained by the tuner  2001  into digital signals. The decoder decodes scrambled contents. The encoder converts data into data in a video format according to MPEG-2, for example. 
     An output signal processing unit  2003  includes a Digital/Analog (D/A) converter and a decoder in order to provide video and audio to the TV  45 . The D/A converter converts digital signals to analog signals. The decoder decodes data in a data format according to MPEG-2, for example. 
     A system control unit  2004  controls operations of the recorder  2000 . The system control unit  2004  includes a setting information processing unit  2011  that switches setting for the recorder  2000 . The setting information processing unit  2011  will be described in detail later. 
     A memory  2005  holds recorder ID  2012  for identifying the recorder  2000 , and setting information  2013  for the recorder  2000 . 
     An operation input unit  2006  receives inputs from a user using buttons of a remote controller, a front panel, or the like (not shown). 
     A communication unit  2007  connects the recorder  2000  to the server  42  via the internet or a LAN. 
     The HDD  2008  has an area in which recorded contents and content lists provided from the input signal processing unit  2002  are stored. 
     The optical disk drive  2009  is a disk drive that performs recording or reproducing for an optical disk such as a Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) or a Blue-ray Disc. The optical disk drive  2009  records recorded contents and content lists provided from the input signal processing unit  2002  onto the optical disc, and reproduces video/audio contents in the optical disk. 
     The input signal processing unit  2002 , the output signal processing unit  2003 , the system control unit  2004 , the HDD  2008 , and the optical disk drive  2009  of the recorder  2000  are connected one another via a bus  2010 . 
     Here, the setting information processing unit  2011  is described in more detail below. 
     According to the setting information  2013  stored in the memory  2005 , the setting information processing unit  2011  sets displaying of a menu screen, a recording/reproducing mode, chapters of recorded contents, TV program recommendation based on user&#39;s preference, and the like regarding the recorder  2000 . In more detail, the setting information processing unit  2011  reads an identifier indicating, for example, “menu screen background color: Black” from the setting information  2013 , and thereby issues a request for menu screen display to the output signal processing unit  2003  together with an instruction for displaying a background of a menu screen in black. 
     Here, the setting information  2013  may be stored in an external storage unit such as a SD card not shown. Especially, it is efficient to store, in the HDD  2008 , the setting information regarding chapters of recorded contents stored in the HDD  2008 , information having a large size, and the like. 
     Conventionally, the setting information  2013  has been set prior to purchase of the recorder  2000 , or set by operations of the user using the operation input unit  2006 . In the seventh embodiment of the present invention, however, the setting information  2013  can be changed based on information obtained from the RF-ID reader/writer  46 . 
       FIG. 78  is a block diagram of a structure of the RF-ID card from which information is read by the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the recorder  2000  to be used to change the settings of the recorder  2000 . 
     The RF-ID card  2100  includes a memory  2101 , the antenna (second antenna)  21 , the power supply unit (second power supply unit)  91 , the data receiving unit  105 , the data transfer unit  108 , a processing unit  2102 , the recording unit  106 , and the reproducing unit  107 . 
     When the RF-ID card  2100  is moved to bring the antenna  21  into proximity of the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the recorder  2000 , the RF-ID reader/writer  46  supplies power to the power supply unit  91  via the antenna  21  in order to provide power to the respective units in the RF-ID card  2100 . 
     Information regarding data recording/reproducing is read from the RF-ID card  2100  to the recorder  2000  via the RF-ID reader/writer  46 . In the recorder  2000 , the information is received by the data receiving unit  105  and then provided to the processing unit  2102 . 
     In the RF-ID card  2100 , the processing unit  2102  causes the recording unit  106  to record information onto the memory  2101 , and causes the reproducing unit  107  to reproduce the information stored in the memory  2101 . 
     The data transfer unit  108  transmits the information provided from the processing unit  2102  to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the recorder  2000  via the antenna  21 . 
     The memory  2101  in the RF-ID card  2100  stores the UID  75 , the medium identification information  111 , and apparatus operation information  2103 . 
     The UID  75  and the medium identification information  111  are used to identify the RF-ID card  2100 . 
     The UID  75  is identification unique to the RF-ID card  2100 . 
     The medium identification information  111  holds an identifier indicating that the RF-ID card  2100  is a card. 
     The apparatus operation information  2103  holds pieces of information regarding an apparatus (device) to perform an operation using the RF-ID card  2100  and regarding the operation. The following describes the pieces of information included in the apparatus operation information  2103 . 
     Operation apparatus identification information  2104  indicates a type of the apparatus (device) to perform the operation using the RF-ID card  2100 . The operation apparatus identification information  2104  indicates the type by an identifier in the similar manner as described for the medium identification information  111 . In  FIG. 78 , the operation apparatus identification information  2104  holds an identifier indicating that a type of the apparatus to perform the operation is a recorder. 
     Target apparatus information  2105  holds information so that only a specific apparatus (device) can perform the operation using the RF-ID card  2100 . In the example of  FIG. 78 , the target apparatus information  2105  holds recorder ID  2012  for identifying the recorder  2000 . It should be noted that, if an apparatus that can use the RF-ID card  2100  according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention is limited, for instance, if only recorders can use the RF-ID card  2100 , the operation apparatus identification information  2104  and the target apparatus information  2105  may not be included in the apparatus operation information  2103 . In addition, if the setting information processing unit  2011  in the recorder  2000  has a structure to change settings of the recorder  2000  by using the information in cards, the medium identification information  111  may not be included in the memory  2101 . 
     Operation instruction information  2106  indicates details of the operation to be performed by the apparatus designated in the apparatus operation information  2103 . In the example of  FIG. 78 , the operation instruction information  2106  includes information  2109  indicating that setting is to be changed (setting change), information  2110  indicating a target for which the setting change is to be performed (change target information), and information  2111  indicating that communication is to be executed in obtaining the setting information (communication execution). 
     It should be noted that the operation instruction information  2106  is not limited for a single operation, but may include plural pieces of information for plural operations, or may be a program in which the plural operations are combined. 
     Communication information  2107  is information regarding a server or the like. When the recorder  2000  is instructed based on the operation instruction information  2106  to access the server or the like to obtain data, the recorder  2000  accesses the server or the like using the communication information  2107 . In the example of  FIG. 78 , the communication information  2107  includes a URL  2112 , login ID  2113 , and a password  2114  of the server or the like. The URL  2112  may be replaced by an IP address. If the recorder  2000  is to access a different apparatus (device) via an office or home network, the URL  2112  may be information for identifying the apparatus, such as a MAC address. 
     The following describes processing by which the recorder  2000  registers the setting information from the recorder  2000  to a server by using the RF-ID card  2100  with reference to  FIG. 79 . 
     At Step  2201 , when the recorder  2000  receives an input from the user using the operation input unit  2006 , the setting information processing unit  2011  causes the output signal processing unit  2003  to issue, to the TV  45 , a request for message display. In response to the request, the TV  45  displays a message “Please present a RF-ID card” on its screen at Step  2202 . The message may be displayed on a console (not shown) of the recorder  2000 . It is also possible that the recorder  2000  requests the user for authentication such as a password or biometric authentication when the user performs the input operation, and after the authentication, proceeds to the setting registration processing. It is further possible that the recorder  2000  does not request the TV  45  for the message display, but the user needs to present the RF-ID card  2100  to the RF-ID reader/writer  46  when using the recorder  2000  in order to perform steps of and after  2203 . It is still further possible that an inquiry message is displayed to enquire where the setting information  2013  is to be registered, and the setting information  2013  is registered into the location the user designates. For example, the setting information  2013  may be registered into the RF-ID card  2200 , or into a sever different from the server  42 . 
     At Step  2203 , the recorder  2000  detects the RF-ID card. After that, mutual authentication between the recorder  2000  and the RF-ID card  2100  is performed at Step  2204 . 
     If the mutual authentication at Step  2204  is successful, then the processing proceeds to Step  2205 . Otherwise, the processing returns to Step  2202  to repeat the detection of the RF-ID card. 
     At Step  2205 , the recorder  2000  obtains the UID  75  from the memory  2101  in the RF-ID card  2100 . 
     At Step  2206 , the recorder  2000  obtains the communication information  2107  from the memory  2101  in the RF-ID card  2100 . If the memory  2101  in the RF-ID card  2100  does not hold the communication information, the recorder  2000  may issue, to the user, a request for providing the communication information. Moreover, if the user instructs at Step  2201  the recorder  2000  to register the setting information  2013  into a location that is not designated in the RF-ID card  2100 , Step  2206  is not performed. If plural pieces of the communication information  2107  are stored in the RF-ID card  2100 , it is possible to display a list of the plural pieces of the communication information  2107  from which the user can select a desired one. 
     At Step  2207 , the recorder  2000  gets the recorder ID  2012  and the setting information  2013  from the memory  2005 . The setting information  2013  is not limited to information currently stored, but may be information inputted by the user in the setting registration processing. 
     At Step  2208 , in the recorder  2000 , the setting information processing unit  2011  issues, to the communication unit  2007 , a request for access to a server or the like having the URL  2112  included in the obtained communication information  2107 . The communication unit  2007  accesses the server using the login ID  2113  and the password  2114 . 
     At Step  2209 , it is determined whether or not the access to the server  42  is successful. If the access is successful, then the processing proceeds to Step  2210 . Otherwise, the setting registration processing is terminated. 
     At Step  2210 , the recorder  2000  transmits, to the server  42 , the UID  75 , and the recorder ID  2012  and the setting information  2013  which are obtained from the memory  2005 , thereby registering the setting information  2013  into the server  42 . 
     At Step  2211 , the recorder  2000  generates the operation instruction information  2106 , using (a) the operation designated at Step  2201  or a storage location of the setting information  2013  selected at Step  2201 , (b) the setting information  2013  obtained at Step  2207 , and (c) the communication information  2107  obtained at Step  2206 . 
     At Step  2212 , the recorder  2000  performs the same step as Step  2202  to cause the TV  45  to displays a message “Please present a RF-ID card” on its screen. 
     At Step  2213 , the recorder  2000  detects the RF-ID card. After that, mutual authentication between the recorder  2000  and the RF-ID card  2100  is performed at Step  2214 . 
     If the mutual authentication at Step  2214  is successful, then the processing proceeds to Step  2215 . Otherwise, the processing returns to Step  2212  to repeat the detection of the RF-ID card  2100 . 
     At Step  2215 , the recorder  2000  obtains the UID from the memory  2101  in the RF-ID card  2100 . 
     At Step  2216 , it is determined whether or not the UID  75  obtained at Step  2205  matches the UID obtained at Step  2215 . If the UIDs match, then the processing proceeds to Step  2217 . Otherwise, the processing returns to Step  2211  to repeat the detection of the RF-ID card  2100 . 
     At Step  2217 , the recorder  2000  transmits, to the RF-ID card  2100 , the operation apparatus identification information  2104  (not shown in  FIG. 77 ) stored in the memory  2005 , the recorder ID  2012 , the operation instruction information  2106  generated at Step  2211 , and the communication information  2107 , in order to record (register) these pieces of information onto the memory  2101  of the RF-ID card  2100 . As a result, the setting registration processing is completed. 
     Referring to  FIG. 80 , the setting information registered into the server  42  by the above-described processing of  FIG. 79  is described. 
     Each of the setting information registered in the server  42  is hereinafter referred to as setting information  2250 . Each setting information  2250  is registered in association with a corresponding one of the UID  75  and a corresponding one of the target apparatus information  2105 . In more detail, the setting information  2250  holds an identifier indicating, for example, “menu screen background color: Black”. In the example of  FIG. 80 , a letter “A” or “B” at the end of pieces of the setting information  2250  indicates that the setting is different from another. 
     It is also possible that plural pieces of setting information are registered for a single UID such as UID 0001  in  FIG. 80 . It is further possible that a single piece of the target apparatus information  2105 , such as REC-0001, is registered for plural pieces of setting information associated with different UID. Here, the setting information may include the change target information  2110 . 
     Next, referring to  FIG. 81 , the apparatus operation information  2103  registered in the memory  2101  of the RF-ID card  2100  by the above-described processing of  FIG. 79  is described. 
     It is assumed in the example of  FIG. 81  that the UID  75  designates “UID 0001 ” and the medium identification information  111  designates a “card”. 
     The apparatus operation information  2103  includes sets each including the operation apparatus identification information  2104 , the target apparatus information  2105 , the operation instruction information  2106 , and the communication information  2107 . Here, it is possible that the communication information  2107  is not registered as being information not related to the other pieces of information. For instance, it is possible that only a piece of the communication information  2107  is registered to always access the same server in using the RF-ID card  2100 . 
     The operation instruction information  2106  includes instruction detail information  2260 , instruction target information  2261 , and communication execution information  2262 . The instruction detail information  2260  holds an identifier indicating an operation to be performed by the device designated by the target apparatus information  2105 . The instruction target information  2261  holds an identifier indicating a setting, such as a menu screen mode or recording mode, of the apparatus to perform the operation, such as REC- 0001 . The communication execution information  2262  holds an identifier indicating whether or not communication is to be executed in performing the operation indicated in the instruction detail information  2260 . It should be noted that the apparatus operation information  2103  may include only the communication information  2107  if the operating to be performed using the RF-ID card  2100  is limited to changing of setting. 
     The communication information  2107  holds a URL, login ID, a password, and the like for accessing a server that is a partner of communication, if the communication execution information  2262  indicates that the communication is to be executed. 
     Next, the description is given for processing of changing the setting of the recorder  2000  by using the RF-ID card  2100  with reference to  FIG. 82 .  FIG. 82  is a flowchart of processing by which the setting information processing unit  2011  in the recorder  2000  updates the setting information  2013  by using the RF-ID card  2100 . 
     First, at Step  2301 , the recorder  2000  detects the RF-ID card  2100 . After that, at Step  2302 , the recorder  2000  performs mutual authentication with the RF-ID card  2100 . 
     At Step  2303 , the recorder  2000  determines whether or not the mutual authentication is successful. If the mutual authentication is successful, then the processing proceeds to Step  2304 . Otherwise, the setting update processing is terminated. 
     At Step  2304 , the recorder  2000  obtains the UID  75  and the apparatus operation information  2103  from the memory  2101  of the RF-ID card  2100 . 
     At Step  2305 , the recorder  2000  searches the apparatus operation information  2103  for the operation apparatus identification information  2104 . At Step  2306 , the recorder  2000  compares the searched-out operation apparatus identification information  2104  to apparatus identification information (not shown) in the memory  2005  of the recorder  2000 . 
     If it is determined at Step  2306  that the operation device identification information  2104  matches the device identification information, then the processing proceeds to Step  2307 . Otherwise, the processing proceeds to Step  2314 . 
     At Step  2314 , the recorder  2000  determines whether or not all pieces of the operation apparatus identification information  2104  in the apparatus operation information  2103  have been examined. If all pieces of the operation apparatus identification information  2104  have been examined, then the setting update processing is terminated. 
     At Step  2307 , the recorder  2000  searches the device operation information  2103  for the target apparatus information  2105 . At Step  2308 , the recorder  2000  compares the searched-out target apparatus information  2105  to the recorder ID  2012  in the memory  2005  of the recorder  2000 . 
     If it is determined at Step  2308  that the target device information  2105  matches the recorder ID  2012 , then the processing proceeds to Step  2309 . Otherwise, the setting update processing is terminated. 
     At Step  2309 , the recorder  2000  obtains the operation instruction information  2106  associated with the target device information  2105  from the apparatus operation information  2103 . 
     At Step  2310 , the recorder  2000  obtains the operation instruction information  2107  associated with the target apparatus information  2105  from the apparatus operation information  2103 . 
     At Step  2311 , the recorder  2000  determines, based on the instruction detail information  2260  in the operation instruction information  2106  in the device operation information  2103 , that an operation to be performed is updating of setting, and thereby accesses the server  42  to obtain the setting information  2250  from the server  42 . The step will be described in more detail with reference to  FIG. 83 . 
     At Step  2312 , the recorder  2000  determines whether or not the obtainment of the setting information  2250  is successful. If the obtainment of the setting information  2250  is successful, then the processing proceeds to Step  2313 . At Step  2313 , the setting information processing unit  2011  in the recorder  2000  updates the setting information  2013  in the memory  2005  of the recorder  2000  by the setting information  2250 . On the other hand, if the obtainment of the setting information  2250  fails, then the setting update processing is terminated. 
     The following describes Step  2311  in  FIG. 82  in more detail with reference to  FIG. 83 .  FIG. 82  is a flowchart of processing by which the setting information processing unit  2011  in the recorder  2000  accesses the server  42  to obtain the setting information  2250  from the server  42 . 
     At Step  2351 , the communication unit  2007  in the recorder  2000  accesses the server  42  having the URL  2112  included in the communication information  2107 . 
     At Step  2352 , the setting information processing unit  2011  provides the communication unit  2007  with the login ID  2113  and the password  2114  which are included in the communication information  2107 , and thereby the communication unit  2007  logins to the server  42 . 
     At Step  2353 , it is determined whether or not authentication (namely, the login) is successful. If the authentication is successful, then the processing proceeds to Step  2354 . Otherwise, the processing is terminated as being failure of obtaining the setting information  2250 . 
     At Step  2354 , the recorder  2000  searches the server  42  for UID. At Step  2355 , the recorder  2000  determines whether or not the searched-out UID matches the UID  75  obtained at Step  2304  in  FIG. 82 . If the searched-out UID matches the UID  75 , then the processing proceeds to Step  2356 . Otherwise, the processing returns to Step  2354  to repeat the search for UID until it is determined at Step  2359  that all pieces of UID in the server  42  have been examined. If it is determined at Step  2359  that all pieces of UID in the server  42  have been examined, then the processing is terminated as being failure of obtaining the setting information  2250 . 
     At Step  2356 , the recorder  2000  searches the server  42  for the target apparatus information associated with the UID  75 . At Step  2357 , the recorder  2000  determines whether or not the searched-out target apparatus information matches the target apparatus information  2105  obtained at Step  2305  in  FIG. 82 . If the searched-out target apparatus information matches the target apparatus information  2105 , then the processing proceeds to Step  2358 . On the other hand, if the searched-out target apparatus information does not match the target apparatus information  2105 , then the processing proceeds to Step  2358 , then the processing returns to Step  2354  to repeat the search for the target apparatus information until it is determined at Step  2360  that all pieces of the target apparatus information in the server  42  have been examined. If it is determined at Step  2360  that all pieces of the target apparatus information have been examined, then the processing is terminated as being failure of obtaining the setting information  2250 . 
     At Step  2258 , the recorder  2000  obtains, from the server  42 , the setting information  2250  associated with the UID  75  and the target apparatus information  2105 . 
     As described above, the use of the RF-ID card  2100  enables the user to perform setting of the recorder  2000  without complicated operations. Even if the user is not familiar with operations of apparatuses (devices) the user can easily change the setting of the recorder  2000  by using the RF-ID card  2100 . Moreover, the operation executable for the recorder  2000  by using the RF-ID card  2100  is not limited to the setting change. For example, the instruction detail information can designate an operation of obtaining a list of recorded contents in the recorder. In this case, the list is registered in the RF-ID card or the server. Thereby, the user can check the list on a different apparatus (device) other than the recorder by using the RF-ID card. 
     In addition, the RF-ID card holding information illustrated in the  FIG. 84  allows the user to perform timer recording in the recorder simply by presenting the RF-ID card to the recorder. In more detail, if the change target information associated with Index  1  in  FIG. 84  is applied, the recorder can perform timer recording according to setting of “TV program ID” and “recording mode” designated in the instruction target information, simply by presenting the RF-ID card to the recorder. Thereby, the timer recording can be performed without accessing the server. In addition, if the change target information associated with Index  2  in  FIG. 84  is applied, the recorder can perform timer recording according to “TV program code” designated in the instruction target information, simply by presenting the RF-ID card to the recorder. Here, the recorder can obtain, from the server, (a) program ID or a start time and end time, and (b) channel information. As a result, the time recording can be performed according to the setting of the “recording mode”. 
     Furthermore, it is also possible that “recommended TV program” is designated in the instruction target information in the RF-ID card. After presenting the RF-ID card to the recorder, the recorder obtains ID of the recommended TV program from the server. Thereby, the recorder can obtain a content of the recommended TV program from the server and performs timer recording of the content. The above functions may be used as service for providing the RF-ID card as being a supplement of a TV program guide magazine, for example. This RF-ID card can reduce user&#39;s bothersome procedures for timer recording. For another service, it is also possible in the RF-ID card that the instruction detail information designates a download operation, the instruction target information designates video or software in a version where a function is restricted, and the communication information designates a URL of a download website. Such RF-ID cards are provided for free to users. The users can use the video or software as trial, and purchase it if the user likes it. 
     It should be noted that the description in the seventh embodiment has been given for the recorder, but the present invention is not limited to the recorder. 
     For example, the seventh embodiment of the present invention may be implemented as a TV having a reader/writer for the RF-ID card and the setting information processing unit. The TV can register, as the change target information, (a) setting of an initial display channel or initial sound volume immediately after power-on, (b) setting of child lock for excluding adult broadcasts and violence scenes, (c) setting of zapping for favorite channels, (d) setting of contrast and brightness of a screen, (e) setting of a language, (f) setting of a continuous use time, and the like, simply by presenting the RF-ID card to the TV. Thereby, the TV can perform settings according to usability. Furthermore, the seventh embodiment may be implemented also as a vehicle navigation system having a reader/writer for the RF-ID card and the setting information processing unit. In this aspect, the instruction detail information designates “highlighted display” and the instruction target information designates “landmark information”. Thereby, by using the RF-ID card, the vehicle navigation system can display the designated landmark as being highlighted, by changing a character font, character size, or color. The landmark information may be obtained from a server. In this case, the RF-ID cards, on which the apparatus operation information illustrated in  FIG. 85  is recorded, are offered to users at rest areas or interchanges on expressways, sightseeing spots, and the like. Thereby, the RF-ID cards allow vehicle navigation systems of the users to display a recommended landmark, where an even is currently held for example, as highlighted display. In addition, the seventh embodiment may be implemented as a laptop having a reader/writer for the RF-ID card and the setting information processing unit. The laptop can designate (a) setting of a resolution of a screen, (b) setting of a position of an icon or the like on a display, (c) setting of a wallpaper, (d) setting of a screen saver, (e) setting of start-up of resident software, (f) setting of employed peripheral devices, (g) setting of a dominant hand for a mouse or the like, and the like, by simply by presenting the RF-ID card to the laptop. Therefore, if the user brings the RF-ID card in a business trip, the user can operate a different personal computer at the business trip location, with the same settings as those the user usually uses. The seventh embodiment may be implemented further as a game machine having a reader/writer for the RF-ID card and the setting information processing unit. The user visiting a friend&#39;s house uses a RF-ID card in which the instruction detail information designates setting change. By presenting the RF-ID card to the game machine at the friend&#39;s house, the user can change (a) setting of positions of keys on a remote controller and (b) setting of a structure of a menu screen. In addition, the user can save data in the game machine by using the RF-ID card. Moreover, the following service using the RF-ID card is also possible. The RF-ID card holds the instruction detail information designating a download operation. Such RF-ID cards are offered to users as supplements of magazines or the like. The users can use the RF-ID cards to download an additional scenario, a rare item, or the like. 
     The RF-ID card according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention can be also applied to home appliances connected to one another via a network. In this aspect, the RF-ID card previously holds (a) setting of a temperature of an air conditioner, (b) setting for a temperature of hot water in a bus tab, and the like, depending of the user&#39;s preference. Thereby, the user presents the RF-ID card to RF-ID reader/writers in the user&#39;s house so as to manage settings of the home appliances at once. In addition, the RF-ID card may designate an operation for checking foods stored in a refrigerator. Here, information of the foods which is registered in the refrigerator is obtained by using RF-ID tags previously attached to the foods. Or, video of the inside of the refrigerator is captured by using camcorder. Thereby, the user can check a list of the foods on a TV by using a RF-ID reader/writer to obtain information from the RF-ID card. As described above, the RF-ID card according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention can be applied for various usages. It is also possible to combine (a) RF-ID cards for designating apparatuses (such as four different cards indicating “heating appliance”, “cooling appliance”, “stove”, and “fan”, respectively) and (b) RF-ID cards for designating setting of the apparatuses (such as three different cards indicating “weak”, “medium”, and “strong”, respectively). It is further possible that such RF-ID cards having the apparatus-designating and setting-designating functions are integrated into a single RF-ID card. And, the settings of the apparatuses can be customized. 
     Although only some exemplary embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail above, those skilled in the art will be readily appreciate that many modifications are possible in the exemplary embodiments without materially departing from the novel teachings and advantages of the present invention. Accordingly, all such modifications are intended to be included within the scope of the present invention. 
     For example, if two users (hereinafter, referred to as a user A and a user B) exchanges photographs between them, the user B can view photographs taken by the user A by the following method. The user B has a TV having an apparatus ID and a relay server having a URL. The apparatus ID and the URL are previously stored in a RF-ID (hereinafter, referred to as a RF tag B). The user B generates information (hereinafter, referred to as device generation information B) from the information in the RF tag B and stores the generated device generation information B into the RF tag B. The user B transmits the device generation information B to the user A via e-mail or the like. The user A stores a URL of a server holding the photographs into the relay server, in association with the received device generation information B. Thereby, the user B simply presents the RF tab B to a RF-ID reader/writer of the TV in order to view the photographs taken by the user A. Here, it is assumed that the RF tag B previously holds an e-mail address of the user A. When the user B simply presents the RF tag B to the RF-ID reader/writer of the TV, the device generation information B may be automatically written into the TV and a notification of the device generation information B may be automatically transmitted to the e-mail address of the user A. Thereby, even if the user B is not familiar with operations of the devices, the user B can exchange photographs with the user A. Furthermore, it is also possible that the user A encrypts at least one of a URL, login ID, and a password by using the device generation information B and sends, to the user B, a post card with RF-ID on which the encrypted information is recorded. This makes it possible to restrict an apparatus permitted to display the photographs, only to the TV of the user B. It is further possible that the user A sends, to the user B, a post card with two RF-IDs that are a RF-ID for sending and a RF-ID for returning. In this aspect, the user A records, onto the RF-ID for returning, device generation information A that is previously generated by a TV or the like of the user A. This can restrict an apparatus permitted to display photographs stored by the user B. More specifically, when the user B receives the post card with the two RF-IDs and returns the post card to the user A, the user B encrypts, by using the device generation information A, a URL, a login ID, or a password of a server storing the photographs of the user B, and then records the encrypted data onto the RF-ID for returning. Or, when the user B stores the photographs, the user B associates the photographs with the device generation information A. Therefore, an apparatus permitted to display photographs stored by the user B can be restricted. 
     Moreover, the mailing object UID of the RF-ID on the mailing object may be a combination of (a) a group ID that is common among a plurality of mailing objects and (b) a UID unique that is unique to each mailing object. Thereby, image data in the server is associated not with every mailing object UID but with the group ID. Therefore, when post cards with RF-ID on which the image data is associated with a plurality of targets are mailed, it is possible to eliminate user&#39;s bothersome procedures for performing registration for each of the UIDs. It is also possible that the image data stored in the server in association with the group ID is switched to be permitted or inhibited to be viewed for each of the UID. Thereby, if, for example, a printer prints destination addresses on the mailing objects, the printer having a RF-ID reader/writer reads the UIDs on the mailing objects and thereby associates the UIDs with addresses in an address list, respectively. Thereby, the address list can be used to manage the permission/inhibition of viewing the images stored in the server. 
     It is also possible that a post card or card is provided with a plurality of RF-ID tags having various different functions. In this aspect, the single post card or card can switch the functions by disconnecting communication of a part of the RF-ID tags which are not currently used. For example, a post card has (a) an upper portion on which a RF-ID tag having a function of displaying a slide show of photographs is attached and (b) a lower portion on which a RF-ID tag having a function of reproducing video. A user can switch the display function or the reproduction function, by selecting the upper portion or the lower portion to be brought into proximity of a RF-ID reader/writer. The RF-ID tags having different functions can be provided to a front side and a back side of the post card. It is also possible that covers made of a material blocking communications are applied on the RF-ID tags so that the user can select a RF-ID tag to be used by opening the cover on it. 
     It is further possible that photographs are stored in a plurality of servers, and a RF-ID tag holds URLs of the servers. Thereby, a user can access the servers to obtain the photographs to display them in a list. 
     Moreover, the RF-ID reader/writer may be provided not only to an apparatus (device) such as the TV or the recorder but also to the input means such as a remote controller for operating the apparatus. For instance, if a plurality of apparatuses are connected to one another via a network, an input means for collectively operating the apparatuses may be provided with a RF-ID reader/writer to operate the respective apparatuses. Furthermore, an input means such as a remote controller may be provided with an individual authentication means for biometric authentication such as fingerprint authentication or face authentication, password, or the like. In this aspect, the input means having a RF-ID reader/writer exchanges data with a RF-ID tag, only when the individual authentication is successful. It is also possible that the individual authentication information is previously stored in the RF-ID tag, and individual authentication is performed by the apparatus or the remote controller using the RF-ID tag. 
     It should be noted that the definition of the term “RF-ID” frequently used in the description of the present invention is not limited to narrow meaning. In general, the term “RF-ID” narrowly refers to a “tag having a nonvolatile memory on which identification information is recorded”. RF-ID having a dual interface function or a security function seems commonly called as a “IC card” or the like. However, in the embodiments of the present invention, the “RF-ID” widely refers to an “electronic circuit which has a nonvolatile memory on which individual identification information is recorded and which can transmit the individual identification information to the outside via an antenna”. 
     Conventionally, if a user who is not familiar with operations of an apparatus (device) wishes to perform complicated settings for the apparatus, it is necessary that a seller, repairer, or serviceperson of the apparatus visits a location of the apparatus to perform the settings or controls the apparatus remotely. Even in remotely controlling the apparatus, the seller, repairer, or serviceperson has to visit the location for setting of the remote control. In the seventh embodiment of the present invention, however, the RF-ID card  2100  enables the user to perform the settings of the apparatus (the recorder  2000 ) without complicated operations. Therefore, even the user not familiar with operations of the recorder can easily change the settings of the recorder. 
     The present invention can be implemented also as an image presentation method of presenting image related to a communication device on an apparatus (device) having a display screen, in a communication system having (a) the apparatus having the display screen, (b) a reader device connected to the apparatus via a communication path, and (c) the communication device performing proximity wireless communication with the reader device. The present invention can be implemented further as a program stored in the communication device with identification information of the communication device, the program being described by codes executed by a virtual machine included in a device performing proximity wireless communication with the communication device, and being for executing: accessing a server connected via a communication network; downloading, form the server, image associated with the identification information from among image stored in the accessed server; and displaying the downloaded image. In addition, the present invention can be implemented as a computer-readable recording medium such as a CD-ROM on which the above program is recorded. 
     The communication device according to the present invention may be used, of course, as various devices having a RF-ID unit in which identification information and a virtual machine program are stored. For example, the communication device may be electronic devices such as a camera, home appliances such as a rice cooker and a refrigerator, and daily commodities such as a toothbrush. 
     Here, an embodiment in which a RF-ID reader is provided to a remote controller of a TV or the like is described with reference to diagrams (a) and (b) in  FIG. 86 , a flowchart (c) in  FIG. 86 , and a flowchart of  FIG. 87 . 
     First, as described earlier, a child device (or child communicator)  5050  such as a camera has the memory (second memory)  52  and the antenna (second antenna)  21 . When an antenna  5063  of a remote controller  5051  is moved into proximity of the antenna  21 , the antenna  5063  supplies power to the antenna  21 . Thereby, data in the memory  52  is transmitted from the antenna  21  to the antenna  5063 . The remote controller  5051  converts the received data into digital data by a communication circuit  5064 , and then stores the digital data into a memory  5061  (Step  5001 a in  FIG. 87 ). Then, a transmission unit of the remote controller  5051  is faced to the TV  45  and a transmission switch  6065  on the remote controller  5051  is pressed (Step  5001 b). Thereby, the data in the memory  5061  is transmitted as light to a light receiving unit  5058  of the parent device (apparatus)  45  (the TV  45 ) via a light emitting unit  5062  (Step  5001 c). The communication may be not light but wireless. 
     Referring back to a flowchart (c) in  FIG. 86 , the embodiment of the present invention used in social systems should be applicable even in twenty or thirty years. An example of the program described in a virtual machine language or the like is known Java™. However, such programs are expected to be extended or replaced by totally different programs described in more efficient languages. In order to address the above situation, in the embodiment of the present invention, the parent device  45  such as the TV holds parent device version information  5059  (or parent device version information n 1 ) that indicates a language type or version of a virtual machine language or the like (Step  5060 i in (c) of  FIG. 86 ). In the beginning of the memory  52  of the child device  5050 , child device version information  5052  (or child device version information n 2 ) indicating a version of a program language or the like for the child device is recorded ((a) in  FIG. 86 ). Following to the child device version information  5052 , a program region  5053  is recorded in the memory  52 . The program region  5053  stores a program  5056 a in a version  5055 a, a program  5056 b in a version  5055 b, and a program  5056 c in a version  5055 c. Following to the program region  5053 , a data region  5054  is recorded in the memory  52 . 
     At Step  5060 i in the flowchart of  FIG. 86 , the parent device  45  stores the parent device version information n 1  of the parent device  45  is stored. Then, the parent device  45  obtains the child device version information n 2  from the memory of the child device (Step  5060 a). Then, the parent device  45  selects an execution program n having a maximum value of n 1 ≧n 2  (Step  5060 b). The parent device  45  executes the selected execution program (Step  5060 c). Then, it is determined whether or not the parent device  45  is connected to the Internet (Step  5060 d). If the parent device  45  is connected to the Internet, then the parent device  45  is connected to the server via the Internet (Step  5060 e). The parent device  45  thereby transmits language information  5065 , which is set in the parent device  45 , to the server (Step  5060 f). The server provides the parent device  45  with a program in the language indicated in the transmitted language information  5065 , for example in French, and causes the parent device  45  to execute the program. Alternatively, the server may execute the program on the server itself. 
     On the other hand, if it is determined at Step  5060 d that the parent device  45  is not connected to the Internet, then the processing proceeds to Step  5060 h. At Step  5060 h, the parent device  45  executes a local program in order to display, on a screen of the parent device  45 , attribute information of the child device  5050 . The attribute information is, for example, information for notifying a trouble or information regarding the number of stored photographs. As described above, the memory  52  in the child device  5050  holds the child device version information  5052 . The memory  52  stores a program, procedure, URL, or the like of each generation. The program, procedure, URL, or the like will be developed every 10 years. Such data format on which information is recorded for each generation can be kept being used even in twenty or thirty years in order to operate the parent device  45 . (a) of  FIG. 86  illustrates an example of information on which versions or generations of a program are recorded. However, the same advantages are also offered in another example illustrated in (b) of  FIG. 86 . In (b) of  FIG. 86 , addresses of data stored in the server are recorded in associated with respective different versions. In this example, a URL  5057 a in a version  5055 d, a URL  5057 b in a version  5055 e, and a URL  5057 c in a version  5055 f are recorded. The above can achieve backward compatibility for many years. For example, it is assumed that a user purchases a product (the parent device  45 ) in version  1  this year and the product has RF-ID. Under the assumption, it is expected that, in twenty or thirty years, programs described in virtual machine languages or the like such as Java™, which are compliant to versions  1 ,  2 , and  3 , will be installed into the parent device  45 . In the situation, the child device  5050  can provide the parent device  45  with the child device version information  5052 . Based on the child device version information  5052 , the parent device  45  can select a program to be compliant to an appropriate version. It is also expected that, in thirty years, the child device will hold information of programs in all versions  1 ,  2 , and  3 . Therefore, a different parent device  45  in version  3  employs the best function of a version among them. On the other hand, the former parent device  45  in version  1  employs a rather limited function of a version older than the version employed by the parent device  45  in version  3 . As a result, perfect compatibility can be achieved. 
     The flowchart of  FIG. 87  is explained below. At Step  5001 a, pressing a read switch  6066  on the remote controller  5051 , a user brings the remote controller  5051  into proximity of the antenna  21  of the child device  5050 . Thereby, data in the memory  52  of the child device  5050  is transmitted to the memory  5061  of the remote controller  5051 . Next, at Step  5001 b, facing the remote controller  5051  to the parent device  45  such as a TV, the user presses a transmission switch  6065  (Step  5001 b). Thereby, the data in the memory  5061  is transmitted as light to the parent device  45  (Step  5001 c). In the embodiment of the present invention, the data is referred to as “tag data” for convenience. The parent device  45  extracts or selects an execution program from the tag data (Step  5001 d). The parent device  45  executes the extracted or selected execution program by a virtual machine language set in the parent device  45  (Step  5001 e). The parent device  45  reads Internet connection identification information for the parent device  45  (Step  5001 f). At Step  5001 g, it is determined whether or not the identification information does not indicate “Connectable to the Internet” (in other words, it is determined based on the identification information whether or not the parent device  45  is connectable to the Internet. If the identification information does not indicate “Connectable to the Internet” until Step  5001 g, then the parent device  45  executes a non-connectable-state program in the execution program (Step  5001 t). The non-connectable-state program is to be executed when the parent device  45  is not connectable to the Internet. Then, the parent device  45  displays a result of the execution on its screen (Step  5001 u). In the embodiment of the present invention, the memory  52  stores not only the information regarding connection to the Internet, but also the non-connectable-state program to be executed when the parent device  45  is not connectable to the Internet. Therefore, the parent device  45  can display a result of a minimum required operation when the parent device  45  is not connectable to the Internet. 
     On the other hand, if it is determined at Step  5001 g that the identification information indicates “Connectable to the Internet”, then the parent device  45  executes a connection program (Step  5001 h). The connection program includes a part of the above execution program. 
     The connection program may be generated by adding, into the execution program in the tag data, data such as a URL of the server, user ID, and a password. More specifically, the added such as a URL of the server, user ID, and a password are added in the data region  5054  illustrated in (a) of  FIG. 86 . Such connection program can extend the execution program in the tag data, and also reduce a capacity of the nonvolatile memory in the memory  52 . In this case, it is also possible that the connection program in the memory  52  is recorded onto a memory such as a non-rewritable ROM in the program region  5053 , while the URL of the server and the like are recorded onto the data region  5054  that is rewritable. As a result, a tip area and a cost can be reduced. 
     At Step  5001 i, the parent device  45  connects to a server having a specific URL. At Step  5001 j, it is determined whether or not the server requests the parent device  45  to upload data to the server. If the server requests for uploading of data, then at Step  5001 p, the parent device  45  uploads data and/or a program to the server. The server executes a program using the data (Step  5001 q). The server provides a result of the execution to the parent device  45  (Step  5001 r). The parent device  45  displays the result and the like of the execution on its screen (Step  5001 s). 
     On the other hand, if it is determined at Step  5001 j that the server does not request for uploading of data, then, the parent device  45  downloads information including a specific program from the server having the URL (Step  5001 k). The parent device  45  executes the downloaded program (Step  5001 m). Then, the parent device  45  displays the result of the execution on its screen (S 5001 n). 
     The memory in the RF-ID unit or the child device has a limited capacity due to restriction on power consumption, a volume, or a cost. Therefore, a common program cannot be stored in the memory. However, the use of the connection program and the server as described in the embodiment of the present invention allows an infinitely large program to be executed. 
     A huge program may be executed on the server. Or, such a program may be downloaded from the server to be executed. These aspects are in the scope of the present invention. 
     The embodiment described with reference to  FIG. 86  has been described to use a remote controller of a TV. In this example, the remote controller has a battery, buttons for switching TV channels, an antenna for reading RF-ID, a communication circuit, and an infrared light emitting unit. The remote controller can be replaced by a mobile phone to produce the same effects as described above. Since mobile phones generally have an infrared light emitting unit, they are easily used instead of remote controllers. In addition, mobile phones have a communication line. Therefore, mobile phones can offer the same capability of that of remote controller, being directly connected to the server. However, a communication cost of a mobile phone is burden of a user. A display screen of a mobile phone is significantly smaller than that of a TV. Therefore, a mobile phone may have the transmission switch  6065  as illustrated in  FIG. 86 . Thereby, if there is a TV near the mobile phone, the user faces the light emitting unit of the mobile phone to the TV to transmit tag data in the memory  52  of the mobile phone directly to the TV. As a result, the user can view data on a large screen of the TV having a high resolution. The above method does not incur a cost, which is greatly advantageous for the user. The communication using the readout tag data via the mobile phone line is stopped in cooperation with the transmission switch. 
     In this case, in the same manner as described for as the remote controller with reference to  FIG. 86 , the mobile phone has at least a reader for RF-ID or a Near Field Communication (NFC) unit. In the future, mobile phones are expected to have a reader function for reading RF-ID or the like. If RF-ID readers are provided to mobile phones, the present invention can be implemented with a much lower additional cost, which is greatly advantageous for the user. Moreover, the present invention can be easily implemented not only as a remote controller or a mobile phone, but also as a Personal Digital Assistance (PDA) terminal, a laptop, or a mobile media player. 
     Eighth Embodiment 
       FIG. 88  illustrates a home network environment assumed in the eighth embodiment. It is assumed that two TVs  45  and  8001  are present in one house, where the TVs  45  and  8001  respectively have RFID tag reader/writers and screen display units  110  and  8003 . The TVs  45  and  8001  are respectively connected with video servers  8004  and  8005 , enabling video data to be transmitted from the video server to the TV wiredly or wirelessly and displayed by the TV. The video server mentioned here is a storage device such as a NAS unit, or a recording device such as a BD recorder. The TVs  45  and  8001  can also access a video server outside the house via the Internet. It is further assumed that the user of the home network has a mobile AV terminal  8006  that is portable and capable of displaying video. Like the TVs, the mobile AV terminal  8006  has a RFID tag  8007  and a video display unit  8008 , and can access a video server wirelessly. 
     In the eight embodiment, consider a situation where, under the above-mentioned environment, the user who is watching video on the TV  1  ( 45 ) wants to watch it on the TV  2  ( 8001 ) upstairs. In the case of moving to another place to watch the video, it is desirable that the user can watch the video seamlessly from the point up to which the user has already watched. However, in order to seamlessly move the video while maintaining security, user authentication and timing synchronization are necessary, and the user is required to perform complex operations. This is because a highly versatile apparatus (device) such as a TV or a mobile terminal can be used in various applications, so that the user wishes to operate the apparatus depending on circumstances. 
     In this embodiment of the present invention, the mobile AV terminal transmits a program according to a status of the mobile AV terminal, and generates a video display destination change command using a status of the TV received as a response. In this way, by an extremely simple operation of causing the mobile AV terminal and the TV touch each other, video passing according to the statuses of both terminals can be achieved, with it being possible to significantly improve user-friendliness. Though the following describes video passing, the same advantageous effects can be attained even in the case of continuously displaying still images by a slide show or the like. 
     In this embodiment of the present invention, according to the above structure, video passing can be performed by an extremely simple operation of causing the mobile AV terminal and the TV touch each other, thereby significantly improving user-friendliness. 
       FIG. 89  is a functional block diagram of each function executed by the mobile AV terminal  8006 . To perform video passing, the user presses a video passing button  8050 . When the video passing button  8050  is pressed, a video passing request generation unit  8051  obtains video information currently displayed by the display unit  8008  from a display information management unit  8052 , generates a video passing request, and writes the video passing request in a memory  8054  of the RFID unit. In the case where no video is being displayed, the video passing request generation unit  8051  enters a video get mode, and generates the video passing request including a video get command. In the case where video is being displayed, the video passing request generation unit  8051  enters a video give mode, and generates the video passing request including a video give command and video information. The video information mentioned here includes video display time information managed in the display information management unit  8052  and connection destination information managed in a communication and broadcast management unit  8055 . When receiving video via a broadcast interface  8056 , the communication and broadcast management unit  8055  manages channel information. When receiving video via a communication interface  8057 , the communication and broadcast management unit  8055  manages an identifier of a video server and an identifier of video. The identifier of the video server and the identifier of the video may be any identifiers uniquely identifying the video server and the video, such as an IP address and a URL. Note that the video passing button may be provided separately as a video get button and a video give button. Moreover, selection of whether to get or give video may be displayed on the screen when the video passing button is pressed. When another RFID tag is brought into proximity, information stored in the memory  8054  in the RFID unit is transmitted from a transmission unit  8058  via a wireless antenna  8059 . In the case where no transmission is made within a predetermined time after the generation of the video passing command, the video passing mode is cancelled, and the information in the memory is discarded. A receiving unit  8060  in the RFID unit receives a video passing response. The video passing response is a response indicating whether or not the video get command or the video give command is accepted. In the case where the video passing response indicates that the video get command is accepted, the video passing response includes video information. The video passing response is outputted to the communication and broadcast management unit  8055 , and the communication and broadcast management unit  8055  performs processing according to the video passing response. In the case where the video passing response indicates that the video get command is accepted, the communication and broadcast management unit  8055  performs video get processing. In the case where the video information included in the video passing response is channel information, the communication and broadcast management unit  8055  notifies the broadcast interface  8056  of the channel information, to receive data of a channel designated by the channel information. The communication and broadcast management unit  8055  also instructs a display management unit  8061  to display the data of the channel. In the case where the channel information designates a channel (a channel of BS, CS, or cable TV) that is not receivable by the broadcast interface  8056  of the mobile AV terminal  8006 , the communication and broadcast management unit  8055  requests a communication unit  8062  to search for a terminal that is capable of receiving data of the channel and transferring it to the communication interface  8057 . Note that the search for the terminal that serves to transfer the data of the channel may be performed beforehand. Even when the data of the channel is received by the communication interface  8057 , the data of the channel is displayed by the display unit  8008  in the same way as in the normal case. In the case where the video information included in the video passing response is connection destination information, the communication and broadcast management unit  8055  notifies the communication unit  8062  of the connection destination information, to transmit a video transmission request to a connection destination. The video transmission request includes a video display time, and data transmission is requested according to this time. Note that, unlike video reception by the broadcast interface  8056 , video reception by the communication interface  8057  may take some time. This depends on preprocessing for receiving video data by the communication interface  8057  and a time period during which video data is temporarily stored in a communication buffer  8063 . In the method of this embodiment, unnecessary data transmission and a waiting time associated with it may be reduced by predicting such a time beforehand and issuing the video transmission request from the communication unit  8062  on the basis of the predicted time. In this case, a display time correction unit  8064  performs correction so that video can be displayed seamlessly. This is possible because data of digital video is typically stored in a display buffer  8065  and displayed by the display unit  8008  while being processed by a display processing unit  8053 . On the other hand, in the case where the video passing response indicates that the video give command is accepted, screen display is cleared. Note that the screen display may be automatically cleared, or whether or not to clear the screen display may be selected by the user. Alternatively, the screen display may be cleared upon receiving a screen display clearing instruction from the terminal to which video is passed. Moreover, a timer may be provided so that the screen display is cleared after a predetermined time has elapsed. 
       FIG. 90  is a functional block diagram of each function executed by the TV. A receiving unit  8101 , upon receiving a video passing request from an antenna  8100  of a RFID tag, outputs the video passing request to a communication and broadcast management unit  8102 . In the case where the received video passing request is a video get command, the communication and broadcast management unit  8102  outputs managed connection destination information of displayed video, to a video passing response generation unit  8103 . Upon receiving the connection destination information, the video passing response generation unit  8103  obtains display time information from a display information management unit  8104 , generates a video passing response, and writes the video passing response in a memory  8105  in the RFID unit. Here, when the video passing response generation unit  8103  cannot obtain desired information, the video passing response generation unit  8103  generates the video passing response indicating that the video passing request is rejected. A transmission unit  8106  transmits the written video passing response to the RFID unit of the mobile AV terminal  8006 . Video display termination processing after transmission is the same as in the mobile AV terminal  8006 . In the case where the received video passing request is a video give command, on the other hand, the communication and broadcast management unit  8102  performs processing according to information included in the video passing request. In the case where channel information is included in the video passing request, the communication and broadcast management unit  8102  notifies a broadcast interface  8107  of the channel information, to receive data of a desired channel designated by the channel information. The communication and broadcast management unit  8102  then notifies a display management unit  8108  of the data of the channel, thereby changing the display. In the case where the video giving command is received while video is being displayed, determination of which video is to be prioritized may be made by a video priority determination unit  8109 , or a selection command may be displayed. In the case where connection destination information is included in the video passing request, the communication and broadcast management unit  8102  notifies a communication unit  8110  of the connection destination information, to transmit a video transmission request. Subsequent processing is the same as in the mobile AV terminal. Moreover, the functions of the other units are the same as those in the mobile AV terminal. 
       FIG. 91  is a sequence diagram in the case where, when the TV  1  ( 45 ) is receiving video from the video server  1  ( 8004 ), the video is passed to the mobile AV terminal  8006 . To perform video passing, the user powers on the mobile AV terminal  8006 . The mobile AV terminal  8006  searches for an access point  8009  of the wireless LAN, and establishes wireless connection. The mobile AV terminal  8006  also obtains an IP address by DHCP or the like, and establishes IP connection. In the case where the mobile AV terminal  8006  is a DLNA terminal, DLNA terminal search processing such as M-SEARCH may be performed. The user presses the video passing button, to generate a video passing request in the memory in the RFID unit. The user further brings the RFID tag  8007  of the mobile AV terminal  8006  into proximity of the RFID tag reader/writer  46  of the TV  1 , to transmit the video passing request to the TV  1 . Upon receiving the video passing request, the TV  1  generates a video passing response (including an IP address of the video server  1 , a video identifier, and a video display time), and returns the video passing response to the mobile AV terminal  8006 . It is assumed here that the TV  1  obtains the IP address of the video server  1  beforehand, even when the video receiving means of the TV  1  has no IP connection such as a HDMI cable. In the case where the video is in encrypted form, necessary security-related information (such as a key) is exchanged at the same time. Upon receiving the video passing response, the mobile AV terminal  8006  transmits a video transmission request (including the video identifier and the video display time) to the IP address of the video server  1  included in the video passing response. Upon receiving the video transmission request, the video server  1  ( 8004 ) switches a video transmission destination to the mobile AV terminal  8006 . Having no longer received the video data, the TV  1  ( 45 ) turns video display OFF. 
       FIG. 92  is a sequence diagram in the case where, when the mobile AV terminal  8006  is receiving the video from the video server  1  ( 8004 ), the video is passed to the TV  2  ( 8003 ). The user presses the video passing button of the mobile AV terminal  8006 , to generate a video passing request (including the IP address of the video server  1 , the video identifier, and the video display time). The user further brings the RFID tag  8007  of the mobile AV terminal  8006  into proximity of a RFID tag reader/writer  8002  of the TV  2 , to transmit the video passing request to the TV  2 . The TV  2  ( 8003 ) generates a video passing response indicating that the video passing request is accepted, and returns the video passing response to the mobile AV terminal  8006 . The TV  2  ( 8003 ) transmits a video transmission request to the video server  1  ( 8004 ). Subsequent processing is the same as in  FIG. 91 . 
       FIG. 93  is a flowchart of processing of the mobile AV terminal  8006 . When the user presses the video passing button (S 8300 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  enters a video get mode (S 8302 ) in the case where the screen is blank (or has no video display) (S 8301 ). In the case where the screen is not blank, a selection screen is displayed (S 8303 ). When the user selects “get” (S 8304 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  equally enters the video get mode. When the user selects “give”, the mobile AV terminal  8006  enters a video give mode (S 8305 ). In the video get mode, the mobile AV terminal  8006  stores a video passing request including a video get command in the memory  8105  in the RFID unit. The user brings the RFID unit of the mobile AV terminal  8006  into proximity of the RFID unit of the other terminal (S 8306 ), to transmit the video passing request to the other terminal (S 8307 ). Upon receiving a video passing response from the other terminal (S 8308 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  performs processing according to information included in the video passing response. In the case where no response is obtained, the mobile AV terminal  8006  displays an error screen indicating no response, and ends processing (S 8309 ). In the case where terrestrial channel information is included in the video passing response, the mobile AV terminal  8006  determines whether or not the mobile AV terminal  8006  is capable of receiving the corresponding channel (that is, whether nor not the mobile AV terminal  8006  has a tuner and an antenna and is in a terrestrial wave receivable range). In the case where the mobile AV terminal  8006  is capable of receiving the channel (S 8311 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  displays data of the designated channel. In the case where the mobile AV terminal  8006  is not capable of receiving the channel, the mobile AV terminal  8006  enters a wireless LAN transfer mode (S 8313 ). Likewise, in the case where channel information of BS or the like, which is basically not receivable by the mobile AV terminal  8006 , is included in the video passing response (S 8314 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  enters the wireless LAN transfer mode. On the other hand, in the case where no channel information is included in the video passing response, the mobile AV terminal  8006  enters a wireless LAN receiving mode (S 8315 ). 
       FIG. 94  is a flowchart of processing of the mobile AV terminal  8006  in the video give mode. In the video give mode, the mobile AV terminal  8006  stores a video passing request including a video give command and information of video to be given, in the memory  8054  in the RFID unit. The user brings the RFID unit of the mobile AV terminal  8006  into proximity of the RFID unit of the other terminal (S 8320 ), to transmit the video passing request to the other terminal (S 8321 ). Upon receiving a video passing response from the other terminal (S 8322 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  performs processing according to information included in the video passing response. In the case where no response is obtained, the mobile AV terminal  8006  displays an error screen indicating no response, and ends processing (S 8323 ). In the case where the video passing response indicates that video passing is disabled (S 8324 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  displays an error screen indicating that video passing is disabled, and ends processing (S 8325 ). In the case where video passing is enabled and video to be passed is being received via terrestrial wave (S 8326 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  stops screen display of terrestrial broadcasting. Otherwise, the mobile AV terminal  8006  performs termination processing of video that is being received via wireless LAN, according to a type of corresponding receiving system (S 8327 ). The mobile AV terminal  8006  thereby stops screen display. Note that the screen display may be stopped according to an instruction from the terminal on the video give side, or the screen display may be switched to another screen such as an initial screen (S 8328 ). 
       FIG. 95  is a flowchart of processing of the mobile AV terminal  8006  in the wireless LAN transfer mode. The mobile AV terminal  8006  is assumed to be a terminal that is capable of receiving terrestrial wave but is not capable of receiving satellite broadcasting and cable TV broadcasting. To receive such broadcast wave, the broadcast wave needs to be received by another terminal capable of receiving the broadcast wave, and transferred to the mobile AV terminal  8006  via wireless LAN. In the wireless LAN transfer mode, the mobile AV terminal  8006  calls information of a wireless LAN transfer capable apparatus. In the case where the information of the wireless LAN transfer capable apparatus is not held in the mobile AV terminal  8006  (S 8340 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  searches for the wireless LAN transfer capable apparatus (S 8341 ). In the case where the wireless LAN transfer capable apparatus cannot be found in the house, the mobile AV terminal  8006  displays an error screen indicating that channel passing is disabled (S 8343 ). In the case where the wireless LAN transfer capable apparatus is found or the information of the capable apparatus is held in the mobile AV terminal  8006 , the mobile AV terminal  8006  transmits a video transfer request for the channel, to the wireless LAN transfer capable apparatus (S 8344 ). In the case where a video transfer enable response is returned from the wireless LAN transfer capable apparatus, the mobile AV terminal  8006  receives video packets of the designated channel via wireless LAN (S 8345 ), and displays the video of the designated channel (S 8346 ). 
       FIG. 96  is a flowchart of processing of the mobile AV terminal  8006  in the wireless LAN receiving mode. In the wireless LAN receiving mode, in the case where the video passing response includes an IP address of a video server and an ID and display time information of video (S 8360 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  accesses the video server. First, the mobile AV terminal  8006  determines whether or not the IP address of the video server is in the same subnet as the IP address of the mobile AV terminal  8006  (S 8361 ). In the case where the IP address of the video server is in the same subnet as the IP address of the mobile AV terminal  8006 , the mobile AV terminal  8006  transmits a video transmission request including the video ID and display time, to the video server (S 8364 ). Note that, in the case where a delay time correction function is available (S 8362 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  corrects the display time information in the video transmission request (S 8363 ). Here, the display time correction function denotes a correction function that is executed to perform efficient video transfer in consideration of various delay in processing. In the case where video cannot be received from the video server (S 8365 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  may retransmit the video transmission request. In the case where there is no response even after a predetermined retransmission timeout occurs (S 8366 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  displays an error screen indicating no server response (S 8367 ). In the case where the time of the received video data does not coincide with the time of display (S 8368 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  adjusts the time to the time of display using a control packet for fast-forward or rewind (S 8369 ). The mobile AV terminal  8006  then displays video. 
       FIG. 97  is a flowchart of processing in the case where a URL is included in the video passing response. In the case where the URL is included (S 8380 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  performs name resolution by DNS, to obtain the IP address of the video server (S 8381 ). Note that the URL for video may be any name assigned for video service. The name resolution also includes conversion from a service identifier to a terminal identifier other than DNS. In the case where the obtained IP address of the video server is in the same subnet as the IP address of the mobile AV terminal  8006  (S 8382 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  returns to the processing described in  FIG. 96 . In the case where the IP address of the video server is not in the same subnet as the IP address of the mobile AV terminal  8006 , the mobile AV terminal  8006  proceeds to connection processing to a server outside the subnet. In the case where the desired information is not included in the video passing response, the mobile AV terminal  8006  displays an error screen indicating that the video passing response is invalid (S 8383 ). 
       FIG. 98  is a flowchart of processing in the case where the IP address of the video server is not in the same subnet as the IP address of the mobile AV terminal  8006 . In the case where the IP address of the video server is in a different subnet, the mobile AV terminal  8006  searches for another wireless access point. In the case where there is no other access point in the house, the mobile AV terminal  8006  determines that the video server is an external server, and proceeds to external server connection processing. In the case where there is another access point (S 8390 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  performs reconnection to the access point, and obtains another IP address of a subnet (S 8391 ). In the case where the subnet of the video server is the same as the subnet of the obtained IP address (S 8392 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  proceeds to home server processing. In the case where the subnet of the video server is not the same as the subnet of the IP address obtained by connecting to the accessible access point in the house (S 8393 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  proceeds to external server access processing. Note that the mobile AV terminal  8006  may perform IP address obtainment processing for all access points beforehand and manage the processing result therein. 
       FIG. 99  is a flowchart of processing in the case of accessing to an external server. In the case where the address of the video server is not a global address (S 8400 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  displays an error screen indicating an address error (S 8401 ). In the case where an access method to the designated video server is unknown (S 8402 ), the mobile AV terminal  8006  displays an error screen indicating that the access method is unknown (S 8403 ). Note that a home video server and a home video appliance are assumed to be compliant with DLNA. In the case where the access method is known and also the video server has the same function as a home server, the mobile AV terminal  8006  performs the same processing as in the case of a home server (S 8404 ). Otherwise, the mobile AV terminal  8006  performs processing according to the access method to obtain video (S 8405 ), and displays the received video (S 8406 ). 
       FIG. 100  is a flowchart of processing of the TV. When the RFID unit of the other terminal is brought into proximity of the RFID unit of the TV (S 8410 ), the TV receives a video passing request (S 8411 ). In the case where the TV is receiving video (S 8412 ) and also a video get command is included in the video passing request (S 8413 ), the TV enters a video give mode (S 8414 ). In the case where the TV is not receiving video but the video get command is included in the video passing request (S 8415 ), the TV returns a video passing response indicating that video passing is disabled (S 8416 ), and displays an error screen indicating that video passing is disabled (S 8417 ). In the case where the video is being received via terrestrial wave (S 8418 ), the TV returns the video passing response including channel information (S 8419 ). The TV then clears screen display (S 8420 ). 
       FIG. 101  is a flowchart of processing in the case where the video is being received not via terrestrial wave. In the case where the video being received is broadcast video other than terrestrial wave (S 8430 ), the TV returns the video passing response including channel information. In the case of a wireless LAN transfer mode, the TV may include the IP address of the TV in the video passing response (S 8431 ). After returning the response, the TV clears screen display (S 8432 ). In the case of other video, the TV returns the video passing response including an IP address of a video server, a video ID, and a video display time, or including a video URL and a video display time (S 8433 ). After this, the TV performs termination processing of video communication via wireless LAN (S 8434 ), and clears screen display. 
       FIG. 102  is a flowchart of processing in the case where a video give command is included in the video passing request. When the TV receives the video give command while displaying video, the TV enters a video get mode (S 8441 ) in the case where a double screen display function is available (S 8440 ). In the case where the double screen display function is not available, the TV displays a selection screen of whether or not to get video (S 8442 ). When the user selects to get video (S 8443 ), the TV enters the video get mode. When the user selects not to get video, the TV returns a video passing response indicating that video passing is disabled (S 8444 ). In the case where channel information is included in the video passing request (S 8445 ), the TV displays data of a designated channel (S 8446 ). In the case where an IP address of a video server or a URL is included in the video passing request (S 8447 , S 8448 ), the TV performs the same processing as in the video get mode of the mobile AV terminal. In the case where such information is not included in the video passing request, the TV displays an information error screen (S 8449 ). 
     Ninth Embodiment 
       FIG. 103  is a sequence diagram in the case where, when the TV  1  ( 45 ) is receiving video from the video server  1  ( 8004 ), the TV  1  ( 45 ) transmits a video transmission request so that the mobile AV terminal  8006  gets the video. As in  FIG. 91 , the user powers on the mobile AV terminal  8006  to pass the video. The mobile AV terminal  8006  searches for the access point  8009  of wireless LAN, and establishes wireless connection. The mobile AV terminal  8006  also obtains an IP address by DHCP or the like, and establishes IP connection. The user presses the video passing button, to generate a video passing request in the memory in the RFID unit. Here, the video passing request includes the IP address of the mobile AV terminal  8006 . The user further brings the RFID tag  8007  of the mobile AV terminal  8006  into proximity of the RFID tag reader/writer  46  of the TV  1 , to transmit the video passing request to the TV  1  ( 45 ). The TV  1  returns a video passing response including the IP address of the video server, to the mobile AV terminal  8006 . This step is intended to enhance security (to prevent arbitrary access from an irrelevant terminal), and may be omitted. As in  FIG. 91 , in the case where video is in encrypted form, necessary security-related information (such as a key) is exchanged at the same time. Upon receiving the video passing request, the TV  1  ( 45 ) transmits a video transmission request including the IP address of the mobile AV terminal  8006 , to the video server  1  ( 8004 ). Upon receiving the video transmission request, the video server  1  ( 8004 ) switches a video transmission destination to the mobile AV terminal  8006 . Subsequent processing is the same as in  FIG. 91 . 
       FIG. 104  is a sequence diagram in the case where, in the same situation as in  FIG. 92 , the IP address of the video server  1  ( 8004 ) is included in a video passing request. This may be omitted as in  FIG. 102 . Upon receiving the video passing request, the TV  2  ( 8003 ) returns a video passing response including the IP address of the TV  2 . Upon receiving the video passing response, the mobile AV terminal  8006  transmits a video transmission request including the IP address of the TV  2 , to the video server  1  ( 8004 ). Upon receiving the video transmission request, the video server  1  ( 8004 ) changes the video transmission destination to the TV  2  ( 8003 ). Subsequent processing is the same as in  FIG. 92 . 
     Tenth Embodiment 
       FIG. 105  is a sequence diagram in the case where a remote controller  8200  having a RFID unit is used instead of the mobile AV terminal  8006 . Here, the remote controller is assumed to be a terminal that does not have a display unit but has a transmission and reception unit and a memory of a RFID unit. The user presses a video passing button, to generate a video passing request in the memory in the RFID unit. The user further brings the RFID unit of the remote controller  8200  into proximity of the RFID unit  46  of the TV  1 , to transmit the video passing request to the TV  1 . Upon receiving the video passing request, the TV  1  generates a video passing response (including the IP address of the video server  1 , a video identifier, and a video display time), and returns the video passing response to the remote controller  8200 . Moreover, upon receiving the video passing request from the remote controller  8200 , the TV  1  ( 45 ) transmits a video stop request to the video server  1  ( 8004 ). After going upstairs, the user brings the RFID unit of the remote controller  8200  into proximity of the RFID unit of the TV  2 , to transmit a video passing request (including the IP address of the video server  1 , the video identifier, and the video display time). Upon receiving the video passing request, the TV  2  ( 8003 ) returns a video passing response, and transmits a video transmission request (including the video identifier and the video display time) to the video server  1 . The video server  1  ( 8004 ) starts transmitting the designated video from the designated time. 
     Eleventh Embodiment 
       FIG. 106  is a sequence diagram in the case where the video server  1  is capable of synchronous transmission. After conducting predetermined communication with the TV  1 , the mobile AV terminal transmits a video transmission request to the video server  1 . Upon receiving the video transmission request, the video server  1  ( 8004 ) temporarily transmits video data to both the TV  1  ( 45 ) and the mobile AV terminal ( 8006 ). This processing is intended to achieve complete seamlessness. The mobile AV terminal and the TV  1  may both display the video temporarily, or some kind of synchronization processing may be performed to achieve complete seamlessness. The video server  1  ( 8004 ) stops video data transfer to the TV  1 , on the basis of a video stop request from the mobile AV terminal ( 8006 ). Note that the TV  1  ( 45 ) may transmit the stop request, or the video server  1  ( 8004 ) may automatically stop video data transfer. 
     Twelfth Embodiment 
     This embodiment relates to a best mode of a method for ensuring traceability in a distribution form from factory shipment to use environment of an apparatus (device) provided with a RFID tag as described in the first to tenth embodiments. 
     Recently, given a need to improve distribution efficiency and also an increase in number of accidents caused by aging of home electrical products, there has been debate for ensuring traceability, namely, an ability to trace from manufacture and distribution through to a use environment by a consumer. 
     As an example, an attempt has been made to enable management from manufacture to distribution to a retailer, by adding a passive RFID tag that uses a communication frequency in a band of 860 to 900 MHz, to a package, a returnable container, or the like. The band of 860 to 900 MHz is also called a UHF (UltraHigh Frequency) band. The RFID tag in the UHF band can exhibit a largest communication distance in the passive type (i.e., the type of tag to which power is supplied from outside), and is capable of communication of 2 to 3 m though depending on output magnitude. Accordingly, by simultaneously passing a plurality of products through a RFID reader gate during transportation, RFID information of the plurality of products can be instantly read with efficiency. Hence, the RFID tag is particularly expected to be used in the field of distribution. 
     However, such a RFID tag of the UHF band has the following problem. Though the RFID tag certainly has an advantage of long-distance communication, the apparatus cannot be traced once it has been delivered to the consumer because the RFID tag is added to the package or the returnable container. Besides, the long-distance feature is not particularly effective in an entity interface, an object interface, or an intuitive interface described in the first to tenth embodiments where apparatuses are brought into proximity of each other to trigger an action. 
     Meanwhile, the RFID tag ( 47 ) described in the first to tenth embodiments is assumed to be a HF-RFID tag in a band of 13.56 MHz (though this is not a limit for the present invention). HF-RFID has a feature of short-distance communication (within about several ten cm though depending on output). For instance, the HF-RFID tag is widely used in applications that intuitively trigger an action by bringing two terminals close to each other, such as electronic money and ticket gate systems. This being so, for example when the user wants to display photographs captured by a digital camera on a TV, the user brings the digital camera  1  close to the RFID reader/writer  46  of the TV, thereby realizing an entity interface where an entity (camera) and an entity (TV) operate in conjunction with each other or an intuitive interface where digital camera photographs are displayed on the TV. 
     In this embodiment, the HF-RFID tag is added to the apparatus (device) as in the first to tenth embodiments, and also the UHF-RFID tag is added to the package or the returnable container of the apparatus, to ensure product traceability even after the product is reached the use environment of the consumer. 
       FIG. 107  is a schematic diagram illustrating processing of HF-RFID and UHF-RFID upon apparatus factory shipment. 
     Though this embodiment describes the case where the apparatus is a recorder, the apparatus is not limited to such and may be any of a digital home appliance, a food, and the like. 
     An apparatus M 003  assembled in a manufacturing line is provided with a HF-RFID tag M 001 . The HF-RFID tag M 001  has a memory, which has a structure of a dual interface that is accessible from both the apparatus M 003  and a communication unit of the RFID tag M 001 . A product serial number of the apparatus and a program (command) for copying the product serial number of the apparatus to the UHF-RFID tag are stored in the memory of the HF-RFID tag M 001 , in an assembly stage. 
     After the assembly of the apparatus M 003  is completed, prior to packaging, a handy reader/writer M 002  reads the product serial number from the memory of HF-RFID, and also records a device ID of UHF-RFID (UHF-RFID unique information) indicating that the UHF-RFID tag is added to the package or the like. 
     Next, having packaged the apparatus M 003 , a UHF-RFID tag M 005  is added to a package M 004 . The UHF-RFID tag M 005  may be directly added to the package, or may be added to a management table or the like. After adding the UHF-RFID tag M 005 , the handy reader/writer M 002  records the product serial number and the like read from the HF-RFID tag M 001  of the apparatus M 003 , to the UHF-RFID tag M 005 . In this embodiment, the handy reader/writer M 002  is capable of accessing both HF-RFID and UHF-RFID. 
     Thus, the product serial number of the apparatus M 003  is recorded on the HF-RFID tag M 001 , and the same information is also recorded on the UHF-RFID tag M 005  of the package M 004 . Therefore, in distribution after packaging, there is no need to read the product serial number and the like from the HF-RFID tag that is capable of only short-distance access. By simultaneously passing a plurality of products through the gate, the information can be directly read from the UHF-RFID tag. This contributes to more efficient distribution. 
     Moreover, after the apparatus M 003  reaches the use environment of the consumer, the HF-RFID tag can be read by a remote controller of a TV and the like. Hence, not only the distribution but also the apparatus reaching the consumer can be traced. As a result, overall traceability that contributes to improved distribution efficiency and prevents accidents caused by aged deterioration during apparatus use can be achieved. 
       FIG. 108  is a schematic diagram illustrating a recording format of a memory accessible from the UHF-RFID tag M 005 . 
     The memory of the UHF-RFID tag M 005  stores a UHF device ID M 010 , HF existence identification information M 011 , an apparatus product serial number and actual article number M 012 , a date M 013 , a manufacturer M 014 , a model number, lot number, and product name M 015 , and a status M 016 . 
     The UHF device ID M 010  is stored in a non-rewritable area of the memory, and is identification information for uniquely identifying the UHF-RFID tag. The UHF device ID M 010  is read by the handy reader/writer before the apparatus M 003  is packaged, and recorded in the HF-RFID tag M 001 . Hence, even when the correspondence relation between the package and the apparatus is wrong, the correspondence relation can be checked beforehand and appropriate processing can be performed. 
     The HF existence identification information M 011  is identification information for determining whether or not the HF-RFID tag M 001  is added to the apparatus M 003 . In the case where the HF-RFID tag M 001  is added to the apparatus M 003 , when recording the product serial number and the like read from the HF-RFID tag M 001  to the UHF-RFID tag M 005  upon apparatus packaging, the HF-RFID existence identification information is changed to information indicating “exist”. This makes it possible to determine whether or not to check the correspondence relation between UHF-RFID and HF-RFID, by referencing only the HF existence identification information M 011 . 
     The apparatus product serial number and actual article number M 012  is at least one of the product serial number read from the HF-RFID tag M 001  and an actual article number associated with the product serial number. The actual article number is a number of the apparatus used in the distribution process. It is possible to uniquely associate the actual article number with the product serial number, by equally managing the product serial number and the actual article number. Accordingly, in this embodiment, the product serial number and the actual article number are not clearly distinguished from each other but are described as the same information. 
     The date M 013  corresponds to a manufacturing year/month/date, and information of a date and time of manufacture of the apparatus M 003  is recorded as the date M 013 . This information may be recorded by the handy reader/writer M 002  at the time of recording the product serial number to the UHF-RFID tag M 005 , or manufacturing year/month/date information stored in the HF-RFID tag M 001  may be read and recorded to the UHF-RFID tag M 005 . 
     The manufacturer M 014  is identification information of a manufacturer of the apparatus M 003 . This information may be recorded by the handy reader/writer M 002  at the time of recording the product serial number to the UHF-RFID tag M 005 , or manufacturer information stored in the HF-RFID tag M 001  may be read and recorded to the UHF-RFID tag M 005 . 
     The model number, lot number, and product name M 015  may be recorded by the handy reader/writer M 002 , or the corresponding information may be read from the HF-RFID tag M 001  and recorded, in the same way as the date M 013  and the manufacturer M 014 . Regarding the lot number, in the case where lot management from manufacture to distribution can be conducted in a unified fashion, the information may be written by any of the two methods. However, in the case where unified management is not conducted and manufacturing line information is unclear upon packaging, reading the lot number from the HF-RFID tag M 001  and recording it to the UHF-RFID tag M 005  is more advantageous because stricter management can be achieved. 
     The status M 016  is status information in the distribution form. That is, status information necessary for tracing the apparatus, such as factory storage, factory shipment, distribution center reception, distribution center shipment, and retailer reception, is recorded as the status M 016 . The status M 016  is rewritable in each distribution process. 
     Moreover, the UHF-RFID tag M 005  stores management server specific information M 017 . The management server specific information M 017  is the same information as the server specific information  48  in the second memory  52  of the HF-RFID tag M 001 . When packaging the apparatus M 003 , the server specific information is read from the HF-RFID tag M 001  and copied to the UHF-RFID tag M 005 . This enables unified management to be performed by the same management server for both of the management in the distribution stage using UHF-RFID and the management after the apparatus is delivered to the consumer. 
     Therefore, after the apparatus M 003  is delivered to the consumer, by reading the management server address information from the HF-RFID tag M 001 , accessing the management server, and making an inquiry by the apparatus product serial number M 012 , trace information from manufacture to distribution managed by the management server can be visualized to the consumer. This enhances consumer assurance and safety. 
       FIG. 109  is a flowchart illustrating a flow of processing of copying the product serial number and the like to the UHF-RFID tag M 005  from the HF-RFID tag M 001  upon factory shipment of the apparatus M 003 . 
     First, the HF-RFID tag M 001  is added to the assembled product (the apparatus M 003 ) (M 020 ). This flowchart shows an example where the HF-RFID tag is added after the assembly of the apparatus M 003 . However, in the case of a structure of a dual interface where the apparatus and the HF-RFID tag can both access a shared memory, the HF-RFID tag M 001  is added to the apparatus M 003  during assembly of the apparatus M 003 . 
     Next, the product serial number of the apparatus M 003  is recorded on the HF-RFID tag M 001  (M 021 ). This is a step of recording the product serial number on the HF-RFID tag M 001  in the assembly process through the handy reader/writer M 002 . The product serial number is obtained from a management server of the manufacturing line using the handy reader/writer or the like, and recorded on the HF-RFID tag M 001  by proximity wireless communication. 
     After the product serial number is recorded on the HF-RFID tag M 001 , the apparatus M 003  is packaged (M 022 ). The packaging mentioned here denotes packaging for distribution with a cushioning material and the like, or containment into a returnable container and the like. 
     After completing the packaging, the UHF-RFID tag M 005  is added to the package (including a returnable container surface, a management label, and so on) (M 023 ). 
     Following this, the handy reader/writer M 002  communicates with a management server M 025 , thereby reading the actual article number associated with the product serial number read from the HF-RFID tag M 001  (M 024 ). The actual article number is a management number used in product distribution, and is issued by the management server. The actual article number is in a one-to-one correspondence with the product serial number. 
     After the actual article number is read from the management server M 025 , the product serial number or the actual article number, and the existence identification information indicating that the HF-RFID tag M 001  is added to the apparatus M 003 , are recorded on the UHF-RFID tag M 005  (M 026 ). 
     As a result of the above processing, the product serial number recorded on the HF-RFID tag M 001  which is added to the apparatus M 003  is copied to the UHF-RFID tag M 005  after apparatus packaging. Typically, the communicable distance of the HF-RFID tag is short, and so it is difficult to access the HF-RFID tag after packaging. In this embodiment, however, the product serial number or the actual article number is recorded on the UHF-RFID tag that has a longer communicable distance than the HF-RFID tag and is added to the package. This allows for apparatus distribution management after packaging. 
     Moreover, even if the package or the like is discarded after the apparatus is delivered to the consumer, the product serial number and the like can be read by accessing the HF-RFID tag added to the apparatus. Thus, unified management from distribution to consumer use can be achieved, which contributes to traceability over a wide range. 
       FIG. 110  is a flowchart illustrating a flow of processing in the distribution process of the apparatus M 003 . 
     First, upon factory shipment of the apparatus M 003 , the product serial number or the actual article number is read from the UHF-RFID tag M 005  by using a handy reader/writer or passing the product through a UHF-RFID reader gate. Shipment completion is registered in the management server M 025  that can communicate with the handy reader/writer or the UHF-RFID reader gate, and also the UHF-RFID tag M 005  is accessed from the handy reader/writer or the UHF-RFID reader gate to rewrite the status (M 016 ) in the memory of the UHF-RFID tag M 005  to indicate shipment completion (M 030 ). 
     After factory shipment, the product is retained in the distribution center or the like. Upon subsequent shipment from the distribution center, the product serial number or the actual article number is read from the UHF-RFID tag M 005  by a handy reader/writer or a UHF-RFID reader gate, and distribution center shipment completion is registered in the management server M 025  and also the status (M 016 ) in the UHF-RFID tag M 005  is rewritten to indicate distribution center shipment completion (M 032 ). 
     Likewise, upon retailer shipment, retailer shipment completion is registered in the management server M 025 , and the status M 016  in the UHF-RFID tag M 005  is rewritten to indicate retailer shipment completion (M 034 ). 
     Lastly, when the apparatus M 003  reaches the consumer, the product serial number is read from the HF-RFID tag M 001  by the reading unit of the RF-ID reader/writer  46  of the TV remote controller or the like, and registered in the management server M 025  in association with TV identification information (M 036 ). Accordingly, in this embodiment too, the server specific information  48  is recorded in the second memory  52  of HF-RFID beforehand. The server specific information  48  in this embodiment indicates the management server M 025 , and includes a URL for connecting to the management server M 025 . Hence, by reading the HF-RFID tag M 001  of the apparatus M 003  using the TV remote controller or the like having the RF reader/writer, management information from manufacture to distribution can be obtained from the management server M 025 . In addition, by managing the product serial number in association with the TV identification information in the management server M 025 , it is possible to store a list of apparatuses possessed by the user in the management server in association with the user&#39;s TV, without managing personal information of the user. 
     When the user&#39;s apparatus has a problem, a message warning the user is adequately displayed on the TV, with it being possible to prevent a serious accident. 
     As described above, according to this embodiment, in the manufacturing stage the apparatus and the package are respectively provided with the HF-RFID tag and the UHF-RFID tag, which each carry existence identification information of the other tag. Moreover, the product serial number and the management server specific information stored in the HF-RFID tag are copied to the UHF-RFID tag. As a result, it is possible to provide a system in which management can be performed even after the apparatus reaches the consumer while maintaining distribution management convenience, unlike a conventional system where traceability is attained only during distribution. 
     Though this embodiment describes management from manufacture to delivery to the user, the present invention has the same advantageous effects even when the user discards or recycles the apparatus. A procedure in this case can be realized in the same way as in this embodiment. 
     For example, in  FIG. 107 , upon factory shipment, the product serial number and the like recorded on the HF-RFID tag M 001  added to the apparatus M 003  are copied to the UHF-RFID tag M 005  added to the package M 004  after packaging. The same applies to shipment to a disposal facility or shipment to a recycling center, other than factory shipment. In the case of shipment to a disposal facility, after disposal completion, disposal completion is registered in the management server. This enables unified management to be performed while the product is manufactured, used by the consumer, and put into disposal. Recently, there is a problem of illegal disposal due to disposal cost. However, referencing HF-RFID or UHF-RFID of an illegally disposed apparatus makes it instantly clear in which part of the distribution stage the illegal disposal has been conducted. Thus, the problem of illegal disposal can be alleviated according to this embodiment. 
     In the case of shipment to a recycling center, since use status information, a problem detection status, a total use time, and the like detected by the use status detection unit  7020  are recorded in an area accessible from the HF-RFID tag, such information can be used for determination of whether or not the apparatus is recyclable, price determination, and so on. When the apparatus is determined as recyclable, information such as TV identification information or personal information managed in the management server M 025  in association with the product serial number may be updated and put to use. 
     Thirteenth Embodiment 
       FIG. 111  is a diagram of an overall system structure. A semi-transmissive mirror transmission plate is attached to a mirror unit in a bathroom. A display, a power antenna, and a RF antenna unit are arranged on a back surface of the mirror transmission plate. The user has a mobile terminal with a RF antenna, and displays some kind of video information on the mobile terminal. A procedure of moving this video to the display of the mirror is described below.  FIG. 112  is a flowchart of the procedure. First, an image output button of the mobile terminal is pressed ( 9001 a). Whether or not information or data obtained via a network or a TV channel is being displayed on the terminal is determined ( 9001 b). When such information or data is being displayed, a URL or an IP address of a server transmitting the video or data, a stream ID of the video being displayed, stream reproduction time information, and TV channel information are obtained ( 9001 c). After this, power transmission/reception is started from the antenna of the mobile terminal ( 9001 d). When the antenna of the mobile terminal is brought into proximity of the antenna on the apparatus (device) side ( 9001 e), power or a signal is transmitted from the terminal antenna to the apparatus antenna ( 9001 f). The mobile terminal then reads attribute information on the apparatus side (video display capability, audio capability, maximum (average) communication speed of Internet inside and outside the house, whether TV channel connection is available, Internet and communication line type), via the apparatus antenna ( 9001 h). 
     In the case where a video source is a TV and the apparatus is connected to a TV antenna ( 9001 i), TV channel information and a TV image reproduction display time are transmitted to the apparatus via the antenna ( 9002 a). The apparatus displays video of the TV channel on the screen ( 9002 b). The image is not horizontally flipped in the case of TV ( 9002 c). 
     Upon receiving a power supply enable flag from the terminal ( 9002 d), the apparatus supplies power to the terminal ( 9002 e). 
     Referring back to the previous step, in the case where the apparatus is connected to the Internet ( 9001 j), a video rate and resolution are set according to the attribute information of the apparatus, and a server address optimal for the settings, a server ID on a DLNA network, a stream ID in a server, and stream reproduction display time information are transmitted to the apparatus via the RF antenna ( 9001 k). 
     Referring to a flowchart of  FIG. 113 , the apparatus displays the stream so as to be synchronous with the display time of the video stream being displayed on the terminal, on the basis of the server IP address, the stream ID, and the stream reproduction display time. Once the synchronization has been established, the apparatus switches from the previous display to the next display, that is, the video on the terminal is seamlessly passed to the apparatus ( 9002 h). 
     In the case where simultaneous display of the video on the terminal and the apparatus is prohibited for copyright protection ( 9002 i), when the video display on the apparatus starts seamlessly, the video display on the terminal is stopped by means such as transmitting a video stop instruction from the apparatus to the terminal ( 9002 j). 
     Moreover, when the apparatus receives, from the terminal, a “mirror flip identifier” for horizontally flipping the video on the mirror display ( 9002 k), the apparatus horizontally flips the video in the next step. Meanwhile, horizontal flip of characters is not performed ( 9002 m). 
     According to the above method, first, the terminal supplies power to the apparatus, and activates the apparatus when the apparatus is not in operation. This benefits power saving. After this, once the apparatus has started operation, then the apparatus supplies power to the terminal. In the case where the terminal receives video data from a server or the like and distributes the video to the apparatus via a network, the terminal needs to transmit the video for a long time via an access point by wireless LAN. When transmitting a large amount of data by wireless LAN, power consumption is high, and there is a possibility that the battery level of the terminal becomes 0. However, this embodiment provides an advantageous effect of preventing battery drain by supplying power from the apparatus to the terminal. Moreover, the mirror shows a reversed image of a human figure. For example, as in the case of a video instruction for toothbrushing, leaning effectiveness decreases because right and left are reversed. However, this embodiment facilitates leaning by horizontal flipping the image. 
     Fourteenth Embodiment 
     The following describes the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention.  FIG. 114  illustrates environments of home networks assumed in the present embodiment. A home network is established in each of houses M 1001 , M 1002 , and M 1003 . Each of the home networks is connected to a registration server M 1005  via the Internet M 1004 . If services provided via a home network are limited within a corresponding house, the registration server M 1005  may exist in the house. It is also possible that a home network is divided into various places such as a vacation house and an office, and that a plurality of home networks are used in a single house such as a dormitory or a room-sharing house. It is assumed that, in a house, there are home appliances which are always connected to the Internet (hereinafter, referred to as “always-connected home appliances”) and home appliances which are not always connected to the Internet (hereinafter, referred to as “non-always-connected home appliances”). The always-connected home appliances, such as TVs M 1008  and M 1009 , a DVD recorder M 1010 , and the like, are connected to the Internet via a router M 1006  or a wireless Access Point (wireless AP) M 1007 . The non-always-connected home appliances, such as a digital camera M 1011 , a microwave M 1012 , and a refrigerator M 1013 , are indirectly connected to the Internet as needed. In the present embodiment, a mobile terminal (mobile device) such as a mobile phone M 1014  is also a terminal included in the home network. The devices in the present embodiment can perform simple data communication with other device each other by using a proximity wireless communication device. Each of the devices obtains information of other device using the proximity wireless communication device, and registers the obtained information into the registration server M 1005  using a home network device. 
       FIG. 115  is a hardware diagram of a communication device M 1101  according to the present embodiment. The communication device M 1101  is assumed to have two devices for communication. One of them is a proximity wireless communication device M 1102 . In general, examples of the proximity wireless communication device M 1102  are a Near Field Communication (NFC) function or a Radio Frequency (RF) tag. The other device is a home network communication device M 1103 . Examples of the home network communication device M 1103  are: a wireless communication device using a wireless Local Area Network (wireless LAN) or ZigBee, which is used in connecting home appliances to each other; a wired communication device using Ethernet™ or Power Line Communication (PLC); and a communication device using WiMax or Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP), which is used in mobile phones. The communication device also includes a user interface (IF) device M 1104 . The user IF device is, for example, an input device such as buttons, a display, and an output device using a Light Emitting Diode (LED) or the like. For devices such as TVs and air conditioners, data input/output is generally performed by using a remote controller that is physically separated from the device. For convenience of the description, such a remote controller is also considered as the user IF device in the present embodiment. 
       FIG. 116  is a functional block diagram for explaining a function of a CPU M 1105  in the communication device M 1101 . A device UID obtainment unit M 1202  in the communication device M 1101  obtains information including device UID for identifying a registration device M 1201  (that is a device to be registered). Here, the registration device M 1201  transmits a registration command and registration information including device UID of the registration device M 1201  to the communication device M 1101 , by using the proximity wireless communication device M 1102 . A registration information generation unit M 1204  obtains the registration information including the device UID from the device UID obtainment unit M 1202 , and obtains home ID from a home ID management unit M 1205 . Then, the registration information generation unit M 1204  adds the home ID to the registration information obtained from the registration device M 1201  via the device UID obtainment unit M 1202 , to generate information-added registration information. If position information of the registration device M 1201  or the like is to be added to the registration information, the registration information generation unit M 1204  obtains the position information from a position information obtainment unit M 1206 . Examples of the position information are address information based on a post code inputted to a TV, geographical position information generated by a Global Positioning System (GPS) of a mobile phone, and the like. If position information of the registration device M 1201  is registered, the registered position information can be used to easily provide services to improve home appliance traceability or the like. The registration information generation unit M 1204  transmits the registration information added with the home ID to the registration information transmitting/receiving unit M 1207 . The home ID management unit manages home ID that is different from communication device ID used by the communication device included in the above-described home network. In conventional home networks, a master device of each communication device manages information for the communication device. The management method is different depending on a type of the corresponding communication device. Therefore, it is not possible to manage information on home-by-home basis. Although there is a situation where ID is inputted by a user for each service, this results in quite low usability. In the present embodiment, introduction of new different ID that is home ID makes it possible to manage pieces of information of devices included in a home network without using a communication device or services. When the home ID management unit registers information of a device to the server at the first time, the home ID management unit generates home ID. The home ID may be generated based on position information or UID of the communication device. It is also possible to generate home ID based on a random number to check whether or not the generated home ID does not overlap with any other ID in the registration server. It is further possible that a user sets the home ID. When a registration information transmitting/receiving unit M 1207  in the communication device M 1101  receives registration information from the registration information generation unit M 1204 , the registration information transmitting/receiving unit M 1207  transmits the received registration information to the registration server M 1005  using the home network communication device M 1103 . The registration server M 1005  compares the received registration information to pieces of information stored in the registration database M 1208  to determine whether or not the received registration information can be registered. Then, the registration server M 1005  sends a registration response back to the communication device M 1101 . In receiving the registration response, the registration information transmitting/receiving unit M 1207  notifies the user of a result of the determination by using the user IF device M 1104 . If the registration server M 1005  determines that the received registration information cannot be registered, the registration information transmitting/receiving unit  1207  notifies the determination to the registration information generation unit M 1204  in order to request change of the registration information. Thereby, it is possible to collectively manage devices in a home network including white goods that do not have user IF devices for communication. 
       FIG. 117  is a flowchart of registering information of the communication device. The communication device M 1101  receives the registration command and the device UID from the registration device M 1201  by using the device UID obtainment unit M 1202  (M 1301 ). After receiving the registration command and the device UID, the communication device M 1101  determines whether or not the communication device M 1101  has home ID (M 1302 ). If the communication device M 1101  does not have the home ID (NO at M 1302 ), then the communication device M 1101  obtains home ID (the processing is referred to as “home ID obtainment”) (M 1303 ). On the other hand, if the communication device M 1101  has the home ID (YES at M 1302 ), the communication device M 1101  generates information of the communication device to be registered into the communication device M 1101  itself (hereinafter, referred to as “registration information” or “home ID”) (M 1304 ). Next, the communication device M 1101  transmits the registration information to the registration server M 1005  by using the registration information transmitting/receiving unit M 1207  (M 1305 ). The communication device M 1101  determines whether or not the communication device M 1101  receives a response (registration response) to the transmitted registration information from the registration server M 1005  (M 1306 ). If the response is not received, then the communication device M 1101  presents a user with a registration failure notification for notifying a failure of the registration processing (M 1307 ) and terminates the registration processing. On the other hand, if the communication device M 1101  receives the response, then the communication device M 1101  presents the user with an inquiry asking whether or not to register the generated information into the communication device M 1101  (M 1308 ). If the user replies OK, then the communication device M 1101  completes the registration processing. If the user replies NO, the communication device M 1101  returns to the home ID obtainment. When it is difficult to obtain home ID, the registration processing is terminated as a failure. 
       FIG. 118  is a flowchart of the home ID obtainment. The communication device M 1101  determines whether or not the communication device M 1101  has a function of automatically generating home ID (hereinafter, referred to also as an “automatic generation function”) (M 1401 ). If the communication device M 1101  has the function, then the communication device M 1101  automatically generates the home ID. On the other hand, if the communication device M 1101  does not have the function, the communication device M 1101  asks the user to manually input the home ID. If there is no method for manually inputting home ID or the user refuses to the manual input, then the communication device M 1101  notifies the user of a failure of the registration processing (M 1403 ) to persuade the user to obtain the home ID by any different method. When the communication device M 1101  automatically generates home ID, the communication device M 1101  selects an appropriate automatic generation function (M 1404 ). If the communication device M 1101  can obtain geographical position information by a GPS or the communication device M 1101  is a terminal such as a TV for which an address as position information has been generally registered, the communication device M 1101  generates the home ID using the position information (M 1405 ). If the communication device M 1101  is a terminal generally set in a house, the communication device M 1101  generates the home ID using a unique identifier of the communication device M 1101  (M 1406 ). Especially if it is difficult to generate effective home ID, the communication device M 1101  generates the home ID using a random number (M 1407 ). After generating the home ID, the communication device M 1101  transmits the home ID to the server (M 1408 ). Then, the communication device M 1101  receives information regarding the generated home ID from the server, and thereby determines whether or not the home ID can be used (M 1409 ). If it is determined that the home ID cannot be used, then the communication device M 1101  returns to the processing of generating the home ID. On the other hand, if the home ID can be used, then the communication device M 1101  asks the user whether to not to register the generated home ID into the communication device M 1101  itself (M 1410 ). If the user replies OK, then the communication device M 1101  registers the home ID into the communication device M 1101  itself (M 1411 ). Otherwise, the communication device M 1101  returns to the processing of generating the home ID. 
       FIG. 119  is a flowchart of registering information of the registration device. The registration device M 1201  transfers a registration command and information including device UID for identifying the registration device M 1201 , to the communication device M 1101  via the proximity wireless communication device. If the communication device M 1101  does not have home ID, the communication device M 1101  generates provisional home ID and transmits the generated provisional home ID to the registration server M 1005  via the home network communication device. The registration server M 1005  sends a response with information regarding the provisional home ID to the communication device M 1101 . On the other hand, if the communication device M 1101  has home ID or if the communication device M 1101  receives, from the registration server M 1005 , home ID that is allowed by the registration server M 1005  to be used, the communication device M 1101  transmits the home ID and the registration information including the device UID to the registration server M 1005 , thereby completing the registration of information of the registration device M 1201 . 
     Fifteenth Embodiment 
     In the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention, a configuration in which the home ID is shared among communication terminals (communication devices) is described.  FIG. 120  is a functional block diagram illustrating a function of sharing home ID between communication devices. Communication devices M 1101 S and M 1101 R included in a home network share the same home ID using a home network M 1601  and the home network communication devices M 1103 . The communication devices M 1101 S and M 1101 R may share the home ID using the proximity wireless communication devices M 1102 . The communication device according to the present embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as a “transmitting communication device M 1101 S”) can share the home ID with another communication device (hereinafter, referred to as a “receiving communication device M 1101 R”) in the same house, by transferring a sharing command and home ID to the receiving communication device via the proximity wireless communication devices M 1102 . In the transmitting communication device M 1101 S, a home ID sharing unit M 1602 S in a home ID management unit M 1205 S provides the sharing command and the home ID that is held in a home ID storage unit M 1209 S, to a proximity wireless communication device M 1102 S. For example, when the proximity wireless communication device M 1102 S of the transmitting communication device M 1101 S is moved into proximity of a proximity wireless communication device M 1102 R of the receiving communication device M 1101 R, information is transferred between them. Thereby, the home ID in the transmitting communication device M 1101 S is stored into the proximity wireless communication device M 1102 R of the receiving communication device M 1101 R. If a home ID storage unit M 1209 R in the receiving communication device M 1101  does not hold any home ID, a home ID sharing unit M 1602 R in the receiving communication device M 1101 R stores the received home ID into the receiving communication device M 1101 R itself. Thereby, it is possible to quite easily share the home ID between the communication devices. On the other hand, if the home ID storage unit M 1209 R already holds home ID, the receiving communication device M 1101 R transmits both the held home ID and the received home ID to the registration server M 1005 . In receiving both home IDs, the registration server M 1005  manages both home IDs virtually as a single home ID. The registration server M 1005  may notify both communication devices of one of the home IDs to unify them. Even in this case, the registration server M 1005  manages both home IDs virtually as a single home ID since there are non-always-connected devices in the home network. It is possible that ID of a non-always-connected device is updated every time of being connected to the home network and the virtual management by the registration server M 1005  ends when updating of all of the registration devices (namely, devices to be registered which are included in the home network) are completed. Thereby, it is possible to unify originally plural home networks into a single network. 
     The home ID sharing can be performed by using the home network. When a communication device is to be connected to the home network M 1601  and a home network connection detection unit M 1603 S of the communication device detects that the communication device does not hold home ID, the communication device broadcasts a request for home ID sharing to terminals connected to the home network M 1601 . Terminals holding home ID among the terminals connected to the home network M 1601  transmit the home ID to the communication device. Thereby, the home ID sharing is completed prior to start of communication. Here, if a master terminal to respond to requests for home ID sharing is previously selected from among terminals holding the home ID, it is possible to prevent that a device requesting home ID sharing receives responses from a plurality of terminals thereby overburdening the home network. If there is no response, the communication device terminal requesting home ID sharing may obtain home ID by itself. 
       FIG. 121  is a flowchart of processing performed by the receiving communication device M 1101 R when home ID is shared using the proximity wireless communication device M 1102 . When the receiving communication device M 1101 R receives a sharing command and home ID (M 1701 ), the receiving communication device M 1101 R determines whether or not the receiving communication device M 1101 R holds home ID (M 1702 ). If the receiving communication device M 1101 R does not hold home ID, then the receiving communication device M 1101 R registers the received home ID, as home ID, into the receiving communication device M 1101 R itself (M 1703 ). On the other hand, if the receiving communication device M 1101 R holds home ID, the receiving communication device M 1101 R compares the held home ID to the received home ID. If the held home ID is identical to the received home ID, the receiving communication device M 1101 R terminates the processing without any further processes. On the other hand, if the held home ID is not identical to the received home ID, the receiving communication device M 1101 R selects home ID (M 1705 ). The selection of home ID may be performed by the receiving communication device M 1101 R or the registration server. In the situation where the receiving communication device M 1101 R asks the registration server to perform the selection, the receiving communication device M 1101 R transmits the held home ID and the received home ID to the registration server as sharing information (M 1706 ). Thereby, the receiving communication device M 1101 R receives, from the registration server, a sharing response including home ID selected by the registration server (M 1707 ). Then, the communication device M 1101 R inquiries the user whether or not to share (register) the selected ID into the communication device M 1101 R (M 1708 ). If the user replies OK, the registration processing is completed. If the user replies NO, the received ID receiving communication device M 1101 R returns to the processing for selecting home ID. In the case where the receiving communication device M 1101 R itself selects the held home ID, the receiving communication device M 1101 R transmits the held home ID as home ID and the received home ID as sharing home ID to the registration server (M 1709 ). The registration server notifies updating of the home ID to other communication devices already sharing home ID. In the situation where the receiving communication device M 1101 R selects the received home ID, then the receiving communication device M 1101 R updates the held home ID by the received home ID (M 1710 ). In addition, the receiving communication device M 1101 R transmits the previously held home ID as sharing home ID and the received home ID as home ID to the registration server (M 1711 ). The registration server notifies updating of the home ID to other communication devices already sharing home ID. 
       FIG. 122  is a flowchart of processing performed by the transmitting communication device M 1101 S when home ID is shared using the proximity wireless communication device M 1102 . After transmitting a sharing command and home ID to the registration server, the transmitting communication device M 1101 S determines whether or not a response to the home ID sharing is received from the registration server (M 1752 ). If there is no response, the transmitting communication device M 1101 S terminates the processing. On the other hand, if the response including a notification of updating home ID is received, the transmitting communication device M 1101 S updates the home ID by the notified home ID (M 1753 ) and completes the processing. 
       FIG. 123  is a sequence diagram of the situation where the registration server selects home ID. The transmitting communication device M 1101 S transmits home ID_A to the receiving communication device M 1101 R by using the proximity wireless communication device. The receiving communication device M 1101 R transmits home ID_B that is held in the receiving communication device M 1101 R itself and the received home ID_A to the registration server M 1005 . The registration server selects the home ID_B from the received home IDs, and notifies the home ID_B to a communication device holding the home ID_A and the receiving communication device M 1101 R to cause the devices to register the home ID_B. 
       FIG. 124  is a flowchart of processing performed by the transmitting communication device M 1101 S when home ID is shared using the home network communication device M 1103 . The transmitting communication device M 1101 S detects connection to the home network (M 1801 ), and broadcasts a request for home ID sharing to terminals in the home network (M 1802 ). If a response to the request for home ID sharing is received, the transmitting communication device M 1101 S registers home ID received with the response into the transmitting communication device M 1101 S itself (M 1804 ). On the other hand, if the response is not received, the transmitting communication device M 1101 S performs the home ID obtainment (M 1303 ). 
       FIG. 125  is a flowchart of processing performed by the receiving communication device M 1101 R when home ID is shared using the home network communication device M 1103 . After receiving the request for home ID sharing (M 1851 ), the receiving communication device M 1101 R determines whether or not the receiving communication device M 1101 R itself is a master terminal selected in the home network (M 1852 ). If the receiving communication device M 1101 R is the master terminal, then the receiving communication device M 1101 R transmits home ID held in the receiving communication device M 1101 R itself in response to the request (M 1853 ). On the other hand, if the receiving communication device M 1101 R is not the master terminal, then the receiving communication device M 1101 R does not perform any processes. Here, if a master terminal is not selected from terminals holding home ID, the receiving communication device M 1101 R responds to all requests for home ID sharing from any terminals without the determination regarding the master terminal. 
       FIG. 126  is a sequence diagram of the situation where the home ID is shared using the home network communication device M 1103 . When a communication device detects connection to a home network, the communication device broadcasts a request for home ID sharing to terminals in the home network. Only a communication device M 1854  selected as the master terminal from among communication devices receiving the request responds to the request. The communication device receiving the response registers home ID received with the response, into the communication device itself. 
     Sixteenth Embodiment 
     A communication device according to the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention is described in detail with reference to the drawings. The communication device according to the present embodiment of the present invention reads terminal apparatus information regarding a terminal apparatus from the terminal apparatus by using a Near Field Communication (NFC) function, and transfers the terminal apparatus information to a server via a general-purpose network. 
       FIG. 127  illustrates a system according to the present embodiment. The system according to the present embodiment includes a terminal apparatus Y 01 , a communication device Y 02 , and a server Y 04 . The subject of the present embodiment is the communication device Y 02 . 
     The terminal apparatus Y 01  is a device having a NFC function (RF-ID unit, IC tag, or NFC tag emulation). The terminal apparatus Y 01  is, for example, an electronic terminal apparatus such as a refrigerator, a microwave, a washing machine, a TV, or a recording device. The terminal apparatus Y 01  has an internal memory for holding, as terminal apparatus information, a product serial number that is ID for identifying the terminal apparatus Y 01 , use history information of the terminal apparatus Y 01 , error information, and the like. 
     The communication device Y 02  has a NFC function for communicating with the NFC function of the terminal apparatus Y 01  by proximity wireless communication. The communication device Y 02  includes a reader/writer function of reading the terminal apparatus information from the terminal apparatus Y 01 . The communication device Y 02  is, for example, a portable device such as a mobile phone or a remote controller terminal of a TV. 
     The server Y 04  is a server connected to the communication device Y 02  in order to communicate with the communication device Y 02 , via a general-purpose network such as the Internet. The server Y 04  includes a database (DB) for accumulating the terminal apparatus information that is read from the terminal apparatus Y 01  to the communication device Y 02 . 
     The terminal apparatus Y 01  includes a Central Processing Unit (CPU) Y 011 , a failure sensor unit Y 012 , a use history logging unit Y 013 , a memory Y 014 , a modulation unit Y 017 , and an antenna Y 018 . 
     The CPU Y 011  is a unit that controls a system of the terminal apparatus Y 01 . The CPU Y 011  controls the failure sensor unit Y 012 , the use history logging unit Y 013 , the memory Y 014 , and the modulation unit Y 017  which are units included in the terminal apparatus. 
     The failure sensor unit Y 012  is a unit that detects a location and detail of a failure occurred in each unit included in the terminal apparatus Y 01 . A piece of failure information detected by the failure sensor unit Y 012  is accumulated in a Random Access Memory (RAM) in the memory Y 014 . The detected failure information is represented by an error code that is uniquely defined depending on a location and condition of the failure. 
     The use history logging unit Y 013  is a unit that performs logging for each piece of use history information every time the terminal apparatus Y 01  is operated by the user. The use history information applied with logging is accumulated into the RAM Y 016  in the memory Y 014 . In general, when use history information is used to examine how a failure has occurred, several pieces of use history information up to occurrence of the failure have high priorities of being examined. Therefore, it is desirable that the use history logging unit Y 013  according to the present embodiment uses the RAM Y 016  as First In First Out (FIFO) to chronologically accumulate new pieces of use history information into the RAM Y 016 . Moreover, when use history information is used to examine how a failure has occurred, it is desirable that several pieces of use history information up to a timing detected by the failure sensor unit Y 012  are stored as priorities into the RAM. Therefore, if when five minor failures are detected in using the terminal apparatus Y 01 , several pieces of operation (use) history information up to the five failures are stored as priorities. 
     The memory Y 014  includes a Read Only Memory (ROM) Y 015  and the RAM Y 016 . 
     The ROM Y 015  previously stores at least a product serial number for uniquely identifying the terminal apparatus Y 01  when the terminal apparatus Y 01  has been shipped. The user of the terminal apparatus Y 01  cannot update the information previously held in the ROM Y 05 . The product serial number is desirably information by which a manufacturer, a manufacturing lot number, and a manufacturing date of the terminal apparatus Y 01  can be determined. It is also desirable that the ROM Y 015  is embedded in a semiconductor chip of the CPU Y 011 . This structure prevents information during memory access to be easily inspected. Therefore, secret key information for authentication and encrypted communication in proximity wireless communication with the communication device can be recorded on the ROMY 015  when shipping. 
     The RAMY 016  is a rewritable memory in which the failure information detected by the failure sensor unit Y 012  and the use history information applied with logging of the use history logging unit Y 013  are accumulated. 
     The modulation unit Y 017  is a unit that modulates communication data for proximity wireless communication with the communication device Y 02 . The modulation method varies depending on employed NFC standard. For example, Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK), Frequency Shift Keying (FSK), Phase Shift Keying (PSK), and the like are used. 
     An example of the antenna Y 018  is a loop antenna. The antenna Y 018  generates electromagnetic induction from radio waves emitted from an antenna of the communication device Y 02 . The antenna Y 018  performs at least processing of providing power to the modulation unit Y 017  and the memory Y 014  to be operated. In addition, the antenna Y 018  overlaps reflected waves of the radio waves emitted from the communication device Y 02  with signals modulated by the modulation unit Y 017  to transmit the terminal apparatus information that is stored in the memory Y 014  to the communication device Y 02 . 
     As described above, the terminal apparatus according to the present embodiment detects failures occurred in each unit included in the terminal apparatus. Then, the terminal apparatus performs logging for use histories to accumulate the use histories into the memory. Then, if the terminal apparatus is moved into proximity of the communication device Y 02  to be capable of performing proximity wireless communication with the communication device Y 02 , the terminal apparatus can transmit the terminal apparatus information stored in the memory into the communication device Y 02 . 
     Next, the communication device Y 02  according to the present embodiment is described. It should be noted that the subject of the present embodiment is the communication device Y 02 . 
     The communication device Y 02  includes an antenna Y 021 , a CPU Y 022 , a demodulation unit Y 023 , a memory Y 024 , a position information determination unit Y 027 , a GPS antenna Y 031 , a communication memory Y 032 , an information adding unit Y 035 , and a communication unit Y 036 . 
     The antenna Y 021  performs polling for calling any terminal apparatuses in order to search for a terminal apparatus communicable with the communication device Y 02  by proximity wireless communication. In receiving a response to the polling, the antenna Y 021  establishes proximity wireless communication with the responding terminal apparatus Y 01  to receive modulated terminal apparatus information from the terminal apparatus Y 01 , and provides the modulated terminal apparatus information to the demodulation unit Y 023 . In general, the polling processing is always necessary even if there is no terminal apparatus communicable with the communication device Y 02  by proximity wireless communication. This consumes power. Therefore, the communication device Y 02  is provided with a switch (not shown) for controlling a timing of start of polling, so that polling processing is performed when the switch is turned ON. This structure can significantly shorten a time period of the polling. As a result, the power consumption amount of the communication device Y 02  can be considerably reduced. This is especially efficient when the communication device Y 02  operates by a limited power source such as a battery. 
     The CPU Y 022  is a unit that controls a system of the communication device Y 02 . The CPU Y 022  controls operations of each unit included in the communication device Y 02 . 
     The modulation unit Y 023  is a unit that demodulates data modulated by the modulation unit Y 017  of the terminal apparatus Y 01 . The demodulated terminal apparatus information is temporarily stored into the memory Y 024 . 
     The memory Y 024  includes a ROM Y 025  and a RAM Y 026 . 
     The ROM Y 025  is a memory that cannot be rewritten by the outside. The ROMY 025  previously holds a product serial number for uniquely identifying the communication device Y 02  when the communication device Y 02  has been shipped. The product serial number is desirably information by which a manufacturer, a manufacturing lot number, and a manufacturing date of the communication device Y 02  can be determined. It is also desirable that the ROMY 025  is embedded in a semiconductor chip of the CPU Y 022 . This structure prevents information during memory access from being easily inspected. Therefore, secret key information for authentication and encrypted communication in proximity wireless communication with the terminal apparatus Y 01  can be recorded on the ROM Y 025  when shipping. 
     The RAM Y 026  holds the terminal apparatus information of the terminal apparatus Y 01  which is received by the antenna Y 021  and demodulated by the demodulation unit Y 023 . As described earlier, the terminal apparatus information includes the product serial number for uniquely identifying the terminal apparatus Y 01 , the use history information of the terminal apparatus Y 01 , and failure codes. 
     The position information determination unit Y 027  is a group of sensors for determining a location of the communication device Y 02 . The position information determination unit Y 027  includes a latitude/longitude positioning unit (GPS) Y 028 , an altitude positioning unit Y 029 , and a position correction unit Y 030 . The position information determination unit Y 027  does not need to always determine a location of the communication device Y 02  (location information) if the location information is generated at a timing where the communication device Y 02  becomes communicable with the terminal apparatus Y 01  using the antenna Y 021 . As a result, power consumption of the communication device Y 02  can be reduced. 
     The latitude/longitude positioning unit Y 028  is a general Global Positioning System (GPS) that receives radio waves from satellites to perform 3-dimensional (3D) positioning of the earth. 
     The altitude positioning unit Y 029  is a general altimeter. The altitude positioning unit Y 029  may be any various altimeters, such as an altimeter receiving radio waves to extract an altitude, an altimeter detecting an air pressure to measure an altitude, and the like. The altitude positioning unit Y 029  is provide to the communication device Y 02  so that an altitude can be detected even in a building where GPS cannot receive radio waves. 
     The position correction unit Y 030  is a unit that corrects a value measured by the GPS to generate more accurate position information. In general, when radio waves from satellites cannot be received in a room or the like, the GPS cannot generate correct position information. Therefore, the position correction unit Y 030  includes an electronic compass and a 6-axis acceleration sensor. The electronic compass is used to detect a direction in which the communication device Y 02  moves and the acceleration sensor is used to detect a speed of the movement. Thereby, it is possible to correct position information generated by the GPS in a location where the GPS is difficult. 
     Regarding the information adding unit Y 035 , when the terminal apparatus information that has been provided from the terminal apparatus Y 01  and stored into the memory Y 024  is to be transmitted to the server Y 04 , the information adding unit Y 035  adds (a) the product serial number of the communication device Y 02  that is stored in the ROM Y 025  in the memory Y 024  and (b) the position information measured by the position information determination unit Y 027 , to the terminal apparatus information. This enables the server Y 04  to determine which communication device transmits the terminal apparatus information, where the transmitting terminal apparatus is located, for example, and then manage the results of the determination. For example, if a manufacturer of the terminal apparatus finds that the terminal apparatus has a possibility of causing serious accidents, the information in the database of the server Y 04  allows the manufacturer to determine where the terminal apparatus is. Thereby, the possibility of causing serious accidents can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to increase sense of safety and security of the user using the terminal apparatus. Furthermore, when the communication device Y 02  has a display function as mobile phone terminals have, the above-described terminal apparatus information generated by the information adding unit Y 035  makes it possible to determine with which communication device the terminal apparatus having a possibility of accidents can perform proximity wireless communication, and thereby display a notification of the possibility of accidents in the terminal apparatus on the communication device Y 02 . Thereby, even if such a terminal apparatus generally does not have any display function and is not connected to a general-purpose network, it is possible to transmit a notification of the accident possibility of the terminal apparatus to the communication device Y 02  in order to warn the user using the terminal apparatus. As a result, it is also possible to provide a terminal apparatus that can increase sense of safety and security of the user using the terminal apparatus. 
     The communication unit Y 036  is a unit that communicates with the server Y 04  via the Internet by using general LAN, wireless LAN, or mobile phone network. Thereby, the communication unit Y 036  transmits, to the server Y 04 , the terminal apparatus information added with the product serial number and the position information of the communication device Y 02  as the communication device information. Here, the added terminal apparatus information is further added with a MAC address and an Internet Protocol (IP) address to be transmitted to the server Y 04 . 
     The server Y 04  is connected to the communication device Y 02  via a general-purpose network such as the Internet. The server Y 04  includes a device management database (DB) for managing the terminal apparatus information. 
     The device management DB Y 041  stores the terminal apparatus information in association with the communication device information. In the device management DB Y 041  according to the present embodiment, the communication device information is managed as parent device information, and the terminal apparatus information is managed as child device information in association with the parent device information. The child device information is added with the position information generated by the communication device in order to manage further information indicating where the terminal apparatus is. 
     As described above, in the system according to the present embodiment, the terminal apparatus information is read from the terminal apparatus by the communication device using proximity wireless communication. The communication device is touched to the terminal apparatus to communicate with the terminal apparatus to obtain the terminal apparatus information. The communication device adds a product serial number and position information of the communication device to the obtained terminal apparatus information, and transmits the generated information to the server. Thereby, the server can manage the communication device information as parent device information in association with the terminal apparatus information as child device information. Therefore, if a manufacturer of the terminal apparatus finds that the terminal apparatus would cause serious accidents, the manufacture can easily recall the terminal apparatus or display a notification of a possibility of the serious accident on a display unit of the communication device. As a result, it is possible to achieve traceability of the products and to provide the users of the products with safety and security. 
       FIG. 128  is a sequence diagram of processing performed by the units included in the system described with reference to  FIG. 127 . 
     First, the communication device Y 02  performs polling to the terminal apparatus Y 01  to establish proximity wireless communication. In terms of power consumption amount of the communication device, it is desirable as described earlier that a switch operated by a user is provided so that the polling is performed while the switch is being pressed or the polling starts when the switch is pressed (SY 01 ). 
     Next, the terminal apparatus Y 01  sends a response to the polling to the communication device Y 02  in order to establish proximity wireless communication with the communication device Y 02  (SY 02 ). At this timing, the position information determination unit Y 027  of the communication device Y 02  generates position information of a current position to be used as position information of the terminal apparatus Y 01 . The generation of the position information is not limited to be performed only in completion of the polling. The position information may be generated any time while the proximity wireless communication is established after the response to the polling. It is important to determine the position of the terminal apparatus at a high accuracy, by generating position information of the position where proximity wireless communication, which can be performed when a distance between communicating devices is only several centimeters, is established. 
     After the establishment of the proximity wireless communication at SY 02 , mutual authentication between the terminal apparatus Y 01  and the communication device Y 02  is performed using general public key cryptography, and also key sharing is temporarily performed to share cryptography keys generated by the terminal apparatus Y 01  and the communication device Y 02  between the devices (SY 03 ). After that, while the proximity wireless communication is established, data on the communication path is encrypted using the cryptography keys to communicate between the devices. As a result, tapping of the data can be prevented. 
     After completing the key sharing, the terminal apparatus Y 01  transmits the terminal apparatus information recorded on the memory Y 014  of the terminal apparatus Y 01 , to the communication device Y 02  (SY 04 ). 
     When the communication device Y 02  receives the terminal apparatus information from the terminal apparatus Y 01 , the communication device Y 02  stores the received terminal apparatus information into the memory Y 024  of the communication device Y 02  (SY 05 ). 
     When the communication device Y 02  completes receiving of the terminal apparatus information from the terminal apparatus Y 01 , the communication device Y 02  issues a connection request to the server Y 04  (SY 06 ). 
     The server Y 04  responds to the connection request of SY 06  to establish communication with the communication device Y 02  (SY 07 ). 
     After establishing communication between the communication device Y 02  and the server Y 04 , the communication device Y 02  adds the communication device information of the communication device Y 02  to the terminal apparatus information of the terminal apparatus Y 01  to be transmitted to the server Y 04  (SY 08 ). Here, the communication device information includes, for example, a product serial number of the communication device Y 02 , position information of the communication device Y 02  when proximity wireless communication with the terminal apparatus Y 01  is established, an e-mail address of the user registered in the communication device Y 02  (if any), a connection account to the server Y 04  registered in the communication device Y 02  (if any), and the like. 
     After adding the communication device information to the terminal apparatus information at SY 08 , then the communication device Y 02  transmits the terminal apparatus information added with the communication device information to the server Y 04  (SY 09 ). 
     The server Y 04  registers the terminal apparatus information added with the communication device information received from the communication device Y 02 , into the device management DB Y 041 . Thereby, the processing is completed. 
     Thereby, the server Y 04  can manage pieces of information regarding devices for each house, by managing information of each terminal apparatus Y 01 , which establishes proximity wireless communication with the communication device Y 02  touching the terminal apparatus Y 01 , in association with identification information (product serial number or the like) of the communication device Y 02 . In addition, for the position information registered as information of a position at which the terminal apparatus is equipped, position information indicating a position where proximity wireless communication is established between the communication device Y 02  and the terminal apparatus Y 01  is used. Since the proximity wireless communication according to the present embodiment is performed at common High Frequency (HF) band of 13.56 MHz, the communication is possible when a distance between communicating devices is within several centimeters. Therefore, if the position information detected in establishing proximity wireless communication is set to be position information of the terminal apparatus, a maximum error is several centimeters which results in assuring an enough accuracy to achieve traceability of the products. 
       FIG. 129  is a schematic diagram illustrating a group of pieces of information of terminal apparatuses managed in association with information of the communication device Y 02  in the device management DB Y 041  of the server Y 04 . 
     When the user intends to perform user registration or the like for a terminal apparatus using the communication device Y 02  in purchasing the terminal apparatus, the following processing is performed. The user equips the terminal apparatus and touches the terminal apparatus by the communication device Y 02 . Thereby, terminal apparatus information of the terminal information is provided to the communication device Y 02  using proximity wireless communication. The communication device Y 02  adds the communication device information of the communication device Y 02  to the terminal apparatus information in order to be transmitted to the server Y 04 . In receiving the terminal apparatus information added with the communication device information, the server Y 04  manages the terminal apparatus information as child device information and the communication device information as parent device information in association with each other in the device management DB. For example, in the device management DB, terminal apparatus information of a terminal apparatus  1  (for example, a microwave Y 052 ), terminal apparatus information of a terminal apparatus  2  (for example, a washing machine Y 053 ), and terminal apparatus information of a terminal apparatus  3  (for example, a TV Y 054 ), all of which are touched by a communication device Y 051 , are managed in association with a product serial number of the communication device Y 051 . Each of the terminal apparatus information includes whereabout information (longitude, latitude, altitude, and the like) and use status information (use histories, error codes, use time periods, and the like). Thereby, the server Y 04  can manage pieces of information of devices for each house, because the communication device Y 051  touches these terminal apparatuses. As a result, traceability of the terminal apparatuses can be achieved. 
     Furthermore, the communication device generates position information when proximity wireless communication with the terminal apparatus is established and uses the generated position information as position information of the terminal apparatus. Therefore, it is possible to register a position of the terminal apparatus with an error of several centimeters which is a distance capable for proximity wireless communication between devices. Since the GPS in the communication device is used to generate the position information of the terminal apparatus, each terminal apparatus does not have a GPS, thereby reducing a cost. 
       FIG. 130  is a schematic diagram illustrating display screens of the display unit of the communication device Y 02  when the communication device Y 02  touches the terminal apparatus Y 01 . 
     First, the description is given for the situation where the communication device Y 02  touches the terminal apparatus Y 01  to register information of the terminal apparatus Y 01  into the server Y 04 . 
     When the user operates the communication device Y 02  to start up a reader/writer application program of the communication device Y 02 , the communication device Y 02  displays, on a display screen, a message persuading the user to make the communication device Y 02  touch the terminal apparatus Y 01  for proximity wireless communication (Y 060 ). 
     When the communication device Y 02  touches the terminal apparatus Y 01 , proximity wireless communication is established between the devices. The communication device Y 02  reads terminal apparatus information of the terminal apparatus Y 01  from the terminal apparatus Y 01 , generates position information of a current position, and provides the pieces of information to the memory in which the pieces of information are temporarily stored. Then, the communication device Y 02  establishes communication with the server Y 04  and transmits the terminal apparatus information added with communication device information of the communication device Y 02  to the server Y 04 . The server Y 04  determines whether or not the terminal apparatus information has already been registered in the device management DB. If it is determined that the terminal apparatus information has not yet been registered in the device management DB, then the server Y 04  causes the communication device Y 02  to display, on the display unit of the communication device Y 02 , a message asking the user whether or not to register information of the terminal apparatus Y 01  (Y 061 ). 
     Next, when the user selects to register the information of the terminal apparatus Y 01 , the server Y 04  causes the communication device Y 02  to display a message asking the user whether or not to register position information of the terminal apparatus. When the user selects to register the position information, the server Y 04  registers the position information associated with the terminal apparatus information transmitted from the communication device Y 02  to the server Y 04 , into the device management DB of the server Y 04  as position information of the terminal apparatus Y 01  (Y 062 ). 
     Next, the description is given for the situation where the position information of the terminal apparatus Y 01  is different from the position information registered in the device management DB of the server Y 04 . 
     When the user operates the communication device Y 02  to start up a reader/writer application program of the communication device Y 02 , the communication device Y 02  displays, on the display screen, a message persuading the user to make the communication device Y 02  to touch the terminal apparatus Y 01  by the communication device Y 02  to perform proximity wireless communication (Y 063 ). 
     When the communication device Y 02  touches the terminal apparatus Y 01 , proximity wireless communication is established between the devices. The communication device Y 02  reads terminal apparatus information of the terminal apparatus Y 01  from the terminal apparatus Y 01 , generates position information, and transmits the terminal apparatus information added with communication device information of the communication device Y 02  to the server Y 04 . The server Y 04  compares (a) a product serial number of the terminal apparatus which is included in the received terminal apparatus information to (b) a product serial number registered in the device management DB, in order to examine whether or not information of the touched terminal apparatus is already registered in the server Y 04 . In addition, the server Y 04  extracts the position information from the received communication device information, and examines whether or not the extracted position information is identical to the position information registered in the device management DB. Since the position information has an error, of course, the determination is made to compare the position information to a threshold value that has the order of several centimeters (in other words, the threshold value is a value corresponding to a distance between devices capable for proximity wireless communication). If it is determined that the extracted position information is different from the registered position information, the server Y 04  causes the communication device Y 02  to display, on the display unit, a message notifying the user of the result of the determination (Y 064 ). 
     Then, the communication device Y 02  displays, on the display unit, a message asking the user whether or not to update the position information of the terminal apparatus Y 01  to information of a current position of the terminal apparatus Y 01  (Y 065 ). 
     If the user selects to update the position information, the communication device Y 02  registers the position information generated by touching the terminal apparatus Y 01  by the communication device Y 02 , into the device management DB of the server Y 04  as new position information of the terminal apparatus Y 01 . 
     Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even if the position information that has been registered is changed because the terminal apparatus Y 01  is moved and equipped at a different location, it is possible to update the position information to new position information that is generated by touching the terminal apparatus Y 01  by the communication device Y 02 . Thereby, an accuracy of traceability of the terminal apparatus Y 01  can be improved. 
     Seventeenth Embodiment 
       FIG. 131  is a functional block diagram of the RF-ID unit N 10  according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention. 
     Referring to  FIG. 131 , the RF-ID unit N 10  includes an antenna N 11 , a power supply unit N 12 , a memory N 13 , a reproducing unit N 14 , and a data transfer unit N 15 . The antenna N 11  is used for proximity wireless communication. The power supply unit N 12  is supplied with power via the antenna N 11 . The memory N 13  is a nonvolatile memory in which pieces of individual identification information are stored. The reproducing unit N 14  reproduces data registered in the memory N 13 . The data transfer unit N 15  transmits the data registered in the memory N 13  into the outside via the antenna N 11 . 
     The memory N 13  stores UID N 13 A, a part number N 13 B, server specific information N 13 C, and an operation program N 13 D. The UID N 13 A is used to identify a product having the RF-ID unit N 10 . The part number N 13 B is used to identify a part number of the product having the RF-ID unit N 10 . The server specific information N 13 C is used to specify the registration server N 40 . The operation program N 13 D is to be executed by the mobile device N 20 . 
       FIG. 132  is a functional block diagram of the mobile device N 20  according to the present embodiment. 
     Referring to  FIG. 132 , the mobile device N 20  includes a RF-ID reader/writer N 21 , a RF-ID storage unit N 22 , a program execution unit N 23 , a data processing unit N 24 , a memory unit N 25 , a display unit N 26 , a communication I/F unit N 27 , a transmission unit N 28 , a receiving unit N 29 , a communication unit N 30 , a GPS N 31 , a 6-axis sensor N 32 , a position information storage unit N 33 , and a CPU N 34 . The RF-ID reader/writer N 21  receives data from the RF-ID unit N 10 . The RF-ID storage unit N 22  holds the data provided from the RF-ID reader/writer N 21 . The program execution unit N 23  executes a program included in the data. The data processing unit N 24  performs data processing for image data included in the data. The memory unit N 25  holds the image data processed by the data processing unit N 24 . The display unit N 26  displays the image temporarily stored in the memory unit N 25 . The communication I/F unit N 27  connects the mobile device N 20  to other device via a general-purpose network. The transmission unit N 28  transmits data to the outside via the communication I/F unit N 27 . The receiving unit N 29  receives data from the outside via the communication I/F unit N 27 . The communication unit N 30  communicates with other device via a general-purpose network by using the communication I/F unit N 27 . The GPS N 31  measures a position of the mobile device N 20  to generate absolute position information of the mobile device N 20 . The 6-axis sensor N 32  measures a position of the mobile device N 20  to generate relative position information of the mobile device N 20 . The position information storage unit N 33  holds results of the measurement of the GPS N 31  and the 6-axis sensor N 32 . The CPU N  34  analyzes the position information stored in the position information storage unit N 33 . 
       FIG. 133  is a functional block diagram of the registration server N 40  according to the present embodiment. 
     Referring to  FIG. 133 , the registration server N 40  includes a communication I/F unit N 41 , a transmission unit N 42 , a receiving unit N 43 , a communication unit N 44 , a product information management unit N 45 , an image data storage unit N 46 , a program storage unit N 47 , a position information generation unit N 48 , and a product control unit N 49 . The communication I/F unit N 41  connects the registration server N 40  to other device via a general-purpose network. The transmission unit N 42  transmits data to the outside via the communication I/F unit N 41 . The receiving unit N 43  receives data from the outside via the communication I/F unit N 41 . The communication unit N 44  communicates with other device via a general-purpose network by using the communication I/F unit N 41 . The product information management unit N 45  manages product information received from the communication I/F unit N 41 . The image data storage unit N 46  holds image data to be transmitted to the mobile device N 20 . The program storage unit N 47  holds a program to be transmitted to the mobile device N 20 . The position information generation unit N 48  generates a map indicating position relationships among the products having the RF-ID unit N 10 , by combining the pieces of product information stored in the product information management unit N 45 . The product control unit N 49  controls the products having the RF-ID units N 10  by using the pieces of product information stored in the product information management unit N 45  and information of a current position of the mobile device N 20 . 
     The present embodiment differs from the other embodiments in that the products in the house are controlled based on a product map generated from (a) the position information of the mobile device N 20  and (b) pieces of position information of the products having the RF-ID units N 10 . 
       FIG. 134  is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement of the networked products according to the present embodiment. 
     Referring to the arrangement diagram of  FIG. 134 , in the house, there are: a TV N 10 A, a BD recorder N 10 B, an air conditioner N 10 C, and a FF heater N 10 K in a living room on the first floor; an air conditioner N 10 D and a fire alarm N 10 E in an European-style room on the first floor; an air conditioner N 10 F and a fire alarm N 10 G in a Japanese-style room on the first floor; a TV N 10 I and an air conditioner N 10 J on the second floor; and a solar panel N 10 H on a roof. 
     As described earlier,  FIG. 135  is the diagram illustrating an example of the system according to the present embodiment.  FIG. 135  is a configuration of home appliances in the arrangement of  FIG. 134 . 
     This system includes: products from the TV N 10 A to the FF heater N 10 K; the mobile device N 20  illustrated in  FIG. 132 ; the registration server N 40  illustrated in  FIG. 133 ; a home network N 100 ; and an external network N 101 . Each of the products N 10 A to N 10 K has (a) the RF-ID unit N 10  illustrated in  FIG. 131  and (b) a communication I/F unit N 18  used to communicate with other products and devices via a general-purpose network. The home network N 100  connects the products N 10 A to N 10 K to the mobile device N 20 . The external network N 101  connects the home network N 100  to the registration server N 40 . 
     The following describes an example of a method of registering information regarding a product having the RF-ID unit N 10  into the registration server N 40  with reference to  FIGS. 136 to 141 . 
       FIG. 136  is a sequence diagram for registering information of the TV N 10 A into the registration server N 40 . 
     First, when a user moves the mobile device N 20  to bring the RF-ID reader/writer N 21  of the mobile device N 20  to proximity of an antenna N 11  of the TV N 10 A, the RF-ID reader/writer N 21  supplies power to a power supply unit N 12  of the TV N 10 A via the antenna N 11  to provide power to each unit in the RF-ID unit N 10  (( 1 ) in  FIG. 136 ). 
     The reproducing unit N 14  in the RF-ID unit N 10  generates product information. The product information includes the UID N 13 A, the part number ID N 13 B, the server specific information N 13 C, and the operation program N 13 D stored in the memory N 13 . 
       FIG. 137A  is a table illustrating examples of a structure of the product information. The product information illustrated in  FIG. 137A  includes: part number ID that is a part number of the TV N 10 A (including color information); UID that is a product serial number of the TV N 10 A; server specific information including an address, a login ID, and a password regarding the registration server N 40 ; and an operation program to be executed by the program execution unit N 23  in the mobile device N 20 . 
     The data transfer unit N 15  in the RF-ID unit N 10  modulates the product information and transmits the modulated product information to the RF-ID reader/writer N 21  of the mobile device N 20  via the antenna N 11  (( 2 ) in  FIG. 136 ). 
     The RF-ID reader/writer N 21  in the mobile device N 20  receives the product information and stores the received product information into the RF-ID storage unit N 22 . 
     The program execution unit N 23  executes the operation program included in the product information stored in the RF-ID storage unit N 22 . 
     Here, the program execution unit N 23  executes the operation program to “generate server registration information to be transmitted to the address of the registration server N 40  which is designated in the product information”. 
       FIG. 137B  is a table illustrating another example of a structure of the product information. The server registration information illustrated in  FIG. 137B  includes: part number ID that is a part number of the TV N 10 A (including color information); UID that is a product serial number of the TV N 10 A; server specific information including a login ID and a password regarding the registration server N 40 ; and position information of the mobile device N 20 . 
     Next, the position information of the mobile device N 20  is explained. 
     The GPS N 31  in the mobile device N 20  constantly operates while the mobile device N 20  is active. Detected results of the GPS N 31  are stored in the position information storage unit N 33 . 
     The 6-axis sensor N 32  operates when the mobile device N 20  is outside an area in which the GPS N 31  can perform positioning. The 6-axis sensor N 32  stores detected results into the position information storage unit N 33 . 
     The program execution unit N 23  generates position information to be included in the server registration information, from the results detected by the GPS N 31  and the 6-axis sensor N 32  which are stored in the position information storage unit N 33 . 
     From the generated position information and information stored in the RF-ID storage unit N 22 , the program execution unit N 23  generates the server registration information as illustrated in  FIG. 137B . 
     Next, the communication unit N 30  designates an address of the registration server N 40  which is recorded on the RF-ID storage unit N 22 , to be a destination address of the server registration information. 
     The transmission unit N 28  transmits the generated server registration information via the communication I/F unit N 27  (( 3 ) in  FIG. 136 ). 
     The receiving unit N 43  of the registration server N 40  receives the server registration information via the communication I/F unit N 41 . 
     The communication unit N 44  confirms the login ID and the password in the server registration information. 
     If the login ID and the password are correct, the registration server N 40  stores, into the product information management unit N 45 , the part number ID, the UID, and the position information included in the server registration information. 
       FIG. 138A  is a table illustrating an example of a structure of product information regarding the TV N 10 A which is registered on the product information management unit N 45 . The product information includes the part number ID, the UID, and the position information. The position information includes latitude, longitude, and altitude. 
     Next, when the registration of the product information of the TV N 10 A is completed, the communication unit N 44  in the registration server N 40  generates a server registration completion notification. The server registration completion notification includes (a) image data that is previously stored in the image data storage unit N 46  and (b) the operation program stored in the program storage unit N 47 . Then, the communication unit N 44  designates an address of the mobile device N 20  to be a destination of the server registration completion notification. 
     The transmission unit N 42  transmits the generated server registration completion notification via the communication I/F unit N 41 (( 4 ) in  FIG. 136 ). 
     The receiving unit N 29  of the registration server N 20  receives the server registration completion notification via the communication I/F unit N 27 . 
     The communication unit N 30  in the mobile device N 20  confirms the destination address of the server registration completion notification, and provides the received server registration completion notification to the program execution unit N 23 . 
     The program execution unit N 23  executes the operation program included in the server registration completion notification. Here, the program execution unit N 23  executes the operation program to “display image data on the display unit N 26 .” 
     In more detail, the program execution unit N 23  instructs the data processing unit N 24  to perform processing for the image data. 
     The data processing unit N 24  thereby performs data processing for the image data. For example, if downloaded image data is compressed, the data processing unit N 24  decompresses the image data. If the image data is encrypted, the data processing unit N 24  decrypts the image data. The data processing unit N 24  may also arrange the downloaded image data in an image display style based on an image display style sheet. 
     In completing the data processing, the data processing unit N 24  provides the processed image data to the memory unit N 25  in which the processed image data is temporarily stored. 
     The display unit N 26  displays the image data stored in the memory unit N 25 . In this example, the image data accumulated in the memory unit N 25  is used to notify a user of that registration of information of a corresponding product is completed without any problem. 
       FIG. 138B  is a table illustrating an example of pieces of product information managed in the product information management unit N 45  of the registration server N 40 , after pieces of information regarding the other products from the BD recorder N 10 B to the FF heater N 10 K are registered in the registration server N 40  in the same manner as described for the TV N 10 A. Pieces of product information for which registration processing is performed in the house of  FIG. 134  are managed in the same table. In this example, products registered using the same mobile device N 20  are determined as products for which registration processing is performed in the same house. 
       FIG. 139  is a flowchart of an example of processing performed by the RF-ID unit N 10  to perform product registration. 
     First, the RF-ID unit N 10  of a target product waits for power supply from the mobile device N 20  (N 001 ). 
     If the RF-ID unit N 10  receives power from the mobile device N 20 , then the processing proceeds to N 002 . Otherwise, the processing returns to N 001 . 
     At N 002 , the RF-ID unit N 10  generates product information including information stored in the memory N 13 . Then, at N 003 , the RF-ID unit N 10  transmits the product information from the antenna N 11  to the mobile device N 20 . Thereby, the processing is completed. 
       FIG. 140  is a flowchart of an example of processing performed by the mobile device N 20  to perform product registration. 
     First, at N 001 , the RF-ID reader/writer N 21  of the mobile device N 20  supplies power to the RF-ID unit N 10  of the target product. 
     Next, the mobile device N 20  waits for product information from the RF-ID unit N 10  of the target product (N 005 ). 
     If the mobile device N 20  receives product information from the RF-ID unit N 10 , then the processing proceeds to N 006 . Otherwise, the processing returns to N 004  to supply power to the RF-ID unit N 10  again. 
     At N 006 , the mobile device N 20  analyzes the received product information and thereby executes an operation program included in the product information. 
     At N 007 , the mobile device N 20  determines a position of the mobile device N 20  itself. 
     At N 008 , the mobile device N 20  generates server registration information including information of the determined position. At N 009 , the mobile device N 20  transmits the generated server registration information to the registration server N 40  via the communication I/F unit N 27 . 
     Next, the mobile device N 20  waits for a server registration completion notification from the registration server N 40  (N 010 ). 
     If the mobile device N 20  receives the server registration completion notification from the registration server N 40 , then the processing proceeds to N 011 . 
     At N 011 , the mobile device N 20  analyzes the server registration completion notification. Then, at N 012 , the mobile device N 20  displays, on the display unit N 26 , image data included in the server registration completion notification. Thereby, the processing is completed. 
       FIG. 141  is a flowchart of an example of processing performed by the registration server N 40  to perform product registration. 
     First, the registration server N 40  waits for server registration information from the mobile device N 20  (N 013 ). 
     If the registration server N 40  receives the server registration information from the mobile device N 20 , then the processing proceeds to N 014 . Otherwise, the processing returns to N 013 . 
     At N 014 , the registration server N 40  analyzes the received server registration information to determine whether or not a login name and a password included in the server registration information are correct. If the login name and the password are correct, then, at N 015 , the registration server N 40  stores the product information into the product information management unit N 45 . 
     At N 016 , the registration server N 40  generates a server registration completion notification that includes an operation program and image data. At N 017 , the registration server N 40  transmits the generated server registration completion notification from the communication I/F unit N 41  to the mobile device N 20 . Thereby, the processing is completed. 
     Next, the following describes an example of a method of controlling a product having the RF-ID unit N 10  by using the position information of the mobile device N 20 , with reference to  FIGS. 142, 143A, 143B, and 143C . 
       FIG. 142  is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of controlling power for the air conditioner N 10 J and the TV N 10 A, when the mobile device N 20  is moved from the first floor to the second floor. 
     The CPU N 34  in the mobile device N 20  monitors the position information stored in the position information storage unit N 33  to determine whether or not predetermined conditions are satisfied. If the predetermined conditions are satisfied, then the CPU N 34  generates positional information including position information that is information of a current position of the mobile device N 20  (hereinafter, referred to as “current position information”. 
       FIG. 143A  is a table illustrating an example of a structure of the positional information. 
     The positional information includes (a) second server login ID and a second server login password which are regarding the registration server N 40  and (b) the current position information of the mobile device N 20 . The second server login ID and the second server login password are previously obtained in purchasing the product and stored in a memory (not shown). The current position information is obtained from the position information storage unit N 33 . 
     The communication unit N 30  designates, as a destination of the positional information, an address of the registration server N 40  in which information of the product is registered. 
     The transmission unit N 28  transmits the positional information to the registration server N 40  via the communication I/F unit N 27  (( 1 ) in  FIG. 142 ). 
     The receiving unit N 43  in the registration server N 40  receives the positional information via the communication I/F unit N 41 . 
     The communication unit N 44  in the registration server N 40  confirms the second server login ID and the second server login password in the received positional information. 
     If the second server login ID and the second server login password are correct, then the communication unit N 44  provides the positional information to the product control unit N 49 . 
     The product control unit N 49  provides the second server login ID to the position information generation unit N 48 . 
     According to instructions from the product control unit N 49 , the position information generation unit N 48  obtains pieces of product information as illustrated in  FIG. 138B  from the product information management unit N 45  based on the second server login ID. Then, the position information generation unit N 48  generates a product map from pieces of position information of the respective products. The product map shows positions of the products in the house illustrated in  FIG. 134 . The position information generation unit N 48  provides the generated product map to the product control unit N 49 . 
       FIG. 144  illustrates an example of the product map generated by the position information generation unit N 48 . 
     The product map is a 3D map (or 3D product map) in which illustrations of the products are arranged at positions based on the respective pieces of position information. 
     The product control unit N 49  controls the products from the TV N 10 A to the FF heater N 10 K, by using (a) the current position information of the mobile device N 20  included in the positional information and (b) the product map (or home appliance map) generated by the position information generation unit N 48 . In this example, the product control unit N 49  turns ON a product located most close to the current position information received from the mobile device N 20 . Here, the product control unit N 49  generates product control information including an instruction for turning ON the air conditioner N 10 J. 
       FIG. 143B  is a table illustrating an example of a structure of first product control information. 
     The first product control information includes: part number ID of the air conditioner N 10 J; UID of the air conditioner N 10 J; and a product control command for turning ON the air conditioner N 10 J. 
     The communication unit N 44  designates an address of the mobile device N 20  to be a designation of the first product control information. 
     The transmission unit N 42  transmits the first product control information to the mobile device N 20  via the communication I/F unit N 41  (( 2 ) in  FIG. 142 ). 
     After receiving the first product control information, the mobile device N 20  transfers the first product control information to the air conditioner N 10 J based on the part number ID and the UID in the first product control information (( 2 )′ in  FIG. 142 ). 
     When the air conditioner N 10 J receives the first product control information from the communication I/F unit N 18 , the air conditioner N 10 J turns ON a power source of the air conditioner N 10 J if the power source is OFF. 
     Next, the product control unit N 49  turns OFF a product located the farthest from the current position information received from the mobile device N 20 . Here, the product control unit N 49  generates product control information including an instruction for turning OFF the TV N 10 A. 
       FIG. 143C  is a table illustrating an example of a structure of second product control information. 
     The second product control information includes: part number ID of the TV N 10 A; UID of the TV N 10 A; and a product control command for turning OFF the TV N 10 A. 
     The communication unit N 44  designates an address of the mobile device N 20  to be a designation of the second product control information. 
     The transmission unit N 42  transmits the second product control information to the mobile device N 20  via the communication I/F unit N 41  (( 2 ) in  FIG. 142 ). 
     After receiving the second product control information, the mobile device N 20  transfers the second product control information to the TV N 10 A based on the part number ID and the UID in the second product control information (( 3 )′ in  FIG. 142 ). 
     When the TV N 10 A receives the second product control information from the communication I/F unit N 18 , the TV N 10 A turns OFF a power source of the TV N 10 A if the power source is ON. 
     As described above, according to the present embodiment, near field communication of RF-ID technology and position information are used to manage, in the registration server N 40 , positions of products each having the RF-ID unit N 10 . Thereby, it is possible to automatically control the products according to a current position of the mobile device N 20 . 
     Regarding the position information, information detected by the 6-axis sensor N 32  (motion sensor) that measures relative position information is used as position information. Therefore, it is possible to update the position information by using the detected results of the 6-axis sensor N 32  when the mobile device N 20  is outside an area in which the GPS N 31  can perform positioning. As a result, correct position information can be obtained even outside the area. 
     It should be noted that the mobile device N 20  according to the present embodiment has been described to have the GPS N 31  and the 6-axis sensor N 32 , but the mobile device N 20  is not limited to the above-described structure. For example, the mobile device N 20  may have only the 6-axis sensor N 32 . In this aspect, the product information management unit N 45  in the registration server N 40  stores pieces of relative position information of products which are with respect to a reference point (position information) of the TV N 10 A which is first registered as illustrated in  FIG. 145 . Here, a product map generated by the position information generation unit N 48  has axes of an x-coordinate, a y-coordinate, and a z-coordinate as illustrated in  FIG. 146 . 
     It should also be noted that it has been described in the present embodiment that (a) part number ID and UID of a target product which are stored in the RF-ID unit N 10  of the target product and (b) position information of the mobile device N 20  are registered to the registration server N 40 , but the present invention is not limited to the above. For example, if the registration server N 40  receives again server registration information regarding a product for which registration has already been completed, the registration server N 40  may perform processing as illustrated in  FIG. 147 . 
     The following describes  FIG. 147 . Referring to  FIG. 147 , the table includes: (a) accuracy identifiers for identifying an accuracy of position information; (b) part number ID in association with each accuracy identifier; and (c) processing to be performed when position information in re-received server registration information is different from position information registered in the product information management unit N 45 . 
     If the registration server N 40  determines, based on the part number ID and the UID included in the re-received server registration information, that the position information has already been registered in the product information management unit N 45 , then the registration server N 40  checks the part number ID. If the registration server N 40  determines, based on the part number ID and the UID included in the re-received server registration information, that the position information has already been registered in the product information management unit N 45 , then the registration server N 40  checks the part number ID. 
     If the part number ID indicates an air conditioner, a solar panel, or a fire alarm, then the registration server N 40  notifies the mobile device N 20  of the position information stored in the product information management unit N 45 . The mobile device N 20  thereby corrects current position information of the mobile device N 20  based on the position information received from the registration server N 40 . 
     It should also be noted that  FIG. 147  shows the two kinds of accuracy identifiers, but the accuracy identifiers are not limited to the two kinds. It is possible to set more than two kinds of accuracy identifiers for respective different processing. 
     It should also be noted that the product control unit N 49  in the present embodiment is included in the registration server N 40 , but the present invention is not limited to the structure. For example, the product control unit N 49  may be included in the mobile device N 20  so that the product control unit N 49  obtains a product map from the registration server N 40  to control products. Besides in the mobile device N 20 , the product control unit N 49  may also be included in a home server (not illustrated) that is connected to the home network N 100 . In this aspect, the mobile device N 20  transmits position information to the home server and obtains a product map from the home server. 
     It should be noted that the mobile device N 20  according to the present embodiment is connected to the registration server N 40  via the home network N 100  and the external network N 101  by using the communication I/F unit (general-purpose I/F unit) N 27 , but the present invention is not limited to the above. For example, the mobile device N 20  may have a function of serving as a mobile phone so that the mobile device N 20  can be connected to the registration server N 40  via at least a mobile phone network (for example, Long Term Evolution (LTE)) by using an interface connectable to the mobile phone network, in stead of the communication I/F unit N 27  (see  FIG. 148 ). Furthermore, the mobile device N 20  may have an interface connectable to a circuit network such as WiMAX so as to be connected to the registration server N 40  via at least the WiMAX network. Any other networks can be used to connect the mobile device N 20  to the registration server N 40 . 
     It should also be noted that, in the present embodiment, the product map generated by the position information generation unit N 48  is used to determine how to control products, but the present invention is not limited to the structure. For example, image data of the product map generated by the position information generation unit N 48  is transmitted to the mobile device N 20  that displays the image data on the display unit N 26 . 
     It should also be noted that, in the present embodiment, the position information generation unit N 48  generates the product map based on the information illustrated in  FIG. 138B , but the present invention is not limited to the above. For example, pieces product information of products located near the position information of the mobile device N 20  in the same house are detected from the product information management unit N 45 , and then used to generate a product map regarding nearby products in the house. In this aspect, the product control unit N 49  performs product control by combining the product map of  FIG. 144  and the product map of nearby products. For instance, it is assumed in the present embodiment that the TV N 10 A, which is the farthest from the mobile device N 20 , is turned OFF but there is a solar panel near the mobile device N 20  in the house. Under the assumption, the product control unit N 49  controls the TV N 10 A to be turned ON, for example. 
     It should also be noted that, in the present embodiment, the product information management unit N 45  in the registration server N 40  stores part number ID, UID, and position information of each product, but the present invention is not limited to the above. For example, it is also possible that a power state (ON or OFF) is obtained in real time from each product via the communication I/F unit N 18  of the product, and then managed in the product information management unit N 45 . The product control unit N 49  thereby controls power of the TV N 10 A located the farthest from the mobile device N 20  to be kept ON when the predetermined number of products are powered OFF, although it has been described n the above description that the product control unit N 49  turns OFF the TV N 10 A. 
     It should also be noted that, in the present embodiment, the product control unit N 49  turns OFF a product located the farthest from the mobile device N 20  and turns ON a product closest to the mobile device N 20 . However, the present invention is not limited to the above. 
     The product control unit N 49  may control power to be turned ON or OFF for a plurality of products based on the position information of the mobile device N 20 . 
     It should also be noted that, in the present embodiment, the product control unit N 49  turns OFF a product located the farthest from the mobile device N 20  and turns ON a product closest to the mobile device N 20 . However, the present invention is not limited to the above. For example, it is also possible that the CPU N 34  in the mobile device N 20  stores position information as a movement history into a memory (not illustrated), and regularly provides the movement history to the registration server N 40 . In this aspect, the registration server N 40  estimates, from the movement histories of the mobile device N 20 , which product is located in which room or which floor, and manages results of the estimation. It is further possible that the product control unit N 49  controls power to be turned ON or OFF for each product in the same house based on the estimation results. For example, if it is estimated from the movement histories that the TV N 10 A and the air conditioner N 10 C are located in the same room, the product control unit N 49  turns OFF the air conditioner N 10 C when the TV N 10 A is turned OFF. 
     In addition to the moving histories, it is also possible to obtain a time of switching ON or OFF each product, thereby estimating which product is in the same room or the same floor. 
     It should also be noted that, in the present embodiment, the product information management unit N 45  manages the product information illustrated in  FIG. 138A, 138B , or  145 , and the position information generation unit N 48  generates the product map illustrated in  FIG. 144 or 146 . However, the present invention is not limited to the above. For example, it is also possible that image data of a room arrangement created by the user is transmitted from the mobile device N 20  to the registration server N 40 , and therefore managed by the product information management unit N 45 . In this aspect, the position information generation unit N 48  generates a product map as illustrated in  FIG. 134 , by combining (a) product information illustrated in  FIG. 138A, 138B , or  145  and (b) the image data of the room arrangement. 
     Here, private information such as the image data of room arrangement may be applied with encryption different from encryption employed for the product information, and then transmitted from the mobile device N 20  to the registration server N 40 . 
     It is also possible that private information such as the image data of room arrangement is transmitted to a server different from the server receiving the product information, and a product map is generated with reference to the different server when the registration server N 40  generates the product map. 
     It should also be noted that the present embodiment may be combined with any other embodiments. For example, it is possible that the function of the terminal apparatus Y 01  according to the sixteenth embodiment is provided to the RF-ID unit N 10  according to the present embodiment and the function of the communication device Y 02  according to the sixteenth embodiment is provided to the mobile device N 20  according to the present embodiment. Thereby, the series of processes including the polling, the mutual authentication, and the key sharing illustrated in  FIG. 128  can be performed prior to the product registration processing of  FIG. 136 . Any combination of the embodiments is within a scope of the present invention. 
     It should also be noted that the units in the above-described embodiments may be typically implemented into a Large Scale Integration (LSI) which is an integrated circuit. These may be integrated separately, or a part or all of them may be integrated into a single chip. Here, the integrated circuit is referred to as a LSI, but the integrated circuit can be called an IC, a system LSI, a super LSI or an ultra LSI depending on their degrees of integration. The technique of integrated circuit is not limited to the LSI, and it may be implemented as a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor. It is also possible to use a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) that can be programmed after manufacturing the LSI, or a reconfigurable processor in which connection and setting of circuit cells inside the LSI can be reconfigured. 
     Furthermore, if due to the progress of semiconductor technologies or their derivations, new technologies for integrated circuits appear to be replaced with the LSIs, it is, of course, possible to use such technologies to implement the functional blocks as an integrated circuit. For example, biotechnology and the like can be applied to the above implementation. 
     Eighteenth Embodiment 
     The following describes a communication system according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. The communication system according to the present embodiment includes a terminal apparatus, a communication device, and a server device. The terminal apparatus has a proximity wireless communication function. The communication device, such as a mobile device, performs proximity wireless communication with the terminal apparatus. The server device is connected to the communication device via a general-purpose network such as the Internet or a mobile telephone communication network. In this communication system, when the communication device points the terminal apparatus, the communication device becomes capable of operating the terminal apparatus based on sensor information or the like detected by the communication device. The configuration is described in more detail with reference to corresponding figures. 
     (System Configuration) 
       FIG. 149  is a schematic diagram showing the communication system according to the present embodiment. As shown in  FIG. 149 , the communication system  100  includes a terminal apparatus  101 , a communication device  102 , and a server device  104 . 
     The terminal apparatus  101  and the communication device  102  can communicate with each other by using proximity wireless communication. Here, the proximity wireless communication in the present embodiment is assumed to be (1) communication between a Radio Frequency Identification (RF-ID) tag (ISO1443) and a reader/writer, which is performed by electromagnetic induction of 13.56 MHz band (High Frequency (HF) band), radio waves between 52 MHz to 954 MHz band (Super High Frequency (UHF) band), or the like, or (2) communication of Near Field Communication (NFC) (ISO/IEC 21481) of 13.56 MHz band. A distance (communication distance) available for the proximity wireless communication is generally limited to several dozens of centimeters in the HF band, or several centimeters in the UHF band. Therefore, the communication device  102  is presented to (or touches) the terminal apparatus  101  to establish the communication (the proximity wireless communication). 
     In the present embodiment, the description is given for the configuration in which the communication device  102  side has a reader/writer function and the terminal apparatus  101  has an IC tag function. However, the present embodiment is characterized in that the terminal apparatus  101  and the communication device  102  can exchange information by using proximity wireless communication. In other words, the present embodiment is not limited to the above combination. For example, it is also possible in the present embodiment that the communication device  102  side has the IC tag function and the terminal apparatus  101  side has the reader/writer function. Moreover, for the NFC, a peer-to-peer (P2P) communication function, a card emulation, and a reader/writer emulation have been standardized. These functions make no difference which device/apparatus should have an IC tag or a reader/writer. Therefore, for the sake of simplicity in the description, it is assumed in the present embodiment that the communication device  102  side has a reader/writer function and the terminal apparatus  101  has an IC tag function. 
     The terminal apparatus  101 , such as an air conditioner or a TV, is a target home appliance to be operated by the communication device  102 . The terminal apparatus  101  includes a controller  105 , a memory  106 , a proximity wireless communication unit  107 , and an antenna  108 . 
     The controller  105  is a system controller of the terminal apparatus  101 . An example of the controller  105  is a Central Processing Unit (CPU). The controller  105  performs at least system control for processing units in the terminal apparatus  101  except the proximity wireless communication unit  107 . 
     The memory  106  is a memory that is capable of holding control software for operating the terminal apparatus  101  by the controller  105 , and various data detected by the terminal apparatus  101 . Examples of the memory  106  are a Random Access Memory (RAM), a non-volatile memory, and the like. The memory  106  is generally embedded in a Large-Scale Integration (LSI) of the controller  105 . However, the memory  106  may be outside the terminal apparatus  101 . 
     The proximity wireless communication unit  107  performs communication with the reader/writer function unit (hereinafter, referred to as a “reader/writer”) in the communication device  102 . The proximity wireless communication unit  107  modulates data to be transmitted to the reader/writer, and demodulates data transmitted from the reader/writer. 
     In addition, the proximity wireless communication unit  107  generates power from radio waves received from the reader/writer, in order to establish at least proximity wireless communication, and also extracts clock signals from the received radio waves. At least the proximity wireless communication unit  107  is thereby operated by the power and clock generated from the radio waves from the reader/writer. Therefore, the proximity wireless communication unit  107  can perform proximity wireless communication with the communication device  102  even if a main power of the terminal apparatus  101  is OFF. 
     The antenna  108  is a loop antenna for the proximity wireless communication with the reader/writer in the communication device  102 . 
     Thus, the terminal apparatus  101  has the above-described structure. 
     The communication device  102  includes an antenna  109 , a display unit  110 , and keys  111 . An example of the communication device  102  is a mobile device. 
     The antenna  109  is an antenna for the proximity wireless communication with the terminal apparatus  101 . The communication device  102  performs polling towards the IC tag on the terminal apparatus  101 . When the communication with the terminal apparatus  101  is established, the communication device  102  reads information from the terminal apparatus  101  or writes information into the terminal apparatus  101 . 
     The display unit  110  is, for example, a liquid crystal display. The display unit  110  displays a result of the proximity wireless communication between the communication device  102  and the terminal apparatus  101 , or data transmitted from the server device  104 . 
     The set of keys  111  is an interface that enables the user to operate the communication device  102 . It should be noted that the keys  111  are not limited to the structure separated from the display unit  110  as shown in  FIG. 149 . For example, it is also possible that the display unit  110  is a touch panel displaying the keys  111  to implement the functions of the keys  111 . In short, the display unit  110  may serve as the keys  111 . 
     The communication device  102  having the above-described structure activates the proximity wireless communication unit in the communication device  102  according to a user&#39;s input by the keys  111 . After the activation, the communication device  102  starts polling to the terminal apparatus  101  for proximity wireless communication. In general, polling keeps emitting radio waves to unspecified receivers. Therefore, the communication device  102  driven by a battery is under load in terms of battery duration. Therefore, the communication device  102  may be provided with a button dedicated for polling. This structure is preferable because the communication device  102  can avoid unnecessary polling and the user needs merely to press the dedicated button without having operation load. 
     The server device  104  is a server having a database. The server device  104  is implemented as, for example, a web server having a database. The server device  104  is connected to the communication device  102  via the Internet  103 . The server device  104  registers, onto the database, information transferred from the communication device  102 , and transfers, to the communication device  102 , information indicating completion of the registration completion or the like. Then, the display unit  110  of the communication device  102  displays information indicating the registration completion. 
     Thus, the communication system  100  has the above-described configuration. In the system configuration, the communication device  102  can obtain information from the terminal apparatus  101 , and register the obtained information onto the database in the server device  104 . More specifically, by using proximity wireless communication, the communication device  102  obtains, from the terminal apparatus  101 , information, such as a product serial number, a model number, or manufacturer identification information, each of which is used to uniquely identify the terminal apparatus  101 . Then, the communication device  102  transfers, to the server device  104 , (a) information received (obtained) from the terminal apparatus  101  via the proximity wireless communication, (b) information for identifying the user or the mobile device (communication device) itself, which is stored in the communication device  102  (for example, an e-mail address, a telephone number, a mobile terminal identification number, or a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card ID), and (c) information for determining a position of the communication device  102  if the communication device  102  can detect position information (for example, GPS information, Assisted-GPS information, or position information estimated based on a base station in a mobile network). The server device  104  registers these pieces of information onto the database. 
     The above-described series of processes can eliminate user&#39;s load for inputting various pieces of information. In other words, in practice, the user merely presents the communication device  102  to the terminal apparatus  101  in order to register various pieces of information such as user registration information for the terminal apparatus  101 . 
     Furthermore, the communication device  102  can obtain, from the terminal apparatus, a trouble occurrence state or use history information which is detected by the terminal apparatus  101 , and transmits such information to the server device  104 . In this case, a manufacturer of the terminal apparatus  101  can handle the trouble of the terminal apparatus  101  by speedily determining an initial failure of a specific lot based on the trouble occurrence state. Moreover, the structure offers advantages to the manufacturer that can specify functions used by each user from the use history information and use the specified information for next product development. 
     (Structure of Communication Device) 
     The following describes the communication device  102  according to the present embodiment in more detail with reference to corresponding figures. 
       FIG. 150  is a block diagram showing a structure of the communication device  120  according to the present embodiment. 
     The communication device  102 , such as a mobile device, includes the antenna  109 , the display unit  110 , and the keys  111  as shown in  FIG. 149 . The communication device  102  further includes a proximity wireless communication unit  201 , a proximity wireless detection unit  202 , an apparatus information obtainment unit  203 , an external communication unit  204 , a sensor unit  205 , a position information obtainment unit  206 , a direction sensor unit  207 , a directional space calculation unit  208 , a selection unit  209 a, a move determination unit  210 , an operation information obtainment unit  212 , a storage unit  213 , a display information decision unit  214 , an operation information transmission unit  215 , an operation history obtainment unit  216 , and a sound sensor  217 . 
     The proximity wireless communication unit  201  demodulates information received by the antenna  109  and modulates information to be transmitted via the antenna  109 . For example, via the antenna  109 , the proximity wireless communication unit  201  transmits polling waves that are signals for calling unspecified receivers, transmits a request for providing apparatus information of the terminal apparatus  101 , and receives information including the apparatus information from the terminal apparatus  101 . 
     The proximity wireless detection unit  202  determines whether or not a response to the polling (polling response) from the terminal apparatus  101  is detected. In addition, the proximity wireless detection unit  202  detects information demodulated by the proximity wireless communication unit  201 . 
     The apparatus information obtainment unit  203  obtains, from the terminal apparatus  101 , the apparatus information for uniquely identifying the terminal apparatus  101 . More specifically, the apparatus information obtainment unit  203  obtains the apparatus information regarding the terminal apparatus  101  from the information detected by the proximity wireless detection unit  202 . Furthermore, the apparatus information obtainment unit  203  determines whether or not a position of the terminal apparatus  101  (apparatus position information) can be obtained from the obtained apparatus information. 
     The external communication unit  204  is used to communicate with external devices/apparatuses including the server device  104  outside the communication device  102 . The external communication unit  204  includes a communication antenna  219 , a receiving unit  220 , a transmission unit  221 , and a communication control unit  222 . More specifically, the communication antenna  219  is connected to a general-purpose network such as the Internet. The transmission unit  221  modulates data to be transmitted to the outside via the general-purpose network such as the Internet  103 . The receiving unit  220  demodulates data received via the general-purpose network such as the Internet  103 . The communication control unit  222  generates and analyzes data exchanged or to-be-exchanged with external devices/apparatuses via the general-purpose network such as the Internet  103 . 
     The sensor unit  205  detects a position of the communication device  102  itself. The sensor unit  205  includes an acceleration sensor  223 , a Global Positioning System (GPS) sensor  224 , an angular velocity sensor  225 , and an orientation sensor  226 . The acceleration sensor  223  measures an acceleration of the communication device  102 . The GPS sensor  224  obtains GPS information, and thereby calculates position information of the communication device  102 . The angular velocity sensor  225  measures an angular velocity of the communication device  102 . The orientation sensor  226  measures an orientation of the position of the communication device  102 . 
     The position information obtainment unit  206  generates (obtains) position information indicating a position (current position) of the communication device  102 . The position information obtainment unit  206  includes an absolute position obtainment unit  227 , a relative position obtainment unit  228 , and a position information calculation unit  229 . The absolute position obtainment unit  227  obtains, as an absolute position of the communication device  102 , (a) the position information generated by the GPS sensor  224  or (b) position information provided from the server device  104  via the external communication unit  204 . The relative position obtainment unit  228  integrates the acceleration measured by the acceleration sensor  223  and the angular velocity measured by the angular velocity sensor  225 , thereby calculating a relative position of the communication device  102  with respect to an initial setting value. The position information calculation unit  229  calculates a current position of the communication device  102  based on the absolute position obtained by the absolute position obtainment unit  227  and the relative position generated by the relative position obtainment unit  228 . For example, if the communication device  102  determines that apparatus position information of the terminal apparatus  101  (a current position of the terminal apparatus  101 ) can be retrieved from the apparatus information obtained by the apparatus information obtainment unit  203 , in the communication device  102 , the absolute position obtainment unit  227  stores the apparatus position information into the storage unit  213  as absolute position information of the communication device  102 , and the relative position obtainment unit  228  initializes the relative position information. On the other hand, if the communication device  102  determines that the apparatus position information cannot be retrieved from the apparatus information obtained by the apparatus information obtainment unit  203 , the communication device  102  activates the GPS sensor  224  to generate absolute position information of the communication device  102 , and causes the relative position obtainment unit  228  to initialize the relative position information. 
     The direction sensor unit  207  generates direction information indicating a direction to which the communication device  102  faces. More specifically, based on the angular velocity measured by the angular velocity sensor  225  and the orientation measured by the orientation sensor  226 , the direction sensor unit  207  calculates an oriented direction that is a direction which the communication device  102  faces, namely, a direction to which the communication device  102  is pointed. 
     The directional space calculation unit  208  calculates a directional space (directional space information) based on the position information generated (obtained) by the position information obtainment unit  206  and the direction information generated by the direction sensor unit  207 . The directional space is a space which the communication device  102  faces, namely, a space to which the communication device  102  is pointed. More specifically, the directional space calculation unit  208  calculates a space pointed by the communication device  102  as the directional space information, based on (a) the position information of the communication device  102  which is calculated by the position information obtainment unit  206  and (b) the oriented direction calculated by the direction sensor unit  207 . 
     The operation information obtainment unit  212  obtains operation information, such as remote control information for controlling the terminal apparatus  101 , from the server device  104  via the external communication unit  204 . 
     The storage unit  213  stores (a) the operation information of the terminal apparatus  101  which is obtained by the operation information obtaining unit  212  and (b) position information of the communication device  102  which is generated when the apparatus information obtainment unit  203  obtains the apparatus information, in association with each other. Here, the stored position information of the communication device  102  is considered as position information of the terminal apparatus  101 . Here, in other words, the position information which is obtained when the apparatus information obtainment unit  203  obtains the apparatus information is position information which is generated (obtained) by the position information obtainment unit  206  when proximity wireless communication with the terminal apparatus  101  is detected. Here, the position information which is generated (obtained) by the position information obtainment unit  206  when proximity wireless communication with the terminal apparatus  101  is detected indicates a position (current position) of the communication device  102 . However, since the communication device  102  performs proximity wireless communication with the terminal apparatus  101 , the position information of the communication device  102  can be considered as position information of the terminal apparatus  101  (hereinafter, referred to as “apparatus position information”). In other words, the communication device  102  can handle, as the apparatus position information of the terminal apparatus  101 , the position information of the communication device  102  that is generated (obtained) by the position information obtainment unit  206  when the proximity wireless communication with the terminal apparatus  101  is detected. 
     The move determination unit  210  determines, based on the sensor information detected by the sensor unit  205 , whether or not the communication device  102  is still. 
     The selection unit  209 a includes an apparatus specification unit  209  and an operation information setting unit  211 . The selection unit  209 a specifies an apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ) existing in the directional space, based on the apparatus position information stored in the storage unit  213 , and selects a piece of operation information corresponding to the specified apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ) from among pieces of operation information stored in the storage unit  213 . The apparatus specification unit  209  specifies an apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ) existing in the directional space, based on the apparatus position information stored in the storage unit  213 . More specifically, based on the directional space information which is generated by the directional space calculation unit  208  and the apparatus position information of the terminal apparatus  101  which is stored in the storage unit  213 , the apparatus specification unit  209  specifies (determines) which terminal apparatus  101  is the apparatus located in the direction pointed by the communication device  102 . The operation information setting unit  211  selects a piece of operation information corresponding to the determined apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ) from among pieces of operation information stored in the storage unit  213 . In other words, the operation information setting unit  211  obtains, from the storage unit  213 , the operation information of the terminal apparatus  101  specified (determined) by the apparatus specification unit  209 , and sets the operation information into the communication device  102 . Thereby, the operation information setting unit  211  selects the operation information corresponding to the specified (determined) apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ). 
     The display information decision unit  214  decides a remote control interface to be displayed on the display unit  110 , based on the operation information set (selected) by the operation information setting unit  211 . 
     The operation information transmission unit  215  transmits, to the apparatus, a control signal for operating the apparatus, based on the operation information set (selected) by the operation information setting unit  211 . More specifically, when a user of the communication device  102  presses one of the keys  111 , the operation information transmission unit  215  transmits, to the terminal apparatus  101 , a control signal, such as a remote control command, which corresponds to the pressed key to operate the terminal apparatus  101 . 
     The operation history obtainment unit  216  obtains information of the control signal such as the remote control command which has been transmitted by the operation information transmission unit  215 , thereby obtaining a user&#39;s operation history regarding the terminal apparatus  101 . 
     The sound sensor  217 , such as a microphone, detects sound around the communication device  102 . 
     Thus, the communication device  102  has the above-described structure. 
     With the above structure, the communication device  102  can easily serve as an extended user interface, such as a remote controller, of a target apparatus, without causing any complicated operations to the user. 
     It should be noted in the above description that the communication device  102  according to the present embodiment includes the antenna  109 , the display unit  110 , the keys  111 , the proximity wireless communication unit  201 , the proximity wireless detection unit  202 , the apparatus information obtainment unit  203 , the external communication unit  204 , the sensor unit  205 , the position information obtainment unit  206 , the direction sensor unit  207 , the directional space calculation unit  208 , the selection unit  209 a, the move determination unit  210 , the operation information obtaining unit  212 , the storage unit  213 , the display information decision unit  214 , the operation information transmission unit  215 , the operation history obtainment unit  216 , and the sound sensor  217 . However, the communication device  102  according to the present embodiment is not limited to have the above structure. As shown in  FIG. 151 , the communication device  102  may have, as a minimum structure, at least a minimum structure part  102 a that includes the apparatus information obtainment unit  203 , the external communication unit  204 , the position information obtainment unit  206 , the direction sensor unit  207 , the directional space calculation unit  208 , the selection unit  209 a, the operation information obtainment unit  212 , the storage unit  213 , and the operation information transmission unit  215 . Here,  FIG. 151  is a block diagram showing the minimum structure of the communication device according to the present embodiment. With the minimum structure part  102 a, the communication device  102  can easily serve as an extended user interface, such as a remote controller, of a target apparatus, without causing any complicated operations to the user. 
     (Details of Apparatus Specification Unit  209 ) 
     The following describes the apparatus specification unit  209  according to the present embodiment in more detail. 
     Each of  FIGS. 152A to 152C  is a block diagram showing an example of a detailed structure of the apparatus specification unit according to the present embodiment. 
     As shown in  FIG. 152A , the apparatus specification unit  209  includes an apparatus direction calculation unit  2092 , a difference calculation unit  2093 , and an apparatus decision unit  2094 . 
     If there are a plurality of apparatuses in the directional space, the apparatus direction calculation unit  2092  calculates plural pieces of apparatus direction information each indicating a direction from the communication device  102  to a corresponding one of the apparatuses, based on using the position information of the communication device  102  and the plural pieces of apparatus position information stored in the storage unit  213  regarding the apparatuses in the directional space. More specifically, the apparatus direction calculation unit  2092  calculates a direction angle between the communication device  102  and each of the apparatuses (terminal apparatuses  101 ), based on a distance between the communication device  102  and each of the terminal apparatuses  101 . 
     The difference calculation unit  2093  calculates a difference between the direction information of the communication device  102  and each of pieces of the apparatus direction information of the terminal apparatuses. More specifically, the difference calculation unit  2093  calculates a difference between (a) the direction angle calculated for each of the terminal apparatuses  101  by the apparatus direction calculation unit  2092  and (b) a directional angle indicating a direction (oriented direction) pointed by the communication device  102 . 
     From among the apparatuses, the apparatus decision unit  2094  eventually decides, as an apparatus to be specified as existing in the directional space, an apparatus having a difference calculated by the difference calculation unit  2093  which is smaller than a predetermined value. For example, the apparatus decision unit  2094  eventually decides (specifies) the terminal apparatus  101  having a minimum difference calculated by the difference calculation unit  2093 , as a target terminal apparatus  101  for which operation information is to be set in the communication device  102  to operate the target terminal apparatus  101 . 
     Thus, the apparatus specification unit  209  having the above-described structure specifies a target apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ) existing in the directional space. More specifically, when there are a plurality of the terminal apparatuses  101  in the directional space calculated by the directional space calculation unit  208 , the communication device  102  can select, as an apparatus to be specified as existing in the directional space (in other words, as an apparatus to which the user intends to point), a terminal apparatus  101  that is determined by the different calculation unit  2093  as being the closest in the direction pointed by the communication device  102  from among the terminal apparatuses  101 . 
     It should be noted that the apparatus specification unit  209  may further include an apparatus number determination unit at a stage prior to the apparatus direction calculation unit  2092  so that the apparatus number determination unit determines whether or not there are a plurality of apparatuses in the directional space. With the above structure, the apparatus number determination unit may determine the number of the terminal apparatuses  101  existing in the directional space, based on (a) the oriented direction of the communication device  102  which is calculated by the directional space calculation unit  208  and (b) the pieces of apparatus position information of the terminal apparatuses  101  which are stored in the storage unit  213 . 
     An apparatus specification unit  309  shown in  FIG. 152B  includes a space information storage unit  3095  and an apparatus decision unit  3096 . 
     The space information storage unit  3095  stores space information indicating a space and an arrangement of apparatuses in the space. More specifically, the space information storage unit  3095  holds (a) room arrangement or layout information of the target building in which the terminal apparatuses  101  exist and (b) coordinate information of the terminal apparatuses  101  on the room arrangement or layout information. 
     If there are a plurality of the terminal apparatuses  101  in the directional space, the apparatus decision unit  3096  obtains, from the space information storage unit  3095 , the space information including information of a space where the communication device  102  exists, based on the position information of the communication device  102 . Then, based on the space information, the apparatus decision unit  3096  determines (decides) an apparatus existing in the space where the communication device  102  exists, as an apparatus to be specified as existing in the directional space. In other words, the apparatus decision unit  3096  determines (decides) a target terminal apparatus  101  which a user of the communication device  102  wishes to operate, based on the room arrangement information or the like obtained from the space information storage unit  3095 . Here, when there is only one terminal apparatus  101  in the same room where the communication device  102  exists, the apparatus decision unit  3096  determines the terminal apparatus  101  as a target terminal apparatus  101  for which operation information is to be set in the communication device  102  to operate the target apparatus. 
     Thus, the apparatus specification unit  309  having the above-described structure specifies a target apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ) existing in the directional space. More specifically, when there are a plurality of the terminal apparatuses  101  in the directional space calculated by the directional space calculation unit  208 , the communication device  102  can obtain room arrangement information of the building, and narrows down a terminal apparatus  101  for which operation information is to be set from among terminal apparatuses  101  in the space where the communication device  102  exists. 
     It should be noted that the apparatus specification unit  309  may further include an apparatus number determination unit at a stage prior to the apparatus decision unit  3096  so that the apparatus number determination unit determines whether or not there are a plurality of apparatuses in the directional space. With the above structure, the apparatus number determination unit may determine the number of the terminal apparatuses  101  existing in the directional space, based on (a) the oriented direction of the communication device  102  which is calculated by the directional space calculation unit  208  and (b) the pieces of apparatus position information of the terminal apparatuses  101  which are stored in the storage unit  213 . 
     An apparatus specification unit  409  shown in  FIG. 152C  includes an apparatus number determination unit  4091 , an apparatus candidate output unit  4092 , a user input receiving unit  4093 , an apparatus decision unit  4094 , an apparatus pitch angle detection unit  4095 , and an apparatus pitch angle storage unit  4096 . 
     The apparatus number determination unit  4091  determines whether or not there are a plurality of apparatuses (terminal apparatuses  101 ) in the directional space, based on (a) the oriented direction of the communication device  102  which is calculated by the directional space calculation unit  208  and (b) the pieces of apparatus position information of the terminal apparatuses  101  which are stored in the storage unit  213 . More specifically, the apparatus number determination unit  4091  determines the number of apparatuses (terminal apparatuses  101 ) in the directional space. 
     The apparatus candidate output unit  4092  generates an apparatus candidate list indicating at least one apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ) existing in the directional space, based on (a) the pieces of apparatus position information stored in the storage unit  213  and (b) pitch angle information stored in the apparatus pitch angle storage unit  4096 , and provides the apparatus candidate list to the display unit  110 . More specifically, the apparatus candidate output unit  4092  generates an apparatus candidate list indicating the terminal apparatuses  101  determined by the apparatus number determination unit  4091 , based on the results of the apparatus pitch angle detection unit  4095 , and provides the apparatus candidate list to the display unit  110 . Then, the display unit  110  displays the apparatus candidate list. 
     The user input receiving unit  4093  receives user&#39;s selection of an apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ) which is selected by the user using the keys  111  from the apparatus candidate list that is generated by the apparatus candidate output unit  4092  and displayed on the display unit  110 . 
     The apparatus decision unit  4094  determines (decides) the apparatus selected by the user from the apparatuses in the apparatus candidate list displayed on the display unit  110 , as an apparatus to be specified as existing in the directional space. More specifically, the apparatus decision unit  4094  determines the terminal apparatus  101  obtained by the user input receiving unit  4093 , as a target terminal apparatus  101  which is to be specified as existing in the directional space and for which operation information is to be set. 
     The apparatus pitch angle detection unit  4095  detects an angle in a pitch direction of the communication device  102  to generate pitch angle information indicating the pitch angle. More specifically, the apparatus pitch angle detection unit  4095  generates pitch angle information indicating an angle in a pitch direction of the communication device  102 , when the apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ) which is in the directional space and for which operation information is to be set is to be specified. In addition, the apparatus pitch angle detection unit  4095  stores the generated pitch angle information into the apparatus pitch angle storage unit  4096  in association with the apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ) determined by the apparatus decision unit  4094 . 
     In the apparatus pitch angle storage unit  4096 , the pitch angle information and the apparatus information are stored in association with each other. More specifically, in the apparatus pitch angle storage unit  4096 , a pitch angle detected by the apparatus pitch angle detection unit  4095  and the terminal apparatus  101  determined by the apparatus decision unit  4094  are stored in association with each other. 
     Thus, the apparatus specification unit  409  having the above-described structure specifies a target apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ) existing in the directional space. More specifically, the target terminal apparatus  101  selected by the user and the pitch angle information are stored in association with each other, so that the communication device  102  can use the pitch angle information to narrow down the target terminal apparatus  101  from the apparatus candidate list generated by the apparatus candidate output unit  4092 , even if there are a plurality of the terminal apparatuses  101  in the directional space calculated by the directional space calculation unit  208 . In addition, the above structure can offer the following advantages. If the pitch angle detected by the apparatus pitch angle detection unit  4095  and the terminal apparatus  101  determined by the apparatus decision unit  4094  are stored in association with each other in the apparatus pitch angle storage unit  4096  after the apparatus decision unit  4094  determines the terminal apparatus  101 , it is possible to learn, from the accumulated pitch angles, habits of the user pointing the communication device  102  to the determined terminal apparatus  101 . 
     (Storage Unit  213  in Communication Device  102 ) 
     The following describes an example of a data structure stored in the storage unit  213 . 
       FIG. 153  is a table showing an example of the data structure stored in the storage unit  213  according to the present embodiment. 
     As shown in  FIG. 153 , the storage unit  213  stores, for example, a product serial number, a product number, position information, and remote control information in association with one another. Here, the storage unit  213  has regions for holding the above pieces of information, such as a product serial number storage region, a product number storage region, a position information storage region, and a remote control information storage region. These regions may form a table as well as a data structure. 
     The product serial number storage region is a region for holding a product serial number for uniquely identifying a registered terminal apparatus  101 . 
     The product number storage region is a region for holding a product number for identifying a product type of the terminal apparatus  101 . 
     The position information storage region is a region for holding position information corresponding to the terminal apparatus  101 . For example, the position information storage region holds longitude and latitude of a position of the terminal apparatus  101 , and room information, such as a living room or a kitchen, where the terminal apparatus  101  exists. 
     The remote control information storage region is a region for holding remote control information corresponding to the terminal apparatus  101 . Here, the remote control information includes (a) operation information corresponding to the terminal apparatus  101  and (b) display information in which each of the keys  111  is in association with a corresponding operation command in the operation information. The operation information includes (a) operations of the terminal apparatus  101 , such as power ON and power OFF, and (b) operation commands each of which is to be transmitted from the communication device  102  to execute a corresponding one of the operations, in association with each other. It should be noted that the operation indicated in the operation information may include a plurality of operations, not only one kind of operation of the terminal apparatus  101 . More specifically, for example, one operation indicated in the operation information may be a series of operations of the terminal apparatus  101 , such as powering ON, opening of a recording list, selection of a specific TV program, and reproduction of the selected TV program. 
     (Method of Calculating Directional Space by Communication Device  102 ) 
     The following describes an example of a method of calculating a directional space by the directional space calculation unit  208 . 
       FIG. 154  is a graph showing an example of the method of calculating a directional space by the directional space calculating unit  208  according to the present embodiment. 
     In  FIG. 154 , coordinates x0 and coordinates y0 indicate a coordinate position of the communication device  102 . In other words, the coordinate position is the position information which the position information obtainment unit  206  in the communication device  102  can generate (obtain). In the coordinate axises, “N” represents “the North”, “S” represents “the South”, “E” represents “the East”, and “W” represents “the West”, which are calculated (measured) by the orientation sensor  226  in the communication device  102 . An angle θ represents a directional angle of the communication device  102  with respect to the coordinate axis is measured by the angular velocity sensor  225  in the communication device  102 . 
     The angle α is a threshold value for defining a range (region) of a directional space. More specifically, the greater angle α results in the larger directional space, while the smaller angle α results in the smaller directional space. In more detail, the range (region) of the directional space is defined as a range (region d) which is surrounded by a dotted line b and a dotted line c to indicate a range having an angle±α with respect to an oriented direction a that is a direction having a directional angle θ. The angle α may be predetermined set in the communication device  102 , or inputted by the user. The angle α may be set based on a size of a building, a size of a room, a distance between a wall and the communication device  102 , or the like. 
     In  FIG. 153 , the range (region) of the directional space is expressed by (x−x0)*tan(θ−α)+y0&lt;y&lt;(x−x0)*tan(θ+α)+y0. The communication device  102  selects a terminal apparatus  101  existing in the above-expressed directional space, based on the apparatus position information stored in the storage unit  213 . 
     The following describes a summary of processing performed by the communication device  102  having the above structure. 
       FIG. 155  is a flowchart of the summary of processing performed by the communication device  102  according to the present embodiment. 
     The processing performed by the communication device  102  is mainly divided into Step S 1  and Step S 2 . At Step S 1 , the communication device  102  holds apparatus position information and operation information. At Step S 2 , based on the stored apparatus position information and operation information, the communication device  102  operates a target terminal apparatus  101  by serving as a remote controller or the like. 
     At Step S 1 , the apparatus information obtainment unit  203  obtains, from a target terminal apparatus  101 , apparatus information for uniquely identifying the terminal apparatus  101  (S 11 ). 
     Next, the position information obtainment unit  206  generates (obtains) position information indicating a current position of the communication device  102  (S 12 ). 
     Next, based on the obtained apparatus information, the operation information obtaining unit  212  obtains the operation information for operating the terminal apparatus  101  from the server device  104  via the external communication unit  204  (S 13 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  stores, into the storage unit  213 , the obtained operation information and the generated position information in association with each other (S 14 ). Here, the stored position information is considered as apparatus position information indicating a position of the terminal apparatus  101 . 
     By performing Steps S 11  to S 14 , the communication device  102  performs Step  51  for storing the apparatus position information and the operation information. 
     Next, at Step S 2 , at the beginning, the direction sensor unit  207  detects a direction to which the communication device  102  faces, thereby generating direction information (S 21 ). 
     Next, the directional space calculation unit  208  calculates a directional space which is a space pointed by the communication device  102  facing the space, based on the position information generated (obtained) by the position information obtainment unit  206  and the direction information generated by the direction sensor unit  207  (S 22 ). 
     Next, the selection unit  209 a specifies an apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ) existing in the directional space based on the apparatus position information stored in the storage unit  213  (S 23 ), and then selects operation information corresponding to the specified apparatus from among pieces of operation information stored in the storage unit  213  (S 24 ). 
     Finally, the operation information transmission unit  215  transmits, to the specified apparatus (terminal apparatus  101 ), a control signal for operating the apparatus based on the selected operation information (S 25 ). 
     By performing Steps S 21  to S 25 , based on the stored operation information and apparatus position information, the communication device  102  performs Step S 2  for operating the target terminal apparatus  101  by serving as a remote controller or the like. 
     The following describes the processing performed by the communication device  102  in more detail. 
     (Registration Flow of Remote Control Information) 
     First, the description is given for a flow of registering operation information onto the storage unit  213  of the communication device  102  according to the present embodiment. 
       FIG. 156  is a flowchart of registering operation information onto the storage unit  213  of the communication device  102  according to the present embodiment. 
     At the beginning, the user activates a reader/writer application program for performing proximity wireless communication (S 101 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  transmits, via the antenna  109 , polling waves which are signal calling unspecified receivers (S 102 ). Then, the communication device  102  determines whether or not a response to the polling has been detected (S 103 ). If it is determined that a response to the polling has not detected (N at S 103 ), then the communication device  102  re-transmits polling waves. 
     On the other hand, if it is determined that a response to the polling has been detected (Y at S 103 ), then the communication device  102  transmits a request for apparatus information in order to obtain apparatus information of the terminal apparatus  101  (S 104 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  receives the requested apparatus information from the terminal apparatus  101  (S 105 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  determines whether or not apparatus position information of the terminal apparatus  101  can be retrieved from the apparatus information (S 106 ). 
     If it is determined that the apparatus position information can be retrieved (Y at S 106 ), then, in the communication device  102 , the absolute position obtainment unit  227  holds the apparatus position information as absolute position information of the communication device  102 , and the relative position obtainment unit  228  initializes relative position information (S 107 ). 
     On the other hand, if it is determined that the apparatus position information cannot be retrieved from the apparatus information (N at S 106 ), then the communication device  102  activates the GPS sensor  224  (S 108 ) to generate absolute position information, and initializes relative position information generated by the relative position obtainment unit  228  (S 109 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  determines whether or not operation information in association with the apparatus information obtained at S 106  is stored in the storage unit  213  (S 110 ). 
     If it is determined that the operation information is stored in the storage unit  213  (Y at S 110 ), then the communication device  102  completes the registration processing. 
     On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation information is not stored in the storage unit  213  (N at S 110 ), then the communication device  102  transmits a request for operation information associated with the apparatus information to the server device  104  via the external communication unit  204  (S 111 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  receives the operation information from the server device  104  (S 112 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  stores the received operation information in association with the apparatus position information into the storage unit  213  (S 113 ). 
     As described above, the communication device  102  performs the registration of the operation information onto the storage unit  213 . 
     (Setting Operation Flow of Remote Control Information) 
     The following describes processing of setting remote control information into the communication device  102  to serve as a remote controller of a target apparatus, according to the present embodiment. 
     Each of  FIGS. 157 and 158  is a flowchart of setting operation information into the communication device  102  according to the present embodiment to operate a target apparatus.  FIG. 157  shows a flow in which the user operates the communication device  102  to activate a remote control application program.  FIG. 158  shows a flow in which the remote control application program is automatically activated without user&#39;s operation using the keys  111 . 
     First,  FIG. 157  is explained. 
     At the beginning, the user operates the keys  111  to activate a remote control application program in the communication device  102  (S 201 ). Subsequently, the user selects a target terminal apparatus  101  by using the keys  111  on the communication device  102  (S 202 ). Therefore, the communication device  102  sets operation information associated with the terminal apparatus selected at S 202  (S 203 ). 
     Here, under the assumption that the operation information is expressly set in the communication device  102  by Steps S 201  to S 203 , the subsequence steps performed by the communication device  102  will be described. 
     After setting the operation information of the target terminal apparatus  101 , such as a TV, into the communication device  102  as described above, the communication device  102  then activates the sensor unit  205  and starts detection of the position information obtainment unit  206  and the direction sensor unit  207  (S 204 ). Then, the communication device  102  causes the relative position obtainment unit  228  to calculate a relative position (S 205 ). 
     Next, based on the remote control operation inputted by the user using the keys  111 , the communication device  102  transmits a remote control command for operating the terminal apparatus  101  for which the operation information is set at S 203 . This means that it is seemed for the user that Steps S 202 , S 203 , and S 204  are a series of steps performed by the communication device  102 , but the communication device  102  also starts Steps S 204  and S 205  which the user does not notice. 
     Next, the move determination unit  210  in the communication device  102  determines whether or not the communication device  102  is still (S 207 ). 
     If it is determined that the communication device  102  is not still (N at S 207 ), then the communication device  102  returns to S 205  to re-calculate relative position information. 
     On the other hand, if it is determined that the communication device  102  is still (Y at S 207 ), then the position information obtainment unit  206  and the direction sensor unit  207  generates position information and oriented direction information, respectively (S 208 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  specifies the target terminal apparatus  101  existing in a direction pointed by the communication device  102 , and sets operation information of the terminal apparatus  101 . 
     Then, the processing returns to S 202  to continue the processing. 
     As described above, the communication device  102  firstly performs Steps S 201  to S 203  to set operation information, and then performs Steps S 204 , S 205 , and S 207  to S 209  to finally set (for example, narrow down) the operation information. 
     Next,  FIG. 158  is explained. 
     Firstly, the communication device  102  activates the sensor unit  205  to start detection of the position information obtainment unit  206  and the direction sensor unit  207  (S 301 ). Then, the communication device  102  causes the relative position obtainment unit  228  to calculate a relative position (S 302 ). 
     Next, the move determination unit  210  in the communication device  102  determines whether or not the communication device  102  is still (S 303 ). 
     If it is determined that the communication device  102  is not still (N at S 303 ), then the communication device  102  returns to S 302  to re-calculate relative position information. 
     On the other hand, if it is determined that the communication device  102  is still (Y at S 303 ), then the communication device  102  activates the remote control application program (S 304 ). 
     Next, the position information obtainment unit  206  and the direction sensor unit  207  in the communication device  102  generate position information and oriented direction information, respectively (S 305 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  specifies the target terminal apparatus  101  existing in a direction pointed by the communication device  102 , and sets operation information of the terminal apparatus  101  (S 306 ). 
     Next, at S 307 , the communication device  102  transmits a remote control command for operating the terminal apparatus  101  based on the remote control operation inputted by the user using the keys  111 , for example (details of the step will be described later). 
     Then, the processing returns to S 301  to continue the processing. 
     As described above, the communication device  102  performs the setting of operation information without (without trigger of) user&#39;s key operation. 
     (Setting Operation Flow of Remote Control Information) 
     Next, the description is given for a detailed example of Steps S 209  and S 307 , namely, a flow of specifying a target terminal apparatus  101  existing in a direction pointed by the communication device  102 . 
       FIG. 159  is a flowchart of an example of processing of specifying a target terminal apparatus  101  existing in a direction pointed by the communication device  102  according to the present embodiment. 
     Firstly, a search range is set, where a represents a search range angle that is an angle for defining a range (region) of a directional space to be searched out (S 401 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  determines whether or not the terminal apparatus  101  exists in a range (region) of a directional space satisfying (x−x0)*tan(θ−α)+y0&lt;y&lt;(x−x0)*tan(θ+α)+y0, based on the position information (x0, y0) of the communication device  102  and the directional angle (oriented direction information) θ which have been described with reference to  FIG. 154  (S 402 ). 
     If it is determined that a terminal apparatus  101  exists in the directional space (Y at S 402 ), then the communication device  102  further determines whether or not there is one terminal apparatus  101  in the directional space (S 403 ). 
     If it is determined that there is one terminal apparatus  101  in the directional space (Y at S 403 ), then the communication device  102  proceeds to S 409  described later to set operation information associated with the terminal apparatus  101 , and completes the processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is not only one terminal apparatus  101  in the directional space, in other words, there are two or more terminal apparatuses  101  in the directional space (N at S 403 ), then the communication device  102  obtains room arrangement information from, for example, the space information storage unit  3095  in the apparatus specification unit  309  (S 404 ). 
     Next, based on the obtained room arrangement information and the directional space obtained at S 402 , the communication device  102  determines whether or not there is one terminal apparatus  101  satisfying conditions that the terminal apparatus  101  exists (i) in a room where the communication device  102  exists and (ii) in the directional space (S 405 ). 
     If there is one terminal apparatus  101  satisfying the conditions (Y at S 405 ), then the communication device  102  proceeds to S 409  described later to set operation information associated with the terminal apparatus  101  and completes the processing. On the other hand, if there is not only one terminal apparatus  101  satisfying the conditions (N at S 405 ), then the communication device  102  displays, on the display unit  110 , a list of the terminal apparatuses  101  satisfying the conditions at S 405  (hereinafter, referred to as an “apparatus candidate list”) (S 406 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  receives selection of a terminal apparatus  101  from the apparatus candidate list which is made by the user using the keys  111  (S 407 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  obtains, for example, the pitch angle information from the apparatus pitch angle detection unit  4095  in the apparatus specification unit  309 , and stores the obtained pitch angle information in association with the terminal apparatus  101  selected at S 407  into the apparatus pitch angle storage unit  4096  (S 408 ). In addition, the communication device  102  specifies a terminal apparatus  101  from among terminal apparatuses  101  existing in a direction pointed by the communication device  102 , and sets operation information of the specified terminal apparatus  101  (S 409 ). 
     Referring back to S 402 , if it is determined that there is no terminal apparatus  101  in the directional space (N at S 402 ), then the communication device  102  further determines, based on the obtained position information, whether or not the communication device  102  exists in a target space, such as a user&#39;s home, where a target terminal apparatus  101  which the user wishes to operate exists (S 410 ). It should be noted that it has been described above that the target space where the target terminal apparatus  101  to be operated exists is the user&#39;s home, but the space is not limited to the user&#39;s home. 
     If it is determined that the communication device  102  exists in the target space where the target terminal apparatus  101  to be operated exists (N at S 410 ), then the communication device  102  displays a notice on the display unit  110  to persuade the user to register the terminal apparatus  101 , for example, by displaying a notice “Not Registered. Please touch the home appliance.” (S 411 ). 
     On the other hand, if it is determined that the communication device  102  does not exist in the target space where the target terminal apparatus  101  to be operated exists (Y at S 410 ), then the communication device  102  obtains position information of the communication device  102 , such as latitude and longitude of the user&#39;s home (S 412 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  determines whether or not the communication device  102  faces the user&#39;s home, based on home position information of the user&#39;s home and the oriented direction information and the position information of the communication device  102  (S 413 ). 
     If it is determined that the communication device  102  does not face the user&#39;s home (Y at S 413 ), then the communication device  102  terminates the processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the communication device  102  faces the user&#39;s home (N at S 413 ), then the communication device  102  displays, on the display unit  110 , an operable apparatus list of operable terminal apparatuses  101 , such as terminal apparatuses  101  connected to an external network, which the communication device  102  can operate via the internet (S 414 ). 
     Next, the user uses the keys  111  to select the target terminal apparatus to be operated from the operable apparatus list displayed by the communication device  102  (S 415 ). Then, the communication device  102  decides the terminal apparatus  101  selected by the user, and sets operation information associated with the decided terminal apparatus  101  into the communication device  102  (S 409 ), and completes the processing. 
     As described above, the communication device  102  specifies the target terminal apparatus  101  existing in the direction pointed by the communication device  102 . 
     (Detailed Flow of Remote Control Operation) 
     The following describes a detailed example of S 206  and S 307 , in other words, a flow of operating a target terminal apparatus  101  to be operated, by using the communication device  102  as a remote controller. 
       FIG. 160  is a flowchart of an example of processing of operating a target terminal apparatus  101  to be operated, by using, as a remote controller, the communication device  102  according to the present embodiment. 
     At the beginning, the communication device  102  determines whether or not there is a command input from the user using the keys  111  (S 501 ). 
     If it is determined that there is no command input from the user (N at S 501 ), then the communication device  102  terminates the processing. 
     On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a command input from the user (Y at S 501 ), then the communication device  102  further determines whether or not the input command is a quit command of the application program (S 502 ). If it is determined that the input command from the user is a quit command of the application program (Y at S 502 ), then the communication device  102  terminates the processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the input command from the user is not a quit command of the application program (N at S 502 ), then the communication device  102  transmits a command signal indicating an operation command to the terminal apparatus  101  (S 503 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  determines, by using the sound sensor  217 , whether or not the terminal apparatus  101  has appropriately received the operation command (S 504 ). More specifically, the communication device  102  receives audio information emitted from the terminal apparatus  101  to notify that the terminal apparatus  101  has appropriately received the operation command. Therefore, based on the obtained audio information, the communication device  102  examines the appropriate receipt. Here, for example, in the case where the terminal apparatus  101  is a TV, the audio information may be a sound caused when the TV changes channels. Furthermore, for example, in the case where the terminal apparatus  101  is an air conditioner or the like, the audio information may be a reaction sound for notifying the user of appropriate receipt of remote control information. 
     If it is determined that the terminal apparatus  101  has appropriately received the operation command (Y at S 504 ), then the communication device  102  transmits an operation history of the terminal apparatus  101  to the server device  104  via the external communication unit  204  (S 505 ). Here, it is also possible that the communication device  102  stores the operation history into the storage unit  213 . 
     Next, the communication device  102  switches a display on the display unit  110  according to the operation command. For example, when a list of recorded TV programs is to be displayed on the terminal apparatus  101  that is a TV, the communication device  102  held by the user also displays the same list on the display unit  110  of the communication device  102 . 
     Referring back to S 504 , if it is determined that the terminal apparatus  101  has not appropriately received the operation command (N at S 504 ), then the communication device  102  re-transmits the operation command and determines whether or not the number of the re-transmissions exceeds a predetermined value (S 506 ). 
     If it is determined that the number of the re-transmissions exceeds the predetermined value (Y at S 506 ), then the communication device  102  displays, on the display unit  110 , a notice for persuading the user to input the command by the keys again, for example, by displaying a notice “Please once more”. 
     As described above, the communication device  102  performs processing as a remote controller for operating the target terminal apparatus  101  to be operated. 
     (Remote Control Registration Sequence) 
     The following describes data exchange between the terminal apparatus  101  and the server device  104 , which is performed when the communication device  102  is to register operation information. 
       FIG. 161  is a sequence of data flow in registration of operation information which is performed by the communication device  102  according to the present embodiment. 
     At the beginning, the user activates an application program in the communication device  102  to perform proximity wireless communication (to activate a reader/writer), so that the communication device  102  starts polling (S 601 ). 
     Next, the user makes the communication device  102 , which starts polling, touch a region of the terminal apparatus  101  where an antenna of the terminal apparatus  101  for proximity wireless communication is provided (S 602 ), so that the communication device  102  transmits polling waves to the terminal apparatus  101  (S 603 ). Next, the terminal apparatus  101  receives the polling waves from the communication device  102 , and transmits a polling response signal to the communication device  102  (S 604 ). As described above, proximity wireless communication is established between the terminal apparatus  101  and the communication device  102 . Then, when the communication device  102  receives the polling response signal from the terminal apparatus  101 , the communication device  102  generates a read command for reading apparatus information from the terminal apparatus  101 , and transmits the read command to the terminal apparatus  101  (S 605 ). When the terminal apparatus  101  receives the read command, the terminal apparatus  101  transmits, to the communication device  102 , information including apparatus information of the terminal apparatus  101  (S 606 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  extracts the apparatus information from the information received from the terminal apparatus  101  (S 607 ). 
     Here, by using various sensors such as the GPS sensor, the communication device  102  generates (obtains) position information of the communication device  102  at the timing where the communication device  102  touches the terminal apparatus  101  at S 602  (S 608 ). Here, the communication device  102  generates (obtains) the position information at the timing of S 602 , by using the situation where the communication device  102  needs to be close to the terminal apparatus  101  within several centimeters in order to establish the proximity wireless communication. In other words, the position information generated by the communication device  102  in the establishment of the proximity wireless communication can be considered as apparatus position information of the terminal apparatus  101 . 
     Next, the communication device  102  transmits, to the server device  104 , a request command for requesting operation information associated with the extracted terminal information of the terminal apparatus  101  from the server device  104  (S 609 ). 
     Next, when the server device  104  receives the request command for requesting the operation information, the server device  104  obtains the operation information associated with the terminal apparatus from an operation information management database, and transmits the obtained operation information to the communication device  102  (S 610 ). 
     Finally, the communication device  102  stores the received operation information, the position information, and the apparatus information, in association with one another, into the storage unit  213  (S 610 ). 
     By the above sequence, the communication device  102  performs the registration of operation information. 
     (Remote Control Operation Sequence) 
     The following describes data exchange between the terminal apparatus  101  and the server device  104 , which is performed when the communication device  102  serves as a remote controller to operate the terminal apparatus  101 . 
       FIG. 162  is a sequence of data flow where the communication device  102  serves as a remote controller to operate the terminal apparatus  101 , according to the present embodiment. 
     At the beginning, the user inputs an operation command to the communication device  102  via the keys  111  based on a remote controller interface displayed on the display unit  110  (S 701 ). 
     Next, the communication device  102  transmits the operation command inputted by the user, to the terminal apparatus  101  via the operation information transmission unit  215  (S 702 ). 
     Next, the terminal apparatus  101  executes a program according to the received operation command (S 704 ). For example, the terminal apparatus  101  executes a program corresponding to the operation command, such as a command for switching power, a command for changing a sound volume, a command for changing a temperature, a command for reproduction, a command for changing TV channels, or the like. 
     Next, the terminal apparatus  101  emits audio (audio information) for notifying appropriate receipt of the operation command (S 704 ). For example, in the case where the terminal apparatus  101  is a TV, the audio is sound emitted when a TV channel is changed to another. In the case where the terminal apparatus  101  is an air conditioner or the like, the audio is reaction sound emitted to notify the user of appropriate receipt of the operation information. 
     Next, the communication device  102  recognizes the audio emitted from the terminal apparatus  101 , by using the sound sensor  217  (S 705 ). Then, if the communication device  102  recognizes that the audio has been emitted by the terminal apparatus  101  to notify appropriate receipt of the operation command, then the communication device  102  transmits an operation history of the terminal apparatus  101  to the server device  104  (S 706 ). Here, as described earlier, the communication device  102  switches a display on the display unit  110  according to the operation command (S 707 ). 
     Subsequently, for example, the user inputs an operation command again, by using the keys  111  based on a remote control interface displayed on the display unit  110  (S 708 ). In this case, as described earlier, the communication device  102  transmits the operation command inputted by the user, to the terminal apparatus  101  via the operation information transmission unit  215  (S 709 ). 
     Here, if the terminal apparatus  101  cannot receive the operation command appropriately, the communication device  102  cannot recognize audio emitted from the terminal apparatus  101  (S 710 ). Then, the communication device  102  re-transmits the operation command (S 711 ). As described above, the communication device  102  can recognize that the terminal apparatus  101  has not received the operation command, without exchanging a specific feedback signal indicating appropriate receipt of the signal by the terminal apparatus  101 . As a result, the communication device  102  can perform re-transmission or the like for the operation command. 
     If it is determined that the number of re-transmissions of the operation command exceeds a predetermined number (S 712 ), then the communication device  102  displays, on the display unit  110 , a notice for persuading the user to input the operation command again by using the keys, such as a notice “Please once more”, and waits for an input operation command from the user (S 713 ). 
     By the above-described sequence, the communication device  102  serves as a remote controller for operating the terminal apparatus  101 . 
     Thereby, the present embodiment of the present invention can provide a communication device that can easily serve as an extended user interface, such as a remote controller, of a target apparatus, without causing any complicated operations to the user. 
     More specifically, the communication device  102  can store, in the storage unit  213 , terminal apparatus information, position information (apparatus position information) of the terminal apparatus  101 , and operation information of the terminal apparatus  101 , in association with one another. Thereby, a direction pointed by the communication device  102  is calculated based on sensor information detected by the sensor unit  205 . Therefore, the operation information of the terminal apparatus  101  existing in the calculated directional space is called from the storage unit  213 . As a result, the communication device  102  can serve as a remote controller of the terminal apparatus  101 . In other words, the communication device  102  can set a remote controller command (control signal) of the communication device  102 , based on the operation information of the terminal apparatus  101 . For example, merely by pointing the communication device  102  to a home appliance (terminal apparatus  101 ) or the like, such as an air conditioner or a TV, which the user of the communication device  102  intends to operate, the communication device  102  can operate the home appliance or the like pointed by the user. 
     Furthermore, the move determination unit  210  determines whether or not the communication device  102  is still. Thereby, by using the stillness of the communication device  102  as a trigger, the communication device  102  can serve as a remote controller of the terminal apparatus  101  in a direction pointed by the communication device  102 . In other words, the communication device  102  can serve as a remote controller for a new terminal apparatus  101  when the communication device  102  becomes still as a trigger, without user&#39;s key operation. 
     Furthermore, the communication device  102  obtains an oriented direction detected by the direction sensor unit  207 . Thereby, if the oriented direction of infrared communication or the like turns away from the terminal apparatus  101  operated by the communication device  102  using the infrared communication, the communication device  102  can present the user with a notice message such as “Please turn it slightly to the right”. 
     In addition, the communication device  102  can obtain sound information of the terminal apparatus  101  by the sound sensor  217 . More specifically, in the case where the terminal apparatus  101  is a TV, the communication device  102  can obtain sound caused by channel switching, and in the case where the terminal apparatus  101  is an air conditioner or the like, the communication device  102  can obtain reaction sound notifying the user of that the terminal apparatus  101  has appropriately received the operation information. Thereby, without transmitting a certain feedback signal indicating that the terminal apparatus  101  has received a signal, the communication device  102  can determine whether or not the operation command has been appropriately transmitted. Therefore, it is possible to collect an operation history of a proper terminal apparatus  101  via the communication device  102 , even if the terminal apparatus  101  is not connected to a general-purpose network. 
     Moreover, by using, as a trigger, the detection of the terminal apparatus  101  by the proximity wireless detection unit  202 , in the communication device  102 , the relative position obtainment unit  228  initializes relative position information, and the absolute position obtainment unit  227  sets the apparatus position information obtained via the GPS sensor  224  or the external communication unit  204  to be absolute position information of the communication device  102 . Thereby, the communication device  102  can reduce accumulation errors of the apparatus position information which are occurred when the acceleration sensor  223  corrects the apparatus position information. 
     It should be noted that it has been described in the present embodiment that the communication device  102  obtains apparatus information of the terminal apparatus  101  by using proximity wireless communication. However, the present embodiment is not limited to the above. For example, it is also possible that the terminal apparatus  101  is provided with a bar-code having apparatus information, and the communication device  102  includes a scanner, such as a digital camera function, to read the apparatus information. Here,  FIG. 163A  is a diagram showing the case where a 2D bar-code is provided as apparatus information of the terminal apparatus  101 , according to the present embodiment.  FIG. 163B  is a diagram showing an example of the case where the apparatus information of the terminal apparatus  101  is read from the 2D bar-code, according to the present embodiment. Each of  FIGS. 163A and 163B  shows an air conditioner  1201  as an example of the terminal apparatus  101 . The communication device  102  shown in  FIG. 14B  further includes a scanner. The structure of the communication device  102  shown in  FIG. 14B  is the same as the structure of the communication device shown in  FIG. 150  (or  FIG. 151 ) except the scanner. As shown in  FIG. 163A , the air conditioner  1201  is provided with a 2D bar-code  1203  including apparatus information. Then, as shown in  FIG. 163B , the scanner in the communication device  102  is used to obtain the apparatus information from the 2D bar-code  1203 . With the above structure, it is possible to obtain apparatus information of a terminal apparatus  101  that does not have a proximity wireless communication function. For example, even if the air conditioner is equipped at a high place and it is therefore difficult to perform action for establishing proximity wireless communication with the air conditioner, in other words, it is difficult to touch the terminal apparatus  101  by the communication device  102 , the communication device  102  can obtain the apparatus information. 
     It should be noted that it has been described in the present embodiment that the communication device  102  selects one terminal apparatus  101  for which the communication device  102  serves as a remote controller. However, the present embodiment is not limited to the above. 
     For example, if a plurality of the terminal apparatuses  101  are located close to each other so that the apparatus specification unit  209  has difficulty in detecting a certain terminal apparatus  101  among them, or if the plurality of terminal apparatuses  101  are to be operated at the same time, the communication device  102  may operate the terminal apparatuses  101  simultaneously. In other words, the communication device  102  may serve as a remote controller for the plurality of terminal apparatuses  101 . Each of  FIGS. 164A and 164B  is a diagram showing a display example of the display unit in the case where a plurality of illumination apparatuses are operated. More specifically, it is shown that the communication device  102  is pointed to an illumination switch board for operating the illumination apparatuses, not to the illumination apparatuses, so that illumination switches operable on the illumination switch board can be operated together on the display unit  110 . In other words, as shown in  FIG. 164A , the communication device  102  may simultaneously set plural pieces of operation information of a plurality of apparatuses, which are a kitchen illumination and a dining illumination, and simultaneously operate the apparatuses. Or, as shown in  FIG. 164B , if an illumination intensity of a light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination or the like can be changed by analog, the display unit  110  may present a display on which the illumination intensity can be changed by analog. 
     Furthermore, for example, if the terminal apparatuses  101  such as a TV and a recorder are closely located, it is difficult to display, on the display unit  110  of the communication device  102 , all of remote control commands of the terminal apparatuses  101 , since each of the TV and the recorder has a great number of remote control commands for operation. Therefore, if there are a great number of remote control commands, it is possible as shown in  FIG. 165A  that the display unit  110  presents a display so that the user can select, on the display, a terminal apparatus  101  for which the communication device  102  is to serve as a remote controller. Here,  FIG. 165A  is a diagram showing a display example in the case where the user is persuaded to select which apparatus among the plurality of apparatuses should be operated by the communication device  102  as a remote controller. In an example of  FIG. 165A , the communication device  102  serves as a remote controller for the TV when setting of TV remote control is “ON”, while the communication device  102  serves as a remote controller for the recorder when setting of recorder remote control is “ON”. 
     It should be noted that it has been described in the present embodiment that the communication device  102  obtains apparatus information of the terminal apparatus  101 . However, the present embodiment is not limited to the above. For example, the communication device  102  may obtain a current operating status, such as powered ON or OFF, of the terminal apparatus  101  from the terminal apparatus  101 . In this case, the communication device  102  may set operation information according to the current operating status of the terminal apparatus  101 . Thereby, it is not necessary to display all of the remote control commands on the display unit  110 . As a result, the user interface can be simplified. For example, in the case where the terminal apparatus  101  is a TV or the like, the communication device  102  can obtain the current operating status of the terminal apparatus  101  by using a general-purpose network such as the Internet.  FIG. 165B  is a diagram showing an example in the case where the communication device  102  sets operation information according to a current operating status of the terminal apparatus  101 . It is assumed in the example of  FIG. 165B  that the TV is ON, the recorder is OFF, and the communication device  102  knows these current operating statuses. Under the assumption, since it is not necessary to use at least a “Power ON” command for TV operation, the display unit  110  of the communication device  102  does not need to display the command. In addition, since the recorder is OFF, the first operation selected by the user would be operation for powering the recorder ON. Therefore, it is necessary to display operation information for powering the recorder ON. As described above, the communication device  102  may narrow down the remote control commands to be presented to the user, according to the operating status of the terminal apparatus  101 . 
     It should be noted that it has been described in the present embodiment that the communication device  102  calculates directional space information of the communication device  102 , and thereby specifies a target terminal apparatus  101  existing in the oriented direction. However, the server device  104  may perform the specification of the terminal apparatus  101 . In this case, for example, the communication device  102  transmits angular velocity information, acceleration information, and position information to the server device  104  via the external communication unit  204 . Then, based on the angular velocity information, the acceleration information, and the position information received from the communication device  102 , the server device  104  may specify a terminal apparatus  101  existing in the oriented direction of the communication device  102 , and transmit the operation information of the specified terminal apparatus  101  to the communication device  102 . 
     It should be noted that the communication device  102  according to the present embodiment may use altitude information. In this case, it is possible to generate (detect) the altitude information of the communication device  102  by a barometer, for example. 
     In the present embodiment, it is possible to change a detection range of a remote controller for a terminal apparatus  101  such as a TV or an air conditioner, depending on a degree of mobility, a degree of operation urgency, a size of the apparatus, or the like. For example, the reduction of a detection range for detecting a terminal apparatus  101 , such as an air conditioner, which is unlikely to move, can prevent false operation during operation of another terminal apparatus  101 . On the other hand, the increase of a detection range of a remote controller for detecting a terminal apparatus  101 , such as a fan, which is likely to move, makes it possible to operate the terminal apparatus  101  even if the position of the terminal apparatus is changed to some extent. 
     Moreover, if the terminal apparatus  101  is far from the communication device  102 , a range in which the communication device  102  can operate the apparatus is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to vary a threshold value α for defining a directional space range, depending on a distance between the terminal apparatus  101  and the communication device  102 . 
     Furthermore, of course, as shown in  FIG. 166 , the user on the first floor of a building can operate a terminal apparatus  101  on the second floor. Here,  FIG. 166  is a schematic diagram of remote control operation for the second floor, according to the present embodiment. As shown in  FIG. 166 , if the user holding the communication device  102  exists in a room or floor that is different from a room or floor where the terminal apparatus  101  to be operated exists, or if the communication device  102  is far from the terminal apparatus  101  to be operated by a predetermined distance or more, the user may point the communication device  102  to a direction so that a list of terminal apparatuses  101  in a room in the pointed direction are displayed. Thereby, even if the user does not exactly remember a location of a terminal apparatus  101  in a next room, it is possible to operate the terminal apparatus  101  in the far location. 
     Nineteenth Embodiment 
       FIG. 167  is a diagram illustrating an entire system according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. 
     Referring to  FIG. 167 , the system according to the present embodiment includes a RF-ID device O 50 , a mobile device O 60 , a first server O 101 , and a second server O 103 . 
     The RF-ID device O 50  is a device having a NFC function. The RF-ID device O 50  is included in electronic products such as refrigerators, microwaves, washing machines, TVs, and recording apparatuses. The RF-ID device O 50  stores, as product information of a corresponding product, (a) a product serial number that is ID for identifying the product, (b) use history information of the product, (d) error information, and the like into a memory of the product. Thereby, the RF-ID device O 50  has the same function as that included in the terminal apparatus  101  according to the eighteenth embodiment. 
     The mobile device O 060  has a NFC function communicable with the NFC function of the RF-ID unit O 50  by proximity wireless communication. The mobile device O 60  also has a reader/writer function of reading product information from the RF-ID device O 50 . In addition, the mobile device O 60  is a portable device such as a mobile phone terminal and a remote controller terminal for TV. Furthermore, the mobile device O 60  has the same function as that of the communication device  102  according to the eighteenth embodiment. 
     The first server O 101  is a server connected to the mobile device O 60  via a general-purpose network such as the Internet in order to communicate with the mobile device O 60 . The first server O 101  has an internal database (DB) in which pieces of RF-ID information read from the RF-ID devices O 50  to the mobile device O 60  are accumulated. 
     The second server O 103  is a server connected to the first server O 101  via a general-purpose network such as the Internet in order to communicate with the first server O 101 . The second server O 103  has an internal database (DB) in which pieces of building information regarding the RF-ID devices O 50  are accumulated. Each of the building information is coordinates of a building in which the corresponding RF-ID device O 50  is located. 
     The RF-ID device O 50  includes product ID O 50 , a first server URL O 52 , service ID O 53 , and an accuracy identifier O 54 . 
     Here, the server device  104  according to the eighteenth embodiment has functions of the first server O 101  and the second server O 103 . 
     The product ID O 51  is ID for identifying a product having the RF-ID device O 50 . For example, the product ID O 51  is a part number (including color information) or a product serial number of the product. 
     The first server URL O 52  is address information of the first server O 101 . 
     The service ID O 53  is ID for identifying a product classification such as a TV, an air conditioner, or a refrigerator. 
     The accuracy identifier O 54  is information indicating reliability of position information provided from a product with the RF-ID device  10  which has the product ID. 
     As described above, if the RF-ID device O 50  according to the present embodiment is moved into proximity of the mobile device O 60  to be able to perform proximity wireless communication, the RF-ID device O 50  can transmit, to the mobile device O 60 , the product serial number, the first server URL, the service ID, and the accuracy identifier which are stored in the memory. 
     Next, the mobile device O 60  according to the present embodiment is described. 
     The mobile device O 60  includes an antenna O 61 , a RF-ID reader/writer O 62 , a coordinate accuracy identification information O 63 , a CPU O 64 , a program execution unit O 65 , a data processing unit O 66 , a memory unit O 67 , a display unit O 68 d, a communication antenna O 68 , a transmission unit O 70 , a receiving unit O 71 , a communication unit O 72 , a position information storage unit O 73 , a RF-ID storage unit O 74 , a RF-ID detection unit O 75 , a URL unit O 76 , a reproducing unit O 77 , a relative position calculation unit O 78 , a coordinate information sending unit O 79 , a recording unit O 80 , a building coordinate information output unit O 81 , a registered-coordinate unit O 82 , a determination unit O 83 , a reference coordinate unit O 84 , a position information output unit O 85 , a position information unit O 86 , a direction information unit O 87 , a magnetic compass O 88 , a geomagnetism correction unit O 89 , a satellite antenna O 90 , a position information calculation unit O 91 , position information O 92 , position information correction unit O 93 , a direction information correction unit O 94 , an angular velocity sensor O 95 , an angular velocity sensor O 96 , an angular velocity sensor O 97 , an acceleration sensor O 98 , an acceleration sensor O 99 , an acceleration sensor O 100 , an integrator O 105 , an integrator O 106 , and an absolute coordinate calculation unit O 107 . 
     The antenna O 61  supplies power towards any RF-ID devices so as to search for a RF-ID device with which the mobile device O 60  can perform proximity wireless communication. In receiving a response, the antenna O 61  establishes proximity wireless communication with the responding RF-ID device O 50  to receive modulated information from the RF-ID device O 50 . 
     The RF-ID reader/writer O 62  demodulates the received modulated information. 
     Here, the proximity wireless communication unit  201  according to the eighteenth embodiment has functions of the antenna O 61  and the RF-ID reader/writer O 62 . 
     The coordinate accuracy identification information O 63  extracts an accuracy identifier from the received information. 
     The CPU O 64  controls a system of the mobile device O 60 . The CPU O 64  controls operations of each unit included in the mobile device O 60 . 
     The program execution unit O 65  executes a program based on the service ID included in the received information. 
     The data processing unit O 66  performs data processing for information transmitted from the first server O 101 . 
     The memory unit O 67  temporarily stores the information processed by the data processing unit O 66 . 
     The display unit O 68 d displays the information stored in the memory unit O 67 . 
     The communication antenna O 68  is connected to a general-purpose network such as the Internet. The communication antenna O 68  has the same function as that of the communication antenna  219  according to the eighteenth embodiment. 
     The transmission unit O 70  modulates information to be transmitted to the general-purpose network such as the Internet. The transmission unit O 70  has the same function as that of the transmission unit  221  according to the eighteenth embodiment. 
     The receiving unit O 71  demodulates information received via the general-purpose network such as the Internet. The receiving unit O 71  has the same function as that of the receiving unit  220  according to the eighteenth embodiment. 
     The communication unit O 72  generates and analyzes information to be exchanged (transmitted and received) in communication with other devices via the general-purpose network such as the Internet. The communication unit O 72  has the same function as that of the communication control unit  222  according to the eighteenth embodiment. 
     The position information storage unit O 73  stores position information generated by the mobile device O 60 . 
     The RF-ID storage unit O 74  holds product ID and service ID which are obtained from the RF-ID device O 50 . 
     The RF-ID detection unit O 75  detects a response from the RF-ID device O 10 . 
     The URL O 76  extracts the first server URL from the information received from the RF-ID device O 50 . 
     The reproducing unit O 77  reproduces the position information stored in the position information storage unit O 73 . 
     The relative position calculation unit O 78  calculates relative position information from (a) the position information which is obtained from the position information storage unit O 73  and then reproduced and (b) position information of a current position (current position information) of the mobile device O 60 . 
     The coordinate information sending unit O 79  provides other units with the position information of the mobile device O 60  which is generated at a timing of receiving a trigger from the RF-ID detection unit O 75 . 
     The recording unit O 80  writes the position information provided from the coordinate information sending unit O 79 , into the position information storage unit O 73 . 
     The building coordinate information output unit O 81  extracts building coordinate information from the information received by the communication antenna O 68 . 
     The registered-coordinate unit O 82  extracts registered coordinate information from the information received by the communication antenna O 68 . 
     The determination unit O 83  examines (determines) an accuracy of the registered coordinate information extracted by the registered-coordinate unit O 82 . 
     If the determination unit O 83  determines that the registered coordinate information is reliable, then the reference coordinate unit O 84  sets the registered coordinate information to be reference coordinate information and provides the reference coordinate information to the position information correction unit O 93 . 
     The position information output unit O 85  generates position information using direction information provided from the direction information unit O 87  and position information provided from the position information unit O 86 , and provides the generated position information to another unit. The position information provided from the position information unit O 86  and the direction information provided from the direction information unit O 87  are position information of the mobile device O 60  which is provided form the absolute coordinate calculation unit O 107  that includes the position information correction unit O 93  and the direction information correction unit O 94 . 
     The magnetic compass O 88  determines a direction. 
     The direction information unit O 89  generates direction information from information detected by the magnetic compass O 88 . 
     Here, the direction sensor  226  according to the eighteenth embodiment includes the functions of the magnetic compass O 88  and the direction information unit O 89 . 
     The satellite antenna O 90  communicates with satellites. 
     The position information calculation unit O 91  calculates position information of the mobile device O 60  from a result of the communication with the satellites. For example, the position information calculation unit O 91  calculates longitude, latitude, and altitude of the position of the mobile device O 60 . 
     The position information unit O 92  generates position information from the position information generated by the position information calculation unit O 91 . 
     Here, the GPS sensor  224  according to the eighteenth embodiment includes the functions of the satellite antenna O 90 , the position information calculation unit O 91 , and the position information unit O 92 . 
     The position information correction unit O 93  corrects a result of position information obtained from the integrators O 105  and O 106 , by using pieces of information provided from the position information O 92 , the reference coordinate unit O 84 , and the building coordinate information output unit O 81 . 
     The direction information correction unit O 94  corrects a result of direction information obtained from the integrators O 105  and O 106 , by using the information provided from the direction information unit O 89 . 
     The angular velocity sensor O 95  measures an angular velocity in the x-axis direction of the mobile device O 60 . 
     The angular velocity sensor O 96  measures an angular velocity in the y-axis direction of the mobile device O 60 . 
     The angular velocity sensor O 97  measures an angular velocity in the z-axis direction of the mobile device O 60 . 
     Here, the angular velocity sensor  225  according to the eighteenth embodiment includes the functions of the angular velocity sensor O 95 , the angular velocity sensor O 96 , and the angular velocity sensor O 97 . 
     The acceleration sensor O 98  measures an acceleration in the x-axis direction of the mobile device O 60 . 
     The acceleration sensor O 99  measures an acceleration in the y-axis direction of the mobile device O 60 . 
     The acceleration sensor O 100  measures an acceleration in the z-axis direction of the mobile device O 60 . 
     Here, the acceleration sensor  223  according to the eighteenth embodiment includes the functions of the acceleration sensor O 98 , the acceleration sensor O 99 , and the acceleration sensor O 100 . 
     The integrator O 105  integrates results of the measurement of the angular velocity sensors O 95 , O 96 , and O 97 . 
     The integrator O 106  integrates results of the measurement of the acceleration sensors O 98 , O 99 , and O 100 . 
     The absolute coordinate calculation unit O 107  includes the position information correction unit O 93  and the direction information correction unit O 94 , in order to calculate absolute coordinates of the mobile device O 60 . 
     As described above, the mobile device O 60  according to the present embodiment can determine a position of the mobile device O 60  when the mobile device O 60  receives the product information from the RF-ID device O 50 , thereby generating position information of the mobile device O 60 . Thereby, the mobile device O 60  transmits, to the first server O 10 , the position information and the product information of the product having the RF-ID device O 50  in association with each other. In addition, (a) the reference coordinates and the building coordinate information which are generated from the registered coordinates received from the RF-ID device O 50 , (b) the position information generated by the position information unit O 92 , and (c) the information generated by the direction information unit O 89  allow the current position information of the mobile device O 60  to be corrected. In addition, combination of the registered coordinate information in the first server O 101  and the building coordinate information in the second server O 103  makes it possible to generate a 3D product map of a building in which a product having the RF-ID device  10  registered by using the mobile device O 60  is located. It is also possible to display the generated 3D product map on the display unit O 68 d. 
     Next, the first server O 101  according to the present embodiment is described. 
     The first server O 101  is a server connected to the mobile device O 60  via a general-purpose network such as the Internet. The first server O 101  includes a registered-coordinate information unit O 102  in which pieces of information regarding products having the RF-ID devices O 50  are managed. 
     The registered-coordinate information unit O 102  receives the information of the RF-ID device O 10  and the information of the mobile device O 60  which are in association with each other. The registered-coordinate information unit O 102  manages the information of the mobile device O 60  as parent device information and the RF-ID device O 50  as child device information in association with each other. The child device information is added with the position information generated by the mobile device O 60  so as to manage also information indicating whether the terminal device (product having the RF-ID device O 50 ) exists. In addition, combination of the building coordinate information received from the second server O 103  and the information in the registered-coordinate information unit O 102  makes it possible to generate a 3D product map of products including the mobile device O 60  arranged in the corresponding building. 
     Next, the second server O 103  according to the present embodiment is described. 
     The second server O 101  is a server connected to the first server O 103  via the general-purpose network such as the Internet. The second server O 103  includes a building coordinate database O 104  in which a room arrangement and coordinates of each existing building (for example, longitude, latitude, and altitude) are managed in association with each other. 
     The room arrangement and coordinates of each existing building stored in the building coordinate database O 104  can be combined with the registered coordinate information registered in the first server O 103  in order to generate a 3D product map of products including the mobile device O 60  arranged in the corresponding building. The building coordinate database O 104  may be managed as private information in a server having security higher than that of the first server O 101  (for example, a server having setting of preventing the server from directly communicating with the mobile device O 60 ). In this aspect, it is possible reduce leakage of the private information. 
     As described above, in the system according to the present embodiment, the product information of the product having the RF-ID device O 50  is read by the mobile device O 60  using proximity wireless communication. Then, the mobile device O 60  transmits, to the first server O 103 , (a) the product information received from the RF-ID device O 50  and (b) the position information generated by touching the RF-ID device O 50  by the mobile device O 60  to perform proximity wireless communication, which are in association with each other. The first server O 103  can manage the information of the mobile device O 60  as parent device information and the information of the product having the RF-ID device O 50  as child device information, in association with each other. In addition, if relative positions of such products having the RF-ID devices O 50  are calculated using pieces of the position information of the products, the relative positions can be used to generate a 3D map of the products. 
     In addition, the system includes the second server O 103  having a database in which a room arrangement and coordinates of each building are managed. The room arrangement and coordinates are combined with pieces of position information of products which are managed in the first server O 101 . Thereby, it is possible to generate a 3D map (3D product map) of the products having the RF-ID devices O 50  arranged in each building. 
     Moreover, the mobile device O 60  can correct the current position information of the mobile device O 60  by using (a) the reference coordinates and the building coordinate information which are generated from the registered coordinates received from the RF-ID device O 50 , (b) the position information generated by the position information unit O 92 , and (c) the information generated by the direction information unit O 89 . 
     The following describes processing of registering the product information of the product having the RF-ID device O 50  into the first server O 101 . 
     If the mobile device O 60  touches the RF-ID device O 50  to be able to perform proximity wireless communication with the RF-ID device O 50 , the mobile device O 60  supplies power and clock to the RF-ID device O 50  that thereby starts operating. 
     With the power supply, the RF-ID device O 50  modulates the product ID O 51 , the first server URL O 52 , the service ID O 53 , and the accuracy identifier O 54  which are stored, and transmits these pieces of data to the mobile device O 60 . 
     In receiving the product ID O 51 , the first server URL O 52 , the service ID O 53 , and the accuracy identifier O 54  by the antenna O 61 , the mobile device O 60  demodulates the received pieces of information in the RF-ID device O 62 . 
     The URL unit O 76  extracts the first server URL O 52  and provides the extracted first server URL O 52  to the communication unit O 72 . 
     The RF-ID storage unit O 74  stores the product ID O 51  and the service ID O 53 . 
     The coordinate accuracy identification information O 63  extracts the accuracy identifier O 54  and provides the extracted accuracy identifier O 54  to the determination unit O 83 . 
     The RF-ID detection unit O 75  provides the coordinate information sending unit O 79  and the reference coordinate unit O 84  with a trigger for notifying of the receipt of the pieces of information from the RF-ID device O 50 . 
     In receiving the trigger, the coordinate information sending unit O 79  provides the communication unit O 72  with the position information of the mobile device N 60  which is received from the position information output unit O 85 . 
     Here, the description is given for the position information of the mobile device O 60  outputted by the position information output unit O 85 . 
     First, the absolute coordinate calculation unit O 107  receives (a) a result of integrating, by the integrator O 105 , results detected by the angular velocity sensors O 95  to O 97  and (b) a result of integrating, by the integrator O 106 , results detected by the acceleration sensors O 98  to O 100 . Here, in the absolute coordinate calculation unit O 107 , the direction information correction unit O 94  and the position information correction unit O 93  correct the results of the integrators O 105  and O 106 , based on (a) the information of the position information unit O 92  storing the calculation result of the position information calculation unit O 91  using the satellite antenna O 90  and (b) information of the direction information unit O 89  storing the results of the orientation indicated by the magnetic compass O 88 . 
     Next, the absolute coordinate calculation unit O 107  provides the corrected direction information in the direction information unit O 87  and the corrected position information in the position information unit O 86  to the position information output unit O 85 . The position information output unit O 85  generates position information from the corrected direction information in the direction information unit O 87  and the corrected position information in the position information unit O 86 . 
     By the above-described processing, the mobile device O 60  eventually generates position information (current position information) of the mobile device O 60 . 
     Then, the program execution unit O 65  provides the product ID and the service ID, which are stored in the RF-ID storage unit O 74 , to the communication unit O 72 . 
     The communication unit O 72  generates data (information) including (a) the position information provided from the coordinate information sending unit O 79  and (b) the product ID and the service ID provided from the program execution unit O 65 . The communication unit O 72  designates the first server URL notified from the URL unit O 76  to be a destination address of the data, and provides the data and the address to the transmission unit O 70 . The transmission unit O 70  modulates the data and transmits the modulated data to the first server O 101  via the communication antenna O 68 . 
     In receiving the data from the mobile device O 60 , the first server O 101  demodulates the modulated data. 
     The registered-coordinate information unit O 102  stores the information of the mobile device O 60  as parent device information and the information of the RF-ID device O 50  as child device information in association with each other. In more detail, the product ID O 51  and the service ID O 53  which are information of the product having the RF-ID device O 50  (child device) are managed in association with the position information of a position at which the mobile device O 60  (parent device) receives the product ID O 51  and the service ID O 53  from the RF-ID device O 50 . 
     The following describes processing performed by the mobile device O 60  to generate a 3D map of products (a 3D product map). Each of the products has the RF-ID device O 50  and has been registered by the mobile device O 60  onto the first server O 101 . 
       FIG. 168  is a diagram illustrating an example of an arrangement of the products having the RF-ID units O 50  according to the present embodiment. 
     In a living room on the first floor, a TV O 50 A, a BD recorder O 50 B, and an air conditioner O 50 C are arranged. In a Japanese room on the first floor, an air conditioner O 50 D is arranged. On the second floor, a TV O 50 E and an air conditioner O 50 F are arranged. Each of the above products is embedded with the RF-ID device O 50 . It is assumed that coordinates of a position of each product have already been registered to the registered-coordinate information unit O 102  connected to the first server O 101 , by using the mobile device O 60  employing the above-described processing for registering product information stored in the RF-ID device O 50 . 
     First, the communication unit O 72  in the mobile device O 60  generates product information request data to be used to request the first server O 101  to provide the product information registered by using the mobile device O 60 . 
     The transmission unit O 70  modulates the product information request data and transmits the modulated data to the first server O 101  via the communication antenna O 68 . 
     In receiving the product information request data, the first server O 101  generates product information response data and transmits the generated data to the mobile device O 60 . The product information response data includes the child product information that managed in association with the mobile device O 60  as its parent device. In this example, the product information response data includes the product ID O 51 , the service ID, and the position information regarding each of the TV O 50 A, the BD recorder O 50 B, the air conditioner O 50 C, the air conditioner O 50 D, the TV O 50 E, and the air conditioner O 50 F. 
     Next, the first server O 101  transmits the same product information response data to the second server O 103 . 
     Based on the position information of each product included in the product information response data, the second server O 103  extracts, from the building coordinate database O 104 , image data including position (coordinate) information of a building (hereinafter, “building coordinate information”) located at the same position as that of each product.  FIG. 169  illustrates the building coordinate information extracted from the building coordinate database O 104 . The building coordinate information includes an image of a room arrangement and position information of a building. 
     The second server O 103  transmits the extracted building coordinate information to the mobile device O 60 . 
     The receiving unit O 71  in the mobile device O 60  receives the product information response data via the communication antenna O 68 , then modulates the received information, and provides the modulated information to the communication unit O 72 . 
     The communication unit O 72  provides the modulated information to the program execution unit O 65 . 
     The program execution unit O 65  generates image data of a 3D map of products as illustrated in  FIG. 170 , using the position information of each of the products which is information included in the product information response data. In the 3D map, the products are mapped as different icons on respective coordinates based on the corresponding position information, so that the user can learn the arrangement of the products at a glance. 
     The program execution unit O 65  provides the generated image data to the data processing unit O 66 . 
     The data processing unit O 66  provides the image data to the memory unit O 67  in which the image data is temporarily stored. 
     The display unit O 68 d displays image data of the 3D map of products illustrated in  FIG. 169  which is stored in the memory unit O 67 . 
     Next, in receiving the building coordinate information from the second server O 103  via the communication antenna O 68 , the receiving unit O 71  in the mobile device O 60  demodulates the received building coordinate information, and provides the demodulated information to the building coordinate information output unit O 81 . 
     The building coordinate information output unit O 81  analyzes the building coordinate information and provides the building coordinate information to the display unit O 68 d. The display unit O 68 d displays image data of a 3D product map as illustrated in  FIG. 170 . The displayed image data is a combination of the image data of  FIG. 169  and the already-displayed image data of  FIG. 170 . 
     As described above, it is possible to generate a 3D product map which the user having the mobile device O 60  can see an arrangement of products at a glance. 
     Next, the description is given for the processing performed by the mobile device O 60  to correct the position information of the mobile device O 60  by using the building coordinate information. 
     It is assumed in this example that product information of the air conditioner O 50 D in  FIG. 168  is to be registered to the first server O 101 . 
     Here, the processing until when the first server O 101  receives data including product ID and service ID from the mobile device O 60  is the same as the processing described previously, and therefore is not explained again below. 
     In receiving the product information of the air conditioner O 50 D, the first server O 101  transmits the position information of the air conditioner D 50 D to the second server O 103 . 
     The second server O 103  extracts, from the building coordinate database O 104 , the building coordinate information of  FIG. 169  corresponding to the position information of the air conditioner O 50 D. Then, the second server O 103  transmits the extracted building coordinate information to the first server O 101 . 
     If the product to be registered is a product usually fixed to a wall or somewhere, such as an air conditioner, the first server O 101  compares (a) the position information of the air conditioner that is indicated in the building coordinate information to (b) the position information of the air conditioner that is generated by the mobile device O 60 . If the position information of the air conditioner that is generated by the mobile device O 60  is not close to a wall, the first server O 101  transmits, to the mobile device O 60 , the position information (hereinafter, referred to also as “building coordinate information) of the air conditioner that is indicated in the building coordinate information. 
     In receiving the building coordinate information, the receiving unit O 71  in the mobile device O 60  demodulates the building coordinate information and provides the demodulated information to the building coordinate information output unit O 81 . The building coordinate information output unit  081  determines, based on the building coordinate information and the position information of the air conditioner, that the current position information of the mobile device O 60  is to be corrected. Then, the building coordinate information output unit O 81  provides the building coordinate information to the position information correction unit O 93 . 
     The position information correction unit O 93  corrects the current position information of the mobile device O 60  based on the building coordinate information provided from the building coordinate information output unit O 81 . 
     Next, the mobile device O 60  registers information of the air conditioner O 50 D into the first server O 101  in association with the corrected current position information of the mobile device O 60 . 
     As described above, (a) the position information of the air conditioner that is indicated in the building coordinate information is compared to (b) the position information of the air conditioner that is generated by the mobile device O 60 . Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not (b) the position information of the air conditioner that is generated by the mobile device O 60  is deviated from a correct position. As a result, the position information of the mobile device O 60  can be corrected. 
     It should be noted that it has been described that the first server O 101  receives the building coordinate information from the second server O 103  for the determination. However, the present invention is not limited to the above. For example, it is also possible that the mobile device O 60  obtains the building coordinate information from the second server O 103  before transmitting information to be registered to the first server O 101  and that the mobile device O 60  compares the building coordinate information to the position information of the air conditioner O 50 D to determine whether or not the position information of the mobile device O 60  is to be corrected. 
     Next, the description is given for the processing performed by the mobile device O 60  to correct the position information of the mobile device O 60  by using the accuracy identifier. 
     It is assumed that the product information of the air conditioner O 50 C has already been registered to the first server O 101  and the mobile device O 60  touches the air conditioner O 50 C. 
     When the mobile device O 60  receives, via the antenna O 61 , the product ID O 51 , the first server URL O 52 , the service ID O 53 , and the accuracy identifier O 54  from the RF-ID device O 50  of the air conditioner O 50 C, the RF-ID unit O 62  in the mobile device O 60  demodulates these pieces of information. 
     At this stage, the mobile device O 60  does not know whether the product information of the air conditioner O 50 C has already been registered in the first server O 101 . Therefore, the mobile device O 60  transmits, to the first server O 101 , data including the position information of the mobile device O 60 , the product ID, and the service ID by the product registration processing as described previously. 
     In receiving the data from the mobile device O 60 , the first server O 101  demodulates the received data. 
     If the registered-coordinate information unit O 102  determines that the product information of the air conditioner O 50 C has already been registered, then the first server O 101  generates data including the position information of the air conditioner O 50 C that is registered in the registered-coordinate information unit O 102 , and then transmits the generated data to the mobile device O 60 . 
     When the receiving unit O 71  in the mobile device O 60  receives the position information of the air conditioner O 50 C via the communication antenna O 68 , the receiving unit O 71  demodulates the received position information and provides the demodulated information to the registered-coordinate unit O 82 . 
     The registered-coordinate unit O 82  extracts the position information from the data including the position information of the air conditioner O 50 C, and provides the extracted position information to the determination unit O 83 . 
     The determination unit O 83  determines whether or not the position information received from the registered-coordinate unit O 82  is to be reference coordinates, based on the accuracy identifier O 54  of the RF-ID device O 50  received from the coordinate accuracy identification information O 63 . 
       FIG. 172  illustrates processing performed by the determination unit O 83  based on each accuracy identifier. 
     Regarding the accuracy identifier O 54 , the RF-ID device O 50  is previously assigned with an accuracy identifier for identifying each different product as illustrated in  FIG. 172 . 
     Here, the air conditioner O 50 C is assigned with the accuracy identifier O 54  representing a “high” accuracy. If the determination unit O 83  determines that the position information of the mobile device O 60  is to be corrected, then the determination unit O 83  provides the position information received from the registered-coordinate unit O 82  to the reference coordinate unit O 84 . 
     Here, if the accuracy identifier O 54  represents a “low” accuracy, then the mobile device O 60  determines that it is not necessary to correct the position information of the mobile device O 60 . Then, the mobile device O 60  notifies the determination result to the first server O 101 . The first server stores the new position information of the air conditioner O 50 C into the registered-coordinate information unit. Thereby, the processing is completed. 
     If there is a trigger from the RF-ID detection unit O 75 , the reference coordinate unit O 84  provides the position information received from the registered-coordinate unit O 82  to the position information correction unit O 93 . 
     The position information correction unit O 93  corrects the current position information of the mobile device O 60  based on the position information received from the reference coordinate unit O 84 . 
     Next, the mobile device O 60  notifies the first server O 101  of that the position information is completed. Thereby, the processing is completed. 
     As described above, (a) the position information indicated in the building coordinate information is compared to (b) the position information generated by the mobile device O 60 . Thereby, it is possible to determine whether or not (b) the position information generated by the mobile device O 60  is deviated from a correct position. As a result, the position information of the mobile device O 60  can be corrected, thereby preventing unnecessary updating of the position information. 
     Furthermore, products which are usually not moved from an initial equipped location are designated in a group of products having a high accuracy of the position coordinates. Thereby, reliability of the accuracy can be improved. 
     If even position information of a product in the group having a high accuracy is deviated from a correct position more than predetermined times, it is possible not to correct the position information newly generated by the mobile device O 60 , but to correct the position information registered in the registered-coordinate information unit O 102 . 
     It should be noted that it has been described that the mobile device O 60  determines, based on the accuracy identifier, whether or not the position information is to be corrected. However, the accuracy identifier may be transmitted to the first server O 101  so that the first server O 101  determines the necessity of the correction. 
     Next, the description is given for processing performed by the mobile device O 60  to manage relative positions of the products. 
     Here, product registration is first performed for the TV O 50 A. Then, with reference to the position information of the TV O 50 A as a reference point, relative position information is generated for the BD recorder O 50 B that is registered next. 
     When the mobile device O 60  receives, via the antenna O 61 , the product ID O 51 , the first server URL O 52 , the service ID O 53 , and the accuracy identifier O 54  from the RF-ID device O 50  of the TV O 50 A, the RF-ID unit O 62  in the mobile device O 60  demodulates these pieces of information. The coordinate information sending unit O 79  in the mobile device O 60  provides the recording unit O 80  with the position information determined in detecting the RF-ID device O 50 . 
     In receiving the position information, the recording unit O 80  records the received position information onto the position information storage unit O 73 . 
     After that, in the same product registration processing as described earlier, the mobile device O 60  registers the product information of the TV O 50 A into the first server O 101 . 
     Next, the mobile device O 60  registers product information of the BD recorder O 50 B. 
     When the mobile device O 60  receives, via the antenna O 61 , the product ID O 51 , the first server URL O 52 , the service ID O 53 , and the accuracy identifier O 54  from the RF-ID device O 50  of the BD recorder O 50 B, the RF-ID unit O 62  in the mobile device O 60  demodulates these pieces of information. 
     The coordinate information sending unit O 79  in the mobile device O 60  provides the recording unit O 80  with the position information determined in detecting the RF-ID device O 50  of the BD recorder O 50 B. 
     The recording unit O 80  does not record the position information of the BD recorder O 50 B onto the position information storage unit O 73 , because the position information of the TV O 50 A has already been recorded. 
     In receiving the position information from the coordinate information sending unit O 79 , the relative position calculation unit O 78  obtains the position information of the TV O 50 A from the position information storage unit O 73  via the reproducing unit O 77 . 
     Next, the relative position calculation unit O 78  calculates relative position information of the BD recorder O 50 B which is with respect to a reference position (or a reference point) that is the position information of the TV O 50 A obtained via the reproducing unit O 77 . Then, the relative position calculation unit O 78  stores the calculation result into the position information recording unit. 
     By the above-described processing, it is possible to generate relative position information of a product with reference to a position of a different certain product. 
     It should be noted that it has been described that relative position information is stored in the mobile device (position information storage unit O 73 ). However, the present invention is not limited to the above. It is also possible that the mobile device O 60  transmits relative position information to the first server O 101  that manages the received relative position information in the registered-coordinate information unit O 102 . 
     It should also be noted that it has been described that the position information of the TV O 50 A for which product registration is performed at the first time is set to be the reference position. However, the present invention is not limited to the above. 
     For example, a position predetermined by the user may be set to be the reference point (reference position). For instance, the reference point may be a position of an entrance of a building. If the mobile device O 60  is a remote controller terminal of a TV, a position of the TV may be the reference point. 
       FIGS. 173 and 174  illustrate examples of processing of a 3D map according to the present embodiment. 
     In the present embodiment, the position information storage unit O 73  in the mobile device O 60  holds relative position information. However, the present invention in not limited to the above. For example, the following aspect is also possible. The coordinate information sending unit O 79  in the mobile device O 60  provides position information generated by the mobile device O 60  to the recording unit O 80  every time the position information is generated. The recording unit O 80  thereby records the position information onto the position information storage unit O 73 . The position information storage unit O 73  accumulates the position information generated by the mobile device O 60 . In this aspect, the program execution unit O 65  generates trajectory information of the mobile device O 60  from pieces of the position information accumulated in the position information storage unit O 73 . Thereby, a travel of the mobile device O 60  can be estimated form the trajectory information. 
     It should be noted that it has been described in the present embodiment that the processing of the determination unit O 83  is performed based on the two kinds of accuracy identifiers in  FIG. 172 . However, the present invention is not limited to the above. For example, the following is also possible. Two or more kinds of product classification are set. A threshold value is defined for each kind of the classification to represent a different size of deviation from the position information. Based on the threshold value, the determination unit O 83  determines whether or not to correct the position information of the mobile device O 60 . 
     It should also be noted that the present embodiment may be combined with any other embodiments of the present invention. For example, it is also possible that the function of the communication device M 1101 S according to the eighteenth embodiment is provided to a product having the RF-ID device O 50 , and the 3D map (3D product map) as well as home ID are shared among products within the same house. In this aspect, each product obtains the 3D map beforehand from the mobile device O 60  using the NFC function. 
     It should also be noted that it has been described in the present embodiment that the RF-ID device O 50  is provided to TVs, BD recorders, air conditioners, and the like.  FIG. 176  illustrates a system including products O 50 G to O 50 N each having the RF-ID device O 50 . Each of the products O 50 G to O 50 N also includes a specific small power wireless communication device (for example, ZigBee), which enables the products to directly communicate with each other within a range in which radio waves can be received. It is assumed that each of the products O 50 G to O 50 N has already obtained a 3D map from the mobile device O 60  via the RF-ID device O 50 . The 3D map shows an arrangement of the products O 50 G to O 50 N. Or, for another method, each of the products O 50 G to O 50 N may have the communication antenna O 68  in order to obtain, via the interne, the 3D map showing the product arrangement. 
     The following describes the situation where a product O 50 H transmits data to a product O 50 K by using the specific small power wireless communication device. The specific small power wireless communication device usually operates at a sleep mode in terms of power saving. At the sleep mode, a power source of the specific small power wireless communication device is switched ON or OFF at regular intervals. Here, timings of switching ON or OFF for the products are in synchronization with each other. When the product O 50 H needs to transmit data, the specific small power wireless communication device in the product O 50 H is switched to an awake mode. At the awake mode, the power source of the specific small power wireless communication device is always ON. The product O 50 H examines the 3D map showing the arrangement of the products O 50 G to O 50 N, which has previously been obtained. From the 3D map of the product arrangement, the product O 50 H determines products located between the product O 50 H and the product O 50 K. In this example, a product O 50 J is determined from the 3D map to be a relay product to relay data. 
     The product O 50 H instructs the product O 50 J to switch to the awake mode. The product O 50 H transmits, to the product O 50 J, data addressed to the product O 50 K. When the product O 50 J receives the data addressed to the product O 50 K, the product O 50 J transfers the data to the O 50 K. Then, the product O 50 J is switched to the sleep mode. 
     As described above, using the 3D map, the product O 50 H determines a relay product in order to transmit data, and causes only the determined relay product (product O 50 J) to be switched to the awake mode. Thereby, other products, which do not need to be at the awake mode, do not need to be switched to the awake mode. Without the 3D map, in order to establish a path to the product O 50 K, the product O 50 H needs to cause all products to be switched to search for the path. 
     It should also be noted that the units included in each of the above-described embodiments may be implemented into a Large Scale Integration (LSI) that is typically an integrated circuit. These units may be integrated separately, or a part or all of them may be integrated into a single chip. Here, the integrated circuit is referred to as a LSI, but the integrated circuit can be called an IC, a system LSI, a super LSI or an ultra LSI depending on their degrees of integration. The technique of integrated circuit is not limited to the LSI, and it may be implemented as a dedicated circuit or a general-purpose processor. It is also possible to use a Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) that can be programmed after manufacturing the LSI, or a reconfigurable processor in which connection and setting of circuit cells inside the LSI can be reconfigured. 
     Furthermore, if due to the progress of semiconductor technologies or their derivations, new technologies for integrated circuits appear to be replaced with the LSIs, it is, of course, possible to use such technologies to implement the functional blocks as an integrated circuit. For example, biotechnology and the like can be applied to the above implementation. 
     Twentieth Embodiment 
     The following describes the twentieth embodiment of the present invention. 
       FIG. 176  is a configuration of network environment for apparatus connection setting according to the present embodiment of the present invention. As shown in  FIG. 176 , the present embodiment is home network environment in which various home appliances are connected to a home appliance control device  5000  via a wireless communication device. Here, the various home appliances are, for example, a TV N 10 A, a BD recorder N 10 B, an air conditioner N 10 C, an air conditioner N 10 D, a fire alarm N 10 E, an air conditioner N 10 F, a fire alarm N 10 G, a solar panel H 10 H, a TV N 10 I, and an FF heater  10 K. 
       FIG. 177  is a diagram showing a structure of a network module of an apparatus (home appliance) according to the present embodiment.  FIG. 177  shows a structure of a network module embedded in each of the home appliances shown in  FIG. 176 . This network module includes at least: a first wireless communication unit  5011  capable of performing proximity wireless communication such as the NFC unit; and a second wireless communication unit  5012  capable of performing near field communication such as ZigBee. The first wireless communication unit  5011  includes an antenna unit, an interface unit, a power supply unit, a communication unit, a clock unit, a nonvolatile memory, and the like. The second wireless communication unit  5012  includes an antenna unit, a wireless communication unit, an interface, and the like. The functions of these units are the same as those described earlier. Therefore, they will not be described again below. It should be noted that the network module may further include a CPU, a thermistor, a power supply unit, and the like. 
       FIG. 178  is a functional block diagram of a structure of a home appliance control device  5000  according to the present embodiment. Likewise each of the home appliances as described above, the home appliance control device  5000  includes at least the first wireless communication unit  5021  and the second wireless communication unit  5022 . Furthermore, the home appliance control device  5000  has protocols corresponding to various different manufacturers, such as manufacturers A, B, and C, or various different apparatuses. 
     This is because the home appliances sometimes employ various different protocols at an upper layer  5025  higher than a physical layer  5023  and a MAC layer  5024 , although they employ a standardized common protocol at the physical layer  5023  and the MAC layer  5024 . For example, an apparatus  5026  performs authentication by using NFC, while an apparatus  5027  performs authentication by using buttons. Moreover, the home appliances would employ various near field communication methods, such as BlueTooth and wireless LAN ( 802 . 11 ). In this case, the home appliances employ different protocols even for the physical layer and the MAC layer. Therefore, the home appliances perform operation at these layers in the same manner as the situation where they have different protocols for the upper layer. Therefore, the home appliance control device  5000  can cope with the above situations, if the home appliance control device  5000  has protocols corresponding to various manufacturers and apparatuses as described previously. 
       FIG. 179  is a diagram for explaining a user action for setting a solar panel according to the present embodiment. The solar panel N 10 H according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of panels each of which is capable of communicating with the home appliance control device  5000 . Here, the user is a person who establishes communication connection between the home appliance control device  5000  and the solar panel N 10 H, such as an engineer for setting the solar panel N 10 H or an engineer for setting the home appliance control device  5000 . Hereinafter, the communication device  102  described in the eighteenth embodiment is referred to as a mobile terminal. 
     As shown in (a) in  FIG. 179 , at the beginning, the user near the home appliance control device  5000  switches a mode of the mobile terminal to an apparatus connection mode, and causes the mobile terminal to touch the home appliance control device  5000  (Step “ 1 ”). Here, in the description, “touching” refers to establishing of short-distance communication to perform near field communication. When the user makes the mobile terminal touch the home appliance control device  5000 , the mobile terminal establishes near field communication with the home appliance control device  5000 , and obtains, from the home appliance control device  5000 , a communication ID (such as a MAC address), an apparatus ID (such as a product serial number), and an available communication protocol, information of a server connecting with the home appliance control device  5000 , a cryptography key for a wireless communication path, and the like ((a) in  FIG. 179 ). Here, the communication ID is provided to target home appliance(s) so that the target home appliance(s) can be connected to the home appliance control device  5000 . The apparatus ID is identification necessary for the mobile terminal to perform inquiry to the server. 
     As described above, the home appliance control device  5000  and the mobile terminal exchange information via proximity wireless communication, and establish a safety path between them via the server for a predetermined time period. Here, the safely path is an encrypted communication path including another wireless path such as a path for cellular phones. The safety path via the server is used to update a secret key between the home appliance control device  5000  and the mobile terminal in order to provide the secret key to the home appliance. 
     However, if the effective secret key is issued, for example, on a day-to-day basis, a security strength of the secret key is decreased. Furthermore, if consecutive setting processes are to be performed for the apparatus (home appliance), such as the solar panel N 10 H in  FIG. 179 , which is far from the home appliance control device  5000 , the security strength is further decreased. However, in the present embodiment, a new secret key can be issued merely by pressing a button on the mobile terminal. As a result, it is possible to shorten an effective time period of the secret key, and keep the security strength. In addition, when the mobile terminal keeps issuing new secret keys and also touches a plurality of home appliances to provide them with the secret keys, it is possible to sequentially perform authentication processes between (a) each of the home appliances far from the home appliance control device  5000  and (b) the home appliance control device  5000 . 
     Here, the use of the above method is not limited to the wireless communication paring within a user&#39;s home. For example, the above method can also be used to perform paring between a home appliance in the user&#39;s home and a home appliance in a home of a user&#39;s relative or friend. Thereby, the user can easily perform pairing processing even if the target apparatuses are not in the home. 
     Furthermore, when moving, the mobile terminal can generate position information of the mobile terminal itself by using a six-axis sensor or a GPS. Therefore, the user makes the mobile terminal touch the home appliance control device  5000  (Step “ 1 ”), and moves to the location of the solar panel N 10 H (Steps “ 2 ” to “ 6 ”), and makes the mobile terminal touch the solar panel N 10 H (Step “ 7 ”) and the same time transmits position information of the mobile terminal to the server. Thereby, the server can manage three-dimensional (3D) relative position information of the home appliance control device  5000  (hereinafter, referred to also as a “Smart Energy Gateway (SEG)”) and the solar panel N 10 H. 
       FIG. 180  is a diagram of switching of a mobile terminal screen in setting the solar panel according to the present embodiment.  FIG. 180  shows an example of switching of a mobile terminal screen when the user makes the mobile terminal touch the first panel of the solar panel N 10 H. 
     As shown in  FIG. 180 , at the beginning, when the user makes the mobile terminal touch the first panel (solar panel No.  1 ) of the solar panel N 10 H (Step “ 1 ”), the mobile terminal starts connecting the first panel (solar panel No.  1 ) to the home appliance control device  5000  (SEG) or the server. More specifically, from the first panel (solar panel No.  1 ), the mobile terminal obtains information such as an apparatus ID of the solar panel N 10 H or a communication protocol, or a product sever address of a manufacturer of the solar panel N 10 H. Based on the obtained information, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the first panel (solar panel No.  1 ) is capable of communicating with the home appliance control device  5000  or the server. The information may be sent to the server and the determination may be made by any one of the server and the mobile terminal. If the obtained communication protocol enables communication between the first panel (solar panel No.  1 ) and the home appliance control device  5000  or the server, then the mobile terminal performs setting for connection between the first panel (solar panel No.  1 ) and the home appliance control device  5000  or the server by using the communication ID. On the other hand, if the obtained communication protocol does not enable the communication, then the mobile terminal may download firmware from the server to update the firmware by proximity wireless communication, or may instruct the home appliance control device  5000  (SEG) to update the firmware. 
     As described above, the mobile terminal performs authentication between the first panel (solar panel No.  1 ) and the home appliance control device  5000  (SEG) or the server. For example, as shown in  FIG. 180 , the first panel (solar panel No.  1 ) obtains a net ID (for example,  0019 ) to perform authentication with the home appliance control device  5000  (SEG) or the server. 
     If the solar panel is an apparatus (home appliance) that cannot be set automatically by proximity wireless communication, the user performs the setting for the solar panel by hands, and requests the home appliance control device  5000  to transmit a signal of setting completion to the mobile terminal, so that the mobile terminal can confirm the setting completion. Furthermore, if the solar panel N 10 H is an apparatus (home appliance) that can be set by simultaneously pressing a setting button of a terminal and a button of the home appliance control device  5000 , the setting button of the mobile terminal and the button of the home appliance control device  5000  are cooperated with each other via a safety path to perform the setting by the simultaneous button pressing. It is assumed that these setting methods are assumed to be automatically downloaded to the mobile terminal from both the home appliance control device  5000  (SEG) and the home appliance. Thereby, the user can instantly complete the setting by using an optimum method among them. 
       FIG. 181  is a diagram of switching of a mobile terminal screen in subsequent authentication of the solar panel according to the present embodiment. The other solar panels subsequent to the first solar panel can basically perform the authentication in the same manner employed by the first solar panel. For example, the secret key is re-issued for the other solar panels, so that the other solar panels can sequentially perform the authentication. In addition, registration of relative positions of the respective solar panels onto the server makes it possible to display, on a screen of the mobile terminal (remote controller) or TV via the server, video by which the user can see actions for the panels at once. 
       FIG. 182  is a diagram of a screen of the mobile terminal in checking energy production of a target solar panel according to the present embodiment. As shown in  FIG. 182 , the mobile terminal can display an energy state of a target solar panel on a screen of the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal displays positions and energy production of the respective panels of the solar panel N 10 H simultaneously or alternately. Therefore, the user can lean how much energy is produced by each of the panels. 
       FIG. 183  is a diagram of a screen of the mobile terminal in checking a trouble of a solar panel according to the present embodiment. For example, in the case where the mobile terminal displays a temperature of each panel of the solar panel, a temperature is generally abnormal if a panel is in a trouble. Therefore, combination of such temperature information and position information of each panel allows the user to instantly learn a panel in trouble. As a result, it is possible to promptly repair the panel in trouble. In addition, if the trouble is notified to a repair shop via the server, it is possible to automatically request the repair. 
       FIGS. 184 to 188  are a flowchart of processing performed by the mobile terminal in setting the solar panel. 
     At the beginning, when the solar panel is to be set, the user sets an apparatus connection mode of the mobile terminal (Step S 5081 ). 
     Next, the mobile terminal displays “Please make the mobile terminal touch (be close to) the home appliance control device” (Step S 5082 ), and starts polling by proximity wireless communication. Then, the user makes the mobile terminal touch the home appliance control device  5000  (a parent device or a solar panel controller) (Step S 5083 ). Here, the mobile terminal repeats the polling until the user makes the mobile terminal touch the home appliance control device  5000 . The repeating times out when a predetermined time period has passed without the touch. Furthermore, if the home appliance control device  5000  is at a sleep mode so that a part of circuits in the home appliance control device  5000  is not activated, the touch of the mobile terminal activates the home appliance control device  5000 . 
     Next, the mobile terminal changes a current mode to a mode for “setting of connection to another apparatus”, and downloads a connection setting program corresponding to the home appliance control device  5000  from the server (Step S 5085 ). 
     More specifically, the mobile terminal performs (1) cryptographic communication, and (2) obtainment of an apparatus ID, a communication ID (MAC address, NFC-ID, or the like), an available communication protocol, a version of the communication protocol, and a sever address regarding the home appliance control device  5000 , by the proximity wireless communication (NFC) or the like. Next, the mobile terminal connects to the server having the obtained sever address, and performs cryptographic communication with the server. More specifically, the mobile terminal is connected to the server, changes a current mode to a mode for “setting of connection to another apparatus”, and downloads a connection setting program corresponding to the home appliance control device  5000  from the server. Here, if the version of the communication protocol is old, a new version of the communication protocol is downloaded from the server to perform version-up. 
     Next, the mobile terminal displays “Please touch a target apparatus to be connected within one hour” (Step S 5086 ). More specifically, since the setting mode at Step S 5085  is effective for a predetermined time period, the mobile terminal displays a notice to request the user to perform the touching within the predetermined time period. 
     Next, the mobile terminal measures a distance between the mobile terminal and the home appliance control device  5000  (SEG) (S 5087 ). 
     More specifically, the user having seen the display at S 5086  brings the mobile terminal to a location of a target apparatus to be connected. Here, the mobile terminal measures a position (relative position) of the mobile terminal with respect to the position of the home appliance control device  5000  on a 3D space by using the angular velocity sensor, the acceleration sensor, the geomagnetic sensor, the GPS, and the like, and thereby calculates a 3D movement locus and coordinates of the moved position of the mobile terminal. Thereby, the mobile terminal can measure a distance from the home appliance control device  5000  (SEG). Here, the calculation may be performed by the server, not by the mobile terminal. In this case, the mobile terminal transmits the measured data to the server. Then, the server uses the data to calculate a 3D movement locus and coordinates of the moved position of the mobile terminal, and thereby measures a distance between the mobile terminal and the home appliance control device  5000  (SEG). 
     Here, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the traveling time or the distance is long for the user (Step S 5088 ). If it is determined that the traveling time or the distance is short (No at Step S 5088 ), then the mobile terminal provides a secret key issued by the home appliance control device  5000  to the target home appliance when the mobile terminal touches the home appliance. 
     On the other hand, if it is determined that the traveling time or the distance is long (Yes at Step S 5088 ), then the mobile terminal temporarily turns the setting mode OFF (Step S 5089 ). Then, when the position information of the mobile terminal becomes close to the position information of the apparatus, the mobile terminal turns the setting mode ON again (Step S 5091 ) and is connected to the server to request the home appliance control device  5000  to re-issue the secrete key. 
     Next, the mobile terminal communicates with the home appliance control device  5000 , and thereby records (a) the number of home appliances for which the mobile terminal has provided pieces of setting information to the home appliance control device  5000 , (b) the number of setting completions actually performed by the home appliance control device  5000  based on the pieces of setting information, and (c) numeral numbers assigned to the respective setting completions (Step S 5092 , Step S 5093 ). Thereby, the home appliance control device  5000  can confirm whether or not unconformity occurs after authorization with the plurality of mobile terminals. 
     Next, the mobile terminal performs proximity wireless communication with the n-th apparatus (solar panel, for example) (Step S 5094 ). More specifically, the user makes the antenna unit of the mobile terminal touch an antenna unit of the n-th apparatus to perform proximity wireless communication with the n-th apparatus. 
     Then, the mobile terminal reads information from the memory of the n-th apparatus via NFC (Step S 5095 ). More specifically, the mobile terminal reads, from the memory of the n-th apparatus, NFC-ID, a MAC address, a manufacturer ID, standard, version, and protocol of the wireless communication, a manufacturer name, a product name, a model number, an error, and/or a history. Here, the mobile terminal may transmit the readout information to the server. 
     Next, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the home appliance control device  5000  and the n-th apparatus (solar panel, for example) can communicate with each other (Step S 5096 ). Here, in the case where the mobile terminal transmits the readout information to the server at Step S 5095 , the server may determine whether or not the home appliance control device  5000  and the n-th apparatus (solar panel, for example) can communicate with each other. 
     Next, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the home appliance control device  5000  and the n-th apparatus have respective different communication protocols (Step S 5097 ). 
     If it is determined that the home appliance control device  5000  and the n-th apparatus have the same communication protocol (No at Step S 5097 ), then the mobile terminal further determines whether or not the communication protocol of the n-th apparatus is old (Step S 5098 ). Then, if it is determined that the communication protocol of the n-th apparatus is old (Yes at Step S 5098 ), then the mobile terminal downloads a new version of the communication protocol from the server and performs version-up of the communication protocol of the n-th apparatus by proximity wireless communication (Step S 5099 ). 
     On the other hand, at Step S 5097 , if it is determined that the home appliance control device  5000  and the n-th apparatus have different communication protocols (Yes at Step S 5097 ), then the mobile terminal downloads, from the server, data of a communication protocol corresponding to the n-th apparatus or the home appliance control device  5000  (Step S 5101 ), and installs the communication protocol data onto the home appliance control device  5000 . 
     More specifically, the mobile terminal downloads the communication protocol data corresponding to the n-th apparatus from the server. When the user makes the mobile terminal touch the home appliance control device  5000 , the mobile terminal installs, onto the home appliance control device  5000  via NFC, the new protocol by which the home appliance control device  5000  can communicate with the n-th apparatus. Here, the mobile terminal may perform the installation via the Internet such as wireless LAN. 
     It is also possible at Step S 5097  that the mobile terminal issues instructions to the home appliance control device  5000  to download the communication protocol data corresponding to the n-th apparatus, so that the new protocol, by which the home appliance control device  5000  can communicate with the n-th apparatus, is installed onto the home appliance control device  5000 . 
     Next, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the new protocol, by which the home appliance control device  5000  can communicate with the n-th apparatus, has already been installed onto the home appliance control device  5000  (Step S 5102 ). 
     If the installation has not yet been completed due to, for example, error occurred during a process from the downloading to the installation (No at Step S 5012 ), then the Steps S 5101  and S 5102  are repeated. On the other hand, if the installation has already been completed (Yes at Step S 5102 ), then the user inputs (presses) a switch (button) of the mobile terminal for “start of connection between the home appliance control device  5000  and the apparatus”. 
     Next, the mobile terminal detects that the switch (button) for “start of connection between the home appliance control device and the apparatus” is inputted (pressed) (Step S 5103 ). 
     Next, the mobile terminal issues a secret key (with expiration) (Step S 5104 ). It should be noted that the issue of the secret key (with expiration) is not necessarily performed by the mobile terminal. The home appliance control device  5000  (hereinafter, referred to also as a “SEG”) or the server may issue the secret key. 
     Next, the mobile terminal transmits the issued secret key to the home appliance control device (SEG) (Step S 5105 ). It should be noted that the mobile terminal may transmit not only the secret key but also a network ID or MAC address of the n-th apparatus, to the home appliance control device (SEG). Typically, the mobile terminal transmits the secret keys and the like to the home appliance control device (SEG) via the server on the Internet or via Intranet such as wireless LAN. 
     Next, the mobile terminal transmits the secret key and a transmission instruction to the n-th apparatus by NFC (Step S 5106 ). 
     Here, it is also possible that the mobile terminal transmits, to the n-th apparatus, a network ID or MAC address of the home appliance control device (SEG) as well as the secret key and the transmission instruction. 
       FIG. 187  shows processing in mutual authentication between the home appliance control device (SEG) and the n-th apparatus. 
     At the beginning, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the n-th apparatus (solar panel, for example) and the home appliance control device (SEG) communicate with each other directly by short-distance wireless communication (ZigBee, for example) (Step S 5110 ). 
     If the communication is performed directly (Yes at Step S 5110 ), then the mobile terminal changes a radio strength of the short-distance wireless communication according to a distance L between the n-th apparatus and the home appliance control device (SEG), in order to increase security as well as energy saving (Step S 5111 ). Here, if the distance L or an obstacle in the communication is large, the mobile terminal presents the user with a screen display for recommending the user to perform communication between the n-th apparatus and the home appliance control device (SEG) via a relay device that will be described later. 
     Next, the home appliance control device (SEG) and the n-th apparatus authenticate each other (mutual authentication) (Step S 5112 ). 
     Next, the home appliance control device (SEG) transmits the authentication result to the mobile terminal via the server (Step S 5113 ). Here, it is also possible that the user makes the mobile terminal touch the n-th apparatus, so that the mobile terminal obtains the authentication result from the n-th apparatus (Step S 5115 ). It is further possible at Step S 5115  that the authentication result is displayed on the n-th apparatus by illumination or the like so that the user learns the authentication result. 
     If the authentication fails (No at Step S 5114 , No at Step S 5116 ), the processing returns to the step of key issuing. 
     Next, the mobile terminal determines whether or not connection authentication of the n-th apparatus, in other words, authentication of connection between the n-th apparatus and the home appliance control device (SEG) has already been completed (Step S 5117 ). 
     Next, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the n-th apparatus is a final apparatus to be connected (Step S 5118 ). 
     If the n-th apparatus is a final apparatus to be connected, in other words, connection authentication has been performed for all of target apparatuses (Yes at Step S 5118 ), then the mobile terminal notifies the server of that connection authentication has been performed for all of target apparatuses, and then releases the connection mode and completes the processing. 
     On the other hand, if the n-th apparatus is not a final apparatus to be connected (No at Step S 5118 ), then the mobile terminal performs processing shown in  FIG. 188  to perform connection authentication for a next target apparatus (the (n+1)th apparatus). 
     More specifically, the mobile terminal is moved to a location of the next (n+1)th apparatus (Step S 5119 ), and obtains physically relative or absolute 3D position information of the mobile terminal (Step S 5121 ). 
     Then, the mobile terminal displays, on the screen of the mobile terminal, 2D or 3D image information or coordinate information which indicates pieces of 2D or 3D position information of the first to the (n+1)th apparatuses (Step S 5122 ). 
     As described above, when the mobile terminal performs the above-described setting for a plurality of apparatuses, the mobile terminal displays, on the screen of the mobile terminal, pieces of the position information of the apparatuses. At S 5121 , the mobile terminal may transmit the obtained pieces of physically relative or absolute 3D position information, to the server. In this case, the server maps arrangement relationships of the n-th and (n+1)th apparatuses (panels in the solar panel, for example) onto a 3D space. It is also possible that the server transmits, to the mobile terminal, the 2D or 3D image information or coordinate information which indicates pieces of 2D or 3D position information of the first to the (n+1)th apparatuses, and the mobile terminal thereby displays the transmitted information on the screen of the mobile terminal. 
     If the screen display of the image information or coordinate information has been completed (Yes at Step S 5123 ), then the mobile terminal returns to S 5093  in  FIG. 185  and repeats the processing. On the other hand, if the screen display has not yet been completed (No at Step S 5123 ), then the processing repeats from S 5121 . 
       FIG. 189  is a flowchart of processing of equipping the solar panel according to the present embodiment. In receiving sunshine, solar panels produce DC high power, causing dangerous arc discharge. Therefore, prior to setting of a solar panel, it is preferable that a light-blocking sheet  5202  is covered on the solar panel in order to prevent power production. Furthermore, until communication setting has been completed, it is preferable to keep the light-blocking sheet being covered for safety. However, in the situation where a target panel of the solar panel is covered with the light-blocking sheet, it is difficult to know where the communication IC is on the target panel. Therefore, a mark indicating an antenna unit of proximity wireless communication is printed on a part of the light-blocking sheet which is located on the same position of the antenna unit. In performing communication setting for the target panel, the mobile terminal touches the mark on the light-blocking sheet. After completing the communication setting, the light-blocking sheet is removed. Therefore, the communication setting is performed by touching, while ensuring safety. 
     More specifically, at the beginning, a light-blocking sheet is removed from the n-th panel of the solar panel (Step S 5201 f), then it is examined whether or not the n-th panel is normal (Step S 5201 g). In more detail, the mobile terminal or a controller  5203 c such as the above-described home appliance control device (SEG) receives, from a communication IC  5203 e of the n-th panel, information of a voltage, a current, and a temperature of the n-th panel, thereby performing the above-described checking. For example, the controller  5203 c checks a total energy production of the n-th panel in order to check whether or not the n-th panel is normal. Then, the controller  5203 c transmits the check result to the mobile terminal via the Internet or an Intranet. 
     Thereby, it is possible to check whether or not each of the panels in the solar panel N 10 H is normal. 
     Here, as shown in  FIG. 189 , the communication IC  5203 e includes a wireless IC such as ZigBee and a communication IC  5203 f such as NFC. The communication IC  5203 e is shielded and is not connected to the outside except a power supply line  5203 a. Therefore, the communication IC  5203 e has a long life of about thirty years, satisfying long life requirement. Furthermore, the controller  5203 c such as the home appliance control device (SEG) receives instructions from the server  5203 d, and therefore the controller  5203 c causes a power supply unit  5203 b to supply power to the communication IC  5203 e, for several tens of seconds, several times per hour, in order to intermittently apply a voltage. As a result, a duty cycle of about 1/100 is achieved. Therefore, the communication ICs embedded on the solar panel are hardly deteriorated. As a result, the communication ICs can ensure a longer life in comparison to the method by which a voltage is constantly applied. 
     The following describes an example of Step S 5097  in  FIG. 186  in the case where the home appliance control device (SEG) and the apparatus are manufactured by different manufacturers or have different protocols, with reference to  FIG. 190 . 
       FIG. 190  is a flowchart of processing of connecting the apparatus to the home appliance control device (SEG), in the case where the home appliance control device (SEG) and the apparatus are manufactured by different manufacturers or have different protocols. 
     Hereinafter, the home appliance control device (SEG) is referred to also as a “controller”. 
     At the beginning, at Step S 5201 a, a mode of the mobile terminal is set to a reading mode. 
     Next, at Step S 5201 b, the mobile terminal touches the home appliance control device (SEG) in order to establish proximity wireless communication with the home appliance control device (SEG). 
     Then, at Step S 5201 c, the mobile terminal reads, from the home appliance control device (SEG), various pieces of data of the home appliance control device (SEG) such as a manufacturer name, an apparatus ID, a product number, and a sever address. 
     Next, at Step S 5201 d, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the sever address is obtained from the home appliance control device (SEG). If the determination at Step S 5201 d is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5201 e. 
     Next, at Step S 5201 e, the mobile terminal accesses the sever address to be connected to the server at Step S 5201 f. If the connection is successful (Yes at Step S 5201 f), then the processing proceeds to Step S 5201 i in  FIG. 188 . 
     On the other hand, if the determination is No at Step S 5201 d or Step S 5201 f, the processing proceeds to Step S 5201 g. More specifically, at Step S 5201 g, the mobile terminal accesses the sever address of the manufacturer or the product number of the home appliance control device (SEG). 
     Next, at Step S 5201 h, the mobile terminal displays, on its menu screen, the manufacturer or the product number of the home appliance control device (SEG). 
     Then, the user confirms the manufacturer or the product number of the home appliance control device (SEG) on the menu screen, thereby selecting the home appliance control device (SEG) to be communicate with a target apparatus. 
     In receiving the user&#39;s selection, the mobile terminal proceeds to Step S 5201 i in  FIG. 191 . 
     The following describes a method of performing version-up of software in the home appliance control device (SEG) with reference to  FIG. 191 . 
     At the beginning, at Step S 5201 i, the mobile terminal displays an initial menu. Then, from the initial menu, the user selects a menu for connecting the home appliance control device (SEG) to a new target apparatus (for example, the n-th panel in the solar panel N 10 H). 
     Next, at Step S 5201 k, the mobile terminal determines whether or not there is a new version of software or firmware of the home appliance control device (SEG). 
     If it is determined that there is a new version of software or firmware of the home appliance control device (SEG) (Yes at Step S 5201 k), then the processing proceeds to Step S 5201 m. At Step S 5201 m, the mobile terminal downloads the new version form the server. Then, the mobile terminal displays, on its screen, an “Installation” button for starting installation. 
     Next, at Step S 5201 n, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the user selects the “Installation” button. If it is determined that the user selects the “Installation” button (Yes at Step S 5201 n), then at Step S 5201 p, the mobile terminal performs version-up of the software or firmware for the home appliance control device (SEG) after performing authentication between the home appliance control device (SEG) and the server. Then, the processing proceeds to Step S 5201 q in  FIG. 192 . Here, the version-up for the home appliance control device (SEG) may be performed not by the mobile terminal, but by the home appliance control device (SEG) instructed by the mobile terminal. 
     If the determination at Step S 5201 k is No, in other words, there is no new version of the software or firmware of the home appliance control device (SEG), or if the determination at Step S 5201 n is No, in other words, the user does not select the “Installation” button on the mobile terminal, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5202 q in  FIG. 193 . 
       FIG. 192  is a flowchart of processing of installing a new-version software onto the home appliance control device (SEG) according to the present embodiment. 
     At the beginning, at Step S 5201 q, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the home appliance control device (SEG) is connected to the server. If it is determined that the home appliance control device (SEG) is connected to the server (Yes at Step S 5201 q), then at Step S 5201 t, the mobile terminal performs authentication between the home appliance control device (SEG) and the server. 
     Next, if the authentication between the home appliance control device (SEG) and the server has been completed, then at Step S 5202 a, the mobile terminal causes the home appliance control device (SEG) to download a new-version software from the server to install it. 
     Next, at Step S 5202 b, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the installation has been completed. If it is determined that the installation has been completed (Yes at Step S 5202 b), then the processing proceeds to Step S 5202 g in  FIG. 193 . On the other hand, if the installation has not been completed at Step S 5202 b, the processing returns to Step S 5201 t. 
     On the other hand, if it is determined that the home appliance control device (SEG) is not connected to the server (No at Step S 5201 q), then at Step S 5201 r, the mobile terminal downloads the new-version software from the server. 
     Next, at Step S 5201 s, it is determined whether or not the downloading has been completed. If it is determined that the downloading has been completed (Yes at Step S 5201 s), then at Step S 5202 c, the mobile terminal displays “Please touch home appliance control device (SEG) for m seconds.” 
     Next, at Step S 5202 d, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal has established proximity wireless communication with the home appliance control device (SEG). 
     Next, if it is determined that the mobile terminal has established proximity wireless communication with the home appliance control device (SEG) (Yes at S 5202 d), in other words, if the mobile terminal touches the antenna unit of the home appliance control device (SEG), then at Step S 5202 e, the mobile terminal transmits the new-version software to the home appliance control device (SEG) by using the proximity wireless communication (direct NFC) or the like, and causes the home appliance control device (SEG) to install the software. 
     On the other hand, if it is not confirmed that the mobile terminal has established proximity wireless communication with the home appliance control device (SEG) (No at S 5202 d), then the processing returns to Step S 5202 c. 
     Next, at Step S 5202 e, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the home appliance control device (SEG) has completed the installation. If it is determined that the installation has been completed (Yes at Step S 5202 f), then the processing proceeds to Step S 5202 g in  FIG. 193 . 
     On the other hand, if the home appliance control device (SEG) has not completed the installation (No at Step S 5202 f), then the processing proceeds to Step S 5202 c. 
     The following describes a flow in the case where a version of the software of the home appliance control device (SEG) is the latest one and the home appliance control device (SEG) previously holds information of a target apparatus to be connected, with reference to  FIG. 193 . 
       FIG. 193  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus, according to the present embodiment. 
     At the beginning, at Step S 5202 g, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the home appliance control device (SEG) is connected to the server. 
     If the determination at Step S 5202 g is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5202 h. At Step S 5202 h, the mobile terminal is connected to the home appliance control device (SEG) via the server. On the other hand, if the determination at Step S 5202 g is No, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5202 i. At Step S 5202 i, the mobile terminal is connected to the home appliance control device (SEG) via a wireless Intranet such as a wireless LAN or ZigBee. 
     Next, at Step S 5202 j, on the menu screen or the like of the mobile terminal, the mode of the mobile terminal is set to an “apparatus connection mode”. Thereby, the mobile terminal displays, for example, “What is a manufacturer name of the target apparatus to be connected?” 
     Next, at Step S 5202 k, if a manufacturer name, a model number, or a product number of the target apparatus to be connected (an air conditioner, a washing machine, a TV, a recorder, or the like) is known (Yes at Step S 5202 k), then the user selects or inputs the manufacturer name, the model number, or the product number on the screen of the mobile terminal. 
     Thereby, at Step S 5202 m, the mobile terminal transmits the input data to the server. Then, the server examines protocol information, such as communication standard, middleware, and an application program, of the target apparatus, based on the apparatus information provided from the mobile terminal. 
     Next, at Step S 5202 p, the server determines whether or not the home appliance control device (SEG) and the target apparatus can normally communicate with each other by using their communication protocols. If the determination at Step S 5202 p is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 e in  FIG. 195 . 
     Referring back to Step S 5202 k, if the determination at Step S 5202 k is No, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 e in  FIG. 195 . If the determination at Step S 5202 p is No, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5202 q in  FIG. 194 . 
     The following explains  FIG. 194 .  FIG. 194  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus, according to the present embodiment. 
     At the beginning, at Step S 5202 q, the server searches for a new-version communication protocol (physical layer, middleware, application layer) and transmits the searched-out new-version communication protocol to the mobile terminal or the home appliance control device (SEG). 
     Next, at Step S 5202 r, the mobile terminal displays “Do you wish to download a new-version communication protocol?” 
     Next, at Step S 5202 s, the mobile terminal detects whether or not an OK button displayed on its screen is pressed, thereby determining whether or not to download the new-version communication protocol. If the determination at Step S 5202 s is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5202 u. Otherwise (No at Step  5202 s), the processing proceeds to Step S 5202 t. At Step S 5202 t, the mobile terminal displays “The home appliance control device (SEG) cannot be connected to this apparatus to communicate.” 
     Next, at Step S 5202 u, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the home appliance control device (SEG) is connected to the server and data of the communication protocol is large. 
     If the determination at Step S 5202 u is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 a. At Step S 5203 a, the mobile terminal starts communication between the home appliance control device (SEG) and the target apparatus. More specifically, the mobile terminal transmits an installation instruction, a cryptographic communication key, and authentication data directly to the home appliance control device (SEG). Thereby, within a predetermined time period set by the server, the home appliance control device (SEG) downloads, from the server, communication protocol necessary for communication with the target apparatus. As a result, communication between the home appliance control device (SEG) and the target apparatus starts. 
     Next, at Step S 5203 b, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the communication between the home appliance control device (SEG) and the target apparatus is successful. If the communication is successful at Step S 5203 b, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 e in  FIG. 195 . Otherwise, the processing returns to Step S 5202 r. 
     Referring back to Step S 5202 u, if the determination at Step  55202 u is No, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 c. At Step S 5203 c, the mobile terminal transmits the downloaded communication protocol to the home appliance control device (SEG), and causes the home appliance control device (SEG) to install the communication protocol. More specifically, the mobile terminal temporarily downloads the communication protocol from the user, and shares a cryptography key with the home appliance control device (SEG) after mutual authentication between the home appliance control device (SEG) and the server. Then, the mobile terminal transmits the downloaded communication protocol to the home appliance control device (SEG) by direct NFC or the like, and causes the home appliance control device (SEG) to install the communication protocol. 
     Next, at Step S 5203 d, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the home appliance control device (SEG) has installed the communication protocol. If it is determined at Step S 5203 d that the installation is successful, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 e in  FIG. 195 . Otherwise, the processing returns to Step S 5202 u. 
     The following explains  FIG. 195 .  FIG. 195  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus, according to the present embodiment. 
     At the beginning, at Step S 5203 e, the mobile terminal determines whether or on the user selects a mode for performing “connection setting for a new apparatus”. 
     If the determination at Step S 5203 e is Yes, then at Step S 5203 f, the mobile terminal establishes cryptographic communication with the home appliance control device (SEG). More specifically, when the user makes the mobile terminal touch the home appliance control device (SEG), the mobile terminal establishes cryptographic communication with the home appliance control device (SEG). Here, the cryptographic communication refers to cryptographic communication via the Internet or via a home network such as wireless LAN, except NFC. 
     Next, at Step S 5203 g, the mobile terminal displays “Please move to the location of the apparatus within n minutes.” 
     Next, at Step S 5203 h, the operator (user) sees the display on the screen of the mobile terminal, and thereby starts the moving. More specifically, the mobile terminal starts moving by the operator (user), and the processing proceeds to S 5203 i in  FIG. 196 . 
     If the determination at Step S 5203 e is No, then the processing tries Step S 5203 e again. 
     The following describes 3D mapping with reference to  FIG. 196 .  FIG. 196  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus, according to the present embodiment. 
     At the beginning, at Step S 5203 i, the mobile terminal obtains relative 3D coordinate information of a position of the mobile terminal with respect to the home appliance control device (SEG). More specifically, the mobile terminal measures 3D changes of the position of the mobile terminal with respect to a position of the home appliance control device (SEG), by using at least one of the angular sensor, the geomagnetism sensor, and the acceleration sensor. Then, the mobile terminal generates the relative 3D coordinate information with respect to the home appliance control device (SEG). 
     Next, at Step S 5203 j, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal has reached the target apparatus. More specifically, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal has reached the target apparatus, such as the air conditioner on the first floor, the air conditioner on the second floor, the microwave on the first floor, the washing machine on the first floor, the TV on the first floor, or the recorder on the first floor. If the determination at Step S 5203 j is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 k. Otherwise (No at Step S 5203 j), the processing returns to Step S 5203 i. 
     Next, at Step S 5203 k, the operator (user) determines whether or not the apparatus at which the mobile terminal has reached includes the first wireless communication unit (NFC, for example), the first antenna unit, and the like. If the determination at Step S 5203  is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 n. At Step S 5203 n, the operator (user) makes the mobile terminal touch the first antenna unit of the apparatus to establish proximity wireless communication between the mobile terminal and the apparatus. At Step S 5203 p, the mobile terminal reads information regarding the apparatus from the apparatus and transmits the information to the server. More specifically, the mobile terminal reads a MAC address and a network ID of the apparatus, and transmits them to the server. 
     Next, at Step S 5203 g, the mobile terminal transmits 3D coordinate information of the position of the apparatus to the server. 
     Next, at Step S 5203 r, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the apparatus and the home appliance control device (SEG) have the same communication protocol. If the determination at Step S 5203 r is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 s. Otherwise (No at Step S 5203 r), the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 z. At Step S 5203 z, the mobile terminal performs the change routine for the communication protocol of the home appliance control device (SEG) as described above, and the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 s. 
     Here, the operator (user) presses, for example, a connection start button to start connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) and the apparatus. 
     Next, at Step S 5203 t, the mobile terminal issues a secret key (with expiration), and transmits the secret key as well as a transmission instruction to the apparatus by proximity wireless communication such as NFC. Here, the mobile terminal transmits the secret key also to the home appliance control device (SEG). It should be noted that the secret key may be issued not by the mobile terminal but by the server. 
     Next, at Step S 5203 u, the mobile terminal causes the home appliance control device (SEG) and the apparatus to start authentication between them. Here, if the home appliance control device (SEG) and the apparatus communicate directly to each other, then the mobile terminal determines that the home appliance control device (SEG) and the apparatus start the authentication. If it is determined at Step S 5203 x that the authentication has been completed, the connection is completed. On the other hand, if the authentication has not been completed at Step S 5203 x, the processing returns to Step  55203 n. 
     Referring back to Step S 5203 k, if the determination at Step S 5203 k is No (if NFC communication fails), then the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 l. At Step S 52031 , information of the apparatus, such as a manufacturer name, a product name, a product model number, and a product serial number, are read by a bar-code reader of the mobile terminal (or by user&#39;s eyes) to input them into the mobile terminal. Then, at Step S 5203 n, the mobile terminal transmits the input data (the information of the apparatus) to the server, and the processing proceeds to Step S 5204 a in  FIG. 197 . 
     The following explains  FIG. 197 .  FIG. 197  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus, according to the present embodiment. 
     At the beginning, at Step S 5204 a, based on the information of the apparatus which has been provided from the mobile terminal, the server examines protocol information of the apparatus and protocol information of the home appliance control device (SEG). Examples of the protocol information are a communication standard, a middleware, and an application program. At Step S 5204 b, the server determines whether or not the home appliance control device (SEG) and the target apparatus can normally communicate with each other by using their communication protocols. 
     If the determination at Step S 5204 b is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 c in  FIG. 194 . If the determination at Step S 5204 b is No, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5204 c. At Step S 5204 c, the server searches for a version of communication protocol (physical layer, middleware, application layer) of the home appliance control device (SEG) which is suitable for communication with the target apparatus. 
     Next, at Step S 5204 d, the mobile terminal displays “Do you wish to download communication protocol suitable for the target apparatus?” 
     Next, at Step S 5204 e, the mobile terminal detects whether or not the OK button displayed on the screen is pressed, thereby determining whether or not to download a new-version communication protocol. If the determination at Step S 5204 e is Yes, the processing proceeds to Step S 5204 g in  FIG. 198 . Otherwise (No at Step S 5204 e), then at Step S 5204 f, the mobile terminal displays “The home appliance control device (SEG) cannot communicate with this apparatus.” 
     The following explains  FIG. 198 .  FIG. 198  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus, according to the present embodiment. 
     At the beginning, at Step S 5204 g, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the home appliance control device (SEG) is connected to the server. If the determination at Step S 5204 g is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5204 h. At Step S 5204 h, the mobile terminal further determines whether or not the mobile terminal can perform cryptographic communication with the home appliance control device (SEG). More specifically, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal can perform cryptographic communication with the home appliance control device (SEG) via the Internet or a wireless home network (except NFC). 
     If it is determined at Step S 5204 h that the cryptographic communication is possible, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5204 i. At Step S 5204 i, the mobile terminal installs, onto the home appliance control device (SEG), a communication protocol necessary to be connected to the target apparatus. More specifically, the mobile terminal transmits an installation instruction, a cryptographic communication key, authentication data, and the like to the home appliance control device (SEG) via the Internet or via an intranet such as a wireless LAN within a predetermined time period. The communication protocol necessary for communication with the target apparatus is downloaded from the mobile terminal or the server to the home appliance control device (SEG). Thereby, the mobile terminal causes the home appliance control device (SEG) to install the communication protocol necessary for communication with the target apparatus. 
     Next, at Step S 5204 j, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the communication protocol has been installed on the home appliance control device (SEG). If it is determined at Step S 5204 j that the installation is successful, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5204 k. At S 5204 k, the apparatus and the home appliance control device (SEG) perform wireless communication except NFC with each other by using optimum communication protocol, thereby starting authentication process. Here, the home appliance control device (SEG) and the apparatus can calculate a distance and obstacles between them, based on 3D coordinate information of their positions and 3D structure information of the building, so that they can set optimum minimum signal output according to the calculation result. 
     Next, at Step S 5204 m, the mobile terminal displays a notice to persuade the user to issue instructions to the apparatus to start connection, such as “Start of connection is possible.” or “Please press the OK button and the apparatus connection start button within m seconds.” 
     On the other hand, if the determination at Step S 5204 g or Step S 5204 h is No, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5205 a. At Step S 5205 a, the mobile terminal displays “Please move and touch the home appliance control device (SEG)”. More specifically, the mobile terminal is moved to the location of the home appliance control device (SEG), and displays “Please touch the home appliance control device (SEG)”. Next, at Step S 5205 b, the mobile terminal establishes proximity wireless communication with the home appliance control device (SEG). More specifically, when the operator (user) moves to the home appliance control device (SEG) and makes the mobile terminal touch the home appliance control device (SEG), the mobile terminal establishes proximity wireless communication with the home appliance control device (SEG). Then, the processing proceeds to Step S 5203 c in  FIG. 194 . 
     The following explains  FIG. 199 .  FIG. 199  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus, according to the present embodiment. 
     At the beginning, the operator (user) presses the “OK button” displayed on the mobile terminal. 
     Thereby, at Step S 5204 p, the mobile terminal transmits an instruction to the home appliance control device (SEG) to issue a secret key and continue cryptographic communication for a predetermined time period. 
     Subsequently, the operator (user) presses the “connection start button” on the apparatus. 
     Then, at Step S 5204 r, the apparatus issues the secret key (with expiration) and continue cryptographic communication for the predetermined time period. 
     Next, at Step S 5204 s, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the home appliance control device (SEG) and the apparatus authenticate each other. At Step S 5204 t, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mutual authentication is successful. 
     It is determined at S 5204 t that the mutual authentication is successful, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5204 u. At Step S 5204 u, the mobile terminal displays “Completion of connection between home appliance control device (SEG) and apparatus” on the screen. Here, it is also possible that the mobile terminal causes the apparatus to perform a specific operation such as display. 
     On the other hand, if the determination at Step S 5204 t is No, in other words, if the mutual authentication fails, then at Step S 5204 x, the mobile terminal displays “Connection failure”. 
     The following explains  FIGS. 200 and 201 . Each of  FIGS. 200 and 201  is a flowchart of processing for connection between the home appliance control device (SEG) to the target apparatus via a relay device, according to the present embodiment. 
     At Step  55206 a, the mobile terminal determines whether or not it is difficult for the target apparatus and the home appliance control device (SEG) to communicate directly with each other. More specifically, in order to make the above determination, the mobile terminal is connected to, for example, the server, and determines, based on (a) 3D coordinate information of a position of the target apparatus to be connected to the server or the home appliance control device (SEG) and (b) 3D coordinate information of a position of the home appliance control device (SEG), whether or not a distance or obstacle between the target apparatus and the home appliance control device (SEG) is large. 
     Next, if the determination at Step S 5206 a is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5206 b. At Step S 5206 b, the mobile terminal obtains, from the server, position information of a relay device between the target apparatus and the home appliance control device (SEG). More specifically, based on 3D coordinate information of positions of relay devices which is stored in the server, the server searches for a relay device (for example, a PAN coordinator) between the target apparatus and the home appliance control device (SEG). Then, the server notifies the position information of the searched-out relay device to the mobile terminal. Thereby, the mobile terminal obtains, from the server, the position information of the relay device existing between the target apparatus and the home appliance control device (SEG). 
     Here, if necessary, the operator (user) makes the mobile terminal touch the target apparatus again. Thereby, the mobile terminal obtains a MAC address, a network ID (PAN ID, for example), communication protocol, a communication key, and 3D coordinates of a position regarding the target apparatus. 
     Next, at Step S 5206 d, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal has network configuration information of the home appliance control device (SEG), such as a MAC address and a network ID (PAN ID, for example) regarding the home appliance control device (SEG). 
     If the determination at Step S 5206 d is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5206 f in  FIG. 201 . On the other hand, if the determination at Step S 5206 d is No, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5206 e. At Step S 5206 e, the mobile terminal establishes proximity wireless communication with the home appliance control device (SEG) and thereby obtains the network configuration information of the home appliance control device (SEG). Then, the processing proceeds to Step S 5206 f ( FIG. 198 ) in  FIG. 201 . More specifically, the operator (user) holding the mobile terminal moves to the location of the home appliance control device (SEG), and makes the mobile terminal touch the home appliance control device (SEG), so that the mobile terminal establishes proximity wireless communication with the home appliance control device (SEG). Then, from the home appliance control device (SEG), the mobile terminal obtains the MAC address, the IP address, the network ID, the communication protocol, the communication key, and again the 3D coordinates of the position, regarding the home appliance control device (SEG). Then, the processing proceeds to Step S 5206 f ( FIG. 198 ) in  FIG. 201 . Here, it is also possible that the server optimizes configuration information of the whole network (MAC addresses of child devices, and network IDs of (PAN IDs) of sub networks) by using 3D coordinate information of all apparatuses, AEGs, and relay devices, and that the optimized configuration information is registered onto the home appliance control device (SEG). 
     The following explains  FIG. 201 . 
     At the beginning, at Step S 5206 f, the mobile terminal establishes proximity wireless communication with the relay device, and sets the relay device so that the target apparatus is connected to the home appliance control device (SEG) via the relay device. 
     More specifically, the operator (user) moves to the location of the relay device such as ZigBee, and makes the mobile terminal touch the relay device. Thereby, the mobile terminal establishes proximity wireless communication with the relay device, so that the mobile terminal can obtain the position information of the relay device again. In addition, the mobile terminal receives, from the server or the like, 3D coordinate information of positions of the target apparatus, the relay device, and the home appliance control device (SEG) and 3D coordinates of the building where the operator (user) exists. Based on the pieces of information, the mobile terminal calculates the above-mentioned optimum network configuration information, namely, a relay connection method or a topology regarding an optimum relay device to serve as a relay point between sub networks (PAN IDs). The mobile terminal receives the configuration information via NFC or via the home appliance control device (SEG) and records it onto the mobile terminal. Or, the configuration information may be recorded onto the server. 
     The mobile terminal transmits a recording instruction to the relay device via at least NFC. In this case, the mobile terminal performs setting in the relay device, so that the target apparatus is connected to the home appliance control device (SEG) via the relay device. More specifically, the mobile terminal registers a MAC address, a network ID, and a communication key of a target apparatus (or each of a plurality of target apparatuses), onto the relay device. 
     Next, at Step S 5206 g, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the connection between the target apparatus and the relay device has been completed. 
     If the connection has been completed (Yes at Step S 5206 g), then the processing proceeds to Step S 5206 h. Otherwise (No at Step S 5206 g), the processing returns to Step S 5206 f. 
     Next, at Step S 5206 h, the mobile terminal records, onto the relay device, the connection information of the mobile terminal, the server, or the home appliance control device (SEG). More specifically, the mobile terminal records, onto the relay device, the connection information of the relay destination, such as a MAC address, a network ID, a communication key, and protocol of the mobile terminal, the server, or the home appliance control device (SEG), via NFC or a network. Thereby, the relay device (PAN coordinator) starts connecting (a) a sub network having PAN ID to which the target apparatus having the registered MAC address belongs to (b) the home appliance control device (SEG) having a MAC address belonging to a sub network having PAN ID to which the home appliance control device (SEG) belongs. 
     Next, at Step S 5206 i, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the connection between the relay device and the home appliance control device (SEG) has been completed. If the determination at Step S 5206 i is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 5206 j. At Step S 5206 j, the mobile terminal determines whether or not connection authentication between the apparatus and the home appliance control device (SEG) has been completed. 
     If it is determined that the connection authentication has been completed (Yes at Step S 5206 j), then it is considered that the relay among the apparatus, the relay device, and the home appliance control device (SEG) has been completed. Therefore, the processing is completed. 
     On the other hand, if the determination at Step S 5206 i is No, or if the determination at Step S 5206 j is No, then the processing returns to Step S 5206 h. 
     As described above with reference to  FIGS. 200 and 201 , the use of 3D mapping according to the present embodiment allows the mobile terminal to obtain 3D position information of a child device, a parent device, and a relay device which are connected via ZigBee or wireless LAN. This is because the mobile terminal always holds the 3D coordinate information. When the mobile terminal is close to each of the child device, the parent device, and the relay device which are connected via ZigBee or wireless LAN via NFC, or when the mobile terminal, which is close to each of the devices/apparatuses, receives information from the device, the mobile terminal exchange physical position relationships (3D position information) among the devices/apparatuses with the devices/apparatuses. As a result, the mobile terminal can obtain the 3D position information as well as the network ID information such as a MAC address from each of the devices/apparatuses. 
     Then, the mobile terminal processes the obtained information (the 3D position information and the like regarding the above devices/apparatuses), thereby generating physically optimum network configuration information. It should be noted that the above processing may be processed not by the mobile terminal, but by the server inside or outside the user&#39;s home. 
     More specifically, as shown in an example in a lower part of  FIG. 200 , this network configuration information can be easily calculated if the 3D position relationships are known. Here, the example in the lower part of  FIG. 200  shows the configuration where (a) a sub network PAN ID 1  includes an apparatus having a MAC address  1 , another apparatus, and a relay device having a MAC address  3 , (b) a sub network PAN ID 2  includes the home appliance control device (SEG) having a MAC address  2  with Internet protocols, and other apparatuses having MAC addresses  5  and  6 , respectively, all of which are connected by radio. This configuration where the PAN ID 1  and the PAN ID 2  are connected to each other via the relay device can offer maximum energy saving, stability, and loop prevention. 
     Here, the conventional methods such as ZigBee require a one-to-one relationship between the home appliance control device (SEG) and the child device. This is because addition of a relay device requires optimization of designing and setting of the whole network configuration, and there has been no method for easily obtaining 3D position relationships of respective devices/apparatuses. Such conventional methods are possible in networks used in company offices that can afford cost and effort. However, general home cannot afford such cost and effort for home appliances such as air conditioners, a microwave, and a solar panel. Therefore, the addition of relay device in a home network has not been easy. 
     However, in the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain position information and ID information such as MAC addresses of the apparatuses (home appliances), only by making the mobile terminal touch the apparatuses by using NFC or by inputting data into the mobile terminal positioned very close to the apparatuses. Therefore, the server or the mobile terminal can obtain the configuration information without cost and effort. If the mobile terminal is operated to record the obtained configuration information directly or indirectly onto the home appliance control device (SEG) or the relay device, it is possible to easily generate optimum network configuration information. Furthermore, the use of NFC allows the user to check unauthorized actions by using a cryptography key or 3D position information, thereby increasing security. Therefore, the addition of relay device is possible also at home, and it is possible to achieve stable wireless communication over a long distance between a solar panel on the roof and the home appliance control device (SEG) on the first floor, or a long distance between the home appliance control device (SEG) at home and a heat pump system or a charging system outside home, for example. Then, in these cases, the use of the server makes it possible to calculate the network configuration information at high accuracy by using 3D coordinates. Therefore, it is possible to configure an ideal network system, and prevent abnormal communication such as loop. As a result, transmission efficiency can be increased. 
     Twenty-First Embodiment 
     In the twentieth-first embodiment, the description is given for a system that enables the mobile terminal to serve as a remote controller for operating an apparatus by using a 3D product map of a building with reference to the drawings. 
       FIG. 202  is a diagram showing an example of image data on a 3D map generated by a program execution unit O 65 .  FIG. 203  is a diagram of an example of a product 3D map generated by a display unit O 68 d by combining the image data of  FIG. 169  and the displayed image data of  FIG. 202 . The same reference numerals of  FIGS. 169 to 171  are assigned to the identical units of  FIGS. 202 and 203 , so that the identical units are not explained again below. 
       FIG. 202  shows an example of apparatus control by, for example, a mobile device (the communication device  102  that is the mobile terminal  9 ) which uses the 3D product map of the building according to the present embodiment. In addition to the building data,  FIG. 203  shows an example of the apparatus control in the case where it is possible to recognize a room where each apparatus exists, according to the present embodiment. The apparatus control processing performed by the mobile terminal shown in  FIGS. 202 and 203  is described with reference to  FIGS. 204, 205, and 206 . Each of  FIGS. 204 and 205  is a flowchart of remote control operation according to the present embodiment.  FIG. 206  is a flowchart for explaining significance of detailed processing shown in  FIG. 205 . 
     At the beginning, at S 6001 , the mobile terminal determines a current position of the mobile terminal by using GPS, thereby generating position information of the mobile terminal. 
     Next, at S 6002 , the mobile terminal obtains position information that is to be used as a reference point. More specifically, for example, in the case where an unlocking system, which locks/unlocks keys by the mobile terminal via proximity wireless communication, is cooperated with an entrance key of the building, the mobile terminal obtains an apparatus ID of the unlocking system when the entrance key is unlocked by the proximity communication. Then, the mobile terminal sets, as the reference point, position information associated with the obtained apparatus ID (position “ 1 ” in  FIG. 203 ). Here, the database in which the apparatus ID and the position information are stored in association with each other is held in the server or the mobile terminal. It should be noted that the mobile terminal may obtain the position information of the entrance key directly from the entrance key by using proximity communication, or of course, from another apparatus except the unlocking system. It should also be noted that, when the user holding the mobile terminal enters the building, the mobile terminal may detect the user&#39;s entrance to the building based on output information of a sensor provided to a door, and set a position of the door to be the reference point. 
     The following describes the situation where the user walks from position “ 1 ” to position “ 2 ” in  FIG. 203  at Step S 6003 . More specifically, at S 6003 , the mobile terminal calculates (a) a traveling distance of the user&#39;s travel based on information of a user&#39;s step length, and also detects (b) a traveling direction of the travel. Based on the travel distance and the travel direction, the mobile terminal calculates position information of the mobile terminal. In more detail, the mobile terminal obtains (i) information of a step length of the user walking at home from a database, and detects (ii) the number of steps n in a target section by using an acceleration sensor, a geomagnetism sensor, or a vibrating gyro. Multiplying the step length by the number of steps n results in the traveling distance. In addition, the mobile terminal detects the traveling direction by using the vibrating gyro and the geomagnetism sensor. Based on the calculated traveling distance and traveling direction, the mobile terminal calculates a relative position of the mobile terminal with respect to the reference point on the 3D space, and records the calculated position information onto a database in the mobile terminal. 
     Next, at S 6004 , the mobile terminal transmits the calculated position information as well as the traveling information such as traveling distance and traveling direction to the server to be stored them in a database in the server. 
     The following describes the situation where the user is at position “ 2 ” in  FIG. 203  at S 6005 . More specifically, at S 6005 , if the user points the mobile terminal to a TV, the mobile terminal serves as a remote controller. Here, the TV should be on a normal line passing 3D coordinate information of the position of the mobile terminal in a direction measured by the mobile terminal. In more detail, the user at position “ 2 ” in  FIG. 203  moves to be in front of the TV on the first floor, and points the mobile terminal to the TV. When the TV is on a normal line passing 3D coordinate information of the position of the mobile terminal in a direction of measured by the mobile terminal, the mobile terminal serves as a remote controller of the TV, by connecting the TV to a network, for example. 
     After traveling from position “ 2 ” to position “ 3 ”, the user further moves from position “ 3 ” to position “ 4 ” in  FIG. 203  and then points the mobile terminal to an air conditioner. In the same manner as described above, the mobile terminal thereby serves as a remote controller of the air conditioner. More specifically, when the user moves on the first floor to enter a Japanese-style room and points the mobile terminal to the air conditioner, the mobile terminal is connected to the air conditioner on a network so that the mobile terminal can serve as a remote controller of the air conditioner. Here, in the same manner as described at S 6003 , the mobile terminal detects a traveling distance from position “ 3 ” to position “ 4 ” based on the step length and the number of steps of the user, and thereby calculates 3D position information (relative position information) of the mobile terminal. Then, the 3D position information is stored into the database in the mobile terminal or the server. 
     Furthermore, at S 6007  in  FIG. 205 , when the user moves from position “ 4 ” to position “ 5 ” in  FIG. 203 , a traveling distance is calculated based on the number of steps, and then stored into the database in the mobile terminal or the server. As described above, such traveling information for each traveling section is accumulated in the database for each user. Therefore, the accumulation is used as a walking history of each user depending on each traveling section. A step length of each user is learned from the walking history to increase its accuracy. 
     Then, at S 6008 , when the user reaches a staircase in the home, the mobile terminal starts calculating (a) a traveling change in the height and (b) a horizontal traveling distance, regarding user&#39;s traveling on the staircase. Here, it is assumed that m represents a height of one stair and that k represents a length of one stair. Under the assumption, multiplying the number of steps by m results in the traveling change in the height, and multiplying the number of steps by k results in the horizontal traveling distance. It is noted that m and k are accumulated in the database, so that m and k are learned from the past data to increase their accuracy. 
     The following describes, for example, the case where the user ascends by a lift not by the staircase at S 6009 . In this case, characteristic data of the lift in the building is recorded on the database. A time r required to ascend from a floor P to a floor Q is obtained from the database, and the floor number to which the user ascends is measured based on the required time r. It is also possible to increase the accuracy of P, Q, and r by learning them from past data. In addition, start and stop of the ascending lift is detected by the acceleration sensor. 
     If it is determined at S 6010  that the ascending has been completed, then the processing proceeds to S 6011 . 
     At S 6011 , a horizontal traveling distance of the ascending is calculated by multiplying the step length by the number of steps, and a traveling direction of the ascending is detected by the vibrating gyro. Based on the horizontal traveling distance and the traveling direction, the mobile terminal generates 3D position information of the mobile terminal. If there is 3D structure data of the building, the position information is modified based on the 3D structure data to increase its accuracy. Then, it is assumed that the user moves out from the lift or the staircase and temporarily stops at the front-left of a TV on the second floor (at position “ 5 ” in  FIG. 203 ) 
     At S 6013 , it is determined whether or not an accumulated error E in the accumulated pieces of 3D position information is greater than a predetermined error allowable value. The accumulated error E is calculated by multiplying a traveling distance by 5%. If it is determined that the accumulated error E is greater than the error allowable value, then the processing proceeds to S 6014 . 
     At S 6014 , the mobile terminal searches apparatuses having (relative or absolute) position information registered in the database, for an apparatus having position information closest to the position information of the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal then presents the searched-out apparatus on the screen of the mobile terminal. The operator takes a photograph of the apparatus by a camera unit of the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal recognizes the apparatus based on the image photographed by the camera unit, and calculates a relative angle and a distance between the mobile terminal and the apparatus in order to modify a reference position. 
     Subsequently, at S 6015 , the mobile terminal obtains network information (MAC address, IP address, communication key, and the like) of the apparatus based on apparatus ID of the apparatus, and is thereby connected to the apparatus. When the user presses a Lock button on the mobile terminal while pointing the mobile terminal to the apparatus, the connection between the mobile terminal and the apparatus is fixed. As a result, the mobile terminal can serve as a remote controller of the apparatus or display video data of the apparatus on the screen of the mobile terminal. 
     Finally, the mobile terminal completes the remote control operation function. 
     The steps S 6007  to S 6011  are, likewise S 6017  in  FIG. 205 , processing performed by the mobile terminal to learn past data to increase an accuracy of traveling distance calculation and generate accurate 3D position information of the mobile terminal. The step S 6013  is, likewise S 6018  in  FIG. 205 , determination as to whether or not an accumulated error of the 3D position information is greater than a predetermined value. The step S 6014  is, likewise S 6019  in  FIG. 205 , correction of an error in the 3D position information (reference position). 
     By the above-described processing, the mobile terminal can obtain a relative position of the mobile terminal with respect to a reference point, and can thereby serve as a remote controller of an apparatus only by pointing the mobile terminal to the apparatus without using correct absolute position information. 
     Furthermore, if an error in the traveling distance measured by the acceleration sensor is large, it is possible to decrease the error of the position information by using a step length, position information of the apparatus, and the like. 
       FIG. 207  is a flowchart for explaining processing of determining a correct reference point of the mobile terminal when a current reference point of the mobile terminal is not correct, according to the present embodiment of the present invention. 
     At the beginning, if it is determined that the mobile terminal has not yet obtained a reference point or that reference point information of the mobile terminal is not correct, then at S 6021 , the mobile terminal photographs the target apparatus. Here, the mobile terminal may transmit the photographed image of the apparatus to the server. 
     Next, at S 6023 , mobile terminal recognizes a kind of the apparatus based on the photographed image. Subsequently, at S 6024 , an image showing only the apparatus is filtered from the photographed image, and the resulting image is transmitted to the server. 
     Next, at S 6026 , the server specifies a building in which the mobile terminal currently exists, based on the position of the mobile terminal, and then specifies the apparatus from a list of apparatuses in the building. More specifically, the server determines a rough position of the mobile terminal by a base station, GPS, or the like, and thereby specifies a building in which the mobile terminal currently exists. In addition, the server specifies the photographed apparatus from the apparatus list associated with the building. Furthermore, the server obtains a size and 3D shape information of the apparatus, and then stores these pieces of information into the database. It should be noted that if a current position of the mobile terminal is not known, it is possible to specify the photographed apparatus from an apparatus list associated with the user of the mobile terminal. 
     Next, at S 6027 , the mobile terminal or the server calculates a relative angle between the mobile terminal and the apparatus, based on a direction which the apparatus faces in the photographed image. 
     Next, at S 6028 , the mobile terminal or the server calculates a distance between the mobile terminal and the apparatus, by using the photographed image based on a zoom magnification or the like included in optical characteristic information of the mobile terminal. 
     Next, at S 6029 , the mobile terminal or the server calculates position information Pr indicated by 3D relative coordinate information of the position of the mobile terminal or the apparatus, based on the distance and relative angle between the mobile terminal and the apparatus. 
     At S 6030 , a relative or absolute position Pm of the mobile terminal in the building is calculated. More specifically, the mobile terminal or the server reads 3D coordinate information Pd of the position of the apparatus from the server or the mobile terminal, and then calculates the relative or absolute position Pm of the mobile terminal in the building, based on the position information Pr and the coordinate information Pd. 
     Eventually, at S 6031 , the position Pm is set to be position information of a reference point of the mobile terminal. 
     By the above-described processing, even if a reference point of the mobile terminal has not yet been set, for example, if it is immediately after powering the mobile terminal ON, it is possible to determine the reference point by using a photographed image. In addition, the filtering of the apparatus image from the photographed image allows the user to transmit the apparatus image to the server without considering privacy of home information. 
       FIGS. 208 and 209  are flowcharts of processing for connecting an apparatus to a parent device in a network to which the apparatus belongs. More specifically,  FIGS. 208 and 209  are flowcharts of the connection processing in the case where the apparatus according to the present embodiment does not have a NFC function. 
     At the beginning, the user points the mobile terminal to a target apparatus to be connected, and photographs the apparatus by a camera unit of the mobile terminal. 
     Next, at S 6112 , the mobile terminal recognizes the apparatus by processing the photographed image of the apparatus based on position information (3D coordinate information, for example) of the mobile terminal. If the apparatus is recognized, the mobile terminal can obtain a kind, a model number, and rough position information (3D coordinate information, for example) of the apparatus. Here, the mobile terminal obtains the above-mentioned kind, model number, and rough position information (3D coordinate information, for example) of the recognized apparatus, from a database in the mobile terminal or the server. 
     Next, at S 6113 , the mobile terminal determines whether or not the target apparatus to be connected has already been registered in the database in the server or the mobile terminal. More specifically, from the database in the mobile terminal or the server, the mobile terminal obtains pieces of information of apparatus candidates. Here, the apparatus candidates are apparatuses having respective pieces position information that are close to the position information of the mobile terminal. Then, the mobile terminal compares each of the apparatus candidates to the photographed apparatus, and thereby confirms whether or not the recognized apparatus has been registered in the database. 
     If it is determined at S 6113  that the target apparatus to be connected has already been registered in the database in the server or the mobile terminal, then the processing proceeds to S 6114 . 
     At S 6114 , the mobile terminal obtains an apparatus ID and the like of the apparatus, and is thereby connected to the apparatus via a network. More specifically, the mobile terminal obtains an apparatus ID, a connection protocol, a communication key, and a sever address of the apparatus from the database in the server or the mobile terminal, and is connected to the apparatus via a network by using the obtained pieces of information. 
     Subsequently, at S 6115 , the mobile terminal issues various commands based on position information of the apparatus and a direction of the mobile terminal. 
     On the other hand, if it is determined that the target apparatus to be connected is not registered in the database in the server or the mobile terminal, then the processing proceeds to S 6116 . 
     Next, at S 6116 , the mobile terminal determines whether or not the apparatus has a network function. Here, it is also possible that the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal can recognize a model number of the apparatus. This is because it is possible to determine whether or not the apparatus has a network function, if the model number of the apparatus is recognized. 
     If it is determined that the apparatus does not have a network function or that the mobile terminal cannot recognize the model number of the apparatus (No at S 6116 ), then the processing proceeds to S 6117 . 
     Next, for example, the user opens a cover of the apparatus to expose a 2D bar-code of the apparatus, and photographs the bar-code by the camera unit of the mobile terminal (S 6117 ). 
     Next, at S 6118 , the mobile terminal decrypts encrypted data of the 2D bar-code, and records the decrypted data onto the database in the server or the mobile terminal. More specifically, the mobile terminal reads the 2D bar-code and decrypts encrypted data of the 2D bar-code. Here, the decrypted data is, for example, an apparatus ID, a connection communication protocol, a communication standard, a remote control function (for infrared remote control, or for wireless ZigBee, for example), a net address (MAC address, IP address, communication key), a sever address, or the like. The mobile terminal records the read data onto the database in the server or the mobile terminal. 
     Next, at S 6119 , the mobile terminal calculates 3D position information of the apparatus and records the calculated position information onto the database. More specifically, the mobile terminal obtains 3D shape information of the apparatus from the database in the server or the mobile terminal. Then, the mobile terminal calculates 3D position information of the apparatus based on the photographed image of the apparatus and 3D position information of the mobile terminal photographing the apparatus, and then records the 3D position information onto the database. 
     If it is determined at S 6116  that the apparatus has a network function or that the mobile terminal can recognize a model number of the apparatus, then the processing proceeds to S 6121 . Here, it is also possible to determine whether or not the apparatus has an AOSS function. 
     Next, at s 6121 , it is determined whether or not the mobile terminal can communicate with the parent device. If it is determined that the mobile terminal can communicate with the parent device, then the processing proceeds to S 6122 . Here, the parent device is, for example, the home appliance control device (SEG), an adapter (AP) of a wireless LAN, or the like. 
     Next, at S 6122 , it is determined whether or not the apparatus has an infrared communication receiving function or a wireless remote control (ZigBee, for example) receiving function. In other words, it is determined whether or not the apparatus can communicate with other apparatuses/devices except the parent device. 
     If it is determined at S 6122  that the apparatus has neither the infrared communication reception function nor the wireless remote control (ZigBee, for example) receiving function (No at S 6122 ), then the processing proceeds to S 6123 . At S 6123 , the parent device and the apparatus start connection authentication with each other according to AOSS start instruction from the user. More specifically, at S 6123 , the user presses a “connection start button” on the mobile terminal, and then the mobile terminal transmits the AOSS instruction to the parent device and thereby causes the parent device to switch its mode to a registerable mode. At the same time, the user presses an AOSS button on the apparatus, then the apparatus starts connection authentication with the parent device and continues the connection authentication for a certain time period. Here, it is preferable to increase security of the communication, by controlling a radio output to be minimum based on a distance and obstacle between the parent device and the apparatus, by using 3D position information of the parent device and 3D position information of the apparatus. 
     Next, it is determined at S 6124  whether or not the connection authentication between the parent device and the apparatus is successful. If it is determined that the connection authentication is successful, then the processing proceeds to S 6126 . 
     On the other hand, if it is determined at S 6122  whether or not the apparatus has an infrared communication receiving function or a wireless remote control (ZigBee, for example) receiving function, then the processing proceeds to S 6125 . 
     Next, at S 6125 , the mobile terminal transmits a communication key and “AOSS start instruction” to the parent device that has the same communication protocol as that of the apparatus. At the same time, the mobile terminal transmits the communication key and “AOSS instruction” to the apparatus to start the mutual authentication. More specifically, when the user presses the connection start button on the mobile terminal, the mobile terminal transmits the communication key and the “AOSS start instruction” to the parent device that has the same communication protocol as that of the apparatus. At the same time, the mobile terminal transmits the communication key and the “AOSS instruction” to the apparatus by using a remote control transmission function, so that the apparatus and the parent device start the mutual authentication. 
     Next, the mobile terminal determines at S 6126  whether or not the mutual authentication has been completed. If it is determined that the mutual authentication has not yet been completed, then the processing proceeds to S 6125 . On the other hand, if it is determined at S 6126  that the mutual authentication has been completed, then the processing proceeds to S 6127 . At S 6127 , it is determined whether or not the connection between the parent device and the apparatus has been established. 
     If it is determined at S 6127  that the connection has been established, then the mobile terminal causes the apparatus to transmit an apparatus ID, a product number, an address, an error code, a use time period, a history, and 3D position information regarding the apparatus, to the server via the parent device. 
     Next, at S 6129 , the mobile terminal calculates 3D position information of the apparatus. More specifically, the mobile terminal obtains 3D shape information of the apparatus from the database based on a product number of the apparatus. Then, the mobile terminal calculates 3D position information of the apparatus based on (a) a distance between the apparatus and the mobile terminal which is detected from the photographed image, (b) a 3D direction which is detected from the photographed image, and (c) position information of the mobile terminal photographing the image. Then, the mobile terminal records the calculated 3D position information onto the database in the server or the mobile terminal. 
     By the above-described processing, even if the apparatus is not provided with a proximity communication function, the use of a 2D bar-code enables easy connection between the apparatus and the parent device. As a result, it is possible to register the apparatus onto the server, or register the 3D position information of the apparatus onto the server. 
     Next, the 3D mapping is described. Each of  FIGS. 210 to 212  is a flowchart of a method of registering position information (position information registration method), according to the present embodiment of the present invention. 
     After starting 3D mapping ( 6140 a), the operator (user) moves the mobile terminal. The following describes an example where the operator moves the mobile terminal to a location of a metes-and-bounds position. 
     At Step S 6140 c, the mobile terminal transmits, to the server, current position information of the mobile terminal which is determined by GPS (hereinafter, GPS information), and thereby obtains 3D absolute coordinates of the position information from the server. For example, the mobile terminal transmits the GPS information to the server and thereby obtains 3D absolute coordinate information that include a metes-and-bounds boundary mark or a measurement reference point ID of a location close to the current position of the mobile terminal. Then, the mobile terminal stores the obtained 3D absolute coordinate information onto an absolute position 3D coordinate database. Here, as described previously, the mobile terminal has two kinds of 3D coordinate information which are 3D coordinate information of an absolute position and 3D coordinate information of a relative position of the mobile terminal. 
     Next, at Step S 6140 d, the mobile terminal switches the position determination by the GPS to position determination by the motion sensor, in order to calculate 3D coordinate information of a current position of the mobile terminal. More specifically, the mobile terminal switches the GPS sensor to the motion sensor to determine a current position of the mobile terminal. Then, the mobile terminal calculates a distance of user&#39;s travel based on a step length and the number of steps of the user, and also detects a direction of the user&#39;s travel by the vibrating gyro. Thereby, the mobile terminal calculates 3D coordinate information of the current position in consideration of the distance and the direction in addition to the 3D absolute coordinate information. 
     Next, at S 6140 e, the mobile terminal records 3D coordinate information of the mobile terminal which has been determined when the mobile terminal has established the proximity wireless communication. More specifically, it is assumed, for example, that the user makes the mobile terminal touch a NFC unit of a key of the building in order to unlock the key. Here, the mobile terminal records 3D coordinate information of the position of the mobile terminal establishing proximity wireless communication by touching the NFC unit of the key of the building, onto the database in the mobile terminal or the server, or onto the NFC unit of the key. 
     Next, at S 6140 f, the mobile terminal further calculates 3D coordinate information of the current position of the mobile terminal, based on the number of steps, a step length, and a direction of the steps of the user. More specifically, when the user enters the building, the mobile terminal calculates the 3D coordinate information of the current position, based on the number of steps, the step length, and the direction of the steps of the user. Here, if the accuracy of the triaxial magnetic sensor is deteriorated by noise or the like, the information detected by the triaxial magnetic sensor is replaced by direction information detected by the vibrating gyro. 
     Next, at S 6140 g, the mobile terminal updates 3D position information of the apparatus, and records a high-accuracy position information identifier in association with the updated 3D position information. More specifically, if a traveling distance from a reference point (3D absolute coordinate information of a position of a reference point) to the current position of the mobile terminal is short, the mobile terminal determines that the position accuracy is high. Therefore, if the user makes the mobile terminal touch the antenna unit of the NFC unit of the apparatus having registered 3D position information and thereby establishes proximity wireless communication between the mobile terminal and the apparatus, the mobile terminal updates the 3D position information of the apparatus, and records a high-accuracy position information identifier, which indicates that the 3D position information has a high accuracy, onto the NFC unit or onto the database in the server or the mobile terminal, in association with the 3D coordinate information. 
     Next, at S 6140 h, the mobile terminal determines whether or not an accumulated error in the 3D coordinate information is greater than a predetermined value. More specifically, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the accumulated error PE of the 3D coordinate information is greater than the predetermined value. 
     If the determination at S 6140 h is Yes, the processing proceeds to S 6140 i. At S 6140 i, the mobile terminal searches neighborhood of the mobile terminal for an apparatus assigned with such a high-accuracy position identifier. Then, the mobile terminal displays, on the screen, the searched-out apparatus with instructions “Please touch the antenna unit of the NFC of the apparatus”. More specifically, the mobile terminal searches apparatuses having NFC functions in the home (TV, air conditioner, microwave, refrigerator, and the like) for an apparatus that is assigned with a high-accuracy position identifier and that is close to the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal displays, on the screen of the mobile terminal, the searched-out apparatus (TV, for example) together with instructions “Please touch the antenna unit of the NFC of the apparatus”. Then, the processing proceeds to S 6140 j in  FIG. 212 . 
     On the other hand, if the determination at S 6140 h is No, then the processing proceeds to S 6140 n in  FIG. 212 . At S 6140 n, the mobile terminal updates 3D reference coordinates and records the high-accuracy position identifier onto the database. More specifically, the mobile terminal can detect an action of the user by the acceleration sensor. For example, the acceleration sensor can detect that the user walks up the first stair of a staircase, that the user has already walked up the final stair of the staircase, that the user stops in front of a closed door, that the user starts ascending by a lift, that the user stops the ascending in the lift, that the user stops in front of a closed entrance door, that the user walks up a step of the entrance, that the user starts ascending by a ladder, that the user turns at a corner of a corridor, or that the user goes around a bulged wall of the building. Then, the mobile terminal compares (performs matching) the 3D coordinate information of the mobile terminal detected by using the acceleration sensor to the 3D coordinate information of the building, thereby updating the 3D reference coordinates. By the above-described processing, it is possible to increase the accuracy of the 3D reference coordinates. Then, here, the updated 3D reference coordinates and the high-accuracy position identifier are recorded onto the database. 
     Next, at S 6140 j, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal has established proximity wireless communication with the apparatus. More specifically, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the user makes the mobile terminal touch the antenna unit of the apparatus and thereby proximity wireless communication is established between the mobile terminal and the apparatus. If the determination is Yes, then the processing proceeds to S 6140 k. 
     Next, at S 6140 k, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the 3D coordinate information of the apparatus is significantly different from the 3D coordinate information of the mobile terminal. If the determination at S 6140 k is Yes, then the processing proceeds to S 6140 p. At S 6140 p, the mobile terminal determines that the apparatus has moved from an original position indicated by the previously-measured coordinates. Therefore, the mobile terminal records an error information identifier onto a database in the apparatus. 
     Here, if there is an apparatus assigned with a high-accuracy position identifier near the mobile terminal, the operator (user) makes the mobile terminal touch the apparatus to update the 3D coordinate information of the current position of the mobile terminal held in the mobile terminal. Furthermore, the operator (user) makes the mobile terminal touch the target apparatus that has been determined at S 6140 k as having moved from the original position, in order to record the updated 3D coordinate information onto the database to correct the position information of the target apparatus. Here, in the database, the target apparatus is assigned with a high-accuracy position identifier, instead of the error information identifier. Thereby, in the database, the target apparatus is stored in association with the high-accuracy position information. 
     On the other hand, if the determination at S 6140 j is No, then the processing proceeds to Step S 6140 n. Since Step S 6140 n has already been described, this step will not be described again. 
     On the other hand, if the determination at S 6140 k is No, then the processing proceeds to S 6140 m. At S 6140 m, the 2D or 3D coordinate information of the position of the apparatus is updated as 3D coordinate information of the position of the mobile terminal. As a result, the 3D coordinate information of the position of the mobile terminal is corrected. Then, the processing proceeds to Step S 6140 n. 
     Twenty-Second Embodiment 
     The following describes cooperation between (a) a mobile device that is the above-described communication device and (b) apparatus(es). 
       FIG. 213  is a diagram for explaining the situation of the mobile device and apparatuses cooperated with the mobile device (hereinafter, referred to also as “cooperation apparatuses”) according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. 
     In  FIG. 213 , display screens  9001 ,  9002 , and  9003  of the mobile device show various examples of the same display screen of the mobile device  9000 . 
     More specifically, the display screen  9001  of the mobile device  9000  is presented when the user holding the mobile device  9000  points the mobile device  9000  to a TV  9004  (“A”). At “A”, data on the display screen  9001  of the mobile device  9000  is transmitted to the TV  9004 , and thereby displayed also on the TV  9004 . 
     Likewise, the display screen  9002  of the mobile device  9000  is presented when the user holding the mobile device  9000  points the mobile device  9000  to a recorder  9005  (“B”). Furthermore, the display screen  9003  of the mobile device  9000  is presented when the user holding the mobile device  9000  points the mobile device  9000  to a microwave apparatus  9006  (“C”). Regarding “B”, a remote control screen for operating the recorder  9005  is displayed on the display screen  9002  of the mobile device  9000 . The user presses a desired button on the remote control screen to operate the recorder  9005 . Regarding “C”, a recipe screen for operating the microwave  9006  is displayed on the display screen  9003  of the mobile device  9000 . In  FIG. 213 , a pair of the upper and lower mobile devices  9000  show, for example, that the mobile device  9000  can appropriately operate a target apparatus such as the TV  9004  regardless whether the mobile device  9000  points to a front side or a rear side of the target apparatus. 
       FIG. 214  is a diagram showing (a) display screens of the mobile device  9000  and (b) display screens of a TV as an example of the cooperation apparatuses, according to the present embodiment of the present invention.  FIGS. 215 to 219  are flowcharts of processing according to the present embodiment of the present invention. 
     First, the processing in which the user selects a desired cooperation apparatus is described with reference to  FIG. 215 . 
     At the beginning, the mobile device  9000  obtains position information of the mobile device (S 9302 ). More specifically, the mobile device obtains position information of the mobile device, by calculating or determining a reference position (position of a reference point) of the mobile device. The calculation or determination of the reference position of the mobile device is performed, for example, by (1) searching for an apparatus by a camera function, (2) then obtaining information detected by a distance sensor, (3) then establishing proximity wireless communication with the apparatus, and (4) receiving specific radio which enables position determination. Here, the method of obtaining the position information of the mobile device has already been described in detail with reference to  FIG. 204 , so that the description will not be repeated below. 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  is pointed in the direction “A” in  FIG. 213 . More specifically, the user points the mobile device  9000  to a desired target apparatus (the TV  9004 , in this example) (S 9303 ). 
     Here, the mobile device  9000  extracts, from the database, apparatus candidates existing in a direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  (S 9304 ). More specifically, the mobile device  9000  extracts, from the database, apparatus candidates in the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 , based on (a) 3D (relative or absolute) coordinate information of positions of the mobile device  9000  and the TV  9004 , (b) direction information indicating the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 , (c) attitude information of the apparatus (the TV  9004 , in this example), (d) area information of the apparatus (the TV  9004 , in this example), and the like. 
     Here, the mobile device  9000  determines whether or not there are a plurality of apparatus candidates in the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  (S 9305 ). If there are a plurality of such apparatus candidates (Yes at S 9305 ), then the mobile device  9000  displays a list of the apparatus candidates with their position relationships on the screen of the mobile device  9000  (S 9306 ). 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  determines whether or not the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  is changed (S 9307 ). If the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  is changed, in other words, if the user changes the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  (Yes at S 9307 ), then the mobile device  9000  changes the display of the apparatus candidates according to the changed direction (S 9308 ). More specifically, the mobile device  9000  changes the display of the apparatus candidates on the screen of the mobile device  9000  according to the direction changed by the mobile device  9000 , based on a determination as to how much each of the apparatus candidates is close to the center of the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 . 
     Here, when the apparatus candidates are displayed on the display screen of the mobile device  9000 , an apparatus candidate closer to the center of the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  is displayed closer to the center of the display screen. It is also possible that the apparatus candidate closer to the center of the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  is displayed higher in the display screen, or displayed with a target cursor. 
     Then, the mobile device determines whether or not pressing of a Lock button is detected (S 9309 ). If the mobile device detects pressing of the Lock button (Yes at S 9309 ), then the processing proceeds to Step S 9310 . More specifically, when a target apparatus that the user desires to operate is displayed at the center of the display, the user presses the Lock button. Then, the mobile device detects the pressing of the Lock button, and thereby the processing proceeds to Step S 9310 . Here, the Lock button may be a physical switch of the mobile device  9000 , or may be a virtual button displayed on a touch panel of the mobile device  9000 . Or, the Lock button may be a different device logically connected to the mobile device  9000 . The above step is shown in  9222  in  FIG. 214 . 
     Next, if the determination at S 9309  is Yes, then the mobile device  9000  specifies the target apparatus selected by the user, and obtains or downloads network connection information of the selected apparatus from the database (S 9310 ). More specifically, the mobile device  9000  specifies the target apparatus (a TV or a microwave, for example) selected by the user from among the apparatus candidates existing in the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 . Then, the mobile device  9000  obtains or downloads, from the database in the server or the mobile device  9000 , network connection information (a MAC address, an IP address, a communication key, a communication standard, a communication protocol) of the specified apparatus, a performance capability of the specified apparatus, a program for the specified apparatus, a script for the apparatus, and the like. 
     The mobile device  9000  holds a flag (Lock flag). When the Lock button is pressed, the Lock flag indicates that the mobile device  9000  is connected to the target apparatus pointed by the mobile device  9000 . While the Lock flag is ON, the Step S 9304  is not performed even if the user changes the direction of the mobile device  9000 . Therefore, even if the user changes the direction of the mobile terminal  9000  while the mobile device  9000  is connected to the target apparatus such as the TV  9004 , the mobile terminal  9000  is not disconnected from the target apparatus. As a result, it is possible to prevent that the display of the apparatus selected by the user is disappeared. 
     The following describes a direction pointed by the user using the mobile device  9000  to a certain apparatus (a TV, a recorder, a microwave, or the like) with reference to  FIG. 220 . 
     In the present embodiment, a target apparatus to be operated by the mobile device  9000  is specified by using (a) 3D (relative or absolute) coordinate information of positions of the mobile device  9000  (communication device) held by the user and the target apparatus (a TV, a recorder, a microwave, or the like), and (b) a direction of the mobile device  9000 . If the mobile device  9000  is in almost cuboid shape, a direction of the mobile device which is used to specify the target apparatus is assumed to be in parallel to a longer side of a virtual cuboid forming a case of the mobile device  9000 . For example, it is assumed that the mobile device  9000  has the buttons and the display screen as shown in  FIG. 220 , and that the user generally holds the mobile device  9000  by the display screen side not the buttons side. Under the assumption, the direction of the mobile device  9000  pointing the target apparatus is a direction  9111  from the buttons side to the display screen side. If the mobile device  9000  is a Smartphone, such as iPhone 4™ manufactured by Apple Inc., which hardly has buttons, and therefore the user holds the mobile device  9000  by hand in various ways, it is possible that a gravity point of the user&#39;s hand on the mobile device  9000  is detected by a gravity sensor, a gyro sensor, a camera unit, a proximity sensor, and the like of the mobile device  9000 , and a direction resulting in the longest distance from the gravity point to the outer periphery of the mobile device is set to be the direction from the mobile device  9000 . It should be noted that, if the mobile device  9000  has a rear-side camera unit  9113  on the rear side of the display screen, a parallel direction  9111  in parallel to the direction of the rear-side camera unit may be set to be a direction from the mobile device  9000 . The direction  9111  may be used as the direction from the mobile device  9000  when the camera unit is not operated, while the direction  9112  may be used as the direction from the mobile device  9000  when the camera unit is operated. When the camera unit is operated and the direction  9112  is therefore set to be the direction from the mobile device  9000 , the user can press the Lock button to specify the target apparatus, while watching the target apparatus displayed on the display screen of the mobile device  9000 . Here, the target apparatus is specified based on the 3D coordinate information of positions of the mobile device  9000  and the target apparatus and the direction information of the mobile device  9000 . 
     It is also possible to dynamically change a direction of the mobile device  9000 , according to a shape of the mobile device  9000 , an activation state of the gravity sensor, the gyro sensor, a camcorder unit, a user proximity sensor, an activation state of the camera unit, user&#39;s selection of a direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 , a line of sight of the user, a posture of the user, or the like. 
     Therefore, the user can select the target apparatus merely by pointing the mobile device  9000  intuitively to a certain apparatus, without being conscious of how the user holds the mobile device  9000 . 
     Moreover, it is also possible that the mobile device  9000  may be pointed in a plurality of directions at the same time to specify a target apparatus. It is therefore possible to search a wide range for the target apparatus regardless of how the user holds the mobile device  9000 . 
     Referring back to  FIG. 216 , the following further describes Step S 9310 . 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  attempts to be connected with the apparatus via a network, by using the network connection information obtained at S 9310  (S 9401 ). If the connection is successful (Yes at S 9401 ) and only communication information is obtained from the database (Yes at S 9402 ), then the mobile device  9000  inquires the apparatus or the server for a performance capability of the apparatus (S 9403 ). Then, the mobile device  9000  changes a display quality according to the obtained performance capability of the apparatus. Here, the mobile device  9000  may also obtain a control display program to be executed in the mobile device  9000 . 
     Next, the mobile device executes the control display program (S 9404 ). 
     Next, in the case where the apparatus is a TV, the mobile device obtains, from the apparatus, the number of TV programs, titles, thumbnails, and the like of channel broadcast programs of the TV. Then, the mobile device displays them on the display screen of the mobile device  9000  (S 9405 ). The above step is shown in  9223  in  FIG. 214 . 
     Then, the user selects (presses a button, clicks on a touch panel, performs pinch out gesture, for example) a thumbnail of a certain program on the screen (display screen  9001 ) of the mobile device  9000 . Therefore, the mobile device  9000  issues an instruction to display the selected TV program on the screen of the apparatus (TV) (S 9407 ). The above step is shown in  9224  in  FIG. 214 . 
     Next, from the TV  9004 , the mobile device  9000  receives video data having quality that corresponds to the performance capability of the mobile device  9000  (S 9408 ). More specifically, the TV displays the designated TV program, and transmits video data having quality corresponding to the performance capability of the mobile device  9000  to the mobile device  9000 . Therefore, the mobile device  9000  receives the video data having quality corresponding to the performance capability from the TV  9004 . 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  displays the video data received from the TV (S 9409 ). The above step is shown in  9225  in  FIG. 214 . 
     Here, if the user flicks to the right on the display screen of the mobile device  9000 , a next channel TV program is displayed on both the display screen of the mobile device  9000  and the screen of the TV. More specifically, when the user flicks to the right on the display screen of the mobile device  9000 , Steps S 9407  to S 9409  are performed for a next channel TV program, and the next channel TV program is displayed on both the display screen of the mobile device  9000  and the screen of the TV  9004  (S 9410 ). The above steps are shown in  9225  to  9227  in  FIG. 214 . 
     With the above structure, the user can intuitively control a function of the target apparatus to be operated, merely by pointing the mobile device  9000  to the apparatus. 
     Furthermore, the use of attitude and shape information of the apparatus makes it possible to specify the apparatus pointed by the mobile device  9000 , even if a distance from the center of the apparatus such as a large-screen TV and an edge of the mobile device  9000  is long. As a result, it is possible to correctly specify the apparatus which the user intends to point. 
     The following describes the processing from S 9410  with reference to  FIGS. 217 and 218 . 
     At the beginning, the mobile device  9000  displays a certain TV program on the display screen of the mobile device  9000  (S 9501 ). Here, it is assumed that, while pressing a Move button on the mobile device  9000 , the user points the mobile device  9000  to a target apparatus (a recorder, a TV, or the like) into/on which the user wishes to store or display the TV program. 
     Here, the mobile device  9000  extracts, from the database, apparatus candidates existing in a direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  (S 9503 ). More specifically, the mobile device  9000  extracts, from the database, apparatus candidates in the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 , based on (a) 3D (relative or absolute) coordinate information of positions of the mobile device  9000  and the apparatus candidates, (b) direction information indicating the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 , (c) attitude information of each of the apparatus candidates, and (d) area information of each of the apparatus candidates. 
     Here, the mobile device  9000  determines whether or not there are a plurality of apparatuses in the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  (S 9504 ). If there are a plurality of such apparatuses (namely, apparatus candidates) (Yes at S 9504 ), then the mobile device  9000  displays a list of the apparatus candidates with their position relationships on the display screen of the mobile device  9000  (S 9505 ). 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  determines whether or not the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  is changed (S 9506 ). If the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  is changed, in other words, if the user changes the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  (Yes at S 9506 ), then the mobile device  9000  changes an apparatus candidate that is displayed at the center of the display screen to another apparatus candidate, according to the changed direction (S 9507 ). More specifically, the mobile device  9000  changes the display status of the apparatus candidates on the display screen of the mobile device  9000  according to the direction changed by the mobile device  9000 , based on a determination as to how much each of the apparatus candidates is close to the center of the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 . Here, regarding the apparatus candidate display on the display screen of the mobile device  9000 , an apparatus candidate that is at the more center of the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  is displayed at the more center in the display. It is also possible that the apparatus candidate that is at the more center of the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  is displayed higher in the display, or displayed with a target cursor. 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  confirms whether or not pressing of the Move button is detected (S 9508 ). If the mobile device detects pressing of the Move button (Yes at S 9508 ), then the processing proceeds to Step S 9509 . More specifically, when the target apparatus which the user desires to operate is displayed at the center of the display, the user presses the Move button. Then, the mobile device detects the pressing of the Move button, and thereby the processing proceeds to Step S 9310 . Here, the Move button may be a physical switch of the mobile device  9000 , or may be a virtual button displayed on a touch panel of the mobile device  9000 . Or, the Move button may be a different device logically connected to the mobile device  9000 . The above step is shown in  9227  in  FIG. 214 . 
     Next, when pressing of the Move button is detected, the mobile device  9000  specifies a certain apparatus among the apparatuses existing in the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  (S 9509 ). More specifically, when pressing of the Move button is detected, the mobile device  9000  specifies the target apparatus (a TV or a microwave, for example) selected by the user among the apparatuses existing in the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 . 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  obtains or downloads network connection information and the like of the specified apparatus from the database (S 9510 ). More specifically, the mobile device  9000  obtains or downloads, from the database in the server or the mobile device  9000 , network connection information (a MAC address, an IP address, a communication key, a communication standard, a communication protocol) of the apparatus, a performance capability of the apparatus, a program for controlling the apparatus, a script for the apparatus, and the like. 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  determines whether or not the specified apparatus has a capability of recording a target content (S 9601 ). If the specified apparatus has the recording capability (Yes at S 9601 ), then the mobile device  9000  transmits, to the specified apparatus, content source information, authentication information, recording range information together with a recording instruction regarding the content (S 9602 ). More specifically, to the specified apparatus, the mobile device  9000  transmits the recording instruction as well as information including content source information (a channel number, a content address, a content URI, and the like), a recording range (time, unit, or the like), a content sever address, a source range, authentication information (authentication protocol, a key), and the like regarding the content. 
     Subsequently, when the apparatus (specified target apparatus) receives the recording instruction and the like from the mobile device  9000 , the apparatus is connected to and receive the target content according to the recording instruction and records the content onto the apparatus itself. To the mobile device  9000 , the apparatus transmits information of the recorded content, such as a title, details, a still picture thumbnail, a video thumbnail, and the like. 
     The mobile device  9000  receives information of the content recorded on the apparatus (S 9604 ), and displays details of the recorded content on the display screen of the mobile device  9000  (S 9605 ). 
     Next, the mobile device displays a dialog for the user, in order to determine whether or not the recording by the apparatus is to be continued (S 9606 ). If the recording by the apparatus is to be continued, in other words, if the user agrees with the continuation (Yes at S 9606 ), then the mobile device  9000  causes the apparatus to continue the recording (S 9608 ). On the other hand, if the recording by the apparatus is not to be continued, in other words, if the user disagrees against the continuation (No at S 9606 ), then the mobile device  9000  causes the apparatus to stop the recording (S 9607 ). 
     Next, when the mobile device  9000  is disconnected from the apparatus (the recorder, for example) that performs the recording, the mobile device  9000  displays information of the previously displayed apparatus (the TV, for example) again (S 9609 ). 
     With the above structure, the user can record a TV program currently watched on a TV onto a recorder, without complicated processes. For example, when the user inputs information of the watching TV program to the recorder by using a remote controller of the recorder, the user does not need to switching a holding device from a remote controller of the TV to the remote controller of the recorder. 
     It should be noted that it has been described in the present embodiment that the target apparatus to be operated by the mobile device is a recorder and that the user records a TV program currently watched on a TV onto the recorder. However, the present embodiment is not limited to the above example. The apparatus may be a display apparatus. In this case, the user may displays the currently watching TV program or content on the target apparatus, instead of recording the TV program or content onto the target apparatus. As a result, the user can watch a currently-watched TV program, Web page, or content also on a different display apparatus, without necessity of inputting information of the TV program, Web page, or content by using a keyboard of a remote controller of the different display apparatus. Furthermore, a Web page which the user is watching on the mobile device can be displayed also on the display apparatus. 
     The following describes the processing from S 9609  with reference to  FIG. 219 . 
     At the beginning, it is assumed that, on the mobile device  9000 , the user is watching the same video as that displayed on the TV (S 9701 ). 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  confirms whether or not pressing of a remote control mode button on the mobile device  9000  is detected (S 9702 ). If pressing of the remote control mode button is detected (Yes at S 9702 ), then a mode on the display screen of the mobile device  9000  is switched to a remote control mode for remotely controlling the TV (S 9703 ). 
     More specifically, when the user wishes to use the mobile device  9000  as a remote controller of the TV (target apparatus), the user presses the remote control mode button displayed on the display screen of the mobile device  9000 . The mobile device  9000  therefore detects the pressing of the remote control mode button, and thereby switches a current mode on the display screen to the remote control mode for the TV. Here, the program for controlling the target apparatus (TV) which has been obtained at S 9510  includes a remote control mode button display function and a remote control mode control program (or script). 
     With the above structure, when the user points the mobile device  9000  to the TV to be controlled, the user can control the TV by using the mobile device  9000  as a remote controller, without using a remote controller of the TV. More specifically, the mobile device  9000  can display a remote control mode for the TV on the mobile device  9000 , so that user can control channels and a sound volume of the TV on the mobile device  9000 . Meanwhile, conventional mobile telephones have a problem that, if such a mobile telephone is to be used as a remote controller of a target TV, it is necessary to download TV remote control application programs and select a program suitable for the target TV from them, for example. However, the mobile device  9000  according to the present embodiment does not have the above problem. In the mobile device  9000  according to the present embodiment, a program for controlling a target TV pointed by the mobile device  9000  is automatically downloaded onto the mobile device  9000 , so that the mobile device  9000  can serve as a remote controller of the TV. As a result, it is possible to reduce complicated steps for switching to the remote control mode. 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  determines whether or not (a) a communication rate of communication between the mobile device  9000  (remote controller) and the target apparatus or (b) a use frequency of the communication are low (S 9704 ). If the use frequency or the communication rate is low (Yes at S 9704 ), then the mobile device  9000  serving as a remote controller of the TV obtains ZigBee or infrared communication protocol from the server. Therefore, the mobile device  9000  switches the current communication standard to wireless communication standard that results in lower power consumption (S 9705 ). 
     With the above structure, automatic selection of a communication standard optimal to a corresponding function can reduce power consumption of the mobile device  9000  and the peripheral apparatus (for example, the TV). 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  detects that a Lock Release button is pressed (S 9706 ). If the pressing of the Lock Release button is detected, in other words, if it is detected that the user presses the Lock Release button displayed on the display screen of the mobile device  9000  (Yes at S 9706 ), then the mobile device  9000  releases connection from the apparatus (TV or the like) (S 9707 ). 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  returns to the initial screen (S 9708 ). The above step is shown in  9228  in  FIG. 214 . 
     With the above structure, when the user wishes to cause the mobile device  9000  to execute functions of different apparatuses, it is possible to selectively switch the functions. 
       FIG. 221  is a flowchart of an example of displays of the mobile device and the cooperation apparatus, according to the present embodiment of the present invention. S 9801  to S 9807  in  FIG. 221  show an example situation where a TV program displayed on a TV is recorded onto a recorder that is a target apparatus. In  FIG. 221 , display states on the mobile device  9000  and user&#39;s actions can be intuitively understood. Since the above situation have previously been described in detail, it will not be described again below. 
     The following describes processing in the case where a cooperation apparatus which the user desires to operate by the mobile device  9000  is a microwave, with reference to  FIGS. 222 and 223 .  FIGS. 222 and 223  are flowcharts of processing in the case where the cooperation apparatus is a microwave, according to the present embodiment of the present invention. 
     At the beginning, the mobile device  9000  obtains position information of the mobile device (S 9912 ). More specifically, More specifically, the mobile device  9000  obtains position information of the mobile device  9000 , by calculating or determining a reference position (position of a reference point) of the mobile device. The calculation or determination of the reference position of the mobile device is performed, for example, by (1) searching for a target apparatus by a camera function, (2) then obtaining information detected by a distance sensor, (3) then establishing proximity wireless communication with the apparatus, and (4) receiving specific radio which enables position determination. Here, the method of obtaining the position information of the mobile device  9000  has already been described in detail with reference to  FIG. 204 , so that the description will not be repeated below. 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  displays a cooking recipe selected by the user from a Web browser or the like (S 9901 ). 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  is pointed to the desired target apparatus (S 9902 ). More specifically, in the situation where the specific recipe is displayed on the display screen of the mobile device  9000 , the user points the mobile device  9000  to the target apparatus (a microwave, a cooking machine, or the like) which the user intends to use for cooking, while pressing the Move button on the mobile device  9000 . In the above manner, the mobile device  9000  is pointed to the target apparatus. This step is shown in “C” in  FIG. 213 . 
     Here, the mobile device  9000  extracts, from the database, apparatus candidates existing in a direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  (S 9903 ). More specifically, the mobile device  9000  extracts, from the database, apparatus candidates in the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 , based on (a) 3D (relative or absolute) coordinate information of positions of the mobile device  9000  and the apparatus to be used for cooking, (b) direction information indicating the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 , (c) attitude information of the apparatus (here, a microwave  9006 ), and (d) area information of the apparatus (the microwave  9006 ). 
     Here, the mobile device  9000  determines whether or not there are a plurality of apparatus candidates in the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  (S 9904 ). If there are a plurality of such apparatus candidates (Yes at S 9904 ), then the mobile device  9000  displays a list of the apparatus candidates with their position relationships on the display screen of the mobile device  9000  (S 9905 ). 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  determines whether or not the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  is changed (S 9906 ). If the user changes the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 , in other words, if the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  is changed (Yes at S 9906 ), then the mobile device  9000  changes the display state of apparatus candidates according to the direction (S 9907 ). More specifically, the mobile device  9000  changes the display state of the apparatus candidates on the display screen of the mobile device  9000  according to the direction changed by the mobile device  9000 , based on a determination as to how much each of the apparatus candidates is closer to the center of the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 . 
     Here, regarding the apparatus candidate display on the display screen of the mobile device  9000 , an apparatus candidate closer to the center of the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  is displayed closer to the center of the display. It is also possible that the apparatus candidate closer to the center of the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  is displayed higher in the display, or displayed with a target cursor. 
     Furthermore, the mobile device detects that the pressing of the Move button is released (S 9908 ). If the release of the pressing of the Move button is detected (Yes at S 9908 ), then the processing proceeds to Step S 9910 . More specifically, when the target apparatus that the user desires to operate is displayed at the center of the display, the user presses the Move button. Then, the mobile device detects the release of the pressing of the Move button, and thereby the processing proceeds to Step S 9910 . Here, the Move button may be a physical switch of the mobile device  9000 , or may be a virtual button displayed on a touch panel of the mobile device  9000 . Or, the Move button may be a different device logically connected to the mobile device  9000 . 
     Next, if the determination at S 9908  is Yes, then the mobile device  9000  obtains or downloads, from the database, network connection information and the like of the target apparatus selected by the user (S 9910 ). More specifically, the mobile device  9000  specifies the target apparatus (here, the microwave) selected by the user from among the apparatus candidates in the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 . Then, the mobile device  9000  obtains or downloads, from the database in the server or the mobile device  9000 , network connection information (a MAC address, an IP address, a communication key, a communication standard, a communication protocol) of the specified apparatus, a performance capability of the specified apparatus, a program for controlling the specified apparatus, a script for the specified apparatus, and the like. 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  determines whether or not the specified apparatus has a capability of performing target cooking (S 9001 ). If the specified apparatus has the cooking capability (Yes at S 9001 ), then the mobile device  9000  transmits, to the specified apparatus, authentication information, recipe information, and recipe source information together with a cooking instruction (S 9602 ). Here, the recipe information indicates cooking details and a cooking method. For example, the recipe information indicates cooking processes (with a temperature, a time, and the like), such as ranging, oven-frying, mixing, kneading, baking, swearing, thawing, heating, and steaming. The recipe source information indicates a channel number, a content URL address, a content sever address, or a source range. The authentication information includes an authentication protocol, a key, and the like. 
     Subsequently, when the apparatus receives the cooking instruction and the like from the mobile device  9000 , the apparatus is connected to and receive cooking data according to the cooking instruction, and records the cooking data. The apparatus transmits the recorded cocking data such as cooking detail recipe to the mobile device  9000 . 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  receives the cooking detail recipe recorded on the apparatus (S 9004 ), and displays, on the mobile device  9000 , the cooking details to be performed by the apparatus (S 9005 ). 
     Next, the mobile device  9000  displays a dialog for the user in order to determine whether or not to start the cooking by the apparatus (S 9606 ). If the cooking is to start by the apparatus, in other words, if the user agrees with start of the cooking by the apparatus (Yes at S 9006 ), then the mobile device  9000  causes the apparatus to start cooking (S 9008 ). On the other hand, if the cooking is not to start by the apparatus, in other words, if the user disagrees against the start (No at S 9006 ), then the mobile device  9000  causes the apparatus to stop the cooking (S 9009 ). 
     Next, when the mobile device  9000  is disconnected from the cooking apparatus (for example, a cooking appliance such as a microwave), the mobile device  9000  displays information of the previously-displayed apparatus (a TV, for example) again (S 9010 ). 
     In the above-described manner, when the user wishes to cook by using a cooking recipe displayed on the mobile device  9000 , the user can start the cooking without inputting the cooking recipe into a microwave or a cooking machine. Furthermore, even if the recipe is not stored in the microwave or the cooking machine, the recipe can be recorded onto the apparatus without any complicated procedures. In addition, the cooking appliance does not need to have a device such as a browser or a touch panel. As a result, a cost of the cooking appliance can be reduced. 
     The following describes the processing in the case where, while pressing the Move button, the user points the mobile device  9000  to a target apparatus onto (a recorder, a TV, or the like) which information is to be recorded or on which information is to be displayed (namely, steps between S 9501  and S 9503  in  FIG. 217 ) with reference to steps from  9227  in  FIG. 214 . 
     At the beginning, if the user unlock (releases) the Lock button at Step  9227 a (Yes at Step  9227 a), then the mobile device  9000  returns to the previously-displayed screen (here, the screen displaying the TV). 
     On the other hand, if the user does not release the Lock button (No at Step  9227 a) and wishes to record the displayed information onto the recorder (Yes at Step  9227 b), then the user points the mobile device  9000  in a direction from “A” to “B” in  FIG. 213  while pressing the Move button (Step  9227 c). 
     The mobile device  9000  therefore detects an apparatus existing in the pointed 3D direction from 3D coordinate information by using a 3D direction sensor in the mobile device  9000 , and is thereby connected to the apparatus (here, the recorder) (Step  9227 d). Here, the display image (display on the mobile device) shown at Step  9227 e in  FIG. 214  is displayed on the display screen of the mobile device  9000 . 
     Next, if the user releases the pressing of the Move button at Step  9227 e (Step  9227 f), then the mobile device  9000  transmits a request (a recording instruction and the like) for recording a currently-displayed TV program, to the apparatus (recorder). Then, the mobile device  9000  displays the display state shown at Step  9227 g in  FIG. 214  on the display screen, and the recorder starts recording of the TV program displayed on the mobile device  9000 . 
     Furthermore, if the user changes the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000  from direction “B” to direction “A” in  FIG. 213  (Step  9227 h), then the mobile device  9000  displays the display state shown at Step  9227 i in  FIG. 214  on the display. 
     The following describes effects of the present embodiment with reference to  FIG. 213 . In  FIG. 213 , solid lines show directions of “A”, “B”, and “C”, respectively, from the mobile device  9000  to respective target apparatuses, in the case where the display screen  9001  of the mobile device  9000  is pointed to the front sides of the TV  9004 , the recorder  9005 , and the microwave  9006 , respectively. Doted lines show directions of the mobile device  9000 , in the case where the display screen  9001  of the mobile device  9000  is pointed to the rear sides of the TV  9004 , the recorder  9005 , and the microwave  9006 , respectively. In a conventional method merely using a motion sensor, which is applied to games and the like, when the display screen  9001  of the mobile device  9000  is pointed to the front side of the TV, the direction “A” is rotated to the left (in other words, in anticlockwise direction) to be switched to the direction “B”. Therefore, the target apparatus is switched from the TV  9004  to the recorder  9005  as the operator intends. However, when the display screen  9001  of the mobile device  9000  is pointed to the rear side of the TV, the direction “A” is rotated in clockwise direction, which is opposite to the anticlockwise direction, to be switched to the direction “B” to point the recorder  9005 . Therefore, the motion sensor wrongly detects that the target apparatus pointed by the mobile device  9000  is switched from the TV  9004  to the microwave  9006 . As a result, the mobile device  9000  wrongly selects the microwave and displays it on the display screen. Therefore, the mobile device  9000  performs false operation which the operator does not intends. 
     In the present embodiment, however, 3D mapping coordinate information of the TV  9004 , the recorder  9005 , and the microwave  9006  are previously registered by using NFC and the server. The mobile device  9000  also stores 3D coordinate information of the mobile device itself. Therefore, when the mobile device  9000  is moved to the rear side of the TV  9004  located at the center of a large room and then rotated in clockwise direction from the direction “A” shown by the dotted arrow to the TV  9004  to the direction “B” shown by the dotted arrow to the recorder  9005 , the mobile device  900  can correctly select the recorder  9005  to be displayed, based on the 3D coordinate information of the positions of the TV  9004 , the recorder  9005 , and the mobile device  9000  and the direction pointed by the mobile device  9000 . As a result, the screen of the mobile device  9000  can display the recorder  9005 . Furthermore, the mobile device  9000  can be linked to the recorder  9005 . As described above, the present embodiment can offer special advantages of preventing false operations. 
     Generally, there are few dozens of home appliances at home. In the present embodiment, when NFC communication is performed by touching such a home appliance by the mobile device  9000 , a distance between the mobile device  9000  and the home appliance is about 5 cm to 10 cm. If the mobile device  9000  has correct position information, the position information with accuracy of about 5 cm to 10 cm is sent to the server. In other words, in the present embodiment, the few dozens of home appliances at home are set to be reference points for position determination. Conventionally, there has been a problem that there is no reference point that is a reference in position determination so that a position in a building cannot be determined correctly. The present embodiment, however, can offer significant advantages that most of home appliances can serve as reference points. 
     (Position Information Obtainment Method in Communication Method Having Plural Transmission Paths) 
     The following describes an example of a method using radio, as the position information obtainment method. 
       FIG. 224  is a diagram for explaining a communication method for establishing a plurality of transmission paths by using a plurality of antennas and performing transmission via the transmission paths. 
     As shown in  FIG. 224 , there is a communication method, such as Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO), which uses a plurality of antennas to establish a plurality of transmission paths to transmit data. 
     The following describes a method of obtaining position information in the case where a parent device  9306  and a mobile terminal (mobile device)  9308  communicate with each other by the above-mentioned communication method. The parent device  9306  communicates with the mobile terminal  9308  via three transmission paths  9308 a,  9308 b, and  9308 c. In practice, there are nine transmission paths (3×3 transmission paths), but the following description is given under the assumption of the three transmission paths. 
     For the communication, the mobile terminal  9308  using the communication method such as MIMO calculates a transfer function A at Steps  9307 a to  9307 d, and further calculates eigenvectors X and Wi, an eigenvalue λ, and the like at Step  9307 g. Here, the nine transmission paths have respective different characteristics, such as different eigenvectors, phases, and amplitudes. More specifically, at Step  9307 a, characteristics of the respective transmission paths are extracted. At Step  9307 b, a radio field strength is measured. At Step  9307 c, transmission characteristics of the respective transmission paths are determined based on the 3D coordinate information of the mobile terminal  9308  stored in the mobile terminal itself and the direction information of the mobile terminal  9308 . At Step  9307 f, (a) transfer functions  9307 d of the respective transmission paths corresponding to the coordinate information and (b) the radio field strength  9307 e as well as (c) the 3D coordinate information and (d) the direction information are transmitted to a server  9302 . Then, the processing proceeds to Step  9350  in  FIG. 225 . 
       FIG. 225  is a flowchart for explaining a method for obtaining position information by the communication method using a plurality of transmission paths. 
     At Step  9350 , the server  9302  generates a pattern of (a) the 3D coordinate information of the mobile terminal  9406  determined at a specific time, (b) the direction of the mobile terminal  9406 , (c) transmission characteristics (transfer function, eigenvalue, eigenvector of the transmission path), and (d) the strength. 
     Subsequently, at Steps  9351 a,  9351 b, and  9351 c, the generated pattern is compressed with the transmission patterns  9352 a,  9352 b,  9352 c (in more detail, AAA, ADA, CAB, for example) corresponding to the respective pieces of 3D coordinate information (3D coordinate information  1 , 3D coordinate information  2 , 3D coordinate information  3 ), thereby mapping the patterns onto a 3D coordinate space. 
     Then, at Step  9353 a, the resulting transmission patterns (pieces of transmission information) are recorded onto a database in the server  9302  in which 3D coordinate positions are stored. Here, it is also possible to record characteristics of a change in the transmission information for a predetermined time period during which the mobile terminal  9308  is moved. 
     As described above, the pieces of transmission information (transmission patterns) are recorded onto the database in the server  9302 . Here, such transmission information (transmission pattern) of the mobile terminal  9308  is recorded in association with each user. For example, if the mobile terminal  9308  transmits position information with a low accuracy to the server, pieces of input transmission information (transmission patterns) are learned to record position information with a higher accuracy on the database. 
     Next, at Step  9353 b, it is assumed that the mobile terminal  9308  after Step  9353 a transmits current transmission information (transmission patterns) to the server  9302  in order to obtain current position information (Yes at Step  9353 ). Under the assumption, at Step  9353 c, the server  9302  matches (a) the transmission pattern transmitted from the mobile terminal  9308  with (b) each of the transmission patterns (pieces of transmission information) recorded on the database in the server  9302 . Here, it is assumed that “AAA” is searched for by using a pattern matching method. Here, fifteen circles at the lower left of  FIG. 225  schematically show transmission patterns recorded on the database in the server  9302 . 
     Next, at Step  9353 d, the server  9302  determines whether or not there is any transmission pattern candidate in the database which is similar to the transmission pattern (AAA) transmitted from the mobile terminal  9308  and the radio field strength of the mobile terminal  9308 . If there is such a candidate at Step  9353 d, then the server  9302  further determines whether or not the number of such candidates is one (Step  9353 e). If there is only one such candidate (Yes at Step  9353 e), then the server  9302  transmits, to the mobile terminal  9308 , 3D coordinate position information of the transmission pattern candidate in the database (Step  9353 g). 
     On the other hand, if there is not only one candidate (No at Step  9353 e), then the processing proceeds to Step  9353 h. At Step  9353 h, a plurality of candidates are filtered based on low-accuracy 3D coordinate information stored in the mobile terminal  9308  in order to reduce the candidates. Here, with reference to the example shown at the lower left of  FIG. 225 , at Step  9353 e, it is assumed that there are three transmission patterns of AAA, which are patterns  9355 a,  9355 b, and  9355 c. Under the assumption, at Step  9353 h, based on low-accuracy 3D coordinate information  9357  stored in the mobile terminal  9308  (shown as a bold-line circle in  FIG. 225 ), the plurality of candidates are narrowed down (filtered) to only candidates close to the mobile terminal. As a result, the number of candidates can be reduced. 
     Next, after the filtering at Step  9353 h, the server  9302  determines whether or not the number of candidates is one (Step  9353 i). If the number of candidates is not one (No at Step  9353 i), then the server  9302  instructs the mobile terminal  9308  to use the low-accuracy 3D coordinate information stored in the mobile terminal  9308  at Step  9353 f. On the other hand, if the number of candidates is one (Yes at Step  9353 i), then the server  9302  transmits 3D coordinate information of the candidate (transmission pattern) to the mobile terminal  9306  (Step  9353 j). 
     However, the mobile terminal  9308  in a room cannot obtain GPS position information from satellites. Therefore, a position of the mobile terminal  9308  in a room is determined by using the triaxial vibrating gyro, the acceleration sensor, and the geomagnetic sensor. However, as the mobile terminal  9308  is far from a reference point, more errors are accumulated to decrease an accuracy. 
     However, in the case of the method according to the present embodiment, such as MIMO, which uses a plurality of transmission paths, the number of patterns such as transfer functions is increased. Therefore, there are more transmission patterns in a room in comparison with the situation using one transmission path. Each of the patterns is changed with a move of λ/2. In other words, if a pattern from which characteristics of a transmission path are extracted is known, it is possible to determine a position with a high accuracy of λ/2. For example, in the case of 1 GHz, it is possible to determine a position with an accuracy of 15 cm. The method has a problem that there would be a plurality of identical transmission patterns in the same room. In the present embodiment, however, the mobile terminal  9308  includes the position detection unit so that false patterns can be eliminated from pieces of low-accuracy position information. Thereby, the mobile terminal  9308  can obtain high-accuracy position information. 
     Moreover, MIMO can change directions of beams emitted from a plurality of antennas. If a beam direction from the mobile terminal to the parent device is changed, it is possible to change a level of received signals such as a strength of a transmission path of a receiver, for example. Move of the mobile terminal  9308  changes the state of the transmission path. Therefore, if the 3D coordinate position of the parent device is known, the position of the mobile terminal  9308  can be calculated. 
     As described above, according to the present embodiment, a mobile device (communication device), such as a mobile telephone or a Smartphone, can easily serve as an extended user interface, such as a multiple remote controller or a home appliance content download interface, of a target apparatus, by using a RF-ID unit of the mobile device and various sensors such as a GPS and a motion sensor. 
     Although the communication device according to the present invention has been described with reference to the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above. Those skilled in the art will be readily appreciated that various modifications and combinations of the structural elements and functions in the embodiments are possible without materially departing from the novel teachings and advantages of the present invention. Accordingly, all such modifications and combinations are intended to be included within the scope of the present invention. 
     Twenty-Third Embodiment 
     The twenty-third embodiment of the present invention will be described. 
       FIG. 226  is a diagram showing an example of (a) a floor of a general home such as a user&#39;s home and (a) apparatuses related to processing performed when a user holding a mobile device (hereinafter, referred to also simply as a “mobile”) moves on the floor. In the user&#39;s home, it is assumed that home appliances such as TVs (a TV-A and a TV-B) are placed in different rooms. The location of the user is determined by a technology of determining a coordinate value of a position in the home. Such a coordinate value is stored in the mobile. A coordinate value (position information) of each of the home appliances in the home is previously registered. Therefore, for example, if the user wishes to control one TV (the TV-A) in a bedroom, the user points the mobile device to the TV. As a result, the mobile device recognizes that the mobile device is pointed to the TV, based on a relative relationship between the coordinate value of the mobile device and the coordinate value of the TV. Therefore, the mobile device specifies the TV to be controlled, and sends a command to control the target TV. It should be noted in  FIG. 226  that the map information of the home, which is used by the mobile device to determine positions, may be held in the mobile device, in a home server such as the SEG ( 401 c), or in a server connected to the mobile device via the Internet. The home server is connected to the mobile device via a public network of the mobile device or via a wireless LAN access point ( 401 e). It is preferable that, as long as the map information is stored in the home server, the home server can provide the map information to the mobile device even if the Internet line is not connected. What is more, the map information can be managed without consuming a storage (region for storing data) of the mobile device more than needs. 
     The following describes a flow of processing by which a user, who holds the mobile device  401 a and is first near a building (user&#39;s home or the like) before entering the building, starts determining a position of the mobile device in the building by using a sensor in the mobile device. 
     With reference to  FIG. 227 , the processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building is described. 
     At the beginning, at Step  402 a, the mobile device determines whether or not a GPS sensor or a function of detecting radio waves in the building in the mobile device is running. If the GPS sensor or the function is running (Yes), then the processing proceeds to Step  402 c. At Step  402 c, the mobile device determines whether or not coordinate information of a current position of the mobile device which are detected by the GPS sensor are close to the target building (user&#39;s home, for example) that has been registered, or whether or not the mobile device detects waves emitted from an apparatus in the target building which is to be connected via wireless LAN. Thereby, the mobile device detects whether or not the mobile device is close to the target building. If it is detected that the mobile device is close to the target building (Yes at Step  402 c), then the processing proceeds to Step  402 d. If the determination at Step  402 c is No, then the processing is repeated until the determination at Step  402 c becomes Yes. On the other hand, if the determination at Step  402 a is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  402 b. At Step  402 b, the user at the entrance of the building (user&#39;s home) selects an “indoor position determination mode” on a user interface of the mobile device in order to start position determination in the building. Then, the processing proceeds to Step  402 d. At Step  402 d, if the angular velocity sensor, the geomagnetism sensor, and the acceleration sensor of the mobile device are not running, then the mobile device activates these sensors and the processing proceeds to Step  402 e. At Step  402 e, it is determined whether or not a map and reference point information can be obtained from a map management server on a Cloud system or from a SEG (server in the user&#39;s home). If the determination at Step  402 e is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  402 f. At Step  402 f, the mobile device obtains the map and the reference point information. The reference point information indicates positions that are to be used as reference positions when a move amount of the mobile device is measured by a sensor in the mobile device and then converted into a coordinate value of a current position. In the reference point information, coordinate values of such reference points on the map are previously registered. The mobile device detects such a reference point and obtains a coordinate value of the reference point, thereby setting coordinate information which is stored in the mobile device as a current position of the mobile device. These reference points are characteristic parts on the map, such as an entrance, a foot of stairs, and an end of a corridor. The reference points also include positions of home appliances, chairs, sofas, and the like. 
     If the mobile device has an enough storage, the mobile device holds the map and the reference point information. How to store and obtain the map and the reference point information is not limited. It is also possible that the map and the reference point information are stored in the SEG or the server on the Cloud system, and the mobile device inquires the SEG or the server on the Cloud system about the map and the reference point information based on detection results of the sensor in the mobile device, so that the mobile device performs, via a network, the same processing as that in the case where the mobile device holds the map and the reference point information. 
     It is further possible that the mobile device obtains a limited part of the map and a limited part of the reference point information, regarding only a location close to a position of the mobile device. More specifically, as the mobile device is moved, the mobile device may download a part of the map and a part of the reference point information from the SEG or from the server on the Cloud system. If the determination at Step  402 e is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  402 g. At Step  402 g, the mobile device detects a predetermined characteristic change pattern (a move of a sliding door indicated by repetition of a previously-measured angle change, or a move on stairs indicated by a vertical acceleration change, for example). If such a pattern is detected at Step  402 g (Yes), then the processing proceeds to Step  402 h. At Step  402 h, it is determined whether or not a “similar characteristic change pattern” similar to the detected pattern is registered in the mobile device. If the determination at Step  402 h is Yes, then the processing proceeds to “ 1 ” in  FIG. 228 . If the determination at Step  402 g is No, then the detection routine is repeated until the determination at Step  402 g becomes Yes. 
     Here, the characteristic change pattern at Step  402 g is, for example, a change G in a vertical direction of an acceleration in a Z-axis (vertical) direction which indicates that the user holding the mobile device ascends three steps of stairs within three seconds. The detection of the change indicates that the user holding the mobile device reaches a height of a floor of the entrance. Then, within five seconds, for example, the angular velocity sensor detects that a Yew direction is changed by 90 degrees, which indicates that the user faces the entrance. 
     In this case, it is recognized that opening of a door is a user&#39;s usual action. As a result, it is determined that the mobile device is currently close to a reference point near the entrance door. In the situation, if the sensor in the mobile device detects that the user is almost still for five seconds, for example, it is determined that the user is unlocking a key of the entrance. If the server or the mobile device holds coordinate information of the position in front of the entrance, position information of the mobile device is updated to the coordinate information. Then, the absolute coordinate system indicated by latitude/longitude of GPS information is switched to the relative coordinate system in the building. The switch to the relative coordinate system can eliminate conversion to coordinates to latitude/longitude, and also reduce conversion errors. 
     The following describes the situation where the entrance door has a RF-ID (NFC) lock. Regarding the RF-ID according to the present embodiment, coordinate information and a coordinate accuracy evaluation point Vs are recorded on the lock or the server. When the mobile device touches the lock, a distance between the mobile device and an antenna unit of the lock is within 5 cm. Therefore, if a coordinate accuracy evaluation point Vm of coordinate information of a position of the mobile device is greater than the coordinate accuracy evaluation point Vs, coordinate information of the lock is replaced by the coordinate information of the mobile device. On the other hand, if the coordinate accuracy evaluation point Vm of the mobile device is smaller than the coordinate accuracy evaluation point Vs, the above replacement is not performed. According to the present embodiment, coordinate information and a coordinate accuracy evaluation point of the coordinate information are recorded on a RF-ID unit of an apparatus such as an air conditioner or a TV or on a server corresponding to the apparatus, so that, every time the mobile device touches the apparatus, higher-accuracy coordinate information and a higher-accuracy evaluation point are updated. As a result, the accuracy of position coordinate information of each apparatus is increased for every touching. 
     Regarding an apparatus having a RF-ID function, coordinate information and a coordinate accuracy evaluation point of the apparatus are recorded as shown in  FIG. 260 . 
       FIG. 228  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building. At Step  403 a, the mobile device specifies a target reference point (the entrance, for example) based on the data change pattern generated by the sensor in the mobile device, and then obtains a coordinate value (a relative coordinate value with respect to an arbitrary reference point as an initial position, an absolute coordinate value based on latitude/longitude and sea level, or the like) of the reference point based on the map and the reference point information. At Step  403 b, the mobile device determines that a current position of the mobile device is the reference point, and writes the coordinate value of the reference point over the current position information stored in the mobile device. At Step  403 c, by using the angular velocity sensor, the geomagnetism sensor, and the acceleration sensor, the mobile device starts measuring move of the mobile device from the reference point. At Step  403 d, the mobile device determines a current position (current coordinate information) of the mobile device on a 3D space based on the information (move information) of the move from the reference point, and registers the 3D coordinate information of the current position. The Step  403 d is repeated during move. At Step  403 e, the mobile device determines based on the move information whether or not the mobile device moves without obvious ascending action using stairs or a lift on the map. At Step  403 f, the mobile device determines whether or not the current coordinate information is higher height information. The height information is a height of the user holding the mobile device, which is obtained from the mobile device or from the server (the SEG, the server on a Cloud system, or the like). If the height information cannot be obtained, an average height (170 cm, for example) in the corresponding country or region is obtained from preset information in the SEG, the server, or the mobile device. If the current coordinate information is higher than the height, the coordinate information is modified to be lower than the height and then the processing proceeds to “ 2 ” in  FIG. 229 . 
     Here, at Step  403 c, the use of the angular velocity sensor, the geomagnetic sensor, and the acceleration sensor enables the mobile device to measure a move amount of the user to determine a 3D position of the user. It is also possible to use a sound sensor, an atmospheric pressure sensor, and the like to detect a location or a floor number where sound occurs. As a result, an accuracy of the position determination can be further increased. 
     According to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the situation where the sensors in the mobile device are always ON whenever the mobile device is inside and outside a target building. As described in the example of the present embodiment, the sensors for determining positions inside the building are turned ON only when the mobile device is detected as being close to the building. When the mobile device is not close to the building, the mobile device is at a sleep mode or turned OFF to save energy, if other application programs such as games are not used. 
     Furthermore, the angular velocity sensor is turned OFF or switched to a sleep mode, when the mobile device exists on a straight-line part on the map of the building, such as a path along which only rectilinear travel is possible. It is also possible to use the geomagnetic sensor to determine a direction. Then, the angular velocity sensor is turned ON at a curved part or a fork in the path. For example, the existing common triaxial angular velocity sensors consume energy of about 5 mA to 10 mA. Turning ON and OFF of the angular velocity sensor as necessary can reduce power consumption. Moreover, the existing common geomagnetic sensors consume energy of about 1 mA that is less than that of the common angular velocity sensors. Therefore, when high-accurate angular velocity detection and attitude detection by the angular velocity sensor are not necessary, it is possible to use only the geomagnetic sensor to detect the attitude of the mobile device. 
       FIG. 229  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building. 
     At Step  404 a, it is determined whether or not area information (coordinate value) indicating respective areas such as a living room and a bedroom, are previously set in the map information (the map). If the determination at Step  404 a is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  404 b. At Step  404 b, the mobile device obtains the area information indicating rooms on the map, with reference to the map information stored in the mobile device. At Step  404 c, based on coordinate information of the mobile device and the obtained area information, the mobile device specifies a room where the mobile device exists (X 1 , Y 1 , Z 1 &lt;Xm, Ym, Zm&lt;X 2 , Y 2 , Z 2 ). At Step  404 d, the mobile device displays a room name (living room, for example) of the specified room on the screen of the mobile device. At Step  404 e, with reference to the map information stored in the mobile device, the mobile device specifies controllable apparatuses existing in a direction pointed by the head of the mobile device. At Step  404 f, the mobile device determines, based on a previously-set coordinate value of the equipped position of each of the specified apparatus, whether or not the apparatus is in the room where the mobile device exists. It is also possible to make the determination based on a previously-set room name, if any. At Step  404 g, the mobile device generates an apparatus list to be presented to the user. In the apparatus list, apparatuses in the room where the mobile device exists are distinguished from apparatuses not in the room. For example, the different groups of the apparatuses are displayed in respective different color frames. Then, the processing proceeds to “ 3 ” in  FIG. 233 . If the determination at Step  404 a is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  404 h. At Step  404 h, with reference to the map information stored in the mobile device, the mobile device specifies controllable apparatuses existing in a direction pointed by the head of the mobile device. At  404 i, the mobile device generates an apparatus list to be presented to the user. Then, the processing proceeds to Step “ 3 ” in  FIG. 233 . Here, the geomagnetic sensor and the acceleration sensor detect a direction of gravitational force, and the angular velocity sensor generates attitude information indicating a direction and a vertical angle of the mobile device. Based on the detection results, the mobile device determines the direction which the user intends to point by the mobile device. 
     As described above, by recognizing a room where the mobile device is, it is possible to control a target apparatus (TV, for example) in the room, even if there are two TVs in different rooms. 
     Furthermore, the acceleration sensor counts the number of user&#39;s steps to measure a move amount, thereby enhancing an accuracy of the acceleration sensor. The move amount measurement is calculated by multiplying the number of steps by a move amount of one step (step length). Here, after the mobile device recognizes the room where the mobile device is, the mobile device obtains a type of the room from the map. The step length varies depending on a kind of the floor (wooden floor, carpet, or the like) of each room. Therefore, the move amount measurement is performed by using an appropriate step length for each floor, in order to increase an accuracy of the move amount detection. For example, the step length is 70 cm for a wooden floor, and 60 cm for carpet. 
       FIG. 230  is a diagram showing an example of information indicating an area of a room on the 3D map. If a shape of a room is complicated and is not a simple cuboid, such a room is considered as a combination of a plurality of cuboids. In this case, the room (area) where the mobile device exists is specified by determining which of the cuboids in the room includes the current coordinate information of the mobile device. 
       FIG. 231  is a diagram showing a move of the mobile device near a reference point. 
     As shown in  FIG. 231 , when it is detected that the mobile device ( 406 a) having the angular velocity sensor at a sleep mode ( 406 b) enters an area (range) within 3 meters from the reference point, the angular velocity sensor is turned ON ( 406 c) to detect the reference point with a higher accuracy. Until the mobile device enters the range, a position of the mobile device is recognized by sensors such as the acceleration sensor and the geomagnetic sensor, by calculating a speculative coordinate value of the position on the map based on a move amount measured from an immediately prior reference point passed by the mobile device. 
       FIG. 232  is a diagram showing a location to be detected with a high accuracy in a direction of moving the mobile device. 
     For example, as shown in  FIG. 232 , a door between a bed room and an entrance is not far from a door between the bed room and a living room. Here, it is assumed that the mobile device enters a range (within 3 meters, for example) from a reference point ( 407 b). At the reference point ( 407 b), map-matching is difficult because inaccurate detection of user&#39;s turning causes the current position of the mobile device to vary depending on the respective rooms on the map. In this case, it is possible to increase an accuracy of the map matching, by operating the angular velocity sensor during a certain time period (for 10 seconds, for example). 
       FIG. 233  is a flowchart of processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building. 
     At Step  408 a, the mobile device obtains a current coordinate value (current coordinate information) of the mobile device. At Step  408 b, it is determined, based on the map, whether or not there is any reference point or any attention point in a range within 3 meters from the current coordinate information on the map. If the determination at Step  408 b is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  408 c. On the other hand, if the determination at Step  408 b is No, then the processing returns to Step  408 a. At Step  408 c, the mobile device refers to a list of sensors to be used near the reference point or the attention point. At Step  408 d, the mobile device obtains detection information detected by the target “angular velocity sensor” and time information (10 seconds, 5 seconds after arrival). At Step  408 e, a sleep mode of the angular velocity sensor is released to start measurement. At Step  408 f, if a pattern of a detection result of the sensor regarding the reference point or the attention point is detected (Yes), then the processing proceeds to Step  408 g. At Step  408 g, it is determined whether or not the predetermined time period of 5 seconds has passed. If the determination at Step  408 g is Yes, then the processing is completed. On the other hand, if the determination at Step  408 g is No, then the step is repeated until the determination at Step  408 g is Yes. If the determination at Step  408 f is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  408 h. At Step  408 h, it is determined whether or not a time period of 10 seconds has passed. If the determination at Step  408 h is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  408 i. At Step  408 i, the mobile device counts a discovery rate within the time period (decrement by 1 count). At Step  408 j, the time information on the list is overwritten to be extended. In the case where the list is obtained from the server, the mobile device notifies the server of the time information to be written over the list, and then the processing returns to Step  408 a. 
       FIG. 234  is a table of moves of the mobile device near reference points and an attention point. 
     The table ( 409 a) shown in  FIG. 234  indicates sensors to be activated by the mobile device in order of priorities. The sensors are prioritized according to reference points and an attention point on the map. The attention point is a position near a range where map-matching errors are likely to occur. The table also indicates a time of activation and an operating time period during which each of the sensors is to be kept operating after detecting each of the reference points and the attention point. Based on the table, it is possible to realize higher-accuracy detection of the reference points and the attention point. Furthermore, the table shows a discovery rate within the operating time period. The discovery rate indicates a percentage of discovery of each of the reference points and the attention point, within the operating time period since the mobile terminal enters the range near the reference point or the attention point and activates the sensor indicated in the table. The table further indicates an error rate. The error rate indicates a rate of case(s) where it is determined, based on the detection data after map-matching, an actual position is different from a result of map-matching. Therefore, the operating time period is set longer when the discovery rate is lower, while the operating time period is set shorter when the discovery rate is higher. As a result, it is possible to reduce the operating time period to save energy. Moreover, if a rate of map-matching errors is high, a distance for detecting the range near the reference point or attention point is extended (from 3 meters to 5 meters), instead of extending the operating time period of the sensor. As a result, it is possible to increase an accuracy of discovery of the reference points and the attention point. On the other hand, if a rate of map-matching errors is low, the distance for detecting the range is shortened to decrease the operating time period of the sensor, thereby saving energy. 
     The attention points include areas where a detection accuracy of each sensor is decreased. For example, the geomagnetic sensor produces significant noises near a TV or in a space having magnetic force. If the mobile device detects noise causing the geomagnetic sensor to point an apparently wrong direction, the mobile device registers a location causing the noise, as an attention point, onto the map. When the mobile device enters a vicinity of an attention point, the angular velocity sensor is activated to correct the wrong direction detection. Furthermore, if the mobile device detects noise but a location of the noise has not yet been registered as an attention point on the map, the mobile device immediately activates the angular velocity sensor to correct wrong detection and registers the location as an attention point on the map. Furthermore, regarding coordinate information (coordinate point) where the user always changes a way of holding the mobile device on a steep slope or on stairs, when the angular velocity sensor arrives at a position where an accuracy of the angular velocity sensor is likely to be influenced by change of a direction of gravitational force, the mobile device corrects detection of the sensor to increase the accuracy and a sampling amount. Moreover, when the geomagnetic sensor is not operated, the geomagnetic sensor is activated to perform the correction. It is determined whether or not coordinate information (coordinate value), from which a change of a position of the mobile device is detected, is always near the location where such position change is always occurred according to a state of the user. If such position change is always occurred at the location, the coordinate information (coordinate value) is registered as an attention point. 
     With reference to  FIG. 235 , the processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building is described. 
     At the beginning, at Step  410 a, the mobile device determines whether or not the mobile device detects (a) coordinate information of a range near the user&#39;s home by GPS, (b) an access point of a wireless LAN in the user&#39;s home, or (c) one of access points of the wireless LAN in the user&#39;s home which have previously been detected in the user&#39;s home. If the determination at Step  410 a is No, then the mobile device waits until the determination becomes Yes. If the determination at Step  410 a is Yes, then at Step  410 b, the mobile device specifies a sensor for detecting a reference point passing in entering the home, from a reference point detection sensor priority list shown in  FIG. 236  that indicates priorities of sensors for detecting reference points. Here, it is assumed that the mobile device specifies the acceleration sensor at Step  410 c, and the acceleration sensor detects G (acceleration) in a Z-axis direction which indicates a registered acceleration pattern (for example, three steps of stairs). In this case, the mobile device determines that the mobile device is currently positioned at previously-registered coordinate information (coordinate value) of the reference point. Therefore, the coordinate value is set in the mobile device. Then, the processing proceeds to “ 4 ” in  FIG. 237 . 
     Here, in addition to Step  410 c, a direction of move on the stairs is determined based on G (acceleration) on a moving direction axis (X-axis) which is detected by the geomagnetic sensor. Then, it is determined whether or not the determined direction is the same as the direction of the stairs which is previously detected and registered on the map. If the detected direction is not the same as the registered direction of the stairs, it is possible to determine that the stairs are not a target reference point. 
       FIG. 236  is a list indicating priorities of sensors for detecting each of reference points. 
     As shown in the list  411 a, since priorities of sensors to be activated are varied depending on a kind of a target reference point. For example, when an entrance door is to be detected, the sound sensor can correctly detect the entrance door by examining a similarity of sound caused by a key hole of the entrance door. However, the sound sensor has a difficulty in detecting a door of a living room because a door of a living room does not make loud sound. Therefore, the acceleration sensor instead of the sound sensor can detect the living room door, because the user ascends one step to a height of the floor in entering the living room. More specifically, detection of a vertical move by the acceleration sensor can provide more efficient characteristic pattern than the sound detection by the sound sensor. As a result, the acceleration sensor is prioritized higher than the sound sensor for the living room door. 
     For example, with reference to the list  411 a, in the normal operation, two highest sensors in the order of priorities in the list are always operated. Here, if the two highest-priority sensors do not provide effective detection even after a certain time period, the third priority sensor is also operated. On the other hand, if the two highest-priority sensors are enough to provide effective detection, only the highest-priority sensor is operated to be used. Therefore, depending on characteristics of a reference point and the detection state, sensors to be operated are selected. As a result, it is possible to performing the detection using only necessary sensors, thereby saving energy consumption and increasing the detection accuracy. Furthermore, if a battery of the mobile device has enough charges, lower-priority sensors are also operated, for example, three highest sensors are always operated. As a result, it is possible to increase the detection accuracy without decreasing usability. 
     With reference to  FIG. 237 , the processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building is described. 
     For example, at Step  412 a, if an amount of acceleration components in a minus direction along the Z-axis is large (Yes), it is determined at Step  412 b that the user is ascending stairs. At Step  412 c, the number “n” of user&#39;s steps on the stairs is counted. At Step  412 d, a position of the user is determined based on a radio field strength and a phase of access points of the wireless LAN, and thereby stairs A is specified from among plural sets of stairs. At Step  412 f, if the number “n” of the user&#39;s steps reaches the number “m” of steps of the stairs A that is obtained from the memory in the server or the mobile device, or if the atmospheric pressure sensor detects a certain atmospheric pressure (Yes), then the processing proceeds to Step  412 g. At Step  412 g, it is determined that the user is at the top of the stairs, then coordinate information of the top step and a coordinate accuracy evaluation point Vs of the coordinate information are obtained from the server, and the processing proceeds to “ 5 ” in  FIG. 238 . On the other hand, if the determination at Step  412 f is No, then the processing returns to Step  412 c. If the determination at Step  412 a is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  412 h. At Step  412 h, if an amount of acceleration components in a plus direction along the Z-axis is large (Yes), then it is determined at Step  412 i that the user is descending stairs. At Step  412 k, the number of user&#39;s steps on the stairs is counted. At Step  412 m, a position of the user is determined based on a radio field strength and a phase of access points of the wireless LAN, and thereby stairs A is specified from among plural sets of stairs. At Step  412 n, if the number of the user&#39;s steps reaches the number “m” of steps of the stairs A that is obtained from the memory in the server or the mobile device, or if the atmospheric pressure sensor detects a certain atmospheric pressure (Yes), then the processing proceeds to Step  412 p. At Step  412 p, it is determined that the user is at the bottom of the stairs, then coordinate information of the bottom step and a coordinate accuracy evaluation point Vs of the coordinate information are obtained from the server, and the processing proceeds to “ 5 ” in  FIG. 238 . On the other hand, if the determination at Step  412 p is No, then the processing returns to Step  412 k. 
     With reference to  FIG. 238 , the processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building is described. 
     At Step  413 a, the coordinate accuracy evaluation point Vm of the coordinate information measured by the mobile device is retrieved from the mobile device. At Step  413 b, if Vs is greater than Vm, in other words, if the coordinate information registered in the server is accurate more than the coordinate information stored in the mobile device (Yes), then the processing proceeds to Step  413 c. At Step  413 c, the coordinate information stored in the mobile device is rewritten by the coordinate information registered in the server. At Step  413 g, the setting of the coordinate information of the reference point at the stairs has been completed. Then, the processing proceeds to “ 2 ” in  FIG. 229 . If the determination at Step  413 b is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  413 d. At Step  413 d, the coordinate information stored in the mobile device is not rewritten by the coordinate information registered in the server. At Step  413 e, if an automatic rewriting flag for automatically rewriting the coordinate information registered in the server as the coordinate information stored in the mobile device is ON, or if the user agrees (OK) with the screen display “Can it be written?” (Yes), then the processing proceeds to Step  413 f. At Step  413 f, the coordinate information registered in the server is rewritten as the coordinate information stored in the mobile device. At Step  413 g, the setting of the coordinate information of the reference point at the stairs has been completed. Then, the processing proceeds to “ 2 ” in  FIG. 229 . If the determination at Step  413 e is No, then at Step  413 g, the setting of the coordinate information of the reference point at the stairs has been completed. Then, the processing returns to “ 2 ” in  FIG. 229 . 
       FIG. 239  shows graphs each indicating detection data in the Z-axis (vertical) direction which is detected by the acceleration sensor. 
     As shown in a pattern  414 a in  FIG. 239 , when the user ascends stairs, an acceleration is high in a minus direction along the vertical Z-axis which is an ascending direction, and such acceleration is periodically detected ( 414 a). On the other hand, when the user descends stairs, an acceleration is high in a plus direction along the vertical Z-axis which is a descending direction, and such acceleration is periodically detected ( 414 b). Moreover, when the user walks horizontally, an acceleration in the minus direction and an acceleration in the plus direction are almost the same along the vertical direction ( 414 c). In the graphs in  FIG. 239 , gravity measured by the acceleration sensor in the steady state is not considered to simplify the explanation. 
     With reference to  FIG. 240 , the processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building is described. 
     At the beginning, at Step  415 a, the mobile device determines whether or not the mobile device detects (a) coordinate information of a range near the user&#39;s home by GPS, (b) an access point of a wireless LAN in the user&#39;s home, or (c) one of access points of the wireless LAN in the user&#39;s home which have previously been detected in the user&#39;s home. If the determination at Step  415 a is No, then the mobile device waits until the determination becomes Yes. If the determination at Step  415 a is Yes, then at Step  415 b, the mobile device specifies a sensor for detecting reference points in user&#39;s entrance from the reference point detection sensor priority list  411 a. At Step  415 c, if the sound sensor is specified from the obtained list, the mobile device of the user (hereinafter, referred to as a “user&#39;s mobile device”) accesses a previously-registered mobile device (for example, a mobile device of a family member, hereinafter, referred to as “family mobile device”) that is going to enter the building (the user&#39;s home), via proximity wireless communication such as a cellular network, a wireless LAN, or a booster transformer (BT). Thereby, the user&#39;s mobile device inquires the family mobile device whether or not the family mobile device is near the building. At Step  415 d, if there is such a mobile device (the family mobile device, for example) near the user&#39;s mobile device and the family mobile device is permitted to enter the building to receive position determination services, the user&#39;s mobile device inquires a coordinate value (coordinate information) of the family mobile device. Then, the user&#39;s mobile device determines whether or not the a distance between the position of the family mobile device (the obtained coordinate value) and a position of a reference point (a reference value) is shorter than a distance between the position of the user&#39;s mobile device and the position of the reference point. If the distance between the family mobile device and the reference point is shorter than the distance between the user&#39;s mobile device and the reference point, then the processing proceeds to Step  415 f. At Step  415 f, the user&#39;s mobile device examines the reference point detection sensor priority list to select another detection method except sound. At Step  415 g, by the selected detection method, the user&#39;s mobile device detects that the user&#39;s mobile device moves to the reference point, then sets coordinate value (coordinate information) of the reference point to the user&#39;s mobile device, and the processing proceeds to “ 6 ” in  FIG. 241 . 
     If it is determined at Step  415 d that the distance between the family mobile device and the reference point is longer than the distance between the user&#39;s mobile device and the reference point, then the processing proceeds to Step  415 e. At Step  415 e, the user&#39;s mobile device determines whether or not sound emitted at the current position of the user&#39;s mobile device matches previously-registered sound (sound of a door knob, or sound of a key). If the determination at Step  415 e is Yes, the user&#39;s mobile device determines that the current position of the user&#39;s mobile device is a reference point and sets a coordinate value of the reference point into the user&#39;s mobile device. Then, the processing proceeds to “ 6 ” in  FIG. 236 . 
     With reference to  FIG. 241 , the processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building is described. 
     At Step  416 a, an amount of a move of the mobile device from a reference point is calculated for each predetermined time period (10 ms) by the acceleration sensor, the angular velocity sensor, and the geomagnetism sensor, so that an estimated coordinate value (estimated coordinate information) of the mobile device is registered in the mobile device for each of the calculation by using an automatic navigation method. At Step  416 b, the mobile device (i) detects the user&#39;s walk based on a results of detecting the Z-axis accelerations, (ii) detects a time at which the user&#39;s foot touches the floor, and (iii) detects one or more sounds occurred at a target time, and (iv) detects a moment at which sound is changed. At Step  416 c, a pattern of the sound change is compared with previously-registered patterns resulting from differences between floors, such as a difference between a wooden floor and a carpet. If the pattern is similar to one of the previously-registered patterns, then the processing proceeds to Step  416 d. At Step  416 d, a direction of the move of the mobile device (hereinafter, referred to as a “moving direction”) is detected by the geomagnetism sensor and the angular velocity sensor. Then, coordinate information of the mobile device is corrected to coordinates of an intersection between (a) the moving direction and (b) a straight line drawn from a coordinate value (coordinate information) that is currently registered as current position information in the mobile device (or corrected to a position that is the closest to the intersection). Then, the processing proceeds to “ 7 ” in  FIG. 242 . On the other hand, if the pattern is not similar to any of the previously-registered patterns, then the processing proceeds to “ 7 ” in  FIG. 242 . 
       FIG. 242  shows graphs and a diagram for showing a relationship between detection data and a walker in the acceleration Z-axis (vertical) direction. 
     As shown in  417 a, a walking state can be detected based on acceleration. By detecting times ( 417 b,  417 c) at each of which a foot touches a floor, it is possible to extract, based on the detected time, only a footstep sound from sound occurred in walking. As a result, a difference of footstep sounds can be detected more efficiently. As shown in  417 d, when the user moves from a living room having a wooden floor to an European-style room having a carpet floor, it is determined that a time of the footstep sound change point  417 e is a time where the user walks across a boundary between the living room and the European-style room ( 417 f). As a result, a coordinate value (coordinate information of a current position) of the mobile device is corrected based on the map. 
       FIG. 243  shows a diagram showing an example of moves in the building. 
     The mobile device detects a reference point  418 a, and can calculate an accuracy of a coordinate value of a position of a TV-A based on (a) an amount  418 b of turning towards the TV-A and (b) an accuracy of a coordinate value of the reference point  418 a on the map. More specifically, if the turning amount  418 b is large, the accuracy of the coordinate value of the position of the TV-A which is recognized by the mobile device is set low. On the other hand, if the turning amount  418 b is small, the accuracy is set high. The resulting accuracy information of the reference point is registered. Likewise, for a move from the TV-A to a TV-B, an accuracy of a coordinate value of a position of the TV-B is calculated based on (a) the accuracy information of the coordinate value of the TV-A and (b) a turning amount or a move amount along the Z-axis ( 418 c), and eventually the calculated accuracy information is registered. 
       FIG. 244  is a table indicating a path of the mobile device from a reference point to a next reference point. 
     In the table  419 a, path information includes: (a) original reference point accuracy information that is accuracy information of an immediately-prior reference point which the mobile device has passed; (b) a move amount; (c) the number of steps (step number) calculated by the acceleration sensor; (d) a total turning amount that is calculated by the angular velocity sensor and the geomagnetic sensor; (e) an elapsed time; and (f) a total amount of a vertical move along the Z-axis. An accuracy evaluation point (coordinate accuracy evaluation point) of a current position of the mobile device is calculated based on values of the above pieces of information. 
       FIG. 245  shows a table and a diagram for explaining the original reference point accuracy information. 
     As shown in the table  420 a, the reference point A such as an entrance, the TV-A, the TV-B, and their reference point accuracy information are registered. As shown in an example in  FIG. 245 , a coordinate accuracy evaluation point of the TV-A is calculated based on the coordinate accuracy evaluation point of the reference point A and a path  1  ( 420 b). A coordinate accuracy evaluation point of the TV-B is calculated based on the coordinate accuracy evaluation point of the TV-A and a path  2  ( 420 c). 
     The calculated coordinate accuracy evaluation points are stored as map information and kept updating. The updating may be performed for each time the mobile device reaches a target reference point. It is also possible to accumulate coordinate accuracy evaluation points of a target reference point, predetermined times, and calculate statistics from them. For example, 10 coordinate accuracy evaluation points are averaged. 
     With reference to  FIG. 246 , the processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building is described. 
     At Step  421 a, a first reference point is detected. At Step  421 b, a coordinate value of a current position of the mobile device is rewritten by a coordinate value of the first reference point. At Step  421 c, coordinate accuracy evaluation point information that indicates an accuracy of the coordinate value of the first reference point is obtained from reference point information. The first reference point is considered as an original reference point in a path list. At Step  421 d, a move from the first reference point is measured by the angular velocity sensor, the geomagnetic sensor, and the acceleration sensor, and then stored. At Step  421 e, it is determined whether or not the mobile device arrives at a second reference point or touches an apparatus having a RF-ID function for communication which is located at the second reference point. If the determination at Step  421 e is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  421 f. At Step  421 f, the mobile device obtains information of the second reference point (reference point information) or information of the apparatus (apparatus information). Then, at Step  421 g, the mobile device obtains coordinate accuracy evaluation point information of the second reference point or the apparatus based on the reference point information or the apparatus information. The coordinate accuracy evaluation point information is obtained from the server (SEG, for example) or from the mobile device itself, in the same manner as described in the case where the mobile device touches the apparatus, such as a home appliance having a RF-ID function, which is located at the second reference point. Then, the processing proceeds to “ 8 ” in  FIG. 242 . On the other hand, if the determination at Step  421 e is No, then the processing returns to Step  421 d. 
     With reference to  FIG. 247 , the processing of determining a position of the mobile device in the building is described. 
     At Step  422 a, a coordinate accuracy evaluation point of the second reference point or the apparatus is calculated based on the path information. At Step  422 b, if the coordinate accuracy evaluation point calculated by the mobile device is higher than coordinate accuracy evaluation point that has been previously calculated and registered (Yes), then the processing proceeds to Step  422 c. At Step  422 c, 3D coordinate information and the coordinate accuracy evaluation point of the second reference point or the apparatus which are currently calculated are written over 3D coordinate information and the coordinate accuracy evaluation point which are registered. If the determination at Step  422 b is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  422 d. At Step  422 d, the 3D coordinate information of the second reference point or the apparatus which is registered is obtained. At Step  422 e, the obtained 3D coordinate information is overwritten as a coordinate value of a current position of the mobile device. Then, the processing returns to “ 2 ” in  FIG. 229 . 
     The following describes a position determination method regarding a lift with reference to  FIGS. 248 and 249 . 
     First,  FIG. 248  is explained. 
     At Step  423 a, it is determined whether or not the user holding the mobile device arrives at a position of a lift. If the determination at Step  423 a is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  423 b. Otherwise (No at Step  423 a), Step  423 a is repeated. 
     At Step  423 b, it is determined whether or not the user holding the mobile device enters the lift. If the user holding the mobile device enters the lift (Yes at Step  423 b), then the processing proceeds to Step  423 c. Otherwise (No at Step  423 b), Step  423 b is repeated. 
     If there are a plurality of lifts having different performance in the building, it is determined at Step  423 c, based on position information, which lift the user enters and on which floor (floor number) the lift currently exists. At Step  423 d, the mobile device obtains “characteristic information” of the target lift from the server. The characteristic information includes: (a) a time period required to ascend or descend from the n-th floor to the m-th floor; (b) information of Ts and load change characteristics; (c) an absolute or relative height of each floor; and (d) a position of a lift door on each floor. At Step  423 e, a vertical acceleration along the Z-axis is measured. At Step  423 f, if an acceleration in the same direction as the gravity direction is increased, or if atmospheric pressure is decreased, it is determined that the user starts ascending in the lift. Therefore, measurement of an elapsed time of the ascending starts. At step  423 g, if an acceleration in the same direction as the gravity direction is decreased, or if increase of atmospheric pressure stops, it is determined that the ascending stops. Therefore, the measurement of the elapsed time is stopped to calculate the elapsed time TA. At Step  423 h, information of a “time period required from the n-th floor to the m-th floor” is calculated based on (a) the floor from which ascending starts, (b) the elapsed time TA, and (c) the required time period information of the lift, and then information of a “floor (floor number) at which the mobile device arrives” is determined based on the “time period required from the n-th floor to the m-th floor”. At Step  423 i, it is determined whether or not the mobile device is moved outside the lift. If the determination at Step  423 i is Yes, then the processing proceeds to “ 9 ” in  FIG. 249 . 
     On the other hand, if the determination at Step  423 i is No, then the processing returns to Step  423 e. 
     It should be noted that, in the case where the lift is descending, detected values of data such as an acceleration and atmospheric pressure are opposite to those in the case where the lift is ascending. Therefore, the floor at which the mobile device arrives is determined in the same manner as described with the above steps. 
     It should also be noted that, in the case where the lift is stopped for someone before arriving at the user&#39;s target floor, a move amount from start of ascending or descending to each stop is considered until the user holding the mobile device eventually goes out of the lift. 
     Next,  FIG. 249  is explained. 
     At Step  424 a, height information or floor number information of the above-described “floor (floor number) at which the mobile device arrives” is recorded as Z information in the current 3D coordinate information of the mobile device. At Step  424 b, it is determined at Step  424 b whether or not the user holding the mobile device goes out by a few steps from a door of the lift. If the determination at Step  424 b is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  424 c. Otherwise (No at Step  424 b), Step  424 b is repeated. 
     At Step  424 c, the mobile device obtains (a) position information of an entrance of the floor and (b) coordinate accuracy evaluation point Vs of the entrance, which are previously stored in the server or the memory in the mobile device. In addition, the mobile device obtains coordinate information of the current position of the mobile device measured by sensors and the like in the mobile device. Then, the processing proceeds to “ 5 ” in  FIG. 238 . In this case, if the coordinate accuracy evaluation point Vs of the entrance is higher than the coordinate accuracy evaluation point Vm of the entrance which is stored in the mobile device, the coordinate information (coordinate value) of the entrance is written over the coordinate information stored in the mobile device to re-set information of the reference point (the entrance). As a result, the accuracy of the coordinate information stored in the mobile device is increased. After that, as a distance and a time period of move of the mobile device are increased, the coordinate accuracy evaluation point Vm stored in the mobile device is decreased if a next reference point is not set. The decrease is executed by a program corresponding to characteristics of a model of the mobile device. The program is downloaded by the mobile device. 
     In the case where the user holding the mobile device gets on an escalator, the mobile device detects both (a) an acceleration upwards along the Z-axis, which is averagely steady, and (b) an acceleration in a move direction, which is also averagely steady. The accelerations show a considerably characteristic pattern as long as the user holding the mobile device does not walk up an escalator. Therefore, based on detection of such a pattern, it is possible to determine that the user gets on an escalator and ascends or descends. Then, a step-number sensor detects that the user gets out of the escalator, and therefore information of the reference point can be re-set. 
     As described above, it is possible to obtain the floor number and height information of the floor at which the user holding the mobile device arrives by a lift. 
     Twenty-Fourth Embodiment 
     In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the description is given for processing performed when a mobile device touches a NFC tag of a home appliance with reference to  FIGS. 254 to 259 . Here, the mobile device has a NFC reader/writer, the home appliance has the NFC tag and a home appliance CPU, and a server manages information of the mobile device and information of the home appliance. 
     With reference to  FIG. 254 , at Step  951 v, the home appliance CPU included in the home appliance regularly records data regarding the home appliance onto a memory in the NFC tag. Therefore, when the mobile device (hereinafter, referred to also as a “mobile terminal”) accesses the tag of the home appliance, the home appliance can provide the mobile terminal with information stored in the home appliance which can be read not by the mobile terminal but only by the home appliance CPU. 
     At Step  951 a, the mobile terminal (mobile device) is activated. 
     At Step  951 b, the mobile terminal determines whether or not an application program for operating the home appliance has already been activated on the mobile terminal. If the application program has already been activated (Yes at S 951 b), then at Step  951 c, the display terminal displays “Please touch” on the display device of the mobile terminal, in order to notify the user of that the mobile terminal is ready for touching the tag of the home appliance. 
     At Step  951 d, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the user makes the mobile terminal touch the NFC tag of the home appliance. If it is determined that the user makes the mobile terminal touch the NFC tag (Yes at Step  951 d), then the processing proceeds to Step  951 e. At Step  951 e, the mobile terminal issues a request for reading data from the tag. At Step  951 f, the home appliance reads the data from the memory in the tag. 
     At Step  951 g, the home appliance determines whether or not to access the home appliance CPU. If it is determined that it is necessary to access the home appliance CPU (Yes at S 951 g), then the processing proceeds to Step  951 h. At Step  951 h, the home appliance accesses to the home appliance CPU. At Step  951 j, the home appliance reads information by accessing the home appliance CPU. At Step  951 k, the home appliances transmits provides the information read from the home appliance CPU, to the memory in the tag of the home appliance, or stores the information in the home appliance. Then, the processing proceeds to Step  5951 m. Therefore, when the mobile terminal accesses the tag of the home appliance, the home appliance can provide the mobile terminal with the information stored in the home appliance which can be read not by the mobile terminal but only by the home appliance CPU. 
     If the determination at Step  951 d is No, then Step  951 d is repeated. On the other hand, if the determination at Step  951 d is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 951 e. 
     If the determination at Step  951 g is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  951 m. 
     At Step  951 m, the home appliance transmits the required information to the mobile terminal. At Step  951 n, the mobile terminal receives the information including a tag ID, a signature, a key ID, an apparatus model, an error code, a use history (the number of uses), log data, a product serial number, an operating state (current state) of the home appliance, a URL, position information, an on-sale mode identifier, and the like. 
     At Step  951 q, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal is within the service range. If the determination at Step  951 q is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  951 r. At Step  951 r, the mobile terminal transmits, to the server having an address of the above-mentioned URL, information including a user ID, the tag ID, the signature, the key ID, the apparatus model, the error code, the use history (the number of uses), the log data, the operating state (current state) of the home appliance, the position information, and the on-sale mode identifier. At Step  951 s, the server receives the information transmitted from the mobile terminal. 
     If the determination at Step  951 q is No, then the processing proceeds to “ 11 ” in  FIG. 255 . 
     The following explains  FIG. 255 . 
     At Step  952 a, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal has an application program corresponding to the apparatus model received from the touched home appliance. If the determination at Step  952 a is Yes, then at Step  952 i, the mobile terminal activates the application program. Therefore, when the mobile terminal holds the apparatus model information and the application program corresponding to the apparatus model, the mobile terminal can activate the application program even outside the service range. 
     If the determination at Step  952 a is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  952 b. At Step  952 b, the mobile terminal activates a general local processing routine. At Step  952 c, the mobile terminal displays a part of the information read from the tag of the home appliance. Therefore, even if the mobile terminal is outside the service range and does not have the application program corresponding to the apparatus model of the touched home appliance, the mobile terminal can present the user with the information obtained from the home appliance. 
     At Step  952 d, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the error code indicates “error”. If the determination at Step  952 d is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  952 e. At Step  952 e, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal holds pieces of attribute information each indicating details and the like of a corresponding error code. If the determination at Step  952 e is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 952 f. 
     If the determination at Step  952 e is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  952 g. At Step  952 g, the mobile terminal displays the apparatus model and the error code or letters converted from the error code, and the processing proceeds to Step S 952 h. Therefore, even if the mobile terminal does not hold pieces of attribute information each indicating details and the like of the corresponding error code, the mobile terminal can present the user with the error information of the home appliance. 
     At Step  952 f, the mobile terminal displays information for explaining details of the error based on the error code, and the processing proceeds to Step S 952 h. Therefore, even if the mobile terminal is outside the service range, the mobile terminal holds relationship information indicating a relationship between each error code and error details, and thereby converts an error code provided from the touched home appliance to corresponding error details. As a result, the mobile terminal can present the user with error details based on the error code provided from the home appliance, so that the user can easily understand the error. When a relationship between an error code and error details is to be changed, it is possible that the mobile terminal receives also a manufacturer code from the tag of the home appliance, then manages a relationship table indicating a relationship between each error code and error details for each manufacturer, and changes the relationship. If common error codes for apparatuses are defined by each manufacturer, it is also possible that the mobile terminal receives also a manufacturer code from the tag of the home appliance, then manages a relationship table indicating a relationship between each error code and error details for each manufacturer, and changes the error details. As a result, it is possible to decrease the number of kinds of errors registered in the mobile terminal. Furthermore, it is possible that the mobile terminal manages a relationship table indicating a relationship among a manufacturer code of a manufacturer, an apparatus model of the manufacturer, an error code, and error details, and changes the error details. 
     At Step  952 h, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal holds a telephone number, an e-mail address, or a URL for inquiring an apparatus model of the home appliance. If the determination at Step  952 h is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step S 954 a of “ 4 ” in  FIG. 257 . 
     If the determination at Step  952 h is No, then the processing proceeds to Step S 954 b of “ 10 ” in  FIG. 257 . 
     With reference to  FIG. 256 , at Step  953 a, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the on-sale mode identifier provided from the server or the tag of the home appliance is ON. If the determination at Step  953 a is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  953 b. At Step  953 b, the mobile terminal displays a menu screen. 
     An on-sale mode represented by the on-sale mode identifier indicates that the home appliance is on sale in an electronics retail store. In general distribution of home appliances, products are manufactured by a manufacturer, then a part of them are stored in a warehouse, and a pat selected at random from the stored products are displayed in electronics retail stores. Consumers checks a usability or design of such a displayed product in the electronics retail store. However, there is a problem described below. 
     The processing from Step  953 d offers advantages to the manufacturer, because the processing from Step  953 d enables the user to easily perform user registration only by making the mobile terminal touch a target home appliance. Consumers, who touch a product in an electronics retail store, do not always decide to buy the product. If a malicious consumer does not intend to buy a home appliance displayed in a store but makes his/her mobile terminal touch the home appliance, the touching results in registration of the consumer as a user of the home appliance. In recent years, user registration is vital information for a manufacturer to specify purchasers of products to be recalled. Therefore, many manufacturers offer financial or additional merits to purchasers who perform user registration. Therefore, such a situation would increase malicious consumers attempting to perform user registration for products which the consumers do not intend to buy. Technologies of preventing such malicious user registration have been highly demanded. At Steps  953 a and  953 b, based on the on-sale mode identifier held in the server or the tag of the home appliance, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the home appliance is on sale (at the on-sale mode). If the home appliance is at the on-sale mode, the mobile terminal prohibits user registration for the home appliance and displays a menu screen to notify the on-sale mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent malicious user registration. It is possible that the on-sale mode is changed or referred to by the server. In this case, the server does not need to directly touch the target home appliance. Therefore, the sever can change the on-sale mode for a large number of home appliances at once, or can control the home appliances in distance locations. It is also possible that the on-sale mode is changed or referred to by the home appliance or the tag of the home appliance. In this case, it is possible to change an on-sale mode for each of home appliances displayed in stores, for example. 
     Referring back to Step  953 a, if the determination at Step  953 a is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  953 c. At Step  953 c, the mobile terminal searches a database for a target home appliance based on the tag ID and the apparatus model, and thereby determines whether or not the home appliance has already been registered (in other words, whether or not user registration has already been performed for the home appliance). If the determination at Step  953 d is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  953 e. At Step  953 e, the mobile terminal determines whether or not a user ID of the mobile terminal and the user ID registered in the server are identical or belong to the same family. If the determination at Step  953 e is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  953 f. At Step  953 f, the mobile terminal displays a menu screen corresponding to a general apparatus model. Therefore, if the mobile terminal has already performed user registration for the home appliance, the mobile terminal does not need to display an unnecessary user registration screen again and again to a purchaser of the home appliance. Recently, almost everyone has one or more mobile terminals. Therefore, for example, if the user performs user registration for a purchased washing machine by using a mobile terminal of his/her father, and makes a mobile terminal of his/her mother touch a NFC tag of the washing machine, it is wrongly determined that a different user requests user registration. As a result, the mobile terminal of the user&#39;s mother displays a user registration change screen, even if the father and the mother live in the same home. In order to solve the above problem, as indicated at Step  953 e, the user ID of the mobile terminal of the user is associated with user IDs of the mobile terminals of the family members of the user. Therefore, in the above example, if it is determined that the mobile terminal of the user&#39;s mother and the mobile terminal of the user&#39;s father belong to the same family, it is determined that the user registration has already been performed for the washing machine correctly. As a result, the mobile terminals of the user&#39;s family do not need to display a user registration screen again and again. 
     If the determination at Step  953 d is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  953 g. At Step  953 g, the mobile terminal displays the user registration screen. At Step  953 h, the mobile terminal determines whether or not there is position information of a current position of the mobile terminal which is detected by the GPS or the like. If the determination at Step  953 h is Yes, the processing proceeds to Step  953 j. At Step  953 j, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal is positioned at a specific region such as a building in which a target apparatus (an apparatus model of a target home appliance) is on sale. The processing proceeds to “ 6 ” in  FIG. 259 . 
     If the determination at Step  953 e is No, then the processing proceeds to “ 5 ” in  FIG. 258 . 
     The following explains  FIG. 257 . 
     At Step  954 a, the mobile terminal displays, on its screen, the above-mentioned telephone number, e-mail address, or URL for inquiring the apparatus model. At Step  954 b, the mobile terminal is connected to the server and determines whether or not there is data to be exchanged with the server. If the determination at Step  954 b is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  954 c. Otherwise (No at Step  954 b), the processing proceeds to Step  954 d, and is completed. 
     At Step  954 c, the mobile terminal displays “Move to the service range” to persuade the user to move into the service range. At Step  954 e, the mobile terminal causes the data (information) read from the tag of the home appliance to be in a “savable state” where the data can be saved in a memory. At Step  954 f, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal is in the service range. If the determination at Step  954 f is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  954 g. Otherwise (No at Step  954 f), then the processing returns to Step  954 c. 
     At Step  954 g, the mobile terminal is connected to the server having the URL recorded on the tag of the home appliance or on the mobile terminal. At Step  954 h, user authentication is performed. At Step  954 j, the mobile terminal transmits, to the server, the data read from the tag or information generated based on the data, or the mobile terminal processes the data or the information by executing an application program provided from the server. 
     As a result, even if the mobile terminal touches the home appliance outside the service range, after the user moves into the service range, the mobile terminal can display a menu screen regarding user authentication, user registration/change, or the target apparatus. 
     The following explains  FIG. 258 . 
     At Step  955 a, the mobile terminal (here, it is assumed that the mobile terminal does not belong to a target building) determines whether or not it is possible to determine a current position of the mobile terminal by using the GPS or the like. If the determination at Step  955 a is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  955 b. At Step  955 b, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the determined position (position information) of the mobile terminal almost matches one of pieces of position information registered in the server. If the determination at Step  955 b is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  955 c. 
     At Step  955 c, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the matching position information in the server is assigned with an identifier indicating that “Other users (other user IDs) are accepted”. If the determination at Step  955 c is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  955 d. At Step  955 d, the mobile terminal is set to be at a guest mode. 
     On the other hand, if the determination at Step  955 c is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  955 e and is terminated. 
     At the guest mode, the mobile terminal (for example, a mobile terminal of a visitor except family members of the user) can operate only a predetermined home appliance at one of the positions registered in the server. For example, it is assumed that a visitor except family members of the user visits the user&#39;s home. Here, it is also assumed that the user wishes to allow the visitor to use a mobile terminal of the visitor as a remote controller of a TV in the user&#39;s home, but does not want to let anyone except the family members see a laundry history of a user&#39;s washing machine. Under such assumption, the TV is assigned with the identifier indicating “Other users (other user IDs) are accepted” which is currently ON, while the washing machine is assigned with the same identifier which is currently OFF. Furthermore, the introduction of the guest mode allows any visitor to use a part of functions of his/her mobile terminal. For example, the gust mode inhibits anyone except family members in a target home from seeing a laundry history of a washing machine in the home, but permits anyone to display an error code of the washing machine on his/her mobile terminal. 
     If the determination at Step  955 b is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  955 f. At Step  955 f, the mobile terminal displays, on its screen, a question such as “Has the address been changed?” or “Has the owner been changed?” If an answer of the question is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  955 g. At Step  955 g, the mobile terminal displays an address change menu or an user change menu. 
     As a result, this offers the following advantages. For example, it is assumed that the user moves with his/her home appliances to a new home and therefore a user&#39;s address registered in user registration at purchase of the home appliances is changed. Under the assumption, if the user forgets to register a new address in the user registration, the mobile terminal of the user can automatically persuade the user to perform the user registration. 
     If the determination at Step  955 f is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  955 h to be continued. 
     The following describes a variation of the present embodiment in the case where a home appliance is on sale in an electronics retail store, with reference to  FIG. 259 . 
     At Step  956 a, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal is in a target region. If the determination at Step  956 a is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  956 b. Otherwise (No at Step  956 a), the processing proceeds to Step  956 c. At Step  956 c, the mobile terminal performs user registration for a target home appliance in the target region. 
     Here, the target region is space information generally indicating one of floors of an electronics retail store. The target region is indicated by GPS information or the like. The determination at Step  956 a may be made based on a current position of the mobile terminal, or a beacon of the store. The determination at Step  956 a may also be made with reference to home appliance distribution route information and a present time. 
     This produces the following advantages. For example, if a home appliance is displayed in a retail store, it is possible to prevent a malicious user from performing malicious user registration for the displayed home appliance which the user has not yet purchased. 
     At Step  956 b, the mobile terminal (having a user ID) and the server performs user authentication. At Step  956 d, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the user authentication is successful (OK). If the determination at Step  956 d is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  956 e. Otherwise (No at Step  956 d), then the processing proceeds to Step  956 f and is terminated. 
     At Step  956 e, the mobile terminal requires input of a password of the retail store or a manufacturer of the target home appliance. 
     At Step  956 g, authentication is performed, and the processing proceeds to Step  956 h. 
     At Step  956 h, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the authentication is successful (OK). If the determination at Step  956 h is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  956 j. Otherwise (No at Step  956 h), then the processing proceeds to Step  956 k and is terminated. 
     At Step  956 j, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the password is correct. If the determination at Step  956 j is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  956 m. Otherwise (No at Step  956 j), then the processing proceeds to Step  956 n and is terminated. 
     At Step  956 m, the mobile terminal is switched to be at the on-sale mode. At Step  956 p, the mobile terminal inquires the user whether or not to record an identifier of the on-sale mode (on-sale mode identifier) onto the tag of the home appliance or onto the server. 
     If the user instructs the mobile terminal to record the on-sale mode identifier (Yes at Step  956 p), then the processing proceeds to Step  956 q. At Step  956 q, the mobile terminal sets the on-sale mode identifier ON in the tag of the home appliance or in the server. At Step  956 r, the mobile terminal transmits information regarding the on-sale mode identifier (identifier information) to the server, or encrypts the identifier information, a password, and a key, and transmits the encrypted information to the tag of the home appliance, so that the encrypted information is recorded on a memory region allocated in the tag. At Step  956 s, the mobile terminal is still at the on-sale mode. 
     At Step  956 t, the tag of the home appliance performs authentication by using the received password and key as well as a key stored in the tag. At Step  956 u, the tag determines whether or not the authentication is successful (OK). If the determination at Step  956 u is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  956 v. At Step  956 v, a value representing ON is recorded on the memory region for the on-sale mode identifier in the tag. 
     Otherwise (No at Step  956 u), then the processing proceeds to Step  956 w and is terminated. 
     If the determination at Step  956 p is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  956 s. 
     This can produce the following advantages. For example, it is possible to prevent a malicious consumer from changing an on-sale mode of a home appliance displayed in a store without authorization. It is also possible to prevent a malicious consumer from setting an on-sale mode of a home appliance to be OFF and performing user registration for the home appliance which the consumer has not yet purchased. Even if there is no such a non-sale mode, it is possible to prevent that a mobile terminal of a malicious consumer requests the malicious consumer to enter a password of a store or a manufacturer of a home appliance displayed in the store, and that the malicious user performs user registration for the home appliance which the malicious consumer has not purchased. 
     It should be noted that it has been described that the mobile terminal is switched to be at the on-sale mode at Step  956 m. However, it is also possible that the mobile terminal performs user registration at Step  956 m. As a result, it is possible to prevent malicious user registration for home appliances not yet been purchased, and also possible to permit sales people in an electronics retail store to perform user registration instead of a purchaser of a target home appliance. 
       FIG. 260  shows attributes of pieces of information recorded on the tag described in the twenty-third, twenty-fourth, twenty-fifth embodiments and so on. 
     Twenty-Fifth Embodiment 
     The following describes the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention.  FIG. 261  shows a mobile terminal  5201  according to the present embodiment.  FIG. 262  shows a home appliance  5211  according to the present embodiment. The present embodiment provides a method of easily increasing an accuracy of positional matching between an antenna unit of a proximity wireless communication module of the mobile terminal  5021  and an antenna unit of a proximity wireless communication module of the home appliance  5211 , by using a guidance function of the mobile terminal  5201  and a guidance function of the home appliance  5211  in proximity wireless communication between the mobile terminal  5201  and the home appliance  5211 . The mobile terminal  5201  is assumed to be a terminal, such as a Smartphone, which has a front side most of which is occupied by a display unit. In the mobile terminal  5201 , an antenna unit of a proximity wireless communication module is assumed to be provided at the rear side of a button unit of the display unit. As shown in  FIG. 262 , in the home appliance  5211  (general home appliance), an antenna unit of a proximity wireless communication module is provided at a certain part of the home appliance. Furthermore, on the home appliance  5211 , a mark  5301 , which serves as a certain mark, is provided to a part near the center of the NFC antenna. The mark may be a common sign such as a circle or a cross, or a specific sign representing the proximity wireless communication module. In addition, a mark, such as a manufacturer logo or a product logo, may be used. However, the mark producing higher positional matching effect is a cross  5302  having a vertical longer line and the center that is the center part of the antenna  5302 , likewise the mark  5301 . 
       FIG. 263  is a diagram showing display states of a position (antenna position)  5303  of the antenna unit of the proximity wireless communication module of the mobile terminal  5201  according to the present embodiment of the present invention. In using proximity wireless communication, the mobile terminal  5201  according to the present embodiment shows, on a display unit on the front side of the mobile terminal  5201 , a position (antenna position) of the antenna unit of the proximity wireless communication module provided on the rear side of the mobile terminal  5201 . The antenna position may be displayed depending on the shape of the antenna unit, or may be displayed as a common sign. Furthermore, it is possible to combine a plurality of displaying ways. Here, a kind of the display of the antenna position may be selected by the user. According to the present embodiment, in comparison to the case where the mobile terminal  5201  simply has, on the rear side of the mobile terminal  5201 , a display for showing a position of the proximity wireless communication module, the above method can further reduce inconvenient actions of the user for approaching the proximity wireless communication module to a certain position of the home appliance while seeing the rear side of the mobile terminal  5201 . 
       FIG. 264  is a diagram showing display states of a position of the proximity wireless communication module of the home appliance  5211  according to the present embodiment of the present invention. The home appliance  5211  according to the present embodiment displays guidance in using proximity wireless communication. Normally, a position of the tag on the home appliance is indicated by a printed mark. However, when the home appliance  5211  has data to be transmitted to the mobile terminal  5201 , the home appliance  5211  clearly displays the existence of the data by using LED or the like. Various kinds of the display are considered in the same manner as described for the mobile terminal  5201 . However, the kinds of the display on the home appliance are basically graphics expanding from the position of the proximity wireless communication module of the home appliance. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to clearly display the position of the proximity wireless communication module of the home appliance when proximity wireless communication is required, without deteriorating a simple design of white goods and the like. 
       FIG. 265  is a diagram showing states of proximity wireless communication between the mobile terminal  5201  and the home appliance  5211  by using their proximity wireless communication modules, according to the present embodiment of the present invention. The user simply approaches the mark displayed on the display unit of the mobile terminal  5201  to the center of the graphic on the home appliance  5211 , so that the proximity wireless communication module of the mobile terminal  5201  can approach to the proximity wireless communication module of the home appliance  5211 . Therefore, it is considerably easy to perform proximity wireless communication within a limit of a capability of the proximity wireless communication modules. The present embodiment is effective for each of the mobile terminal  5201  side and the home appliance side. However, if both of the mobile terminal  5201  and the home appliance have the function of the present embodiment, further effects can be expected. 
       FIG. 266  is a diagram showing the situation where the proximity wireless communication display is combined with an acceleration meter and a gyro. If the graphic displayed on the home appliance is not a circle expanding from the proximity wireless communication module, the graphic is assumed to be displayed depend on an inclination of the mobile terminal  5201 . Therefore, it is possible to approach the mobile terminal  5201  to the graphic displayed on the home appliance at a desired angle depending on a shape of the graphic. In general, the mobile terminal  5201  is not in a shape of a circle and a square, the present embodiment is efficient to the mobile terminal  5201 . 
       FIG. 267  is a diagram showing the situation where the proximity wireless communication display is cooperated with a camera unit (camera) on the rear side of the mobile terminal  5201 . Even if the home appliance displays guidance, the guidance is hidden behind the mobile terminal  5201  and therefore the user cannot see a most part of the guidance. In order to solve the above problem, the camera unit in the mobile terminal  5201  is used to display the guidance on the mobile terminal  5201 . Most of mobile terminals (mobile terminal  5201 ) has a camera unit on the rear side, so that the present embodiment is efficient for the mobile terminals. If the camera unit is provided near the antenna unit of the mobile terminal  5201 , an antenna position mark of the antenna unit of the mobile terminal  5201  is displayed on the center of the image taken by the camera unit. Or, a positional matching display is located on the antenna position mark on the display unit. However, if the antenna position mark is not displayed on the center of the image taken by the camera, the following is performed. An autofocus distance data or a size of the antenna position mark is previously downloaded from the server. Then, based on the position of the mobile terminal, the target home appliance is specified. Then, based on the size of the antenna mark, a distance between the mobile terminal and the target home appliance is calculated. Then, based on the distance, a displacement between the center of the camera unit and the antenna unit on the mobile terminal is corrected on the display on the mobile terminal, so that an antenna position mark of the home appliance is displayed on the center of the display on the mobile terminal or on the center of the positional matching display on the mobile terminal. 
       FIG. 268  is a diagram showing the situation where the mobile terminal  5201  is cooperated with a server  5505  to download an application program from the server  5505  to achieve the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, it is necessary to download an application program onto the mobile terminal  5201 . When an application program is to be downloaded, the mobile terminal  5201  transmits model information  5510  indicating a model of the mobile terminal  5201  to the server. Based on the model information  5510 , the server searches a coordinate information database  5503  for (a) (a-1) coordinate information of a position of a NFC antenna of the mobile terminal  5201  and (a-2) coordinate information of a position of a display unit  5221  of the mobile terminal  5201  which correspond to the model of the mobile terminal  5201 , or (b) information indicating a positional relationship between both pieces of the coordinate information. Especially, if there is identification information indicating whether or not a center position of the antenna unit of the mobile terminal  5201  is on the rear side of the display unit of the mobile terminal  5201  such as a Smartphone, and the identification information indicates “Yes (namely, the center position of the antenna unit is on the rear side)”, the server obtains antenna position display coordinate information  5513  (x1, y1) indicating the center position of the antenna unit which is displayed on the display unit, and transmits the antenna position display coordinate information  5513  as well as the target application program  5501  to the mobile terminal  5201 . The application program  5501  is displayed when the application program  5501  is read by NFC, so that a position corresponding to the center position of the antenna unit is displayed at the center that is the antenna position display coordinate information  5513  (x1, y1), likewise  5513 r,  5513 s,  5513 r,  5513 z,  5513 v,  5513 a,  5513 y,  5513 x of the antenna position display coordinate information  5513  (x1, y1) shown in the display examples ( 5 ) to ( 12 ) in  FIG. 263 . Especially in the case of the cross display  5521  as shown in ( 4 ), when the user matches the antenna position of the antenna unit of the mobile terminal  5201  to the antenna position mark  5321 a,  5321 b of the home appliance, it is possible to match the antenna position of the mobile terminal to the antenna position of the home appliance with a high accuracy. Therefore, the mobile terminal  5201  can surely read data from the tag on the home appliance. Especially as shown in  FIG. 271 , for example, in updating or downloading of a home appliance firmware which takes about one minute, if the user has to keep matching the antenna positions for a long time by hand, the present embodiment can produce high effects. A value corresponding to a position of the mobile terminal  5201  is inputted, and thereby a target application program is distributed. It is assumed that the server has a database  5503  holding position information including information indicating a relationship between a position of the antenna unit of the proximity wireless communication of each mobile terminal  5201  and a position of the display unit of each mobile terminal  5201 . With the above structure, the server can cope with various kinds of mobile terminal  5201 . It should be noted that each of the mobile terminals  5201  may previously hold the antenna position display center coordinates. Even in this case, the same effects of the present embodiment can be produced. 
       FIG. 269  is a functional block diagram of the mobile terminal  5201  for implementing the present embodiment. A control unit of the mobile terminal  5201  obtains display coordinates of a position of the antenna unit of the mobile terminal  5201 , by using a general wireless communication unit. Then, the control unit stores the obtained display coordinates into a display coordinate holding unit. When a proximity wireless communication unit of the mobile terminal  5201  attempts to start proximity wireless communication, the control unit obtains the display coordinates from the display coordinate holding unit, and also obtains a display image from an antenna position display image holding unit. As a result, the control unit displays the display image at the display coordinates on the display unit of the mobile terminal  5201 . It is also possible that the control unit displays, on the display unit, also image taken by the camera unit of the mobile terminal  5201 . When a proximity wireless communication antenna unit of the mobile terminal  5201  approaches to a proximity wireless communication unit of the target home appliance, proximity wireless communication starts between the mobile terminal  5201  and the home appliance. 
       FIG. 270  is a diagram showing how the guidance display is changed in the case where a trouble occurs in the home appliance  5211 . When a trouble occurs, the home appliance displays a red warning mark. Here, the trouble refers to a state, such as breakdown, where necessity of proximity wireless communication should be immediately notified to the user. After the trouble is notified, the color of the warning mark is changed from red to blue, for example. If the trouble is not urgent, for example, if a filter is to be exchanged or a firmware is requested to be updated, the warning mark is displayed in yellow. Here, the displayed colors are not limited to the above two colors. In addition, the notification to the user may be performed by producing warning sound or the like. 
       FIG. 271  is a diagram showing the situation of long-time communication. If long-time communication such as firmware updating is to be performed, a remaining time period of the communication is notified to the user. The notification may be displayed on the mobile terminal  5201 , or on the home appliance  5211 . 
       FIG. 272  is a diagram of the case where the home appliance  5211  having a display screen displays guidance. The proximity wireless communication module of the home appliance  5211  is not provided at the rear side of the home appliance  5211 . The proximity wireless communication module is not provided on the display screen, either. Therefore, the guidance is displayed to allow the user to recognize the proximity wireless communication module provided on a part except the display screen. The guidance display may be a cross or an arrow. 
       FIG. 273  is a flowchart according to the present embodiment of the present invention. As shown in  FIG. 262 , a printed mark  5301  is printed on the home appliance  5211 . The printed mark  5301  has a length d 1  and the center that is located at the center of the antenna  5302 . The printed mark  5301  may be tilted. If an event occurs, or if proximity wireless communication has not been performed for a predetermined time period (Step  5201 a), then the home appliance  5211  attempts to be connected to the server. At Step  5201 b, the home appliance  5211  determines whether or not the home appliance  5211  can be connected to the server via the Internet. If the determination at Step  5201 b is Yes, then the home appliance  5211  transmits information to the server (Step  5201 k). On the other hand, if the home appliance  5211  cannot be connected to the server via the Internet, or if the home appliance  5211  does not have a communication function, then the home appliance  5211  displays (illuminates) an illuminated mark ( 5321 a,  5321 b) in order to connect the home appliance  5211  to the server by proximity wireless communication. The illuminated mark ( 5321 a,  5321 b) has a horizontal length d 2 . At least the horizontal length d 2  is longer than a length d 1  of the printed mark  5301 . The illuminated mark is similar to the illuminated mark shown in  FIG. 262  which has the center that is positioned at the center of the antenna unit of the home appliance  5211 . More specifically, the illuminated mark is changed in the same manner as the display mark ( 5321 ,  5320 ), as shown ( 1 ) to ( 2 ) in  FIG. 271 . It is impossible to turn off the illumination of the printed mark  5301 . Therefore, if the printed mark is large, flexibility of design is decreased. However, as shown in ( 3 ) in  FIG. 271 , an illuminated mark ( 5321 e,  5320 f) is larger than the printed mark  5301 , in other words, d 2 &gt;d 1 . Therefore, the illuminated mark ( 5321 e,  5320 f) has a shape larger than the mobile terminal  5201  such as a Smartphone. As a result, the illuminated mark does not hide behind the mobile terminal  5201 . Therefore, it is possible to easily match a position of the antenna unit of the mobile terminal  5201  to a position of the antenna unit of the home appliance  5211 . In the above situation, as shown in ( 2 ) in  FIG. 270 , the illuminated mark  5321  having a cross shape is displayed (blinking) in red color. In the case of general errors except trouble errors, the illuminated mark  5321  is displayed in a different color (for example, blue) (( 3 ) in  FIG. 270  or ( 4 ) in  FIG. 271 ) ( 5201 c). Here, the trouble errors refer to errors, such as breakdown, which do not occur in normal operation. The general errors refer to errors, such as filter exchange for air conditioners, which occur in normal operation and are not the troubles. If there is any information except errors to be transmitted to the server, it is possible to display something. In the case of errors, a warning sound is produced ( 5201 d) At Step  5201 e, the home appliance  5211  determines whether or not proximity wireless communication (touching) has not yet been performed for a predetermined time period since the warning sound. If the touching has not yet been performed for the predetermined time period (Yes at Step  5201 e), the home appliance  5211  determines that the user is not near, and therefore stops the warning sound ( 5201 f). Furthermore, the home appliance  5211  makes interval of blinking of the illuminated mark longer or makes the illuminated mark darker ( 5201 g). The home appliance  5211  estimates using hours of the home appliance based on a user history stored in the home appliance  5211 . The home appliance  5211  illuminates the mark or makes interval of the illumination blinking shorter only in the using hours, in order to save energy ( 5201 h). Then, the home appliance  5211  determines whether or not touching by the mobile terminal of the user has been performed for a time period longer than the above predetermined time period ( 5201 j). If the touching has not yet been performed for the time period (Yes at Step  5201 j), then the home appliance  5211  produces the warning sound again. If the home appliance  5211  detects touching by the mobile terminal of the user (No at Step  5201 j), then the home appliance  5211  starts data transfer ( 5201 k). The user notices the illuminated mark or the warning sound of the home appliance  5211  ( 5202 a), and then activates an application program in the mobile terminal  5201  ( 5202 b). According to the application program, the mobile terminal  5201  displays a touch instruction mark on the display unit of the mobile terminal  5201 . The touch instruction mark is a cross or a circle having the center that is positioned at a target part on the display unit. The target part on the display unit corresponds to almost the center of the NFC antenna unit provided on the rear side of the display unit ( 5202 c). The mobile terminal  5201  starts transmit radio to the home appliance  5211  via the antenna unit ( 5202 d). At the same time, the user attempts to match the touch instruction mark on the mobile terminal  5201  to the antenna display mark on the home appliance  5211  ( 5202 e). The mobile terminal  5201  repeats polling ( 5202 g). The mobile terminal  5201  determines whether or not the communication starts within a predetermined time period ( 5202 h). If the communication starts within a predetermined time period (No at Step  5205 h), then the mobile terminal  5201  reads data from the memory in the proximity wireless communication unit in the home appliance ( 5203 d in  FIG. 275 ). On the other hand, if the communication does not start within the predetermined time period (Yes at  5202 h), then the mobile terminal  5201  stops the polling ( 5202 j), and displays “Please match them again” ( 5203 a). Then, the user tries to perform the matching. The mobile terminal  5201  determines whether or not the mobile terminal  5201  can communicate with the home appliance  5211  after the try ( 5203 b). If the communication fails even after the try (No at  5203 b), then the mobile terminal  5201  terminates the processing ( 5203 c). In reading data, the mobile terminal  5201  obtains, from a part of the data firstly transmitted, (a) information of a total amount of data to be readout and (b) a communication speed at the home appliance  5211  side ( 5203 e). The mobile terminal  5201  calculates an error ratio based on a state of the communication ( 5203 f). At  5203 f, the mobile terminal  5201  may transmit the error ratio to the server. The mobile terminal  5201  calculates a time period required to read data from the home appliance  5211 , based on the data amount and the communication speed ( 5203 g). Then, on the display unit, the mobile terminal  5201  displays an estimated time period required to read the data ( 5204 a in  FIG. 276 ). The mobile terminal  5201  also displays a remaining time period as a bar or circle indicator. If the communication is completed ( 5204 b), then the mobile terminal  5201  displays the fact of the communication completion ( 5204 c), and then transmits the readout data to the server ( 5204 d). As the data transfer is progressed from the home appliance  5211  to the mobile terminal  5201  ( 5204 e), the home appliance may make the illuminated mark brighter, make the blinking of the illuminated mark faster, or change the color of the illuminated mark ( 5204 f). If the communication is completed ( 5204 g), the home appliance  5211  notifies the completion to the mobile terminal  5201  ( 5204 h). After the communication completion ( 5204 j), then the home appliance  5211  stops the blinking of the illuminated mark but keeps illuminating of the mark ( 5204 k), and then turns off the illumination after a predetermined time period ( 5204 m). 
     As described above, in the present embodiment, the mobile terminal such as a Smartphone is touched to (performs proximity wireless communication with) the home appliance and thereby transmits information of the home appliance to the server. Therefore, a very low-cost and simple structure with an antenna and a single IC can receive Internet services. Here, the server can provide data to the user via the mobile terminal anytime. However, connection from the home appliance to the mobile terminal and the server is not achieved until the mobile terminal touches the home appliance. In the present embodiment, however, if the home appliance has not been connected to the server for a predetermined time period, or if the home appliance needs to be connected to the server due to breakdown, the home appliance illuminates a red LED or the like which has the center that is positioned at the center of the NFC antenna unit or produces sound. Thereby, the home appliance requires the user to make the mobile terminal touch the home appliance. Therefore, it is possible to connect the home appliance to the mobile terminal or the server via a human. In addition, the home appliance displays the illuminated mark (illuminated display mark) that has the center that is positioned at the center of the NFC antenna and that is larger than the printed mark. The illuminated mark is larger than a Smartphone (the mobile terminal). Therefore, the cross display of the illuminated mark enables the user to recognize the position of the antenna unit of the home appliance, even if the position of the antenna unit hides behind the Smartphone. 
     Moreover, in the present embodiment, the memory unit in the mobile terminal such a Smartphone previously holds, as a parameter, coordinate information (x1, y1) to be displayed on the display unit of the mobile terminal. The coordinate information corresponds to the center position of the antenna unit provided on the rear side of the mobile terminal. The coordinate information enables the mobile terminal to display the position of the antenna unit on the display unit. Especially, as shown in ( 4 ) in  FIG. 263 , on the display unit of the mobile terminal, the antenna position mark of the mobile terminal is displayed as a cross at a position corresponding to the mark ( 5321 a,  5321 b) indicating a position of the NFC antenna of the home appliance. Therefore, the user can easily match the position of the antenna unit of the mobile terminal to the position of the antenna unit of the home appliance. As a result, it is possible to prevent that a time for starting data transfer is too early, or that an error occurs during long-time downloading. The above-described coordinate information for the display unit of the mobile terminal may be downloaded together with an application program for readout, from the server. Even in this case, the same effects can be produced. Furthermore, a physical position of the antenna unit of the mobile terminal, a physical position of the display unit of the mobile terminal, information indicating a positional relationship between displayed positions, and respective pieces of position information may be used. A cross mark is effective. However, a circle or a square may be displayed on the display unit of the mobile terminal. It is important that the user can easily recognize a mark for the home appliance side and a displayed mark for the mobile terminal side and easily match the marks. 
     If a mark, such as a displayed mark  5401  in  FIG. 272 , which indicates a position of the antenna unit of the home appliance such as a TV is displayed on a display screen of the home appliance (TV), even the display screen having a narrow frame can display the mark larger. 
     In the present embodiment, if the mobile terminal, such as a Smartphone, has an antenna unit on the rear side of the display unit, antenna arrangement identification information is ON. In this case, regarding coordinate position information of a region in the display unit which corresponds to the center of the antenna unit, for example, in the case of the display unit having horizontal 480 pixels×vertical 1200 pixels, the center position of the antenna unit is defined as (x, y)=(200 dots, 400 dots). This enables positions of antenna units of mobile terminals (mobile telephones) manufactured by any manufacturer to be correctly specified. Therefore, normalization and standardization are easy. In this case, it is possible to specify a range of a target antenna, for example, by defining an end point ( 150 ,  200 ) and another end point ( 250 ,  500 ) for a region of the antenna. Furthermore, the above method is performed with a minimum data amount. As a result, a memory is not consumed. The above data may be stored in the mobile terminal. It is also possible to download the data from the server and stored in an antenna coordinate storage dedicated area in the mobile terminal. In this case, the data is inputted to the mobile terminal when the application program for readout is downloaded from the server. As a result, in the downloading of the application program, the mobile terminal can automatically determine a position of the antenna unit. The above-described coordinate information can produce considerable effects. 
     Furthermore, a folding mobile telephone as shown in  FIG. 268  has an antenna unit on the rear side of a button unit. Therefore, based on data (antenna position data) indicating a position of the antenna unit in the mobile terminal  5201 m, by (i) illuminating a horizontal direction and a vertical direction which cross to indicate a position of a pressed button corresponding to the position of the antenna unit, or by (ii) providing another display unit, it is possible to display the position of the antenna unit so that the user can match the mark indicating the position of the antenna unit of the mobile telephone to a mark (antenna display mark), such as a cross mark, which indicates a position of the antenna unit of the home appliance. As a result, even conventional mobile telephone can display the antenna positions. 
     The following describes a method of displaying a standby screen on the mobile terminal in synchronized operation according to the present embodiment, with reference to  FIG. 277 . 
     At Step  5205 a, on the display unit of the mobile terminal, the mobile terminal selects a reservation screen for a target home appliance. When the reservation screen is selected (Yes), the mobile terminal proceeds to Step  5205 b. At Step  5205 b, the user inputs a reservation start time, details of reservation processing, and a parameter of a kind of the processing, into the mobile terminal. At Step  5205 c, the mobile terminal determines whether or not an operation time period is varied, for example, depending on laundry in the case of a washing machine. If the determination at Step  5205 c is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  5205 d. At Step  5205 d, the mobile terminal turns a “forced synchronized operation mode” ON or OFF. Then, the processing proceeds to Step  5205 e. 
     If the determination at Step  5205 c is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  5205 e. 
     At Step  5205 e, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the mobile terminal touches a target home appliance. If the determination at Step  5205 e is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  5205 f. Otherwise (No at Step  5205 e), then Step  5205 e is repeated. 
     At Step  5205 f, the mobile terminal transmits an instruction for setting a program or the like to the home appliance. At Step  5205 g, the home appliance receives the instruction. At Step  5205 h, to the mobile terminal, the home appliance transmits the program data including an estimated time period of processing from a start to an end. 
     The home appliance proceeds from Step  5205 h to Step  5205 i. At Step  5205 i, the home appliance starts the program. At Step  5205 j, the home appliance determines whether or not the enforced synchronized operation mode is ON or whether or not an operation time period is fixed. If the determination at Step  5205 j is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  5205 k. Then, synchronized operation is performed between the mobile terminal and the home appliance. At Step  5205 m, for example, if the home appliance such as a washing machine completes its processing in 15 minutes although the processing generally takes 20 minutes at maximum, the home appliance is stopped until 20 minutes pass. Thereby, the home appliance can be operated completely in synchronization with the mobile terminal. 
     If the determination at Step  5205 j is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  5205 n. At Step  5205 n, the home appliance performs operation not always in synchronization with the mobile terminal. 
     The processing of the mobile terminal proceeds to Step  5205 p. At Step  5205 p, the mobile terminal receives the program from the home appliance. At Step  5205 q, the mobile terminal starts the program. At Step  5205 r, the mobile terminal determines whether or not the forced synchronized operation mode is ON, or whether or not an operation time period is fixed. If the determination at Step  5205 r is Yes, then the processing proceeds to Step  5205 s. At Step  5205 s, the mobile terminal displays the same data as operated in the home appliance. At Step  5205 t, the mobile terminal displays a standby screen as shown at  5302 a in  FIG. 278 , and then processing proceeds to Step  5205 u. At Step  5205 u, the mobile terminal displays an icon for indicating a current state of the target home appliance, such as an icon  5305 ,  5306 , or  5307  in  FIG. 278 . For example, when an air conditioner (home appliance) starts a reserved operation, the mobile terminal displays an icons for indicating a start time or a remaining time period of the operation, as shown in  5306 b,  5305 b, or  5306 c in  FIG. 278 . If the user presses one of the icons, the mobile terminal changes the screen to a menu screen for a washing machine as shown at  5303 , for example. Here, if the user selects an icon  5309 a on the menu screen, the mobile terminal displays a reservation screen like a screen  5304 . As a result, the mobile terminal notifies the user outside home of what kind of reservation is made for the washing machine or the air conditioner. 
     More specifically, in the present embodiment, communication is performed when the mobile terminal touches a target home appliance. However, even if the mobile terminal is not communicating with home appliances, each of the home appliances is forced to operate in synchronization with the mobile terminal according to setting of the application program shared with the mobile terminal. Therefore, the user outside home sees a standby screen of the mobile terminal to check current operation states of the home appliances in home, and the mobile terminal notifies the user of laundry completion, heating start, and the like. As a result, the user can receive services as if the services were provided via a network. 
     If the determination at Step  5205 r is No, then the processing proceeds to Step  5205 v. At Step  5205 v, the server causes the mobile terminal to displays a time period required for processing of each of home appliances. Here, for example, the mobile terminal displays, on the standby screen, a minimum required time period, a maximum required time period, and a completion time of laundry and drying of a washing machine. In the present embodiment, even if the mobile terminal displays the standby screen  5351 a, the application programs for the home appliances are operating. Therefore, the mobile terminal displays icons as shown in ( 1 ) in  FIG. 278 , and also displays current operation states of the home appliances as shown in ( 2 ) in  FIG. 278 . As a result, the user can learn current states of the home appliances without operating the mobile terminal. In the present embodiment, an icon of a home appliance that completes its operation is disappeared from the standby screen. Therefore, the standby screen is simple to see, without unnecessary icons. 
     Although the communication device according to the present invention has been described with reference to the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above. Those skilled in the art will be readily appreciated that various modifications and combinations of the structural elements and functions in the embodiments are possible without materially departing from the novel teachings and advantages of the present invention. Accordingly, all such modifications and combinations are intended to be included within the scope of the present invention. 
     It should be noted that it has been described in the embodiment with reference to  FIG. 263  that the center of the NFC antenna unit of the mobile terminal is positioned at the rear side of the display unit (such as LCD or LED) of the mobile terminal. However, even if the center of the NFC antenna unit is positioned at the rear side of a part without the display unit, a part of concentric circle having the center that is the center of the NFC antenna unit is displayed on the display unit. In this case, although the center of the concentric circle is not displayed on the display unit, a partial curve line of the concentric circle enables the user to guess the center and match the concentric circle displayed on the mobile terminal to the mark on a target home appliance. As a result, the center of the NFC antenna unit of the mobile terminal can touch the appropriate position of the home appliance. 
     It should also be noted that it has been described in the embodiment with reference to  FIG. 267  that the camera unit of the mobile terminal is used. Here, it is also possible to illuminate a LED illumination provided in the mobile terminal, when the camera unit is activate, when the NFC reader is activated, when a change of electric field strength is occurred due to the mobile terminal touching the home appliance, or when the acceleration sensor or the like detects that the mobile terminal touches the home appliance. The mobile terminal is generally provided with a white LED for a camera flash. Therefore, in the case of using the camera unit, the LED illumination can solve the problem that the mark on the home appliance becomes dark under the mobile terminal and therefore not displayed on the mobile terminal. In this case, a lens of the camera unit is positioned at a range of the NFC antenna unit of the mobile terminal. Therefore, the camera unit can take an image of the antenna unit of the home appliance, without adjusting the image. In this case or in the case where the camera lens is out of alignment, the camera unit recognizes the antenna arrangement mark on the home appliance by recognizing a pattern of the image taken by the camera unit. Therefore, the mobile terminal can detect a displacement between the mark on the mobile terminal and the mark on the home appliance. If the mobile terminal displays arrows (right, left, down, and up arrows) on the screen, the user can adjust the antenna positions correctly. In this case, the adjustment becomes easy if a matching ratio is indicated by sound. As a point is far from the center, louder or higher warning sound is emitted to notify the user of the displacement. 
     It should also be noted that it has been described in the embodiment with reference to  FIG. 268  that the pressing button unit of the mobile terminal  5201 m displays illumination cross lines for guiding to the antenna position. However, the method is not familiar to the user using the method at the first time. Therefore, the mobile terminal  5201 m displays (a) an overall image of the mobile terminal on the screen, and also displays (b) an image on which the illumination lines on the pressing button unit are to match the antenna mark of the home appliance. As a result, even the user as a beginner can understand that the user needs to match the illumination lines on the pressing button part to the cross mark of the antenna unit of the home appliance. Therefore, operations become easy. 
     In the embodiment, in general, the guidance for matching the antenna units is displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. If the NFC unit of the mobile terminal serves as a “reader/writer”, the antenna guidance is displayed. On the other hand, if the NFC unit of the mobile terminal serves as an “IC tag”, the antenna guidance is not displayed. In some situations, the antenna guidance is not illuminated. As a result, it is possible to eliminate unnecessary display element and unnecessary illuminating of the display unit, thereby saving energy. If the NFC unit of the mobile terminal serves as an “IC tag”, the antenna of the reader/writer is large and guidance of the antenna is not necessary. In addition, since the IC tag is used only to provide data, it is not always necessary to illuminate the display unit. 
     It should also be noted that the mobile terminal may have an illumination display unit, such as a LED, on a part that corresponds to a position of the center of the antenna unit and on the case surface opposite to the NFC antenna side. As a result, when the NFC antenna unit is to face the target, it is possible to clearly notify the user of the center of the NFC antenna unit. 
     INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY 
     The communication device according to the present invention is suitable as a communication device which can easily serve as an extended user interface by using RF-ID and various sensors in the communication device. Examples of the communication device are a mobile telephone, a Smartphone, and the like. Examples of the extended user interface are a mufti-purpose remote controller of a target home appliance, an interface for downloading a content onto a target home appliance, and the like. Examples of the sensors are a GPS sensor, a motion sensor, and the like. More specifically, the communication device according to the present invention has a motion sensor that detects a direction of the communication device. Therefore, the communication device can easily serve as an extended user interface of a target home appliance. 
     NUMERICAL REFERENCES 
     
         
           100  communication system 
           101  terminal apparatus 
           102  communication device 
           102 a minimum structure part 
           103  Internet 
           104  server device 
           105  controller 
           106  memory 
           107  proximity wireless communication unit 
           108 ,  109  antenna 
           110  display unit 
           111  keys 
           201  proximity wireless communication unit 
           202  proximity wireless detection unit 
           203  apparatus information obtainment unit 
           204  external communication unit 
           205  sensor unit 
           206  position information obtainment unit 
           207  direction sensor unit 
           208  directional space calculation unit 
           209 ,  309 ,  409  apparatus specification unit 
           209 a selection unit 
           210  move determination unit 
           211  operation information setting unit 
           212  operation information obtainment unit 
           213  storage unit 
           214  display information decision unit 
           215  operation information transmission unit 
           216  operation history obtainment unit 
           217  sound sensor 
           219  communication antenna 
           220  receiving unit 
           221  transmission unit 
           222  communication control unit 
           223  acceleration sensor 
           224  GPS sensor 
           225  angular velocity sensor 
           226  orientation sensor 
           227  absolute position obtainment unit 
           228  relative position obtainment unit 
           229  position information calculation unit 
           2092  apparatus direction calculation unit 
           2093  difference calculation unit 
           2094 ,  3096 ,  4094  apparatus decision unit 
           3095  space information storage unit 
           4092  apparatus candidate output unit 
           4093  user input receiving unit 
           4095  apparatus pitch angle detection unit 
           4096  apparatus pitch angle storage unit 
           1201  air conditioner 
           1203  two-dimensional (2D) bar-code 
         O 10 , O 50  RF-ID unit 
         O 50 C, O 50 D, O 50 F air conditioner 
         O 51  product ID 
         O 52  first server URL 
         O 53  service ID 
         O 54  accuracy identifier 
         O 60  mobile device 
         O 61  antenna 
         O 62  RF-ID reader/writer 
         O 63  coordinate accuracy identification information 
         O 64  CPU 
         O 65  program execution unit 
         O 66  data processing unit 
         O 67  memory unit 
         O 68 d display unit 
         O 68  communication antenna 
         O 70  transmission unit 
         O 71  receiving unit 
         O 72  communication unit 
         O 73  position information storage unit 
         O 74  RF-ID storage unit 
         O 75  RF-ID detection unit 
         O 76  URL unit 
         O 77  reproducing unit 
         O 78  relative position calculation unit 
         O 79  coordinate information sending unit 
         O 80  recording unit 
         O 81  building coordinate information output unit 
         O 82  registered-coordinate unit 
         O 83  determination unit 
         O 84  reference coordinate unit 
         O 85  position information output unit 
         O 86  position information unit 
         O 87 , O 89  direction information unit 
         O 88  magnetic compass 
         O 90  satellite antenna 
         O 91  position information calculation unit 
         O 92  position information unit 
         O 93  position information correction unit 
         O 94  direction information correction unit 
         O 95 , O 96 , O 97  angular velocity sensor 
         O 98 , O 99 , O 100  acceleration sensor 
         O 101  first server 
         O 102  registered-coordinate information unit 
         O 103  second server 
         O 104  building coordinate database 
         O 105  integrator 
         O 106  integrator 
         O 107  absolute coordinate calculation unit